Note: Descriptions are shown in the official language in which they were submitted.
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
INNOVATIVE DISCOVERY OF THERAPEUTIC, DIAGNOSTIC, AND ANTIBODY
COMPOSITIONS RELATED TO PROTEIN FRAGMENTS OF ARGINYL-TRNA SYNTHETASES
[0001]
STATEMENT REGARDING SEQUENCE LISTING
[0002] The Sequence Listing associated with this application is provided in
text
format in lieu of a paper copy, and is hereby incorporated by reference into
the
specification The name of the text file containing the Sequence Listing is
120161 435PC SEQUENCE LISTING txt. The text file is about 137 KB, was
created on May 2, 2011, and is being submitted electronically via EFS-Web.
TECHNICAL FIELD
[0003] The present invention relates generally to compositions comprising
newly
identified protein fragments of aminoacyl-tRNA synthetases and other proteins,
polynucleotides that encode them and complements thereof, related agents, and
methods of use thereof in diagnostic, drug discovery, research, and
therapeutic
applications.
BACKGROUND
[0004] For over four decades, aminoacyl-tRNA synthetases (AARSs) were thought
of as essential housekeeping proteins that catalyze the aminoacylation of tRNA
molecules as part of the decoding of genetic information during the process of
protein
translation. AARSs have been extensively studied in this respect, and many of
their
full-length sequences were cloned for sequence analysis and to provide a rich
source of
biochemical experimentation. Some fragments of AARSs, and other proteins,
however,
possess unexpected activities not associated with aminoacylation, including
extracellular signaling activities that modulate pathways beyond protein
translation.
Generally, these unexpected activities are not observed in the context of the
full-length
or parental protein sequences; instead, they are observed following removal or
resection
of AARS protein fragments from their parental sequences, or by expressing and
1
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
sufficiently purifying fragment AARS sequences and then testing for novel, non-
synthetase related activities.
[0005] While the full-length sequences of AARS have been known for some time,
no systematic experimental analysis has been conducted to elucidate such AARS
protein fragments, or protein fragments from related or associated proteins,
or to
evaluate the potential role of the full length AARS proteins for novel
biological
activities outside of the context of amino acid synthesis. In portions of this
specification, such AARS protein fragments, AARS domains, or AARS alternative
splice variants are referred to herein as "resectins". In its broadest
context, the term
"resectin" refers to a portion of a protein which has been excised or
restricted (either by
means of proteolysis, alternative splicing, mutagenesis, or recombinant
genetic
engineering) from the context of its native full-length or parental protein
sequence,
which often otherwise masks its novel biological activities. Likewise, no
systematic
experimental analysis has been conducted to explore the use of such resectins
as
biotherapeutic agents, diagnostic agents, or drug targets in the treatment of
various
medical conditions, or their potential association with human diseases. As
essential
housekeeping genes with a known function in mammals that is critical to life,
AARSs
were neither considered as drug targets in mammals, nor were they parsed out
by
standard genomic sequencing, bioinformatic, or similar efforts to identify
resectins
having non-synthetase activities. Standard biochemical research efforts have
similarly
been directed away from characterizing the biological properties of AARS
resectins and
their potential therapeutic and diagnostic relevance, mainly due to the
previously
understood role of their corresponding full-length parental AARSs.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0006] Figure 1 shows the domain structure of the Arginyl aminoacyl tRNA
synthetase overlaid with the relative positions and sizes of the N-terminal
AARS
polypeptides identified from mass spectrometry analysis shown schematically.
[0007] Figure 2 shows the domain structure of the Arginyl aminoacyl tRNA
synthetase overlaid with the relative positions and sizes of the C-terminal
AARS
polypeptides shown schematically. Figure 2A representing fragments identified
from
mass spectrometry analysis, Figure 2B representing the fragments identified
from deep
sequencing of transcriptomes, and Figure 2C representing fragments identified
from
bioinformatics analysis.
[0008] Figure 3 shows the domain structure of the Arginyl aminoacyl tRNA
synthetase overlaid schematically with the relative positions and sizes of the
Internal
AARS polypeptides shown schematically. Figure 3A representing fragments
identified
2
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
from mass spectrometry analysis, Figure 3B representing the fragments
identified from
deep sequencing of transeriptomes, and Figure 3C representing fragments
identified
from bioinformatics analysis.
BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
[0009] Embodiments of the present invention relate generally to the discovery
of
protein fragments of aminoacyl-tRNA synthetases (AARSs), which possess non-
canonical biological activities, such as extracellular signaling activities,
and/or other
characteristics of therapeutic and diagnostic relevance. The AARSs are
universal and
essential elements of the protein synthesis machinery found in all organisms,
but human
AARSs and their associated proteins have naturally-occurring resected
variants, with
potent cell signaling activities that contribute to normal functioning of
humans. The
activities of these protein fragments are distinct from the protein synthesis
activities
commonly known for AARSs, and the present invention includes the discovery and
development of these resected proteins as new biotherapeutic agents, new
discovery
research reagents, and as new antigens/targets for directed biologics and
diagnostic
agents that can be used to potentially treat or diagnose a wide variety of
human
diseases, such as inflammatory, hematological, neurodegenerative, autoimmune,
hematopoietic, cardiovascular, and metabolic diseases or disorders.
[0010] The AARS protein fragment(s) of the present invention may therefore be
referred to as "resectins," or alternatively as "appendacrines." As noted
above, the term
"resectie derives from the process of excising or resecting a given AARS
protein
fragment from the context of its full-length parent AARS sequence, which
typically
masks its non-canonical activities In certain instances, the AARS protein
fragments
and polynucleotides of the present invention were identified through the
occurrence of
this resection process, whether naturally-occurring (e.g., proteolytic, splice
variant),
artificially-induced, or predicted. The term "appendacrine" derives from a
combination
of "append" (from Latin ¨ appender) and to "separate" or -discern" (from Greek
¨
crines)," and also reflects the separation of one or more appended domains of
the
AARS protein fragments from their corresponding full-length or parent AARS
sequences.
[0011] Although a few AARS fragments have been previously shown to have non-
synthetase activities, the expression, isolation, purification, and
characterization of such
fragments for biotherapeutic, discovery, or diagnostic utility is limited, and
persons
skilled in the art would not have readily appreciated such activities to
associate with
each member of the entire family of AARSs, or with alternative fragments.
Here, a
methodical approach was utilized to discover and verify AARS protein fragments
for
3
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
the 20 mitochondrial and 20 cytosolic AARSs (and associated proteins) for
biotherapeutic discovery and diagnostic utility. For instance, certain of the
present
AARS protein fragment(s) and polynucleotides that encode them are identified
from
biological samples using mass spectrometry (MS), mainly to identify
proteolytic
fragments, and others were identified by deep sequencing techniques, mainly to
identify
splice variants. Other AARS protein fragment(s) are identified using in silico
predictions of amino acid sequences, such as by computationally comparing
synthetases
from humans and lower organisms along with key demarcations (e.g., protease
sites);
this approach utilized sequence analysis of the full-length AARS based on
specific
criteria to discern proteolytic fragments and functional domains possessing
non-
canonical biological activities.
[0012] Novel resectins of the AARSs are unexpected, and their differential
expression is also unexpected. Specific resections are typically seen under
different
treatments (e.g., from cells grown in media with or without serum), at
different stages
of growth (e.g., adult brain vs. fetal brain) and for different tissue types
(e.g., pancreas
vs. liver). The pattern of expression is not the same for all aminoacyl tRNA
synthetases
despite the fact that the canonical functions for all aminoacyl tRNA
synthetases are
needed in the same cell locations and in relatively proportional amounts. One
would
not expect the levels of an aminoacyl tRNA synthetase activity to increase
without an
increase in the amounts of other aminoacyl tRNA synthetase activities at the
same
time. The mass spectrometry and deep sequencing data indicates that aminoacyl
tRNA
synthetase resectins do have varying levels and do occur in different sites
and at
different stages.
[0013] In addition, AARS protein fragments can be expressed and purified to
sufficiently high purity to discern their biological properties. Previously,
fragments
were often not of sufficient purity, folding, and stability to enable proper
biological
characterization of non-synthetase activities. Cell based assays, for
instance, are used
in conjunction with sufficiently pure, stable, soluble and folded resectins to
reveal their
important biotherapeutic, discovery or diagnostic activities.
[0014] In particular, embodiments of the present invention relate to protein
fragments of Arginyl tRNA synthetases, related agents and compositions of
biotherapeutic, discovery, or diagnostic utility, and methods of use thereof.
The
compositions of the present invention are useful in a variety of diagnostic,
drug
discovery, and therapeutic applications, as described herein. Preferably, the
AARS
proteins and fragments are purified and stored in suitable condition to the
extent
required for such biotherapeutic, discovery, or diagnostic uses.
4
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[0015] Certain embodiments include therapeutic compositions, comprising an
isolated aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein fragment of at least about
100, 90,
80, 70, 60, 50 or 40 amino acids that comprises an amino acid sequence as set
forth in
Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9, wherein the protein fragment
has an EC's()
of about 10 nM or less for a cell-based non-canonical biological activity and
has a
solubility of at least about 10 mg/ml, and wherein the composition has a
purity of at
least about 95% on a protein basis and substantially undetectable levels of
endotoxin.
In specific embodiments, the composition is substantially serum free. Various
assays
for measuring such features of resectins are described herein and may be used
to define
aspects of the invention. In certain aspects, these features will be
preferable for
biotherapeutic utility of the AARS protein fragments described herein.
[0016] Certain embodiments include compositions, comprising an isolated
aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein fragment of at least about 100, 90,
80, 70,
60, 50 or 40 amino acids that comprises an amino acid sequence as set forth in
Table(s)
1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9, and has a solubility of at least about
5 mg/ml, and
wherein the composition has a purity of at least about 95% on a protein basis,
and less
than about 10 EU / mg protein endotoxin. In one aspect, the composition is a
therapeutic composition. In specific embodiments, the composition is
substantially
serum free. In some embodiments the AARS protein fragment comprises a non-
canonical activity. In some embodiments, the non-canonical biological activity
is
selected from modulation of extracellular signaling, modulation of cell
proliferation,
modulation of cell differentiation, modulation of gene transcription,
modulation of
cytokine production or activity, modulation of cytokine receptor activity, and
modulation of inflammation_ In some embodiments, the AARS protein fragment has
an
EC50 of less than about 1 nM, about 5 nM, about 10 nM, about 50 nM, about 100
nM or
about 200 nM for a cell-based non-canonical biological activity.
[0017] In certain embodiments the AARS protein fragment is fused to a
heterologous polypeptide. In some embodiments, the AARS fusion protein
substantially
retains a non-canonical activity of the AARS protein fragment. In some
embodiments,
the AARS fusion protein suppresses a non-canonical activity of the AARS
protein
fragment. In some embodiments, the heterologous polypeptide is attached to the
N-
terminus of the AARS protein fragment. In some embodiments, the heterologous
polypeptide is attached to the C-terminus of the AARS protein fragment. In one
aspect
of any of these embodiments the heterologous polypeptide is selected from the
group
consisting of purification tags, epitope tags, targeting sequences, signal
peptides,
membrane translocating sequences, and PK modifiers.
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[0018] In certain embodiments, the composition comprises an AARS protein
fragment at a concentration of least about 10 mg/mL. In certain embodiments
the
composition comprises an AARS protein fragment which is at least 90%
monodisperse.
In certain embodiments the composition comprises less than about 3 % high
molecular
weight aggregated proteins. In certain embodiments the composition exhibits
less than
3% aggregation when stored at a concentration of at least 10 mg/ mL in PBS for
one
week at 4 C. In certain embodiments the composition exhibits less than 3%
aggregation when stored at a concentration of at least 10 mg/ mL in PBS for
one week
at room temperature.
[0019] Various assays for measuring such features of resectins arc described
herein
and may be used to define aspects of the invention. In certain aspects, these
features
will be preferable for biotherapeutic utility of the AARS protein fragments
described
herein.
[0020] Certain embodiments include compositions, comprising an isolated
aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein fragment of at least 70 amino acids
that
differs from an amino acid sequence set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-
6, or
Table(s) 7-9 by substitution, deletion, and/or addition of about 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 amino acids, wherein the altered
protein
fragment substantially retains a non-canonical activity of the unaltered
protein, or has a
dominant negative phenotype in relation to the non-canonical activity, wherein
the
protein fragment has a solubility of at least about 5 mg/ml, and wherein the
composition
has a purity of at least about 95% on a protein basis and less than about 10
EU / mg
protein endotoxin. In specific embodiments, the composition is substantially
serum
free
[0021] Other embodiments include compositions, comprising an isolated antibody
that specifically binds to an isolated aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS)
protein
fragment as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9,
wherein affinity
of the antibody for the AARS protein fragment is about 10X stronger than its
affinity
for a corresponding full-length AARS polypeptide. One of the surprising
aspects of the
present invention includes certain resectins possessing "new" surfaces
accessible to
antibody or other directed biologics, whereas the full length AARS -hides" or
covers
these surfaces with other sequences or adjacent domains. The process of
resecting can
also create greater aqueous accessibility for revealing previously
unidentified biological
activities. Some embodiments include compositions, comprising an isolated
antibody
that specifically binds to an isolated aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS)
protein
fragment as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9,
wherein the
antibody has an affinity of at least about 10 nM for the AARS protein
fragment, and an
6
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
affinity of at least about 100 nM for a corresponding full-length AARS
polypeptide. In
some embodiments, the antibody binds to an epitope located within an AARS
polypeptide unique splice junction as set forth in any of Table(s) 1-3, or
Table(s) 4-6, or
Table(s) 7-9, or to an amino acid sequence C-terminal of this splice site. In
certain
embodiments, the antibody antagonizes the non-canonical activity of the AARS
protein
fragment. Such antagonists may optionally bind the corresponding parental or
full-
length AARS.
[0022] Other aspects relate to bioassay systems, comprising a substantially
pure
aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein fragment of at least 70 amino acids
that
comprises an amino acid sequence as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-
6, or
Table(s) 7-9, and a binding partner that binds to the AARS protein fragment.
In one
aspect, the binding partner is selected from the group consisting of a
cellular surface
receptor protein, nucleic acid, lipid membrane, cell regulatory protein,
enzyme, and
transcription factor. Optionally, such a receptor may be part of a cell,
preferably a cell
relevant to the revealed biology of the resectin.
[0023] Certain embodiments include cellular compositions, comprising an
isolated
aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein fragment of at least 70 amino acids
that
comprises an amino acid sequence as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-
6, or
Table(s) 7-9, and an engineered population of cells in which at least one cell
comprises
a polynucleotide encoding said AARS protein fragment. In one aspect, the cells
are
capable of growing in a scrum free medium.
[0024] Also included are detection systems, comprising a substantially pure
aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein fragment of at least 50 or 100 amino
acids
that comprises an amino acid sequence as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or
Table(s) 4-6, or
Table(s) 7-9, a cell that comprises a cell-surface receptor or an
extracellular portion
thereof that binds to the protein fragment, and a molecule of less than about
2000
daltons, or a second polypeptide, which modulates binding or interaction
between the
AARS protein fragment and the extracellular receptor.
[0025] Particular embodiments include diagnostic systems, comprising a
substantially pure aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein fragment of at
least 70
amino acids that comprises an amino acid sequence as set forth in Table(s) 1-
3, or
Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9, and a cell that comprises a cell-surface
receptor or an
extracellular portion thereof that binds to the AARS protein fragment, wherein
the
system or cell comprises an indicator molecule that allows detection of a
change in the
levels or activity of the cell-surface receptor or extracellular portion
thereof.
[0026] Certain embodiments include cellular growth devices, comprising an
isolated aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein fragment of at least 70
amino
7
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
acids that comprises an amino acid sequence as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or
Table(s) 4-
6, or Table(s) 7-9, an engineered population of cells in which at least one
cell comprises
a polynucleotide encoding said AARS protein fragment, at least about 10 liters
of
serum-free cell media, and a sterile container. In specific embodiments, the
cells
utilized for any of the methods or compositions described herein are capable
of growing
in serum-free media, optionally with an antibiotic and an inducer.
[0027] Some embodiments relate to antisense or RNA interference (RNAi) agents,
comprising a sequence that is targeted against a unique splice junction of an
AARS
splice variant as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9.
[0028] Also included are therapeutic compositions, comprising an isolated
aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein fragment of at least 70 amino acids
that
comprises an amino acid sequence as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-
6, or
Table(s) 7-9, wherein the protein fragment specifically binds to a binding
partner and
has a solubility of at least about 5 mg/ml, and wherein the composition has a
purity of at
least about 95% on a protein basis. In some aspects, the composition may have
less
than 10 EU endotoxin / mg protein.
[0029] Also included are compositions, comprising an isolated aminoacyl-tRNA
synthetase (AARS) protein fragment of at least 70 amino acids that is at least
80%,
85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, or 100% identical to an amino acid sequence set forth in
Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9, wherein the protein fragment
has a
solubility of at least about 5 mg/ml, and wherein the composition has a purity
of at least
about 95% on a protein basis and less than 10 EU endotoxin / mg protein. In
any of
these embodiments, the compositions may comprise an AARS protein fragment that
is
at least about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90% or about 95%
monodisperse with respect to its apparent molecular mass. In another aspect of
any of
these embodiments, the compositions comprise less than about 10 % (on a
protein
basis) high molecular weight aggregated proteins, or less than about 5 % high
molecular
weight aggregated proteins, or less than about 4% high molecular weight
aggregated
proteins, or less than about 3% high molecular weight aggregated proteins, or
less than
2 % high molecular weight aggregated proteins, or less than about 1% high
molecular
weight aggregated proteins.
[0030] In another aspect of any of these embodiments, the compositions
exhibits
less than about 10% aggregation when stored at a concentration of at least 10
mg/ mL in
PBS for one week at 4 C, or less than about 5% aggregation when stored at a
concentration of at least 10 mg/ mL in PBS for one week at 4 C, or less than
about 3%
aggregation when stored at a concentration of at least 10 mg/ mL in PBS for
one week
at 4 C, or less than about 2% aggregation when stored at a concentration of
at least 10
8
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
mg/ mL in PBS for one week at 4 C, or less than about 1% aggregation when
stored at
a concentration of at least 10 mg/ mL in PBS for one week at 4 'C.
[0031] Certain embodiments include compositions, comprising a substantially
pure
aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein fragment of at least 70 amino acids
that
comprises an amino acid sequence as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-
6, or
Table(s) 7-9, and at least one covalently or non-covalently moiety attached
thereto. In
some embodiments, the moiety is a detectable label. In some embodiments, the
moiety
is a water soluble polymer. In some embodiments, the moiety is PEG. In one
aspect of
any of these embodiments, the moiety is attached to the N-terminus of the
protein
fragment. In one aspect of any of these embodiments, the moiety is attached to
the C-
terminus of the protein fragment.
[0032] Particular embodiments include compositions, comprising a solid
substrate
attached to an isolated aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein fragment of
at least
70 amino acids that comprises an amino acid sequence as set forth in Table(s)
1-3, or
Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9, or a biologically active fragment or variant
thereof,
wherein the protein fragment has a solubility of at least about 5 mg/ml, and
the
composition has a purity of at least about 95% on a protein basis.
[0033] Also included are compositions, comprising a binding agent that
specifically
binds to an isolated aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein fragment as set
forth
in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9, wherein the binding agent
has an
affinity of at least about 1 nM for the protein fragment. In one aspect, the
binding agent
binds to an epitope located within an AARS polypeptide unique splice junction
as set
forth in any of Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9, or to an amino
acid
sequence C-terminal of this splice site In some embodiments, the binding agent
antagonizes a non-canonical activity of the AARS polypeptide.
[0034] Certain embodiments include isolated aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS)
polypeptides, comprising an amino acid sequence of an AARS protein fragment as
described herein, an amino acid sequence encoded by an AARS polynucleotide as
described herein, or a variant or fragment thereof Certain AARS polypeptides
comprise an amino acid sequence that is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, or
100%
identical to an AARS reference sequence as disclosed in Table(s) 1-3, or
Table(s) 4-6,
or Table(s) 7-9, or Table E2. Certain AARS polypeptides consist essentially of
an
amino acid sequence that is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, or 100%
identical to an
AARS reference sequence as disclosed in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or
Table(s) 7-9,
or Table E2. In certain embodiments, the polypeptide comprises a non-canonical
biological activity. In specific embodiments, the non-canonical biological
activity is
selected from modulation of cell signaling (e.g., extracellular signaling),
modulation of
9
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
cell proliferation, modulation of cell migration, modulation of cell
differentiation,
modulation of apoptosis or cell death, modulation of angiogenesis, modulation
of cell
binding, modulation of cellular metabolism, modulation of cellular uptake.
modulation
of gene transcription, or secretion, modulation of cytokine production or
activity,
modulation of cytokine receptor activity, and modulation of inflammation.
[0035] Other aspects include antibodies and other binding agents that exhibit
binding specificity for an isolated AARS polypeptide as described herein, a
binding
partner of the AARS polypeptide, or the complex of both. In some embodiments,
the
affinity of the antibody or binding agent for the AARS polypeptide is about
10X
stronger than its affinity for a corresponding full-length AARS polypeptide.
In specific
embodiments, the binding agent is selected from a peptide, peptide mimetic, an
adnectin, an aptamer, and a small molecule. In certain embodiments, the
antibody or
binding agent antagonizes a non-canonical activity of the AARS polypeptide. In
other
embodiments, the antibody or binding agent agonizes a non-canonical activity
of the
AARS polypeptide.
[0036] Certain embodiments include isolated aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS)
polynucleotides, comprising a nucleotide sequence of an AARS polynucleotide as
described herein, a nucleotide sequence that encodes an AARS protein fragment
as
described herein, or a variant, a fragment, or a complement thereof. Certain
AARS
polynucleotides comprise a nucleotide sequence that is at least 80%, 85%, 90%,
95%,
98%, or 100% identical to an AARS reference polynucleotide, or a complement
thereof,
as disclosed in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9, or Table E2.
In some
embodiments, the nucleotide sequence is codon optimized for bacterial
expression. In
one aspect, the nucleotide sequence is at least 80% identical a polynucleotide
sequence
disclosed in Table E2.
[0037] Specific AARS polynucleotides consist essentially of a nucleotide
sequence
that is at least 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 98%, or 100% identical to an AARS
reference
polynucleotide, or a complement thereof, as disclosed in Table(s) 1-3, or
Table(s) 4-6,
or Table(s) 7-9, or Table E2. Other AARS polynucleotides comprise or consist
essentially of a nucleotide sequence that specifically hybridizes to an AARS
reference
polynucleotide, as disclosed in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-
9, or Table
E2. In certain embodiments, the polynucleotide is selected from a primer, a
probe, and
an antisense oligonucleotide. In specific embodiments, the primer, probe, or
antisense
oligonucleotide is targeted to a specific or unique splice junction, and / or
sequence 3'
of this splice site within an AARS polynucleotide.
[0038] Certain embodiments include methods of determining presence or levels
of
an AARS protein fragment in a sample, comprising contacting the sample with
one or
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
more binding agents that specifically bind to an AARS protein fragment as
described
herein, detecting the presence or absence of the binding agent, and thereby
determining
the presence or levels of the AARS protein fragment. Other embodiments include
methods of determining presence or levels of an AARS protein fragment in a
sample,
comprising analyzing the sample with a detector that is capable of
specifically
identifying a protein fragment as described herein, and thereby determining
the
presence or levels of the AARS protein fragment. In specific embodiments, the
detector is a mass spectrometer (MS), a flow cytometer, a protein imaging
device, an
enzyme-linked immunosorbent assays (ELISA), or a protein microarray. Certain
embodiments comprise comparing the presence or levels of the AARS protein
fragment
to a control sample or a predetermined value. Certain embodiments comprise
characterizing the state of the sample to distinguish it from the control. In
specific
embodiments, the sample and control comprise a cell or tissue, and the method
comprises distinguishing between cells or tissues of different species, cells
of different
tissues or organs, cells at different cellular developmental states, cells at
different
cellular differentiation states, cells at different physiological states, or
healthy and
diseased cells. For instance, selected resectins may be more abundant under
conditions
such as stress or insult.
[0039] Certain embodiments include discovery methods of, and related
compositions for, identifying a compound that specifically binds to an
aminoacyl-tRNA
synthetase (AARS) polypeptide as described herein, or one or more of its
cellular
binding partners, comprising a) combining the AARS polypeptide or its cellular
binding
partner or both with at least one test compound under suitable conditions, and
b)
detecting binding of the AARS polypeptide or its cellular binding partner or
both to the
test compound, thereby identifying a compound that specifically binds to the
AARS
polypeptide or its cellular binding partner or both. In certain embodiments,
the test
compound is a polypeptide or peptide, an antibody or antigen-binding fragment
thereof,
a peptide mimetic, or a small molecule. In certain embodiments, the test
compound
agonizes a non-canonical biological activity of the AARS polypeptide or its
cellular
binding partner. In other embodiments, the test compound antagonizes a non-
canonical
biological activity of the AARS polypeptide or its cellular binding partner.
Certain
embodiments include a compound identified by the above-method, such as an
agonist
(e.g., small molecule, peptide).
[0040] Certain embodiments include methods of determining presence or levels
of a
polynucleotide sequence of an AARS splice variant in a sample, comprising
contacting
the sample with one or more oligonucleotides that specifically hybridize to an
AARS
polynucleotide as described herein, detecting the presence or absence of the
11
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
oligonucleotides in the sample, and thereby determining the presence or levels
of the
polynucleotide sequence of the AARS splice variant. Other embodiments include
methods of determining presence or levels of a polynucleotide sequence of an
AARS
splice variant in a sample, comprising contacting the sample with at least two
oligonucleotides that specifically amplify an AARS polynucleotide as described
herein,
performing an amplification reaction, detecting the presence or absence of an
amplified
product, and thereby determining presence or levels of the polynucleotide
sequence of
the AARS splice variant. In specific embodiments, the oligonucleotide(s)
specifically
hybridize to or specifically amplify a splice junction that is unique to the
AARS splice
variant. Certain embodiments include comparing the presence or levels of the
AARS
protein fragment or splice variant to a control sample or a predetermined
value. Certain
embodiments include characterizing the state of the sample to distinguish it
from the
control. In specific embodiments, the sample and control comprise a cell or
tissue, and
the method comprises distinguishing between cells or tissues of different
species, cells
of different tissues or organs, cells at different cellular developmental
states, cells at
different cellular differentiation states, or healthy and diseased cells.
[0041] Some embodiments include pharmaceutical compositions, comprising an
AARS polynucleotide described herein, an AARS polypeptide described herein, a
binding agent as described herein, or a compound identified by the above-
method or
described herein, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
[0042] Certain embodiments include methods of modulating a cellular activity
of a
cell, comprising contacting the cell with an AARS polynucleotide described
herein, an
AARS polypeptide described herein, a binding agent described herein, a
compound of
the above-method or described herein, or a pharmaceutical composition
described
herein. In specific embodiments, the cellular activity is selected from cell
proliferation,
cell migration, cell differentiation, apoptosis or cell death, cell signaling,
angiogenesis,
cell binding, cellular uptake, cell secretion, metabolism, cytokine production
or activity,
cytokine receptor activity, gene transcription, and inflammation. In one
aspect, the cell
is selected from the group consisting of pre-adipocytes, bone marrow,
neutrophils,
blood cells, hepatocytes, astrocytes, mesenchymal stem cells, and skeletal
muscle cells.
[0043] In certain embodiments, the cell is in a subject. Certain embodiments
comprise treating the subject, wherein the subject has a condition associated
with a
neoplastic disease, an immune system disease or condition, an infectious
disease, a
metabolic disease, an inflammatory disorder, neuronal/neurological disease, a
muscular/cardiovascular disease, a disease associated with aberrant
hematopoiesis, a
disease associated with aberrant angiogenesis, or a disease associated with
aberrant cell
survival.
12
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[0044] Also included are processes for manufacturing a pharmaceutical
compound,
comprising: a) performing an in vitro screen of one or more candidate
compounds in the
presence an AARS protein fragment of at least 70 amino acids that comprises an
amino
acid sequence as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9,
to identify a
compound that specifically binds to the AARS protein fragment; b) performing a
cell-
based or biochemical or receptor assay with the compound identified in step
a), to
identify a compound that modulates one or more non-canonical activities of the
AARS
protein fragment; c) optionally assessing the structure-activity relationship
(SAR) of the
compound identified in step b), to correlate its structure with modulation of
the non-
canonical activity, and optionally derivatizing the compound to alter its
ability to
modulate the non-canonical activity; and d) producing sufficient amounts of
the
compound identified in step b), or the derivatized compound in step c), for
use in
humans, thereby manufacturing the pharmaceutical compound.
[0045] Other embodiments include processes for manufacturing a pharmaceutical
compound, comprising: a) performing an in vitro screen of one or more
candidate
compounds in the presence a cell-surface receptor or an extracellular portion
thereof
that specifically binds to an AARS protein fragment of Table(s) 1-3, or
Table(s) 4-6, or
Table(s) 7-9, to identify a compound that specifically binds to the cell-
surface receptor
or extracellular portion thereof; b) performing a cell-based or biochemical or
receptor
assay with the compound identified in step a), to identify a compound that
modulates
one or more non-canonical activities of the AARS protein fragment; c)
optionally
assessing the structure-activity relationship (SAR) of the compound identified
in step
b), to correlate its structure with modulation of the non-canonical activity,
and
optionally deriyatizing the compound to alter its ability to modulate the non-
canonical
activity; and d) producing sufficient amounts of the compound identified in
step b), or
the derivatized compound in step c), for use in humans, thereby manufacturing
the
pharmaceutical compound.
[0046] Some embodiments include a cellular composition, comprising an
engineered population of cells in which at least one cell comprises a
polynucleotide
encoding a heterologous full length aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein,
wherein the cells are capable of growing in a serum-free medium. In one
aspect, the full
length aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein comprises a heterologous
purification or epitope tag to facilitate purification of an AARS protein
fragment. In
another aspect, the full length aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein
comprises a
heterologous proteolysis site to enable production of the AARS protein
fragment upon
cleavage.
13
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[0047] Some embodiments include a method for producing an AARS polypeptide
as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9, or Table E2 in
situ within a
cell, comprising; i) expressing a heterologous full length aminoacyl-tRNA
synthetase
(AARS) protein within the cell, wherein the cell comprises a protease capable
of
cleaving the heterologous full length aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein
to
produce the AARS polypeptide.
[0048] Some embodiments include a method for producing an AARS polypeptide
as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9, or Table E2
comprising
contacting an isolated full length aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) protein
with a
protease that is capable of cleaving the full length aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase
(AARS)
protein and producing an AARS polypeptide.
[0049] Some embodiments include an engineered full length aminoacyl-tRNA
synthetase (AARS) protein comprising a heterologous proteolysis site to enable
the
proteolytic generation of an AARS protein fragment as set forth in any of
Table(s) 1-3,
or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9 or Table E2.
[0050] Some embodiments include a composition, comprising an isolated full
length aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase protein, wherein the composition has a purity
of at
least about 95% on a protein basis, less than about 10 EU endotoxin / mg
protein, and is
substantially serum free. In one aspect, the full length aminoacyl-tRNA
synthetase
protein is present at a concentration of at least 10 mg / mL, and is at least
90%
monodisperse.
[0051] A further embodiment includes a method of treating a disease or
disorder
mediated by the dysregulation of the expression, activity or spatiotemporal
location of a
tRNA synthetase via the administration of an AARS protein fragment, or nucleic
acid
encoding the ARRS protein fragment, as set forth in any of Table(s) 1-3, or
Table(s) 4-
6, or Table(s) 7-9, or Table E2. In one aspect of this embodiment, the disease
is selected
cancer, neuropathy, diabetes, and inflammatory disorders.
14
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
[0052] TABLE OF CONTENTS
[0053] I. OVERVIEW .................................................. 15
[0054] II. DEFINITIONS .............................................. 16
[0055] III. PURIFIED AARS PROTEIN FRAGMENTS AND VARIANTS ............ 28
[0056] IV. AARS POLYNUCLEOTIDES ..................................... 67
[0057] V. ANTIBODIES ................................................ 79
[0058] VI. ANTIBODY ALTERNATIVES AND OTHER BINDING AGENTS ........... 84
[0059] VII. BIOASSAYS AND ANALYTICAL ASSAYS ......................... 89
[0060] VIII. EXPRESSION AND PURIFICATION SYSTEMS .................... 91
[0061] IX. DIAGNOSTIC METIIODS AND COMPOSITIONS ..................... 104
[0062] X. ANTISENSE AND RNA] AGENTS ................................. 119
[0063] A. ANTISENSE AGENTS ................................ 120
[0064] B. RNA INTERFERENCE AGENTS ......................... 128
[0065] XI. DRUG DISCOVERY ........................................... 136
[0066] XII. METHODS OF USF .......................................... 144
[0067] XIII. PHARMACEUTICAL FORMULATIONS, ADMINISTRATION AND KITS .. 148
[0068] XIV. EXAMPLES ................................................ 157
I. OVERVIEW
[0069] The current invention is directed, at least in part, to the discovery
of novel
AARS polypeptides, and methods for their preparation and use, which represent
the
transformation of native wild type proteins into new forms that exhibit
markedly
different characteristics compared to the naturally occurring full length
Arginyl tRNA
synthetase genes. Such AARS polypeptides were identified based on extensive
sequence, and mass spectrometry analysis of expressed Arginyl tRNA synthetase
in
different tissues, followed by the systematic production and testing of each
potential
AARS polypeptide to identify protein sequences that represent stable and
soluble
protein domains which exhibit novel biological activities, and favorable
therapeutic
drug characteristics.
[0070] Based on this analysis at least three new novel families of AARS
polypeptides derived from Arginyl tRNA synthetase have been identified.
[0071] In one aspect, such Arginyl RNA synthetase derived AARS polypeptides
comprise polypeptide sequences comprising approximately comprising amino acids
1-
71of Arginyl tRNA synthetase.
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[0072] In a second aspect, such Arginyl tRNA synthetase derived AARS
polypeptides comprise polypeptide sequences comprising approximately
comprising
amino acids 168-530 of Arginyl tRNA synthetase.
[0073] In a third aspect, such Arginyl tRNA synthetase derived AARS
polypeptides
comprise polypeptide sequences comprising approximately comprising amino acids
551-660 of Arginyl tRNA synthetase.
[0074] These new AARS polypeptide families represent novel, previously unknown
protein products which exhibit inter alia i) novel biological activity, ii)
favorable
protein stability and aggregation characteristics, and iii) the ability to be
expressed and
produced at high level in prokaryotic expression systems, which are materially
different
characteristics not found in the intact wild type protein.
H. DEFINITIONS
[0075] Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used
herein have
the same meaning as commonly understood by those of ordinary skill in the art
to
which the invention belongs. Although any methods and materials similar or
equivalent
to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the
present invention,
preferred methods and materials are described. For the purposes of the present
invention, the following terms are defined below.
[0076] The articles "a" and "an" are used herein to refer to one or to more
than one
(i.e., to at least one) of the grammatical object of the article. By way of
example, "an
element" means one element or more than one element.
[0077] By "about" is meant a quantity, level, value, number, frequency,
percentage,
dimension, size, amount, weight or length that varies by as much as 30, 25,
20, 25, 10,
9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1% to a reference quantity, level, value, number,
frequency,
percentage, dimension, size, amount, weight or length.
[0078] An "agonist" refers to a molecule that intensifies or mimics an
activity. For
example, a non-canonical biological activity of an AARS, or another protein.
Agonists
may include proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, small molecules, or any
other
compound or composition that modulates the activity of an AARS either by
directly
interacting with the AARS or its binding partner, or by acting on components
of the
biological pathway in which the AARS participates. Included are partial and
full
agonists.
[0079] As used herein, the term "amino acid" is intended to mean both
naturally
occurring and non-naturally occurring amino acids as well as amino acid
analogs and
mimetics. Naturally occurring amino acids include the 20 (L)-amino acids
utilized
during protein biosynthesis as well as others such as 4-hydroxyproline,
hydroxylysine,
16
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
desmosine, isodesmosine, homocysteine, citrulline and ornithine, for example.
Non-
naturally occurring amino acids include, for example, (D)-amino acids,
norleucine,
norvaline, p-fluorophenylalanine, ethionine and the like, which are known to a
person
skilled in the art. Amino acid analogs include modified forms of naturally and
non-
naturally occurring amino acids. Such modifications can include, for example,
substitution or replacement of chemical groups and moieties on the amino acid
or by
derivitization of the amino acid. Amino acid mimetics include, for example,
organic
structures which exhibit functionally similar properties such as charge and
charge
spacing characteristic of the reference amino acid. For example, an organic
structure
which mimics Argininc (Arg or R) would have a positive charge moiety located
in
similar molecular space and having the same degree of mobility as the e-amino
group of
the side chain of the naturally occurring Arg amino acid. Mimetics also
include
constrained structures so as to maintain optimal spacing and charge
interactions of the
amino acid or of the amino acid functional groups. Those skilled in the art
know or can
determine what structures constitute functionally equivalent amino acid
analogs and
amino acid mimetics.
[0080] In certain aspects, the use of non-natural amino acids can be utilized
to
modify (e.g. increase) a selected non-canonical activity of an AARS protein
fragment,
or to alter the in vivo or in vitro half-life of the protein. Non-natural
amino acids can
also be used to facilitate (selective) chemical modifications (e.g.,
pegylation) of an
AARS protein. For instance, certain non-natural amino acids allow selective
attachment of polymers such as PEG to a given protein, and thereby improve
their
pharmacokinetic properties.
[0081] Specific examples of amino acid analogs and mimetics can be found
described in, for example, Roberts and Vellaccio, The Peptides: Analysis,
Synthesis,
Biology, Eds. Gross and Meinhofer, Vol. 5, p. 341, Academic Press, Inc., New
York,
N.Y. (1983) . Other
examples include peralkylated amino acids, particularly permethylated amino
acids.
See, for example, Combinatorial Chemistry, Eds. Wilson and Czamik, Ch. 11, p.
235,
John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, N.Y. (1997)
. Yet other examples include amino acids whose amide
portion (and, therefore, the amide backbone of the resulting peptide) has been
replaced,
for example, by a sugar ring, steroid, benzodiazepine or carbo cycle. See, for
instance,
Burger's Medicinal Chemistry and Drug Discovery, Ed. Manfred E. Wolff, Ch. 15,
pp.
619-620, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, N.Y. (1995)
. Methods for synthesizing peptides, polypeptides,
peptidomimetics and proteins are well known in the art (see, for example, U.S.
Pat. No.
17
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
5,420,109; M. Bodanzsky, Principles of Peptide Synthesis (1st ed. & 2d rev.
ed.),
Springer-Verlag, New York, N.Y. (1984 & 1993), see Chapter 7; Stewart and
Young,
Solid Phase Peptide Synthesis, (2d ed.), Pierce Chemical Co., Rockford, Ill.
(1984)
). Accordingly, the AARS
polypeptides of the present invention may be composed of naturally occurring
and non-
naturally occurring amino acids as well as amino acid analogs and mimetics.
[0082] The term "antagonist" refers to a molecule that reduces or attenuates
an
activity. For example, a non-canonical biological activity of an AARS, or
another
protein. Antagonists may include proteins such as antibodies, nucleic acids,
carbohydrates, small molecules, or any other compound or composition that
modulates
the activity of an AARS or its binding partner, either by directly interacting
with the
AARS or its binding partner or by acting on components of the biological
pathway in
which the AARS participates. Included are partial and full antagonists.
[0083] The term "aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase" (AARS) refers generally to
enzymes that in their natural or wild-type form are capable of catalyzing the
esterification of a specific amino acid or its precursor to one of all its
compatible
cognate tRNAs to form an aminoacyl-tRNA. In this "canonical" activity,
aminoacyl-
tRNA synthetases catalyze a two-step reaction: first, they activate their
respective
amino acid by forming an aminoacyl-adenylate, in which the carboxyl of the
amino acid
is linked in to the alpha-phosphate of ATP by displacing pyrophosphate, and
then, when
the correct tRNA is bound, the aminoacyl group of the aminoacyl-adenylate is
transferred to the 2' or 3' terminal OH of the tRNA.
[0084] Class I aminoacyl-tRNA synthetases typically have two highly conserved
sequence motifs_ These enzymes aminoacylate at the 2'-OH of an adenosine
nucleotide, and are usually monomeric or dimeric. Class II aminoacyl-tRNA
synthetases typically have three highly conserved sequence motifs. These
enzymes
aminoacylate at the 3'-OH of the same adenosine, and are usually dimeric or
tetrameric.
The active sites of class II enzymes are mainly made up of a seven-stranded
anti-
parallel 13-sheet flanked by a-helices. Although phenylalanine-tRNA synthetase
is class
11, it aminoacylates at the 2'-OH.
[0085] AARS polypeptides include sources of mitochondrial and cytoplasmic
forms
of tyrosyl-tRNA synthetase (TyrRS), a tryptophanyl-tRNA synthetase (TrpRS), a
glutaminyl-tRNA synthetase (G1nRS), a glycyl-tRNA synthetase (GlyRS), a
histidyl-
tRNA synthetase (HisRS), a seryl-tRNA synthetase (SerRS), a phenylalanyl-tRNA
synthetase (PheRS), an alanyl-tRNA synthetase (AlaRS), an asparaginyl-tRNA
synthetase (AsnRS), an aspartyl-tRNA synthetase (AspRS), a cysteinyl-tRNA
synthetase (CysRS), a glutamyl-tRNA synthetase (GluRS), a prolyl-tRNA
synthetase
18
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
(ProRS), an arginyl-tRNA synthetase (ArgRS), an isoleucyl-tRNA synthetase
(IleRS), a
leucyl-tRNA synthetase (LeuRS), a lysyl-tRNA synthetase (LysRS), a threonyl-
tRNA
synthetase (ThrRS), a methionyl-tRNA synthetases (MetRS), or a valyl-tRNA
synthetase (ValRS). The wild-type or parental sequences of these AARS
polypeptides
are known in the art.
[0086] By "coding sequence" is meant any nucleic acid sequence that
contributes to
the code for the polypeptide product of a gene. By contrast, the term "non-
coding
sequence" refers to any nucleic acid sequence that does not contribute to the
code for
the polypeptide product of a gene.
[0087] Throughout this specification, unless the context requires otherwise,
the
words "comprise," "comprises," and "comprising" will be understood to imply
the
inclusion of a stated step or element or group of steps or elements but not
the exclusion
of any other step or element or group of steps or elements.
[0088] By "consisting of' is meant including, and limited to, whatever follows
the
phrase "consisting of." Thus, the phrase "consisting of' indicates that the
listed
elements are required or mandatory, and that no other elements may be present.
By
"consisting essentially of' is meant including any elements listed after the
phrase, and
limited to other elements that do not interfere with or contribute to the
activity or action
specified in the disclosure for the listed elements. Thus, the phrase
"consisting
essentially of' indicates that the listed elements are required or mandatory,
but that
other elements are optional and may or may not be present depending upon
whether or
not they materially affect the activity or action of the listed elements.
[0089] The recitation "endotoxin free" or "substantially endotoxin free"
relates
generally to compositions, solvents, and/or vessels that contain at most trace
amounts
(e.g., amounts having no clinically adverse physiological effects to a
subject) of
endotoxin, and preferably undetectable amounts of endotoxin. Endotoxins are
toxins
associated with certain bacteria, typically gram-negative bacteria, although
endotoxins
may be found in gram-positive bacteria, such as Listeria tnenocytogenes. The
most
prevalent endotoxins are lipopolysaccharides (LPS) or lipo-oligo-saccharides
(LOS)
found in the outer membrane of various Gram-negative bacteria, and which
represent a
central pathogenic feature in the ability of these bacteria to cause disease.
Small
amounts of endotoxin in humans may produce fever, a lowering of the blood
pressure,
and activation of inflammation and coagulation, among other adverse
physiological
effects.
[0090] Therefore, in phaimaceutical production of AARS polypeptides, it is
often
desirable to remove most or all traces of endotoxin from drug products and/or
drug
containers, because even small amounts may cause adverse effects in humans. A
19
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
depyrogenation oven may be used for this purpose, as temperatures in excess of
300 C
are typically required to break down most endotoxins. For instance, based on
primary
packaging material such as syringes or vials, the combination of a glass
temperature of
250 C and a holding time of 30 minutes is often sufficient to achieve a 3 log
reduction
in endotoxin levels. Other methods of removing endotoxins are contemplated,
including, for example, chromatography and filtration methods, as described
herein and
known in the art. Also included are methods of producing AARS polypeptides in
and
isolating them from eukaryotic cells such as mammalian cells to reduce, if not
eliminate
the risk of endotoxins being present in a composition of the invention.
Preferred are
methods of producing AARS polypeptides in and isolating them from scrum free
cells.
Such compositions comprising AARS polypeptides, represent new formulations
which
exhibit novel and new biological and therapeutic characteristics not found in
AARS
polypeptide compositions contaminated with serum or endotoxin which have the
potential to bind to and alter the novel biological properties of the AARS
polypeptides.
[0091] Endotoxins can be detected using routine techniques known in the art.
For
example, the Limulus Ameobocyte Lysate assay, which utilizes blood from the
horseshoe crab, is a very sensitive assay for detecting presence of endotoxin,
and
reagents, kits and instrumentation for the detection of endotoxin based on
this assay are
commercially available, for example from the Lonza Group. In this test, very
low
levels of LPS can cause detectable coagulation of the limulus lysate due a
powerful
enzymatic cascade that amplifies this reaction. Endotoxins can also be
quantitated by
enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA). To be substantially endotoxin free,
endotoxin levels may be less than about 0.001, 0.005, 0.01, 0.02, 0.03, 0.04,
0.05, 0.06,
0.08, 0.09, OA, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2, 2_5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 EU /mg of
protein
Typically, 1 ng lipopolysaccharide (LPS) corresponds to about 1-10 EU.
[0092] In certain embodiments, the "purity" of any given agent (e.g., AARS
protein
fragment) in a composition may be specifically defined. For instance, certain
compositions may comprise an agent that is at least 80, 85, 90, 91, 92, 93,
94, 95, 96,
97, 98, 99, or 100% pure, including all decimals in between, as measured, for
example
and by no means limiting, by high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC), a
well-
known form of column chromatography used frequently in biochemistry and
analytical
chemistry to separate, identify, and quantify compounds.
[0093] As used herein, the terms "function" and "functional" and the like
refer to a
biological, enzymatic, or therapeutic function.
[0094] By "gene" is meant a unit of inheritance that may occupy a specific
locus on
a chromosome and consists of transcriptional and/or translational regulatory
sequences
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
and/or a coding region and/or non-translated sequences (i.e., introns, 5' and
3'
untranstated sequences).
[0095] "Homology" refers to the percentage number of amino acids that are
identical or constitute conservative substitutions. Homology may be determined
using
sequence comparison programs such as GAP (Deveraux et at., 1984, Nucleic Acids
Research 12, 387-395) . Tn
this way
sequences of a similar or substantially different length to those cited herein
could be
compared by insertion of gaps into the alignment, such gaps being determined,
for
example, by the comparison algorithm used by GAP.
[0096] The term "host cell" includes an individual cell or cell culture that
can be or
has been a recipient of any recombinant vector(s), isolated polynucleotide, or
polypeptide of the invention. Host cells include progeny of a single host
cell, and the
progeny may not necessarily be completely identical (in morphology or in total
DNA
complement) to the original parent cell due to natural, accidental, or
deliberate mutation
and/or change. A host cell includes cells transfected or infected in vivo or
in vitro with
a recombinant vector or a polynucleotide of the invention. A host cell which
comprises
a recombinant vector of the invention is a recombinant host cell.
[0097] By "isolated" is meant material that is substantially or essentially
free from
components that normally accompany it in its native state. For example, an
"isolated
polynucleotide," as used herein, includes a polynucleotide that has been
purified from
the sequences that flank it in its naturally-occurring state, e.g., a DNA
fragment which
has been removed from the sequences that are normally adjacent to the
fragment.
Alternatively, an "isolated peptide" or an "isolated polypeptide" and the
like, as used
herein, includes the in vitro isolation and/or purification of a peptide or
polypeptide
molecule from its natural cellular environment, and from association with
other
components of the cell; i.e., it is not significantly associated with in vivo
substances.
[0098] The term "mRNA" or sometimes refer by "mRNA transcripts" as used
herein, include, but not limited to pre-mRNA transcript(s), transcript
processing
intermediates, mature mRNA(s) ready for translation and transcripts of the
gene or
genes, or nucleic acids derived from the mRNA transcript(s). Transcript
processing
may include splicing, editing and degradation. As used herein, a nucleic acid
derived
from an mRNA transcript refers to a nucleic acid for whose synthesis the mRNA
transcript or a subsequence thereof has ultimately served as a template. A
cDNA
reverse transcribed from an mRNA, an RNA transcribed from that cDNA, a DNA
amplified from the cDNA, an RNA transcribed from the amplified DNA, etc., are
all
derived from the mRNA transcript and detection of such derived products is
indicative
of the presence and/or abundance of the original transcript in a sample. Thus,
mRNA
21
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
derived samples include, but are not limited to, mRNA transcripts of the gene
or genes,
cDNA reverse transcribed from the mRNA, cRNA transcribed from the cDNA, DNA
amplified from the genes, RNA transcribed from amplified DNA, and the like.
[0099] "Non-canonical" activity as used herein, refers generally to either i)
a new
activity possessed by an AARS polypeptide of the invention that is not
possessed to any
significant degree by the intact native full length parental protein, or ii)
an activity that
was possessed by the by the intact native full length parental protein, where
the AARS
polypeptide either exhibits a significantly higher (i.e. at least 20% greater)
specific
activity compared to the intact native full length parental protein, or
exhibits the activity
in a new context; for example by isolating the activity from other activities
possessed
by the intact native full length parental protein. In the case of AARS
polypeptides, non-
limiting examples of non-canonical activities include extracellular signaling,
RNA-
binding, amino acid-binding, modulation of cell proliferation, modulation of
cell
migration, modulation of cell differentiation (e.g., hematopoiesis,
neurogenesis,
myogenesis, osteogenesis, and adipogenesis), modulation of gene transcription,
modulation of apoptosis or other forms of cell death, modulation of cell
signaling,
modulation of cellular uptake, or secretion, modulation of angiogenesis,
modulation of
cell binding, modulation of cellular metabolism, modulation of cytokine
production or
activity, modulation of cytokine receptor activity, modulation of
inflammation, and the
like.
[00100] The term "half maximal effective concentration" or "EC50" refers to
the
concentration of an AARS protein fragment, antibody or other agent described
herein at
which it induces a response halfway between the baseline and maximum after
some
specified exposure time; the EC50 of a graded dose response curve therefore
represents
the concentration of a compound at which 50% of its maximal effect is
observed. In
certain embodiments, the EGO of an agent provided herein is indicated in
relation to a
"non-canonical" activity, as noted above. EC50
also represents the plasma
concentration required for obtaining 50% of a maximum effect in vivo.
Similarly, the
"EC00" refers to the concentration of an agent or composition at which 90% of
its
maximal effect is observed. The -ECoo" can be calculated from the "EC50" and
the Hill
slope, or it can be determined from the data directly, using routine knowledge
in the art.
In some embodiments, the EC50 of an AARS protein fragment, antibody, or other
agent
is less than about 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90,
or 100 nM.
Preferably, biotherapeutic composition will have an EC50 value of about 1nM or
less.
[00101] The term "modulating" includes "increasing" or "stimulating," as well
as
"decreasing" or "reducing," typically in a statistically significant or a
physiologically
22
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
significant amount as compared to a control. Accordingly a "modulator" may be
an
agonist, an antagonist, or any mixture thereof depending upon the conditions
used. An
"increased" or "enhanced" amount is typically a "statistically significant"
amount, and
may include an increase that is 1.1, 1.2, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20,
30 or more
times (e.g., 500, 1000 times) (including all integers and decimal points in
between and
above 1, e.g., 1.5, 1.6, 1.7. 1.8, etc.) the amount produced by no composition
(the
absence of an agent or compound) or a control composition. A "decreased" or
reduced
amount is typically a "statistically significant" amount, and may include a
1%, 2%, 3%,
4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18% , 19%,
20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%,
95%, or 100% decrease in the amount produced by no composition (the absence of
an
agent or compound) or a control composition, including all integers in
between. As one
non-limiting example, a control in comparing canonical and non-canonical
activities
could include the AARS protein fragment of interest compared to its
corresponding
full-length AARS, or a fragment AARS having comparable canonical activity to
its
corresponding full-length AARS. Other examples of "statistically significant"
amounts
are described herein.
[00102] By "obtained from" is meant that a sample such as, for example, a
polynucleotide extract or polypeptide extract is isolated from, or derived
from, a
particular source of the subject. For example, the extract can be obtained
from a tissue
or a biological fluid isolated directly from the subject. "Derived" or
"obtained from"
can also refer to the source of a polypeptide or polynucleotide sequence. For
instance,
an AARS sequence of the present invention may be "derived" from the sequence
information of an AARS proteolytic fragment or AARS splice variant, or a
portion
thereof, whether naturally-occurring or artificially generated, and may thus
comprise,
consist essentially of, or consist of that sequence
[00103] The terms "polypeptide" and "protein" are used interchangeably herein
to
refer to a polymer of amino acid residues and to variants and synthetic and
naturally
occurring analogues of the same. Thus, these terms apply to amino acid
polymers in
which one or more amino acid residues are synthetic non-naturally occurring
amino
acids, such as a chemical analogue of a corresponding naturally occurring
amino acid,
as well as to naturally-occurring amino acid polymers and naturally occurring
chemical
derivatives thereof. Such derivatives include, for example, post-translational
modifications and degradation products including pyroglutamyl, iso-aspartyl,
proteolytic, phosphorylated, glycosylated, oxidatized, isomerized, and
deaminated
variants of the AARS reference fragment.
23
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00104] The recitations "sequence identity" or, for example, comprising a
"sequence
50% identical to," as used herein, refer to the extent that sequences are
identical on a
nucleotide-by-nucleotide basis or an amino acid-by-amino acid basis over a
window of
comparison. Thus, a "percentage of sequence identity" may be calculated by
comparing two optimally aligned sequences over the window of comparison,
determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid base
(e.g., A, T,
C, G, I) or the identical amino acid residue (e.g., Ala, Pro, Ser, Thr, Gly,
Val, Leu, Ile,
Phe, Tyr, Trp, Lys, Arg, His, Asp, Glu, Asn, Gln, Cys and Met) occurs in both
sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of
matched
positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison (i.e.,
the
window size), and multiplying the result by 100 to yield the percentage of
sequence
identity.
[00105] Terms used to describe sequence relationships between two or more
polynucleotides or polypeptides include "reference sequence," "comparison
window,"
"sequence identity," "percentage of sequence identity" and "substantial
identity." A
"reference sequence" is at least 12 but frequently 15 to 18 and often at least
25
monomer units, inclusive of nucleotides and amino acid residues, in length.
Because
two polynucleotides may each comprise (1) a sequence (i.e., only a portion of
the
complete polynucleotide sequence) that is similar between the two
polynucleotides, and
(2) a sequence that is divergent between the two polynucleotides, sequence
comparisons
between two (or more) polynucleotides arc typically performed by comparing
sequences of the two polynucleotides over a "comparison window" to identify
and
compare local regions of sequence similarity. A "comparison window" refers to
a
conceptual segment of at least 6 contiguous positions, usually about 50 to
about 100,
more usually about 100 to about 150 in which a sequence is compared to a
reference
sequence of the same number of contiguous positions after the two sequences
are
optimally aligned. The comparison window may comprise additions or deletions
(i.e.,
gaps) of about 20% or less as compared to the reference sequence (which does
not
comprise additions or deletions) for optimal alignment of the two sequences.
Optimal
alignment of sequences for aligning a comparison window may be conducted by
computerized implementations of algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA
in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package Release 7.0, Genetics Computer
Group,
575 Science Drive Madison, WI, USA) or by inspection and the best alignment
(i.e.,
resulting in the highest percentage homology over the comparison window)
generated
by any of the various methods selected. Reference also may be made to the
BLAST
family of programs as for example disclosed by Altschul et al., 1997, Nucl.
Acids Res.
25:3389. A detailed discussion of sequence analysis can be found in Unit 19.3
of
24
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Ausubel et al., "Current Protocols in Molecular Biology," John Wiley & Sons
Inc,
1994-1998, Chapter 15.
[00106] Calculations of sequence similarity or sequence identity between
sequences
(the terms are used interchangeably herein) are performed as follows. To
determine the
percent identity of two amino acid sequences, or of two nucleic acid
sequences, the
sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be
introduced in
one or both of a first and a second amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for
optimal
alignment and non-homologous sequences can be disregarded for comparison
purposes). In certain embodiments, the length of a reference sequence aligned
for
comparison purposes is at least 30%, preferably at least 40%, more preferably
at least
50%, 60%, and even more preferably at least 70%, 80%, 90%, 100% of the length
of
the reference sequence. The amino acid residues or nucleotides at
corresponding amino
acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared. When a position in
the first
sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the
corresponding
position in the second sequence, then the molecules are identical at that
position.
[00107] The percent identity between the two sequences is a function of the
number
of identical positions shared by the sequences, taking into account the number
of gaps,
and the length of each gap, which need to be introduced for optimal alignment
of the
two sequences.
[00108] The comparison of sequences and determination of percent identity
between
two sequences can be accomplished using a mathematical algorithm. In a
preferred
embodiment, the percent identity between two amino acid sequences is
determined
using the Needleman and Wunsch, (1970, J. Mol. Biol. 48: 444-453) algorithm
which
has been incorporated into the GAP program in the GCG software package
, using either a Blossum 62 matrix or a PAM250 matrix, and a gap
weight of 16, 14, 12, 10, 8, 6, or 4 and a length weight of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or
6. In yet
another preferred embodiment, the percent identity between two nucleotide
sequences
is determined using the GAP program in the GCG software package
, using a NWSgapdna.CMP matrix and a gap weight of 40, 50, 60,
70, or 80 and a length weight of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. A particularly preferred
set of
parameters (and the one that should be used unless otherwise specified) are a
Blossum
62 scoring matrix with a gap penalty of 12, a gap extend penalty of 4, and a
frame shift
gap penalty of 5.
[00109] The percent identity between two amino acid or nucleotide sequences
can be
determined using the algorithm of E. Meyers and W. Miller (1989, Cabios, 4: 11-
17)
which has been incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0), using a
PAM120
weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12 and a gap penalty of 4.
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00110] The nucleic acid and protein sequences described herein can be used as
a
"query sequence" to perform a search against public databases to, for example,
identify
other family members or related sequences. Such searches can be performed
using the
NBLAST and XBLAST programs (version 2.0) of Altschul, et al., (1990, J. Mol.
Biol,
215: 403-10). BLAST nucleotide searches can be performed with the NBLAST
program, score = 100, wordlength = 12 to obtain nucleotide sequences
homologous to
nucleic acid molecules of the invention. BLAST protein searches can be
performed
with the XBLAST program, score = 50, wordlength = 3 to obtain amino acid
sequences
homologous to protein molecules of the invention. To obtain gapped alignments
for
comparison purposes, Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et
al.,
(1997, Nucleic Acids Res, 25: 3389-3402). When utilizing BLAST and Gapped
BLAST programs, the default parameters of the respective programs (e.g.,
XBLAST
and NBLAST) can be used.
[00111] The term "solubility" refers to the property of an agent provided
herein to
dissolve in a liquid solvent and form a homogeneous solution. Solubility is
typically
expressed as a concentration, either by mass of solute per unit volume of
solvent (g of
solute per kg of solvent, g per dL (100 mL), mg/ml, etc.), molarity, molality,
mole
fraction or other similar descriptions of concentration. The maximum
equilibrium
amount of solute that can dissolve per amount of solvent is the solubility of
that solute
in that solvent under the specified conditions, including temperature,
pressure, pH, and
the nature of the solvent. In certain embodiments, solubility is measured at
physiological pH. In certain embodiments, solubility is measured in water or a
physiological buffer such as PBS. In certain embodiments, solubility is
measured in a
biological fluid (solvent) such as blood or serum In certain embodiments, the
temperature can be about room temperature (e.g., about 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25
C) or
about body temperature (37 C). In certain embodiments, an agent such as an
AARS
protein fragment has a solubility of at least about 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5,
0.6, 0.7, 0.8,
0.9, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20,
25, or 30 mg/mi at
room temperature or at 37 C.
[00112] A "splice junction" as used herein includes the region in a mature
mRNA
transcript or the encoded polypeptide where the 3' end of a first exon joins
with the 5'
end of a second exon. The size of the region may vary, and may include 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7,
8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55,
60, 65, 70, 75,
80, 85, 90, 95, 100 or more (including all integers in between) nucleotide or
amino acid
residues on either side of the exact residues where the 3' end of one exon
joins with the
5' end of another exon. An "exon" refers to a nucleic acid sequence that is
represented
in the mature form of an RNA molecule after either portions of a precursor RNA
26
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
(introns) have been removed by cis-splicing or two or more precursor RNA
molecules
have been ligated by trans-splicing. The mature RNA molecule can be a
messenger
RNA or a functional form of a non-coding RNA such as rRNA or tRNA. Depending
on
the context, an exon can refer to the sequence in the DNA or its RNA
transcript. An
"intron" refers to a non-coding nucleic acid region within a gene, which is
not
translated into a protein. Non-coding intronic sections are transcribed to
precursor
mRNA (pre-mRNA) and some other RNAs (such as long noncoding RNAs), and
subsequently removed by splicing during the processing to mature RNA.
[00113] A "splice variant" refers to a mature mRNA and its encoded protein
that are
produced by alternative splicing, a process by which the exons of the RNA (a
primary
gene transcript or pre-mRNA) are reconnected in multiple ways during RNA
splicing.
The resulting different mRNAs may be translated into different protein
isoforms,
allowing a single gene to code for multiple proteins.
[00114] A "subject," as used herein, includes any animal that exhibits a
symptom, or
is at risk for exhibiting a symptom, which can be treated or diagnosed with an
AARS
polynucleotide or polypeptide of the invention. Also included are subjects for
which it
is desirable to profile levels of AARS polypeptides and/or polynueleotides of
the
invention, for diagnostic or other purposes. Suitable subjects (patients)
include
laboratory animals (such as mouse, rat, rabbit, or guinea pig), farm animals,
and
domestic animals or pets (such as a cat or dog). Non-human primates and,
preferably,
human patients, are included.
[00115] "Treatment" or "treating," as used herein, includes any desirable
effect on
the symptoms or pathology of a disease or condition that can be effected by
the non-
canonical activities of an AARS polynucleotide or polypeptide, as described
herein, and
may include even minimal changes or improvements in one or more measurable
markers of the disease or condition being treated. Also included are
treatments that
relate to non-AARS therapies, in which an AARS sequence described herein
provides a
clinical marker of treatment. "Treatment" or "treating" does not necessarily
indicate
complete eradication or cure of the disease or condition, or associated
symptoms
thereof. The subject receiving this treatment is any subject in need thereof
Exemplary
markers of clinical improvement will be apparent to persons skilled in the
art.
[00116] The practice of the present invention will employ, unless indicated
specifically to the contrary, conventional methods of molecular biology and
recombinant DNA techniques within the skill of the art, many of which are
described
below for the purpose of illustration. Such techniques are explained fully in
the
literature. See, e.g., Sambrook, et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory
Manual (3rd
Edition, 2000); DNA Cloning: A Practical Approach, vol. I & IT (D. Glover,
ed.);
27
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Oligonucleotide Synthesis (N. Gait, ed., 1984); Oligonucleotide Synthesis:
Methods and
Applications (P. Herdewijn, ed., 2004); Nucleic Acid Hybridization (B. Hames &
S.
Higgins, eds., 1985); Nucleic Acid Hybridization: Modern Applications (Buzdin
and
Lukyanov, eds., 2009); Transcription and Translation (B. Hames & S. Higgins,
eds.,
1984); Animal Cell Culture (R. Freshney, ed., 1986); Freshney, R.I. (2005)
Culture of
Animal Cells, a Manual of Bask Technique, 5th Ed. Hoboken NJ, John Wiley &
Sons;
B. Perbal, A Practical Guide to Molecular Cloning (31d Edition 2010); Farrell,
R., RNA
Methodologies: A Laboratoty Guide for Isolation and Characterization (3rd
Edition
2005), Methods of Enzymology: DNA Structure Part A: Synthesis and Physical
Analysis
of DNA Methods in Enzymology, Academic Press; Using Antibodies: A Laboratory
Manual: Portable Protocol NO. I by Edward Harlow, David Lane, Ed Harlow (1999,
Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, ISBN 0-87969-544-7); Antibodies: A
Laboratory
Manual by Ed Harlow (Editor), David Lane (Editor) (1988, Cold Spring Harbor
Laboratory Press, ISBN 0-87969-3,4-2), 1855. Handbook of Drug Screening,
edited by
Ramakrishna Seethala, Prabhavathi B. Fernandes (2001, New York, N.Y., Marcel
Dekker, ISBN 0-8247-0562-9); and Lab Ref A Handbook of Recipes, Reagents, and
Other Reftrence Tools Jim- Use at the Bench, Edited Jane Roskams and Linda
Rodgers,
(2002, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, ISBN 0-87969-630-3).
[00117]
III. PURIFIED AARS PROTEIN FRAGMENTS AND VARIANTS FOR THERAPEUTICS AND
OTHER APPLICATIONS
[00118] Surprisingly, and unlike their full-length parental sequences that are
known
only for their aminoacylation-activities, it has been found that AARS
fragments possess
biological activities important fbr biotherapeutic, discovery and diagnostic
applications.
Embodiments of the present invention therefore include full length proteins,
mature
protein isoforms and protein fragments of aminoacyl-tRNA synthetases (AARS),
in
addition to biologically active variants and fragments thereof In certain
embodiments,
the proteins and fragments may arise through endogenous proteolysis, in vitro
proteolysis, splice variation, or in silico prediction, among other
mechanisms.
[00119] The AARS protein fragments described herein, and variants thereof, may
possess at least one "non-canonical" biological activity. The AARS protein
fragment(s)
of the present invention are also referred to herein as "AARS polypeptides" or
"AARS
reference polypeptides." In certain embodiments, the AARS polypeptides
provided
herein comprise or consist essentially of all or a portion of the AARS
polypeptide
"reference sequence(s)" as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or
Table(s) 7-9
28
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
below, which represent the amino acid sequence(s) of various fragments of
Arginyl
tRNA synthetases. Mouse and human AARS protein sequences are highly related,
typically differing by no more than a few amino acids within an entire
sequence, a
particular domain, or a particular protein fragment.
N-terminal AARS Polypeptides: (Tables 1, 2 & 3)
Table lA
AARS polypeptides identified by MS
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species . NO.
Residues
ArgRSNI Protein / MDVLVSECSARLLQQEEEIKSLTAEIDRLKN SEQ.ID.
Human i CGCLGASPNLEQLQEENLKLKYRLNILRKSL NO 12
1-398 QAERNKPTKNMINIISRLQEVFGHAIKAAYP
DLENPPLLVTPSQQAKFGDYQCNSAMGISQ
MLKTKEQKVNPREIAENITKHLPDNECIEKV
EIAGPGFINVHLRKDFVSEQLTSLLVNGVQL
PALGENKKVIVDFSSPNIAKEMHVGHLRSTII
GESISRLFEFAGYDVLRLNHVGDWGTQFGM
LIAHLQDKFPDYLTVSPPIGDLQVFYKESKK
RFDTEEEFKKRAYQCVVLLQGKNPDITKAW
KLICDVSRQELNKIYDALDVSLIERGESFYQ
DRMNDIVKEFEDRGFVQVDDGRKIVFVPGC
SIPLTIVKSDGGYTYDTSDLAAIKQRLFE
ArgRSN1 DNA / ATGGACGTACTGGTGTCTGAGTGCTCCGC SEQ.ID.
Human i GCGGCTGCTGCAGCAGGAAGAAGAGATTA NO.13
AATCTCTGACTGCTGAAATTGACCGGTTG
AAAAACTGTGGCTGTTTAGGAGCTTCTCC
AAATTTGGAGCAGTTACAAGAAGAAAATT
TAAAATTAAAGTATCGACTGAATATTCTTC
GAAAGAGTCTTCAGGCAGAAAGGAACAA
ACCAACTAAAAATATGATTAACATTATTA
GCCGCCTACAAGAGGTCTTTGGTCATGCA
ATTAAGGCTGCATATCCAGATTTGGAAAA
TCCTCCTCTGCTAGTGACACCAAGTCAGCA
GGCCAAGTTTGGGGACTATCAGTGTAATA
GTGCTATGGGTATTTCTCAGATGCTCAAAA
CCAAGGAACAGAAAGTTAATCCAAGAGA
AATTGCTGAAAACATTACCAAACACCTCC
CAGACAATGAATGTATTGAAAAAGTTGAA
ATTGCTGGTCCTGGTTTTATTAATGTCCAC
TTAAGAAAGGATTTTGTATCAGAACAATT
GACCAGTCTTCTAGTGAATGGAGTTCAAC
TACCTGCTCTGGGAGAGAATAAAAAGGTT
ATAGTTGACTTTTCCTCCCCTAATATAGCT
29
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table IA
AARS polypeptides identified by MS
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species I . NO.
Residues
AAAGAGATGCATGTAGGCCACCTGAGGTC
AACTATCATAGGAGAGAGTATAAGCCGCC
TCTTTGAATTTGCAGGGTATGACGTGCTCA
GGTTAAATCATGTAGGAGACTGGGGGACC
CAGTTTGGCATGCTCATCGCTCACCTGCAA
GACAAATTTCCAGATTATCTAACAGTTTCA
CCTCCTATTGGGGATCTTCAGGTCTTTTAT
AAGGAATCTAAGAAGAGGTTTGATACTGA
GGAGGAATTTAAGAAGCGAGCATATCAGT
GTGTAGTTCTGCTCCAGGGTAAAAACCCA
GATATTACAAAAGCTTGGAAGCTTATCTG
TGATGTCTCCCGCCAAGAGTTAAATAAAA
TCTATGATGCATTGGACGTCTCTTTAATAG
AGAGAGGGGAATCCTTCTATCAAGATAGG
ATGAATGATATTGTAAAGGAATTTGAAGA
TAGAGGATTTGTGCAGGTGGATGATGGCA
GAAAGATTGTATTTGTCCCAGGGTGTTCCA
TACCATTAACCATAGTAAAATCAGATGGA
GGTTATACCTATGATACATCTGACCTGGCT
GCTATTAAACAAAGACTATTTGAG
Table 1B
ArgRSN1
Mass spec peptides detected and inferred linking peptides
Type / Sequence SEQ.ID
species . NO.
Protein AAYPDLENPPL1VTPSQQPK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.14
Protein FGDYQCNSAMGISQMLKAKEQKVSPREIAENITKHLPN SEQ.ID.
mouse NKYIDKVEIAGPGFINVHLRK NO.15
Protein DFVSEQLT SLLVNGVQLPVLGDKEK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.16
Protein VIVDF S SPNIAK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.17
Protein EMHVGHLRSTIIGESMSRLFEFAGYDVLRLNHVGDWG SEQ.ID.
mouse TQFGMLIAHLQDKEPDYLTVSPPIGDLQAFYKESKKRF NO. 18
DADEEFKKRAYQCVVLLQSKNPDIMKAWNLICDVSRE
EFKKIYDALDITLIERGESFYQDRMKDIVKEFEDKGFVQ
VDDGRKIVFVPGC
Protein SVPLTIVKSDGGYTYDTSDLAA1K SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.19
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table 1C
ArgRSN1
Concatenated sequences based on mass spec peptides detected
Type! Sequence SEQ.ID
species . NO.
Protein AAYPDLENPPLIVTPSQQPKFGDYQCNSAMGISQMLICA SEQ.ID.
mouse KEQKVSPREIAENITKHLPNNKYIDKVEIAGPGFINVHL NO.20
RKDFVSEQLTSLLVNGVQLPVLGDKEKVIVDFSSPNIA
KEMHVGHLRSTIIGESMSRLFEFAGYDVLRLNHVGDW
GTQFGMLIAHLQDKFPDYLTVSPPIGDLQAFYKESKKR
FDADEEFKKRAYQCVVLLQSKNPDIMKAWNLICDVSR
EEFKKIYDALDITLIERGESFYQDRMKDIVKEFEDKGFV
QVDDGRIUVFVPGCSVPLTIVKSDGGYTYDTSDLAAIK
Table 2
AARS polypeptides and alternative transcripts identified by Deep Sequencing
Name Type! Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species! . NO.
Residues
ArgRSN3 Protein / MDVLVSECSARLLQQEEEIKSLTAEIDRLKN SEQ.ID.
Human / CGCLGASPNLEQLQEENLKLKYRLNILRKSL NO.21
1-353 + QAERNKPTKNMINIISRLQEVFGHAIKAAYP
20 aa DLENPPLLVTPSQQAICFGDYQCNSAMGISQ
MLKTKEQKVNPREIAENITKHLPDNECIEKV
EIAGPGFINVHLRKDFVSEQLTSLLVNGVQL
PALGENKKVIVDFSSPNIAKEMHVGHLRSTI
IGESISRLFEFAGYDVLRLNHVGDWGTQFG
MLIAHLQDKFPDYLTVSPPIGDLQVFYKESK
KRFDTEEEFKKRAYQCVVLLQGKNPDITKA
WKLICDVSRQELNKIYDALDVSLIERGESFY
QDRMNDIVKEFEDRGKSLICHVRVKQCASW
IFWEKD
ArgRSN3 DNA/
ATGGACGTACTGGTGTCTGAGTGCTCCGC SEQ.ID.
Human GCGGCTGCTGCAGCAGGAAGAAGAGATT NO.22
AAATCTCTGACTGCTGAAATTGACCGGTT
GAAAAACTGTGGCTGTTTAGGAGCTTCTC
CAAATTTGGAGCAGTTACAAGAAGAAAA
TTTAAAATTAAAGTATCGACTGAATATTC
TTCGAAAGAGTCTTCAGGCAGAAAGGAA
CAAACCAACTAAAAATATGATTAACATTA
TTAGCCGCCTACAAGAGGTCTTTGGTCAT
GCAATTAAGGCTGCATATCCAGATTTGGA
AAATCCTCCTCTGCTAGTGACACCAAGTC
AGCAGGCCAAGTTTGGGGACTATCAGTGT
31
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table 2
AARS polypeptides and alternative transcripts identified by Deep Sequencing
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species / . NO.
Residues
AATAGTGCTATGGGTATTTCTCAGATGCT
CAAAACCAAGGAACAGAAAGTTAATCCA
AGAGAAATTGCTGAAAACATTACCAAAC
ACCTCCCAGACAATGAATGTATTGAAAAA
GTTGAAATTGCTGGTCCTGGTTTTATTAAT
GTCCACTTAAGAAAGGATTTTGTATCAGA
ACAATTGACCAGTCTTCTAGTGAATGGAG
TTCAACTACCTGCTCTGGGAGAGAATAAA
AAGGTTATAGTTGACTTTTCCTCCCCTAAT
ATAGCTAAAGAGATGCATGTAGGCCACCT
GAGGTCAACTATCATAGGAGAGAGTATA
AGCCGCCTCTTTGAATTTGCAGGGTATGA
CGTGCTCAGGTTAAATCATGTAGGAGACT
GGGGGACCCAGTTTGGCATGCTCATCGCT
CACCTGCAAGACAAATTTCCAGATTATCT
AACAGTTTCACCTCCTATTGGGGATCTTC
AGGTCTTTTATAAGGAATCTAAGAAGAGG
TTTGATACTGAGGAGGAATTTAAGAAGCG
AGCATATCAGTGTGTAGTTCTGCTCCAGG
GTAAAAACCCAGATATTACAAAAGCTTGG
AAGCTTATCTGTGATGTCTCCCGCCAAGA
GTTAAATAAAATCTATGATGCATTGGACG
TCTCTTTAATAGAGAGAGGGGAATCCTTC
TATCAAGATAGGATGAATGATATTGTAAA
GGAATTTGAAGATAGAGGAAAAAGTTTA
AAACACGTTCGGGTGAAACAGTGCGCCTC
ATGGATCTTCTGGGAGAAGGACTAA
ArgRSN4 Protein / MDVLVSECSARLLQQEEEIKSLTAEIDRLKN SEQ.ID.
Human / CGCLGASPNLEQLQEENLKLKYRLNILRKSL NO.23
1-160 QAERNKPTKNMINIISRLQEVFGHAIKAAYP
DLENPPLLVTPSQQAKFGDYQCNSAMGISQ
MLKTKEQKVNPREIAENITKHLPDNECIEKV
E1AGPG
ArgRSN4 DNA/ ATGGACGTACTGGTGTCTGAGTGCTCCGC SEQ.ID.
Human GCGGCTGCTGCAGCAGGAAGAAGAGATT NO.24
AAATCTCTGACTGCTGAAATTGACCGGTT
GAAAAACTGTGGCTGTTTAGGAGCTTCTC
CAAATTTGGAGCAGTTACAAGAAGAAAA
TTTAAAATTAAAGTATCGACTGAATATTC
TTCGAAAGAGTCTTCAGGCAGAAAGGAA
CAAACCAACTAAAAATATGATTAACATTA
TTAGCCGCCTACAAGAGGTCTTTGGTCAT
32
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table 2
AARS polypeptides and alternative transcripts identified by Deep Sequencing
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species / . NO.
Residues
GCAATTAAGGCTGCATATCCAGATTTGGA
AAATCCTCCTCTGCTAGTGACACCAAGTC
AGCAGGCCAAGTTTGGGGACTATCAGTGT
AATAGTGCTATGGGTATTTCTCAGATGCT
CAAAACCAAGGAACAGAAAGTTAATCCA
AGAGAAATTGCTGAAAACATTACCAAAC
ACCTCCCAGACAATGAATGTATTGAAAAA
GTTGAAATTGCTGGTCCTGGTTAA
Table 2B
AARS polypeptides unique splice junctions
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences in the SEQ.ID
species vicinity of the unique splice junction . NO.
RI-AS02 DNA! ATTGTAAAGGAATTTGAAGATAGAG I GAAAAAG SEQ.ID.
Human! TTTAAAACACGTTCGGGT NO.25
Protein! IVKEFEDRGKSLKHVR SEQ.ID.
Human! NO.26
R1-AS03 DNA! GAAAAAGTTGAAATTGCTGGTCCTG1GTTA SEQ.ID.
Human! AATCATGTAGGAGACTGGGGG NO.27
Protein! EKVEIAGPG SEQ.ID.
Human! NO.28
Table 3
AARS polypeptides and nucleic acids identified by Bioinformatics
Name Type! Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species! . NO.
Residues
ArgRS N2 Protein! SEQ.ID.
Human / MDVLVSECSARLLQQEEEIKSLTAEIDRLK NO.29
1-71 NCGCLGASPNLEQLQEENLKLKYRLNILRK
SLQAERNKPTK
ArgRSN2 DNA! ATGGACGTACTGGTGTCTGAGTGCTCCGC SEQ.ID.
Human! GCGGCTGCTGCAGCAGGAAGAAGAGATT NO.30
AAATCTCTGACTGCTGAAATTGACCGGTT
GAAAAACTGTGGCTGTTTAGGAGCTTCTC
CAAATTTGGAGCAGTTACAAGAAGAAAA
TTTAAAATTAAAGTATCGACTGAATATTC
TTCGAAAGAGTCTTCAGGCAGAAAGGAA
CAAACCAACTAAA
33
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
C-terminal AARS Polypeptides: (Tables 4, 5 & 6)
Table 4A
AARS poly-peptides identified by MS
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species . NO.
/Residue
s
ArgRS( 1 Protein / MINIISRLQEVFGHAIKAAYPDLENPPLLVT SEQ.ID.
Human / PSQQAKFGDYQCNSAMGISQMLKTKEQKV NO.43
73-660 NPREIAENITKHLPDNECIEKVEIAGPGFINV
HLRKDFVSEQLTSLLVNGVQLPALGENKK
VIVDFSSPNIAKEMHVGHLRSTIIGESISRLF
EFAGYDVLRLNHVGDWGTQFGMLIAHLQ
DICFPDYLTVSPPIGDLQVFYKESKKREDTE
EEFKKRAYQCVVLLQGKNPDITKAWKLIC
DVSRQELNKIYDALDVSLIERGESFYQDRM
NDIVKEFEDRGFVQVDDGRKIVFVPGCSIPL
TIVKSDGGYTYDTSDLAAIKQRLFEEKADM
IIYVVDNGQSVHFQTIFAAAQMIGWYDPKV
TRVFHAGFGVVLGEDKKKFKTRSGETVRL
MDLLGEGLKRSMDKLKEKERDKVLTAEEL
NAAQTSVAYGCIKYADLSHNRLNDYIFSFD
KMLDDRGNTAAYLLYAFTRIRSIARLANID
EEMLQKAARETKILLDHEKEWKLGRCILRF
PEILQKILDDLFLHTLCDYIYELATAFTEFY
DSCYCVEKDRQTGKILKVNMWRMLLCEA
VAAVMAKGFDILGIKPVQRM
ArgRS(21 DNA / ATGATTAACATTATTAGCCGCCTACAAGA SEQ.ID.
Human / GGTCTTTGGTCATGCAATTAAGGCTGCAT NO.44
ATCCAGATTTGGAAAATCCTCCTCTGCTA
GTGACACCAAGTCAGCAGGCCAAGTTTG
GGGACTATCAGTGTAATAGTGCTATGGG
TATTTCTCAGATGCTCAAAACCAAGGAA
CAGAAAGTTAATCCAAGAGAAATTGCTG
AAAACATTACCAAACACCTCCCAGACAA
TGAATGTATTGAAAAAGTTGAAATTGCT
GGTCCTGGTTTTATTAATGTCCACTTAAG
AAAGGATTTTGTATCAGAACAATTGACC
AGTCTTCTAGTGAATGGAGTTCAACTACC
TGCTCTGGGAGAGAATAAAAAGGTTATA
GTTGACTTTTCCTCCCCTAATATAGCTAA
AGAGATGCATGTAGGCCACCTGAGGTCA
ACTATCATAGGAGAGAGTATAAGCCGCC
TCTTTGAATTTGCAGGGTATGACGTGCTC
AGGTTAAATCATGTAGGAGACTGGGGGA
CCCAGTTTGGCATGCTCATCGCTCACCTG
CAAGACAAATTTCCAGATTATCTAACAGT
34
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table 4A
AARS poly-peptides identified by MS
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species . NO.
/Residue
TTCACCTCCTATTGGGGATCTTCAGGTCT
TTTATAAGGAATCTAAGAAGAGGTTTGA
TACTGAGGAGGAATTTAAGAAGCGAGCA
TATCAGTGTGTAGTTCTGCTCCAGGGTAA
AAACCCAGATATTACAAAAGCTTGGAAG
CTTATCTGTGATGTCTCCCGCCAAGAGTT
AAATAAAATCTATGATGCATTGGACGTCT
CTTTAATAGAGAGAGGGGAATCCTTCTAT
CAAGATAGGATGAATGATATTGTAAAGG
AATTTGAAGATAGAGGATTTGTGCAGGT
GGATGATGGCAGAAAGATTGTATTTGTC
CCAGGGTGTTCCATACCATTAACCATAGT
AAAATCAGATGGAGGTTATACCTATGAT
ACATCTGACCTGGCTGCTATTAAACAAA
GACTATTTGAGGAAAAAGCAGATATGAT
TATCTATGTTGTGGACAATGGACAATCTG
TGCACTTCCAGACAATATTTGCTGCTGCT
CAAATGATTGGTTGGTATGACCCTAAAGT
AACTCGAGTCTTCCATGCTGGATTTGGTG
TGGTGCTAGGGGAAGACAAGAAAAAGTT
TAAAACACGTTCGGGTGAAACAGTGCGC
CTCATGGATCTTCTGGGAGAAGGACTAA
AACGATCCATGGACAAGTTGAAGGAAAA
AGAAAGAGACAAGGTCTTAACTGCAGAG
GAATTGAATGCTGCTCAGACATCCGTTGC
GTATGGCTGCATCAAATATGCTGACCTTT
CCCATAACCGGTTGAATGACTACATCTTC
TCCTTTGACAAAATGCTAGATGACAGAG
GAAATACAGCTGCTTACTTGTTGTATGCC
TTCACTAGAATCAGGTCTATTGCACGTCT
GGCCAATATTGATGAAGAAATGCTCCAA
AAAGCTGCTCGAGAAACCAAGATTCTTTT
GGATCATGAGAAGGAATGGAAACTAGGC
CGGTGCATTTTACGGTTCCCTGAGATTCT
GCAAAAGATTTTAGATGACTTATTTCTCC
ACACTCTCTGTGATTATATATATGAGCTG
GCAACTGCTTTCACAGAGTTCTATGATAG
CTGCTACTGTGTGGAGAAAGATAGACAG
ACTGGAAAAATATTGAAGGTGAACATGT
GGCGTATGCTGCTATGTGAAGCAGTAGC
TGCTGTCATGGCCAAGGGGTTTGATATCC
TGGGAATAAAACCTGTCCAAAGGATGTA
A
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table 4B
ArgRS1c1
Mass spec peptides detected and inferred linking peptides
Type / Sequence SEQ.ID
species . NO.
Protein LQEVFGCAIR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.45
Protein AAYPDLENPPLIVTPSQQPK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.46
Protein! FGDYQCN SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.47
Protein! SAMGISQMLKAKEQKVSPREIAENITKHLPNNKYIDKV SEQ.ID.
mouse EIAGPGFINVHERKDEVSEQLTSLEVNGVQLPVLGDKE NO.48
Protein VIVDF S SPNIAK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.49
Protein EMHVGHLRSTIIGESMSR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.50
Protein LFEFAGYDVLR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.51
Protein LNHVGDWGTQFGMLIAHLQDK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.52
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse FPDYLTVSPPIGDLQAFYK NO 53
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse E SKKR NO.54
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse FDADEEFKKRAYQCVVLLQSK NO.55
Protein NPDIMK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.56
Protein AWNLICDV SR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.57
Protein! EEFK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.58
Protein KIYDALDITLIER SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.59
Protein GE SFYQDRMKDIVKEFEDKGFVQVDDGRK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.60
Protein! IVFVPGCSVPLTIVKSDGGYTYDTSDLAAIK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.61
Protein QRLFEEKANKIIYVVDNGQAIHFQTIFAAAQMIGWYDP SEQ.ID.
mouse KVTLVTHVGF GVVL GEDKKKFKTRS GETVRLMDLLEE NO.62
GLKRSMDKLKEKER
Protein DKVLTEEELK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.63
Protein! AAQTSVAYGCIK SEQ.ID.
36
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table 4B
ArgRS1c1
Mass spec peptides detected and inferred linking peptides
Type! Sequence SEQ.ID
species . NO.
mouse NO.64
Protein / YADLSHNRLNDYIF SFDKMLDDR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.65
Protein / GNTAAYLLYAFTR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.66
Protein / IRSIAR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.67
Protein / LANIDEAMLQR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.68
Protein / AARETKIILDHEKEWKLGRCILREPEILQKILDDLELHTL SEQ.ID.
mouse CDYIYELATTFTEFYDSCYCVEKDRQTGKVLKVNMWR NO.69
Protein / MLLCEAVAAVMAK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.70
Protein GFDILGIKPVQR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.71
Protein AAYPDLENPPLIVTPSQQPK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.72
Protein FGDYQCNSAMGISQMLKAKEQKVSPREINENITKHLPN SEQ.ID.
mouse NKYIDKVEIAGPGFINVHLRK NO.73
Protein DF V SEQLT SLLVNGVQLPVLGDKEK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.74
Protein V1VDFS SPNIAK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.75
Protein EMHVGHLRSTIIGESMSR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.76
Protein LFEFAGYDVLR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.77
Protein LNHVGDWGTQFGMLIAHLQDK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.78
Protein FPDYLTVSPPIGDLQAFYK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.79
Protein ESKKRFDADEEFKKRAYQCVVLLQSKNPDIMK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.80
Protein! AWNLICDVSR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.81
Protein! EEFKKIYDALDITLIERGESFYQDRMKDIVKEFEDKGFV SEQ.ID.
mouse QVDDGRK NO.82
Protein! IVFVPGCSVPLTIVKSDGGYTYDTSDLAAIK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.83
Protein! QRLFEEKANKIIY V VD N GQAIHFQTIFAAAQMIGWYDP SEQ.ID.
mouse KVTLVTHVGEGVVLGEDKKKEKTRSGETVRLMDLLEE NO.84
GLKRSMDKLKEKER
Protein DKVLTEEELK SEQ.ID.
37
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table 4B
ArgRS1c1
Mass spec peptides detected and inferred linking peptides
Type! Sequence SEQ.ID
species . NO.
mouse NO.85
Protein / AAQTSVAYGCIKYADLSHNRLNDYIFSFDKMLDDR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.86
Protein / GNTAAYLLYAFTR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.87
Protein / IRSIAR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.88
Protein / LANIDEAMLQR SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.89
Protein/ AARETK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.90
Protein / IILDHEKEWK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.91
Protein LGRCILRFPEILQKILDDLFLHTLCDYIYELATTFTEFYD SEQ.ID.
mouse SCYCVEKDRQTGKVLKVNMWR NO.92
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse MLLCEAVAAVMAK NO.93
Protein LQEVEGCAIRAAYPDLENPPLIVTPSQQPKFGDYQCNS SEQ.ID.
mouse AMGISQMLK NO.94
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse AKEQKVSPREIAENITKHLPNNK NO.95
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse YIDKVEIAGPGFINVHLR NO.96
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse DEVSEQLTSLLVNGVQLPVLGDKEKVIVDESSPNIAK NO.97
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse EMHVGHLRSTIIGESMSR NO.98
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse LFEFAGYDVLR NO.99
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse LNHVGDWGTQFGMLIAHLQDK NO.100
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse FPDYLTVSPPIGDLQAFYK NO.101
Protein! SEQ.ID.
mouse ESKKRFDADEEFKKR NO.102
Protein! SEQ.ID.
mouse AYQCVVLLQSK NO.103
Protein! SEQ.ID.
mouse NPDIMK NO.104
Protein! SEQ.ID.
mouse AWNLICDVSR NO.105
Protein! SEQ.ID.
mouse EEFK NO.106
38
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table 4B
ArgRS1c1
Mass spec peptides detected and inferred linking peptides
Type! Sequence SEQ.ID
species . NO.
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse IYDALDITLIER NO.107
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse GESFYQDRMKDIVK NO.108
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse EFEDKGFVQVDDGR NO.109
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse KIVFVPGCSVPLTIVKSDGGYTYDTSDLAAIK NO.110
Protein QRLFEEKANKIIYVVDNGQAIHFQTIFAAAQMIGWYDP SEQ.ID.
mouse KVTLVTHVGFGVVLGEDKKKFKTRSGETVR NO.111
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse LMDLLEEGLKR NO.112
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse SMDKLKEKER NO.113
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse DKVLTEEELK NO.114
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse AAQTSVAYGCIK NO.115
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse YADLSHNR NO.116
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse LNDYIFSFDK NO.117
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse MLDDR NO.118
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse GNTAAYLLYAFTR NO.119
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse IRSIAR NO.120
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse LANIDEAMLQR NO.121
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse AARETK NO.122
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse IILDHEKEWK NO.123
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse LGRCILRFPEILQK NO.124
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse ILDDLFLHTLC NO.125
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse DYIYELATTFTEFYDSCYCVEKDRQTGKVLKVNMWR NO.126
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse MLLCEAVAAVMAKGFDILGIKPVQR NO.127
39
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table 4C
ArgRS1c1
Concatenated sequences based on mass spec peptides detected
Type / Sequence SEQ.ID
species . NO.
Protein / LQEVEGCAIRAAYPDLENPPLIVTPSQQPKFGDYQCNS SEQ.ID.
mouse AMGISQMLKAKEQKVSPREIAENITKHLPNNKYIDKVE NO. 128
IAGP G FINVHLRKDFV S EQ LT SLLVNGVQLPVL GDKEK
VIVDFSSPNIAKEMHVGHLRSTIIGESMSRLFEFAGYDV
LRLNHVGDWGTQFGML1AHLQDKFPDYLTVSPPIGDL
QAFYKESKKRFDADEEFKKRAYQCVVLLQSKNPDTMK
AWNLICDVSREEFKKIYDALDITLIERGESFYQDRMKDI
VKEFED KGFV QVDD GRKIVFVP GC SVPLTIVKSD GGYT
YDTSDLAAIKQRLFEEKANKIIYVVDNGQAIHFQTIFAA
A QMTG WYDPKVTLVTHVG FGVVLGEDKK KFKTR S G E
TVRLMDLLEEGLICRSMDICLKEICERDKVLTEEELICAAQ
TSVAYGCIKYADLSHNRLNDYIFSEDICMLDDRGNTAA
YLLYAFTRIRSIARLANIDEAMLQRAARETKIILDHEKE
WKLGRCILREPEILQKILDDLELHTLCDYIYELATTFTEF
YDSCYCVEKDRQTGKVLKVNMWRMLLCEAVAAVMA
KGFDILGIKPVQR
Protein / AAYPDLENPPLIVTPSQQPKFGDYQCNSAMGISQMLKA SEQ.ID.
mouse KEQKVSPREIAENITKHLPNNKYIDKVEIAGPGFINVHL NO.129
RKDFV S EQLT S LLVNGVQL PVLGDKEKVIVDF S SPNIA
KEMHVGHLRSTIIGESMSRLFEFAGYDVLRLNHVGDW
GTQFGMLIAHLQDKFPDYLTVSPPIGDLQAFYKESKKR
FDADEEFKKRAYQ CVVLL Q SKNPDIMKAWNLICDV SR
EEFKKIYDALDITLIERGESFYQDRMKDIVKEFEDKGFV
QVDDGRKIVEVPGCSVPLTIVKSDGGYTYDTSDLAAIK
QRLFEEKANKITYVVDNGQAIHFQTIFAAAQMIGWYDP
KVTLVTHVGEGVVLGEDKKKEKTRSGETVRLMDLLEE
GLICRSMDKLICEKERDKVLTEEELKAAQTSVAYGCIKY
ADL S HNRLNDYIF S FDKMLDDRGNTAAYLLYAFTRIRS
IARLANIDEAMLQ1kAARETKIILDHEKE VVKLGRCILRFP
EILQICILDDLELHTLCDYIYELATTFTEFYDSCYCVEKD
RQTGKVLKVNMWRMLLCEAVAAVMAK
Protein / LQEVFGCAIRAAYPDLENPPLIVTP SQQPKFGDYQCNS SEQ.ID.
mouse AMGISQMLKAKEQKVSPREIAENITKHLPNNKYIDKVE NO.130
IAGPGFINVHLRKDEVSEQLTSLLVNGVQLPVLGDKEK
MEW S SPNIAKEMHVGHLRSTIIGESMSRLFEFAGYD V
LRLNHVGDWGTQFGMLIAHLQDKFPDYLTVSPPIGDL
QAFYKESICKRFDADEEFKKRAYQCVVLLQSKNPDIMK
AWNLICDVSREEFKKIYDALDITLIERGESFYQDRMICDI
VKEFED KGFV QVDD GRKIVFVP GC SVPLTIVKSD GGYT
YDTSDLAAIKQRLFEEKANKIIYVVDNGQAIHFQTIFAA
A QMTG WYDPKVTLVTHVG FGVVLGEDKK ICEKTR S G E
TVRLMDLLEEGLKRSMDKLKEICERDKVLTEEELICAAQ
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
TSVAYGCIKYADLSHNRLNDYIFSFDKMLDDRGNTA A
YLLYAFTRIRSIARLANIDEAMLQRAARETKIILDHEKE
WKLGRCILRFPEILQKILDDLFLHTLCDYIYELATTFTEF
YDS CYCVEKDRQTGKVLKVNMWRMLLCEAVAAVMA
KGFDILGIKPVQR
Table 5
AARS polypeptides and alternative transcripts identified by Deep Sequencing
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species / . NO.
Residues
ArgRS Protein / MDLLGEGLKRSMDKLKEKERDKVLTAEELN SEQ.ID.
C3
Human / AAQTSVAYGCIKYADLSHNRLNDYIFSFDKM NO.131
463-660 LDDRGNTAAYLLYAFTRIRSIARLANIDEEML
QKAARETKILLDHEKEWKLGRCILRFPEILQKI
LDDLFLHTLCDYIYELATAFTEFYDSCYCVEK
DRQTGKILKVNMWRMLLCEAVAAVMAKGF
DILGIKPVQRM
ArgRS DNA/
ATGGATCTTCTGGGAGAAGGACTAAAAC GA SEQ.ID.
(-3
Human TCCATGGACAAGTTGAAGGAAAAAGAAAG NO.132
AGACAAGGTCTTAACTGCAGAGGAATTGAA
TGCTGCTCAGACATCCGTTGCGTATGGCTG
CATCAAATATGCTGACCTTTCCCATAACCG
GTTGAATGACTACATCTTCTCCTTTGACAAA
ATGCTAGATGACAGAGGAAATACAGCTGCT
TACTTGTTGTATGCCTTCACTAGAATCAGGT
CTATTGCACGTCTGGCCAATATTGATGAAG
AAATGCTCCAAAAAGCTGCTCGAGAAACCA
AGATTCTTTTGGATCATGAGAAGGAATGGA
AACTAGGCCGGTGCATTTTACGGTTCCCTG
AGATTCTGCAAAAGATTTTAGATGACTTAT
TTCTCCACACTCTCTGTGATTATATATATGA
GCTGGCAACTGCTTTCACAGAGTTCTATGA
TAGCTGCTACTGTGTGGAGAAAGATAGACA
GACTGGAAAAATATTGAAGGTGAACATGTG
GCGTATGCTGCTATGTGAAGCAGTAGCTGC
TGTCATGGCCAAGGGGTTTGATATCCTGGG
AATAAAACCTGTCCAAAGGATGTAA
ArgRS Protein MLIAHLQDKFPDYLT V SPPIGDLQVFYKESKK SEQ.ID.
C4 Human!
RFDTEEEFKKRAYQCVVLLQGKNPDITKAWK NO.133
247-660 LICDVSRQELNKIYDALDVSLIERGESFYQDR
MNDIVKEFEDRGFVQVDDGRKIVFVPGCSIPL
TIVKSDGGYTYDTSDLAAIKQRLFEEKADMII
YVVDNGQSVHFQTIFAAAQMIGWYDPKVTR
VFHAGFGVVLGEDKKKFKTRSGETVRLMDL
LGEGLKRSMDKLKEKERDKVLTAEELNAAQ
41
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table 5
AARS polypeptides and alternative transcripts identified by Deep Sequencing
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species / . NO.
Residues
TSVAYGCIKYADLSHNRLNDYIFSFDKMLDD
RGNTAAYLLYAFTRIRSIARLANIDEEMLQKA
ARETKILLDHEKEWKLGRCILRFPEILQKILDD
LFLHTLCDYIYELATAFTEFYDSCYCVEKDRQ
TGKILKVNMWRMLLCEAVAAVMAKGFDILG
IKPVQRM
ArgRS DNA/
ATGCTCATCGCTCACCTGCAAGACAAATTT SEQ.ID.
C4 Human
CCAGATTATCTAACAGTTTCACCTCCTATTG NO.134
GGGATCTTCAGGTCTTTTATAAGGAATCTA
AGAAGAGGTTTGATACTGAGGAGGAATTTA
AGAAGCGAGCATATCAGTGTGTAGTTCTGC
TCCAGGGTAAAAACCCAGATATTACAAAAG
CTTGGAAGCTTATCTGTGATGTCTCCCGCCA
AGAGTTAAATAAAATCTATGATGCATTGGA
CGTCTCTTTAATAGAGAGAGGGGAATCCTT
CTATCAAGATAGGATGAATGATATTGTAAA
GGAATTTGAAGATAGAGGATTTGTGCAGGT
GGATGATGGCAGAAAGATTGTATTTGTCCC
AGGGTGTTCCATACCATTAACCATAGTAAA
ATCAGATGGAGGTTATACCTATGATACATC
TGACCTGGCTGCTATTAAACAAAGACTATT
TGAGGAAAAAGCAGATATGATTATCTATGT
TGTGGACAATGGACAATCTGTGCACTTCCA
GACAATATTTGCTGCTGCTCAAATGATTGG
TTGGTATGACCCTAAAGTAACTCGAGTCTT
CCATGCTGGATTTGGTGTGGTGCTAGGGGA
AGACAAGAAAAAGTTTAAAACACGTTCGG
GTGAAACAGTGCGCCTCATGGATCTTCTGG
GAGAAGGACTAAAACGATCCATGGACAAG
TTGAAGGAAAAAGAAAGAGACAAGGTCTT
AACTGCAGAGGAATTGAATGCTGCTCAGAC
ATCCGTTGCGTATGGCTGCATCAAATATGC
TGACCTTTCCCATAACCGGTTGAATGACTA
CATCTTCTCCTTTGACAAAATGCTAGATGAC
AGAGGAAATACAGCTGCTTACTTGTTGTAT
GCCTTCACTAGAATCAGGTCTATTGCACGT
CTGGCCAATATTGATGAAGAAATGCTCCAA
AAAGCTGCTCGAGAAACCAAGATTCTTTTG
GATCATGAGAAGGAATGGAAACTAGGCCG
GTGCATTTTACGGTTCCCTGAGATTCTGCA A
AAGATTTTAGATGACTTATTTCTCCACACTC
TCTGTGATTATATATATGAGCTGGCAACTG
CTTTCACAGAGTTCTATGATAGCTGCTACTG
42
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table 5
AARS polypeptides and alternative transcripts identified by Deep Sequencing
Name Type! Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species / . NO.
Residues
TGTGGAGAAAGATAGACAGACTGGAAAAA
TATTGAAGGTGAACATGTGGCGTATGCTGC
TATGTGAAGCAGTAGCTGCTGTCATGGC CA
AGGGGTTTGATATCCTGGGAATAAAACCTG
TCCAAAGGATGTA A
Table 5B
AARS polypeptides unique splice junctions
Name Type! Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences in the SEQ.ID
species vicinity of the unique splice junction . NO.
R1- DNA! ATTGTAAAGGAATTTGAAGATAGAG I GAAAAAGTT SEQ.ID.
AS02 Human / TAAAACACGTTCGGGT NO.135
Protein! N/A
Human /
RI- DNA! GAAAAAGTTGAAATTGC:TGGTCCTG I GTTAAATCA SEQ.ID.
AS03 Human! TGTAGGAGACTGGGGG NO.136
Protein N/A
Human /
Table 6
AARS polype-Aides and nucleic acids identified by Bioinformatics
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species / . NO.
Residues
ArgRSC2 Protein / DEEMLQKAARETKILLDHEKEWKLGRCILR SEQ.ID.
Human / FPEILQKILDDLFLHTLCDYIYELATAFTEFY NO.137
551-660 DSCYCVEKDRQTGKILKVNMWRMLLCEAV
AAVMAKGFDILGIKPVQRM
ArgRS('2 DNA / GATGAAGAAATGCTCCAAAAAGCTGCTCG SEQ.ID.
Human / AGAAACCAAGATTCTTTTGGATCATGAGA NO.138
AGGAATGGAAACTAGGCCGGTGCATTTTA
CGGTTCCCTGAGATTCTGCAAAAGATTTT
AGATGACTTATTTCTCCACACTCTCTGTGA
TTATATATATGAGCTGGCAACTGCTTTCA
CAGAGTTCTATGATAGCTGCTACTGTGTG
GAGAAAGATAGACAGACTGGAAAAATAT
TGAAGGTGAACATGTGGCGTATGCTGCTA
TGTGAAGCAGTAGCTGCTGTCATGGCCA A
43
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table 6
AARS polype-Aides and nucleic acids identified by Bioinformatics
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species / . NO.
Residues
GGGGTTTGATATCCTGGGAATAAAACCTG
TCCAAAGGATGTAA
Internal AARS Polypeptides: (Tables 7, 8 & 9)
Table 7A
AARS polypeptides identified by MS
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species / . NO.
Residues
ArgRSI1 Protein / KDEVSEQLTSLLVNGVQLPALGENKKVIVD SEQ.ID.
Human / FS SPNIAKEMHVGHLRSTIIGESISRLFEFAG NO.151
168-530 YDVLRLNHVGDWGTQFGMLIAHLQDKFPD
YLTVSPPIGDLQVFYKESKKRFDTEEEFKKR
AYQCVVLLQGKNPDITKAWKLICDVSRQEL
NKIYDALDVSLIERGESFYQDRMNDIVKEFE
DRGEVQVDDGRKIVE VPGCSIPL l'IVKSDGG
YTYDTSDL A AIKQRLFEEKADMIIYVVDNG
QSVHFQTIFAAAQMIGWYDPKVTRVFHAGF
GVVLGEDKKKFKTRS GET VRLMDLLGEGL
KRSMDKLKEKERDKVLTAEELNAAQTSVA
YGCIKYADL SHNRLNDYIFSFDKMLDDRGN
ArgRSI1 DNA / AAGGATTTTGTATCAGAACAATTGACCAG SEQ.ID.
Human / TCTTCTAGTGAATGGAGTTCAACTACCTG NO.152
CTCTGGGAGAGAATAAAAAGGTTATAGTT
GACTTTTCCTCCCCTAATATAGCTAAAGA
GATGCATGTAGGCCACCTGAGGTCAACTA
TCATAGGAGAGAGTATAAGCCGCCTCTTT
GAATTTGCAGGGTATGACGTGCTCAGGTT
AAATCATGTAGGAGACTGGGGGACCCAG
TTTGGCATGCTCATCGCTCACCTGCAAGA
CAAATTTCCAGATTATCTAACAGTTTCAC
CTCCTATTGGGGATCTTCAGGTCTTTTATA
AGGAATCTAAGAAGAGGTTTGATACTGAG
GAGGAATTTAAGAAGCGAGCATATCAGT
GTGTAGTTCTGCTCCAGGGTAAAAACC CA
GATATTACAAAAGCTTGGAAGCTTATCTG
TGATGTCTCCCGCCAAGAGTTAAATAAAA
TCTATGATGCATTGGACGTCTCTTTAATAG
AGAGAGGGGAATCCTTCTATCAAGATAGG
ATGAATGATATTGTAAAGGAATTTGAAGA
44
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table 7A
AARS poly-peptides identified by MS
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID
species / . NO.
Residues
TAGAGGATTTGTGCAGGTGGATGATGGCA
GAAAGATTGTATTTGTCCCAGGGTGTTCC
ATACCATTAACCATAGTAAAATCAGATGG
AGGTTATACCTATGATACATCTGACCTGG
CTGCTATTAAACAAAGACTATTTGAGGAA
AAAGCAGATATGATTATCTATGTTGTGGA
CAATGGACAATCTGTGCACTTCCAGACAA
TATTTGCTGCTGCTCAAATGATTGGTTGGT
ATGACCCTAAAGTAACTCGAGTCTTCCAT
GCTGGATTTGGTGTGGTGCTAGGGGAAGA
CAAGAAAAAGTTTAAAACACGTTCGGGTG
AAACAGTGCGCCTCATGGATCTTCTGGGA
GAAGGACTAAAACGATCCATGGACAAGT
TGAAGGAAAAAGAAAGAGACAAGGTCTT
AACTGCAGAGGAATTGAATGCTGCTCAGA
CATCCGTTGCGTATGGCTGCATCAAATAT
GCTGACCTTTCCCATAACCGGTTGAATGA
CTACATCTTCTCCTTTGACAAAATGCTAG
ATGACAGAGGAAATACA
Table 7B
ArgRSI1
Mass spec peptides detected and inferred linking peptides
Type / Sequence SEQ.ID
species . NO.
Protein / VIVDFSSPNIAK SEQ.ID.
mouse NO.153
Protein! EMHVGHLRSTIIGESMSRLFEFAGYDVLRLNHVGDWG SEQ.ID.
mouse TQFGMLIAHLQDKFTDYLTYSPPIGDLQAFYKESKKRF NO.154
DADEEFKKRAYQCVVLLQSKNPDIMKAWNLICDVSRE
EFKKIYDALDITLIERGESFYQDRMKDIVKEFEDKGFVQ
VDDGRKIVFVPGCSVPLTIVK
Protein SEQ.ID.
mouse SDGGYTYDTSDLAA1K NO.155
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table 7C
ArgRSI1
Concatenated sequences based on mass spec peptides detected
Type / Sequence SEQ.ID
species . NO.
Protein / VIVDFSSPNIAKEMHVGHLRSTIIGESMSRLFEFAGYDV SEQ.ID.
mouse LRLNHVGDWGTQFGMLIAHLQDKFPDYLTVSPPIGDL NO.156
QAFYKESKKRFDADEEFKKRAYQCVVLLQSKNPDIMK
AWNLICDVSREEFKKIYDALDITLIERGESFYQDRMKDI
VKEFEDKGFVQVDDGRKIVFVPGCSVPLTIVKSDGGYT
YDTSDLAAIK
Table 8
AARS poly-peptides and alternative transcripts identified by Deep Sequencing
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID.
species / NO.
Residues
Table 8B
AARS polypeptides unique splice junctions
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences in the vicinity SEQ.ID.
species of the unique splice junction NO.
Table 9
AARS polypeptides and nucleic acids identified by Bioinformatics
Name Type / Amino acid and Nucleic Acid Sequences SEQ.ID.
species NO.
/Residue
[00120] "Protein fragments," or the amino acid sequence of protein fragments,
such
as proteolytic fragments or splice variant fragments, can be characterized,
identified, or
derived according to a variety of techniques. For instance, splice variants
can be
identified by techniques such as deep sequencing (see, e.g., Xing et al., RNA.
14:1470-
1479, 2008; and Zhang et at., Genonte Research. 17:503-509, 2007). As a
further
example, protein fragments such as proteolytic fragments can be identified in
vitro,
such as by incubating full-length or other AARS polypeptides with selected
proteases,
or they can be identified endogenously (e.g., in vivo). In certain
embodiments, protein
fragments such as endogenous proteolytic fragments can be generated or
identified, for
instance, by recombinantly expressing full-length or other AARS polypeptides
in a
selected microorganism or eukaryotic cell that has been either modified to
contain one
46
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
or more selected proteases, or that naturally contains one or more proteases
that are
capable of acting on a selected AARS polypeptide, and isolating and
characterizing the
endogenously produced protein fragments therefrom.
[00121] In certain embodiments, protein fragments such as endogenous (e.g.,
naturally-occurring) proteolytic fragments can be generated or identified, for
instance,
from various cellular fractions (e.g., cytosolic, membrane, nuclear) and/or
growth
medium of various cell-types, including, for example, immune cells such as
monocytes,
dendritic cells, macrophages (e.g., RAW 264.7 macrophages), neutrophils,
eosinophils,
basophils, and lymphocytes, such as B-cells and T-cells (e.g., CD4+ helper and
CD8+
killer cells), including primary T-cells and T-cell lines such as Jurkat T-
cells, as well as
natural killer (NK) cells.
[00122] In certain embodiments, protein fragments such as endogenous
proteolytic
fragments, however generated, can be identified by techniques such as mass-
spectrometry, or equivalent techniques. Once an in vitro or endogenously
identified
protein fragment has been generated or identified, it can be mapped or
sequenced, and,
for example, cloned into an expression vector for recombinant production, or
produced
synthetically.
[00123] A wide variety of proteases can be used to produce, identify, derive,
or
characterize the sequence of AARS protein fragments such as proteolytic
fragments.
Generally, proteases are usually classified according to three major criteria:
(i) the
reaction catalyzed, (ii) the chemical nature of the catalytic site, and (iii)
the
evolutionary relationship, as revealed by the structure. General examples of
proteases
or protainases, as classified by mechanism of catalysis, include aspartic
proteases,
serine proteases, cysteine proteases, and metalloproteases
[00124] Most aspartic proteases belong to the pepsin family. This family
includes
digestive enzymes, such as pepsin and chymosin, as well as lysosomal
cathepsins D and
processing enzymes such as renin, and certain fungal proteases (e.g.,
penicillopepsin,
rhizopuspepsin, endothiapepsin). A second family of aspartic proteases
includes viral
proteinases such as the protease from the AIDS virus (HIV), also called
retropepsin.
[00125] Serine proteases include two distinct families. First, the
chymotrypsin
family, which includes the mammalian enzymes such as chymotrypsin, trypsin,
elastase, and kallikrein, and second, the substilisin family, which includes
the bacterial
enzymes such as subtilisin. The general 3D structure between these two
families is
different, but they have the same active site geometry, and catalysis proceeds
via the
same mechanism. The serine proteases exhibit different substrate
specificities,
differences which relate mainly to amino acid substitutions in the various
enzyme
subsites (substrate residue interacting sites). Some serine proteases have an
extended
47
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
interaction site with the substrate whereas others have a specificity that is
restricted to
the P1 substrate residue.
[00126] The cysteine protease family includes the plant proteases such as
papain,
actinidin, and bromelain, several mammalian lysosomal cathepsins, the
cytosolic
calpains (calcium-activated), as well as several parasitic proteases (e.g.,
Trypanosoma,
Schistosoma). Papain is the archetype and the best studied member of the
family.
Recent elucidation of the X-ray structure of the Interleukin- 1-beta
Converting Enzyme
has revealed a novel type of fold for cysteine proteinases.
[00127] The metalloproteases are one of the older classes of proteases, found
in
bacteria, fungi, and higher organisms. They differ widely in their sequences
and their
3D structures, but the great majority of enzymes contain a zinc atom that is
catalytically
active. In some cases, zinc may be replaced by another metal such as cobalt or
nickel
without loss of proteolytic activity. Bacterial thermolysin has been well
characterized
and its crystallographic structure indicates that zinc is bound by two
histidines and one
glutamic acid. Many metalloproteases contain the sequence motif HEXXH, which
provides two histidine ligands for the zinc. The third ligand is either a
glutamic acid
(thermulysin, neprilysin, alanyl aminopeptidase) or a histidine (astaein,
serralysin).
[00128] Illustrative proteases include, for example,
achromopeptidase,
aminopeptidase, ancrod, angiotensin converting enzyme, bromelain, calpain,
calpain I,
calpain II, carboxypeptidase A, carboxypeptidase B, carboxypeptidase G,
carboxypeptidase P, carboxypeptidase W, carboxypeptidase Y, caspase 1, caspase
2,
caspase 3, caspase 4, caspase 5, caspase 6, caspase 7, caspase 8, caspase 9,
caspase 10,
caspase 11, caspase 12, caspase 13, cathepsin B, cathepsin C, cathepsin D,
cathepsin E,
cathepsin G, cathepsin H, cathepsin L, chymopapain , chymase, chymotrypsin,
clostripain, collagenase, complement Clr, complement Cl s, complement Factor
D,
complement factor I, cucumisin, dipeptidyl peptidase IV, elastase (leukocyte),
elastase
(pancreatic), endoproteinase Arg-C, endoproteinase Asp-N, endoproteinase Glu-
C,
endoproteinase Lys-C, enterokinase, factor Xa, ficin, furin, granzyme A,
granzyme B,
HIV Protease, IGase, kallikrein tissue, leucine aminopeptidase (general),
leucine
aminopeptidase (cytosol), leucine aminopeptidase (microsomal), matrix
metalloprotease, methionine aminopeptidase, neutrase, papain, pepsin, plasmin,
prolidase, pronase E, prostate specific antigen, protease alkalophilic from
Streptomyces
griseus, protease from Aspergillus, protease from Aspergillus saitoi, protease
from
Aspergillus sojae, protease (B. licheniformis) (alkaline or alcalase),
protease from
Bacillus polymyxa, protease from Bacillus sp, protease from Rhizopus sp.,
protease S,
proteasomes, proteinase from Aspergillus oryzae, proteinase 3, proteinase A,
proteinase
48
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
K, protein C, pyroglutamate aminopeptidase, rennin, rennin, streptokinase,
subtilisin,
thermolysin, thrombin, tissue plasminogen activator, trypsin, tryptase and
urokinase.
[00129] Certain embodiments relate to isolated AARS polypeptides, comprising,
consisting essentially of, or consisting of amino acid sequences that have
been derived
from endogenous, naturally-occurring AARS polypeptide fragments, and
pharmaceutical compositions comprising said fragments, and methods of use
thereof.
These and related embodiments can be generated or identified in vivo, ex vivo,
and/or in
vitro. In certain preferred in vitro embodiments, AARS proteolytic fragments
are
generated or identified by incubating an AARS polypeptide, such as a full-
length
AARS polypeptide, with one or more isolated human proteases, mainly those
proteases
that are endogenous or natural to humans, such as elastase and others
described herein
and known in the art. Other embodiments relate to isolated AARS polypeptides,
comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of amino acid sequences
that have
been derived from endogenous, naturally-occurring AARS splice variants, and
pharmaceutical compositions comprising said fragments, and methods of use
thereof.
Essentially, AARS protein fragment can be isolated from samples that have been
exposed to proteases, whether in vivo or in vitro.
[00130] In certain embodiments, AARS protein fragments can be identified by
techniques such as mass-spectrometry, or equivalent techniques. Merely by way
of
illustration and not limitation, in certain embodiments the proteomes from
various cell
types, tissues, or body fluids from a variety of physiological states (e.g.,
hypoxia, diet,
age, disease) or fractions thereof may be separated by 1D SDS-PAGE and the gel
lanes
cut into bands at fixed intervals; after which the bands may be optionally
digested with
an appropriate protease, such as trypsin, to release the peptides, which may
then be
analyzed by 1D reverse phase LC-MS/MS. The resulting proteomic data may be
integrated into so-called peptographs, which plot, in the left panel, sequence
coverage
for a given protein in the horizontal dimension (N to C terminus, left to
right) versus
SDS-PAGE migration in the vertical dimension (high to low molecular weight,
top to
bottom). The specific peptide fragments can then be sequenced or mapped. In
certain
embodiments, the AARS reference fragment may be characterized by its unique
molecular weight, as compared, for example, to the molecular weight of the
corresponding full-length AARS.
[00131] As noted above, embodiments of the present invention include the AARS
polypeptides set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9. Also
included
are "variants" of the AARS reference polypeptides. The recitation polypeptide
"variant" refers to polypeptides that are distinguished from a reference AARS
polypeptide by the addition, deletion, and/or substitution of at least one
amino acid
49
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
residue, and which typically retain (e.g., mimic) or modulate (e.g.,
antagonize) one or
more non-canonical activities of a reference AARS polypeptide.
[00132] Moreover human Arginyl tRNA synthetases include several hundred highly
related polymorphic forms, and these are known in the art to be at least
partially
functionally interchangeable. It would thus be a routine matter to select a
naturally
occurring variant of Arginyl tRNA synthetase, including, for example the
single
nucleotide polymorphic forms listed in Table A to create an AARS polypeptide
containing one or more amino acid changes based on the sequence of any of the
homologues, orthologs, and naturally-occurring isoforms of human as well as
other
species of Arginyl tRNA synthetase.
Table A
Human Arginyl tRNA synthetase SNPs
Gene Bank Nucleotide Gene Bank Nucleotide Change
Accession Change Accession
Number Number
rs118184696 A/T rs2290632 A/T
rs118180032 A/C rs2290631 A/G
rs117979436 C/T rs2290630 A/C
rs117938085 C/T rs2290629 A/G
rs117910938 A/G rs2290628 A/G
rs117904947 C/T rs2290627 A/G
rs117805893 C/T rs2290626 C/T
rs117586708 G/T rs22 90 625 A/G
rs116881881 A/G rs2161173 C/G
rs116754739 A/G rs2112326 A/G
rs116692940 G/T rs1870052 G/T
rs116690232 C/T rs1136673 G/T
rs116688540 C/T rs1136 672 G/T
rs116664558 A/G rs1136 671 C/T
rs116606943 C/T rs1136669 C/T
rs116604336 A/G rs1136668 A/C
rs116570152 G/T rs1136667 C/T
rs116531890 A/G rs1059443 A/G
rs116464791 A/T rs918406 C/T
rs116380137 A/C rs680677 C/G
r8116361226 C/T rs653568 A/G
rs116257593 A/G rs6320 97 A/G
r8116183920 A/G rs590784 A/C
rs116371286 A/C rs582906 G/T
rs115948568 A/G rs244903 A/G
rs115905321 A/G rs244 9 02 C/T
rs115901063 A/G rs244901 C/G
rs115887332 A/T rs244900 A/G
rs115864473 C/T rs244898 C/T
rs115825016 A/C rs2448 97 C/T
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table A
Human Arginyl tRNA synthetase SNPs
Gene Bank Nucleotide Gene Bank Nucleotide Change
Accession Change Accession
Number Number
rs115760164 A/T rs244896 G/T
rs115683699 C/T rs244889 A/C
rs115667735 A/G rs244888 A/T
rs115473823 A/G rs193466 C/T
rs115461823 G/T rs184957 A/T
rs115365149 C/G rs168647 A/G
rs115263344 C/T rs165948 CPT
rs115238954 C/T rs11269831 -
/TTTCTGATTTACGTGAATCACT
TAGTACATAT
r8115197001 A/G rs35585158 -
/TTTCTGATTTACGTGAATCACT
TAGTACATAT
rs115167734 C/T rs6863186 G/T
rs114935064 A/G rs6555816 C/T
rs114905260 C/G rs5873114 -/GTTA
rs114795201 C/T rs4976620 A/G
rs114671846 A/G rs4976619 A/C
rs114625871 C/T rs4976618 -/A/T
rs114619091 C/T rs4976617 C/T
rs114504027 A/G rs4976616 A/T
rs114270274 A/C rs4976615 A/T
rs114038151 A/G rs4976614 C/G
r8114037780 A/G rs4976560 A/G
rs114006453 C/G rs4976559 CPT
rs113962186 A/G rs3797711 A/C
rs113782038 A/G rs3756602 C/T
rs113720769 A/G rs3756601 C/T
rs113717899 -/CA rs3084550 -/ACTA
r8113695809 A/G rs2445786 A/G
rs113646872 A/G rs2445785 C/T
rs113605026 C/T rs2432645 A/G
rs113580372 C/G rs2432644 A/G
rs113554809 A/G rs2432643 G/T
rs113486302 C/G rs2432642 C/G
rs113470525 A/G rs2307771 -/C
rs113440432 C/T rs2305737 A/C
rs113378496 A/G rs2305736 A/G
rs113362439 A/G rs2305735 A/G
rs113304455 A/T rs2305734 A/T
rs113175122 A/G rs2305733 A/G
rs113173551 -/G rs2305732 C/T
rs113076954 A/G rs2305731 CPT
51
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table A
Human Arginyl tRNA synthetase SNPs
Gene Bank Nucleotide Gene Bank Nucleotide change
Accession Change Accession
Number Number
rs113072198 A/C rs2305730 A/G
rs112942704 C/T rs2305729 C/T
rs112929633 C/G rs2305728 A/G
rs112915607 A/C rs2305727 A/G
rs112866258 A/G rs2305726 A/G
rs112853562 -/TT rs2305725 A/C
rs112609654 C/T rs2290633 A/G
rs112554320 A/G rs11287832 -/T
rs112467769 A/G , rs11134516 A/G .
rs112386681 A/G rs11134515 C/T
rs112374318 C/T rs10675915 , -/TAT
rs112316281 A/C rs10557485 -/TTT
rs112301722 -/TT rs10533468 -/CCCC
rs112297730 A/C rs10516047 A/G
rs112290637 A/G rs10223174 C/T
rs112132879 C/T rs10075737 C/T
rs112031498 C/G rs10075191 A/C
rs112030251 C/T rs10069598 A/G
rs112026739 C/T rs10063775 A/G
rs111802241 C/T rs10042894 A/G
r8111744682 API' rs10042188 A/T
rs111718700 C/T rs9764041 A/T
rs111573970 C/T rs9717186 A/C
rs111545111 A/G rs9647575 A/G
rs111462618 C/G rs9647574 A/G
rs111413807 -/T rs9647573 G/T
r8111400978 G/T rs9647572 A/G
rs111236454 A/G rs9647571 C/G
rs80346848 C/T rs9331569 -/TTT
rs80313082 G/T rs7737859 A/G
re80241471 A/G rs7729863 A/T
rs80206048 C/T rs7721460 A/G
rs80066923 C/T rs7720641 C/T
rs80054466 A/C rs7714332 A/C
rs79948711 C/T rs7709842 C/T
rs79719603 A/G rs7704557 A/G
rs79557735 G/T rs7704206 G/T
rs79523408 A/G rs7700690 CPT
rs79321362 C/T rs6898877 C/G
rs79283789 A/C rs6898527 A/G
rs79201400 C/T rs6890233 C/T
rs79154165 -/G rs6887036 A/G
rs79116025 C/T rs6882371 A/G
52
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table A
Human Arginyl tRNA synthetase SNPs
Gene Bank Nucleotide Gene Bank Nucleotide Change
Accession Change Accession
Number Number
rs79113634 G/T rs6874879 A/G
rs79103980 C/T rs6873664 A/C
rs79062764 A/C re6868421 A/C
rs78985547 A/G rs12521951 C/T
rs78849762 G/T rs12521858 G/T
rs78636307 A/G rs12521577 C/T
rs78655764 C/T rs12520913 A/T
rs78634201 A/C rs1252 0653 G/T
rs78602242 A/G , rs1252 0552 A/G . rs78511125 A/T rs12519228
C/T
rs78390101 -/TTTT rs12519090 , A/C
rs78363759 A/G rs12516801 A/C
rs78325695 A/C rs12516460 A/G
rs78274997 G/T rs12516424 C/T
rs78268250 -/T rs12515318 A/G
rs78238764 A/G rs12514748 A/G
rs7R217RRO A/T rs1218 9091 A/T
rs78203348 G/T rs12188304 C/T
rs78069156 C/T rs12187995 A/C
rs78039114 C/T rs12153772 C/G
r877959391 A/G rs12153564 A/G
rs77936688 A/C rs12153563 C/T
rs77827529 A/C rs11958698 C/T
rs77824483 A/G rs11958018 C/T
rs77804607 C/T rs11749654 A/C
rs77771045 A/G rs11748918 G/T
rs77661711 A/C rs11746080 A/G
rs77628308 G/T rs11746078 A/G
rs77607421 G/T rs11743840 A/G
rs77576032 A/C rs11743757 C/G
re77570331 C/T rs11738672 C/G
rs77483531 -/cc rs11738671 C/T
rs77319475 C/T rs11557637 A/C
rs77292057 C/G rs11557636 A/G
rs77204454 A/C rs11557634 C/T
rs77178198 C/T rs11557633 C/T
rs77101561 C/T rs11453962 -/T
rs77020089 -/T rs11430234 -/T
rs77005211 G/T rs11423188 -/T
rs76943812 A/T rs11345301 -/A
rs76848592 C/T rs11311315 -/T
rs76727748 A/G rs11291393 -/A
rs76700391 A/T rs34446466 A/G
53
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
W02011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table A
Human Arginyl tRNA synthetase SNPs
Gene Bank Nucleotide Gene Bank Nucleotide Change
Accession Change Accession
Number Number
rs76691939 G/T rs34442207 -/T
rs76685579 C/T rs34318878 -/T
rs76633933 A/C re34274489 -/T
rs76584439 A/C rs34271397 -/T
rs76532941 C/T rs34225874 -/T
rs76530903 C/T rs34121907 -/TAT
rs76484666 G/T rs34104604 -/G
rs76424455 G/T rs33990018 -/A
rs76401404 A/T , rs33980252 -/T . rs76376959 A/C rs33920269 -
/TTT
rs76217402 C/G rs28688070 , A/G
rs76174192 A/C rs28571618 C/T
rs76163401 C/T rs28537325 A/T
rs76121814 C/T rs28483077 A/G
rs76112678 A/G rs17732105 A/G
rs76011402 A/T rs17732057 C/T
rs75972441 A/G rs17732045 A/G
rs75643003 A/T rs17732015 A/G
rs75441465 C/T rs17731981 A/G
rs75409719 C/T rs17664614 A/G
r875399022 A/C rs17664559 A/G
rs75384112 G/T rs17664493 CPT
rs75307167 G/T rs17633878 C/T
rs75249584 G/T rs17633806 A/G
rs75218784 C/T rs17633733 A/T
rs75168852 A/C rs17552440 C/T
r875140107 G/T rs17552419 C/T
rs75106564 C/T rs17552018 C/T
rs75095020 A/T rs13182927 A/G
rs75031790 C/G rs13172925 A/G
re74936396 A/G rs13172906 C/G
rs74936344 A/T rs13172658 C/G
rs74897611 C/T rs13172502 A/C
rs74885621 A/G rs13158178 A/G
rs74765456 A/G rs13155873 C/T
rs74744069 C/T rs13154956 A/T
rs74660183 A/C rs12654784 A/C
rs74537477 A/G rs12522512 A/G
rs74487766 A/G rs57791972 -/CC
rs74468174 A/G rs57477209 C/T
rs74406691 A/C rs56891451 -/A
rs74389345 A/T rs56654743 -/T
rs73802341 C/T rs56361177 G/T
54
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table A
Human Arginyl tRNA synthetase SNPs
Gene Bank Nucleotide Gene Bank Nucleotide change
Accession Change Accession
Number Number
rs73802340 C/T rs56341346 A/G
rs73326643 A/G rs56309278 C/T
re73316547 A/C rs56064173 A/C
rs73316530 A/G rs55966278 G/T
rs73316525 A/G rs55694682 A/T
rs73316519 C/T rs55645650 G/T
rs73316518 C/T rs41283169 C/T
rs73314851 C/G rs41283167 A/C
rs73314846 A/G rs36049925 -/AG
rs73314836 A/G rs36015007 -/A
rs73314833 C/G rs35898318 -/TTT
rs73314824 A/T rs35886946 -/T
rs72836363 C/T rs35738082 -/C
rs72836362 C/T rs35722978 -/T
rs72836358 C/T rs35717210 -/T
rs72830975 C/T rs35643354 -/A
rs72830973 C/G re35641348 -/G
rs72830969 C/G rs35560247 -/T
rs72830965 G/T rs35468758 -/T
rs72830962 A/G rs35466646 -/CCCC
rs72830959 C/G rs35439881 -/AG
rs72532703 -/T rs35365870 -/A
rs72496362 -/T rs35319547 -/A
rs72431656 -/A rs35254979 -/T
rs72411315 -/CC rs35237798 -/T
rs72334054 -/TAT rs35170210 -/T
rs72276928 -/T rs35093178 -/T
rs72227613 -/CA rs35001933 -/AA
rs72153989 -/T rs34864760 -/AA
rs72104437 -/AA rs34791845 -/T
rrs7199213 -/A rs34723836 A/T
6
rs71990776 -/ATT rs34579916 -/A
rs71977003 -/TAGT rs34501328 -/T
rs71972722 -/T rs34484619 -/T
rs71905728 -/T rs34578180 -/A/CA/G
rs71896554 -/AC rs34669829 -/G/GTTA
rs71796598 -/AAAAA rs67225121 -/CACA/CACACA
rs71779923 -/A rs61156257 -/CACACA
rs71738365 -/T rs72412281 -/CACACA
rs71603865 A/T s72083953 -/ACACAC
rs71603864 A/G rs70976491 -
/-
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
W02011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table A
Human Arginyl tRNA synthetase SNPs
Gene Bank Nucleotide Gene Bank Nucleotide change
Accession Change Accession
Number Number
AAAAAAAAAA
rs71589837 A/G rs61532333 -/TTTT
re71588659 AAA/TAT re61525394 -/TAT
rs71303324 -/AAT rs61456455 A/G
rs70976490 -/A rs60743864 -/AA
rs70976489 -/AAA rs60614962 -/T
rs67907149 -/T rs60594519 A/G
rs67885474 -/C rs60514038 C/T
rs67562347 -/T rs60492623 C/T
rs67012869 C/T rs60401511 -/AA
rs66757470 -/T rs60295313 A/C
rs66745652 -/T rs59359069 A/G
rs62385664 A/G rs58186106 -/A
rs62385663 G/T rs58133689 -/C
rs62385662 A/G rs57885645 -/G
rs62385661 A/C rs57821179 -/T
rs62385660 C/T re61532333 -/TTTT
rs61744940 A/G rs61525394 -/TAT
rs61456455 A/G
rs60743864 -/AA
[00133] In certain embodiments, a polypeptide variant is distinguished from a
reference polypeptide by one or more substitutions, which may be conservative
or non-
conservative, as described herein and known in the art. In certain
embodiments, the
polypeptide variant comprises conservative substitutions and, in this regard,
it is well
understood in the art that some amino acids may be changed to others with
broadly
similar properties without changing the nature of the activity of the
polypeptide.
[00134] In certain embodiments, a variant polypeptide includes an amino acid
sequence having at least about 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%,
91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or more sequence identity or similarity
to
a corresponding sequence of an AARS reference polypeptide, as described
herein, and
substantially retains the non-canonical activity of that reference
polypeptide. Also
included are sequences differing from the reference AARS sequences by the
addition,
deletion, or substitution of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19,
20, 30, 40, 50, 60 ,70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 or more amino
acids but
which retain the properties of the reference AARS polypeptide. In certain
embodiments, the amino acid additions or deletions occur at the C-terminal end
and/or
the N-terminal end of the AARS reference polypeptide. In certain embodiments,
the
56
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
amino acid additions include 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18,
19, 20, 30, 40, 50 or more wild-type residues (i.e., from the corresponding
full-length
AARS polypeptide) that are proximal to the C-terminal end and/or the N-
terminal end
of the AARS reference polypeptide.
[00135] In certain embodiments, variant polypeptides differ from the
corresponding
AARS reference sequences by at least 1% but less than 20%, 15%, 10% or 5% of
the
residues. (If this comparison requires alignment, the sequences should be
aligned for
maximum similarity. "Looped" out sequences from deletions or insertions, or
mismatches, are considered differences.) The differences are, suitably,
differences or
changes at a non-essential residue or a conservative substitution. In
certain
embodiments, the molecular weight of a variant AARS polypeptide differs from
that of
the AARS reference polypeptide by about 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%,
10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, or more.
[00136] Also included are biologically active "fragments" of the AARS
reference
polypeptides, i.e., biologically active fragments of the AARS protein
fragments.
Representative biologically active fragments generally participate in an
interaction, e.g.,
an intramolecular or an inter-molecular interaction. An inter-molecular
interaction can
be a specific binding interaction or an enzymatic interaction. An inter-
molecular
interaction can be between an AARS polypeptide and a cellular binding partner,
such as
a cellular receptor or other host molecule that participates in the non-
canonical activity
of the AARS polypeptide. In some embodiments, AARS proteins, variants, and
biologically active fragments thereof, bind to one or more cellular binding
partners with
an affinity of at least about 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7,
0.8, 0.9, I, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25,
26, 27, 28, 29,
30, 40, or 50 nM. The binding affinity of an AARS protein fragment for a
selected
cellular binding partner, particularly a binding partner that participates in
a non-
canonical activity, is typically stronger than that of the AARS protein
fragment's
corresponding full-length AARS polypeptide, by at least about 1.5x, 2x, 2.5x,
3x, 3.5x,
4x, 4.5x, 5x, 6x, 7x. 8x, 9x, 10x, 15x, 20x, 25x, 30x, 40x, 50x, 60x, 70x,
80x, 90x,
100x, 200x, 300x, 400x, 500x, 600x, 700x, 800x, 900x, 1000x or more (including
all
integers in between). The binding affinity of an AARS protein fragment for a
binding
partner that participates in at least one canonical activity of an AARS is
typically
weaker than that of the AARS protein fragment's corresponding full-length AARS
polypeptide, by at least about 1.5x, 2x, 2.5x, 3x, 3.5x, 4x, 4.5x, 5x, 6x, 7x,
8x, 9x, 10x,
15x, 20x, 25x, 30x, 40x, 50x, 60x, 70x, 80x, 90x, 100x, 200x, 300x, 400x,
500x, 600x,
700x, 800x, 900x, 1000x or more.
57
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00137] Typically, biologically active fragments comprise a domain or motif
with at
least one activity of an AARS reference polypeptide and may include one or
more (and
in some cases all) of the various active domains, and include fragments having
a non-
canonical activity. In some cases, biologically active fragments of an AARS
polypeptide have a biological activity that is unique to the particular,
truncated
fragment, such that the full-length AARS polypeptide may not have that
activity. In
certain cases, the biological activity may be revealed by separating the
biologically
active AARS polypeptide fragment from the other full-length AARS polypeptide
sequences, or by altering certain residues of the full-length AARS wild-type
polypeptide sequence to unmask the biologically active domains.
[00138] A biologically active fragment of an AARS reference polypeptide can be
a
polypeptide fragment which is, for example, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17,
18, 19, 20,
21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75,
80, 85, 90, 95,
100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280,
300, 320,
340, 360, 380, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750 or more contiguous or
non-
contiguous amino acids, including all integers (e.g., 101, 102, 103) and
ranges (e.g., 50-
100, 50-150, 50-200) in between, of the amino acid sequences set forth in any
one of
the AARS reference polypeptides described herein, but typically exclude the
full-length
AARS. In certain embodiments, a biologically active fragment comprises a non-
canonical activity-related sequence, domain, or motif. In certain embodiments,
the C-
terminal or N-terminal region of any AARS reference polypeptide may be
truncated by
about 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6,7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80,
90, 100, 110,
120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500,
550, 600,
650, or 700 or more amino acids, or by about 10-50, 20-50, 50-100, 100-150,
150-200,
200-250, 250-300, 300-350, 350-400, 400-450, 450-500, 500-550, 550-600, 600-
650,
650-700 or more amino acids, including all integers and ranges in between
(e.g., 101,
102, 103, 104, 105), so long as the truncated AARS polypeptide retains the non-
canonical activity of the reference polypeptide. Typically, the biologically-
active
fragment has no less than about 1%, about 5 %, about 10%, about 25%, or about
50%
of an activity of the biologically-active (i.e., non-canonical activity) AARS
reference
polypeptide from which it is derived. Exemplary methods for measuring such non-
canonical activities are described in the Examples.
[00139] As noted above, an AARS polypeptide may be altered in various ways
including amino acid substitutions, deletions, truncations, and insertions.
Methods for
such manipulations are generally known in the art. For example, amino acid
sequence
variants of an AARS reference polypeptide can be prepared by mutations in the
DNA.
Methods for mutagenesis and nucleotide sequence alterations are well known in
the art.
58
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
See, for example, Kunkel (1985, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 82: 488-492),
Kunkel et
al., (1987, Methods in Enzymol, 154: 367-382), U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,192,
Watson, J. D.
et al., ("Molecular Biology of the Gene", Fourth Edition, Benjamin/Cummings,
Menlo
Park, Calif., 1987) and the references cited therein. Guidance as to
appropriate amino
acid substitutions that do not affect biological activity of the protein of
interest may be
found in the model of Dayhoff et al., (1978) Atlas of Protein Sequence and
Structure
(Natl. Biomed. Res. Found., Washington, D.C.).
[00140] Similarly it is within the skill in the art to address and / or
mitigate
immunogenicity concerns if they arise using an AARS polypeptide, e.g., by the
use of
automated computer recognition programs to identify potential T cell epitopes,
and
directed evolution approaches to identify less immunogenic forms.
[00141] Methods for screening gene products of combinatorial libraries made by
point mutations or truncation, and for screening cDNA libraries for gene
products
having a selected property are known in the art. Such methods are adaptable
for rapid
screening of the gene libraries generated by combinatorial mutagenesis of AARS
polypeptides. Recursive ensemble mutagenesis (REM), a technique which enhances
the
frequency of functional mutants in the libraries, can be used in combination
with the
screening assays to identify AARS polypeptide variants (Arkin and Yourvan
(1992)
Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89: 7811-7815; Delgrave et al., (1993) Protein
Engineering,
6: 327-331). Conservative substitutions, such as exchanging one amino acid
with
another having similar properties, may be desirable as discussed in more
detail below.
[00142] Biologically active truncated and/or variant AARS polypeptides may
contain
conservative amino acid substitutions at various locations along their
sequence, as
compared to a reference AARS amino acid residue Additionally, naturally
occurring
variants of AARS proteins have been sequenced, and are known in the art to be
at least
partially functionally interchangeable. It would thus be a routine matter to
select an
amino acid position to introduce a conservative, or non-conservative mutation
into an
AARS polypeptide based on naturally occurring sequence variation among the
known
AARS protein homologues, orthologs, and naturally-occurring isoforms of human
as
well as other species of an AARS protein.
[00143] A "conservative amino acid substitution" is one in which the amino
acid
residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain.
Families of
amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art,
which can
be generally sub-classified as follows:
[00144] Acidic: The residue has a negative charge due to loss of H ion at
physiological pH and the residue is attracted by aqueous solution so as to
seek the
surface positions in the conformation of a peptide in which it is contained
when the
59
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
peptide is in aqueous medium at physiological pH. Amino acids having an acidic
side
chain include glutamic acid and aspartic acid.
[00145] Basic: The residue has a positive charge due to association with H ion
at
physiological pH or within one or two pH units thereof (e.g., histidine) and
the residue
is attracted by aqueous solution so as to seek the surface positions in the
conformation
of a peptide in which it is contained when the peptide is in aqueous medium at
physiological pH. Amino acids having a basic side chain include arginine,
lysine and
histidine.
[00146] Charged: The residues are charged at physiological pH and, therefore,
include amino acids having acidic or basic side chains (i.e., glutamic acid,
aspartic acid,
arginine, lysine and histidine).
[00147] Hydrophobic: The residues are not charged at physiological pH and the
residue is repelled by aqueous solution so as to seek the inner positions in
the
conformation of a peptide in which it is contained when the peptide is in
aqueous
medium. Amino acids having a hydrophobic side chain include tyrosine, valine,
isoleucine, leucine, methionine, phenylalanine and tryptophan.
[00148] Neutral/polar: The residues are not charged at physiological pH, but
the
residue is not sufficiently repelled by aqueous solutions so that it would
seek inner
positions in the conformation of a peptide in which it is contained when the
peptide is in
aqueous medium. Amino acids having a neutral/polar side chain include
asparagine,
glutamine, cystcine, histidine, serine and threonine.
[00149] This description also characterizes certain amino acids as "small"
since their
side chains are not sufficiently large, even if polar groups are lacking, to
confer
hydrophobicity With the exception of proline, "small" amino acids are those
with four
carbons or less when at least one polar group is on the side chain and three
carbons or
less when not. Amino acids having a small side chain include glycine, serine,
alanine
and threonine. The gene-encoded secondary amino acid proline is a special case
due to
its known effects on the secondary conformation of peptide chains. The
structure of
proline differs from all the other naturally-occurring amino acids in that its
side chain is
bonded to the nitrogen of the a-amino group, as well as the a-carbon. Several
amino
acid similarity matrices are known in the art (see e.g., PAM120 matrix and
PAM250
matrix as disclosed for example by Dayhoff et al., 1978, A model of
evolutionary
change in proteins). Matrices for determining distance relationships In M. 0.
Dayhoff,
(ed.), Atlas of protein sequence and structure, Vol. 5, pp. 345-358, National
Biomedical
Research Foundation, Washington DC; and by Gonnet et al., (Science, 256: 14430-
1445, 1992), however, include proline in the same group as glycine, serine,
alanine and
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
threonine. Accordingly, for the purposes of the present invention, praline is
classified
as a "small" amino acid.
[00150] The degree of attraction or repulsion required for classification as
polar or
nonpolar is arbitrary and, therefore, amino acids specifically contemplated by
the
invention have been classified as one or the other. Most amino acids not
specifically
named can be classified on the basis of known behavior.
[00151] Amino acid residues can be further sub-classified as cyclic or non-
cyclic,
and aromatic or non-aromatic, self-explanatory classifications with respect to
the side-
chain substituent groups of the residues, and as small or large. The residue
is
considered small if it contains a total of four carbon atoms or less,
inclusive of the
carboxyl carbon, provided an additional polar substituent is present; three or
less if not.
Small residues are, of course, always non-aromatic. Dependent on their
structural
properties, amino acid residues may fall in two or more classes. For the
naturally-
occurring protein amino acids, sub-classification according to this scheme is
presented
in Table B.
Table B: Amino acid sub-classification
Sub-classes Amino acids
Acidic Aspartic acid, Glutamic acid
Basic Noncyclic: Arginine, Lysine; Cyclic: Histidine
Charged Aspartic acid, Glutamic acid, Arginine, Lysine,
Histidine
Small Glycine, Serine, Alanine, Threonine, Praline
Polar/neutral Asparagine, Histidine, Glutamine, Cysteine, Serine,
Threonine
Polar/large Asparagine, Glutamine
Hydrophobic Tyrosine, Valine, Isoleucine, Leucine, Methionine,
Phenylalanine, Tryptophan
Aromatic Tryptophan, Tyrosine, Phenylalanine
Residues that Glycine and Praline
influence chain
orientation
[00152] Conservative amino acid substitution also includes groupings based on
side
chains. For example, a group of amino acids having aliphatic side chains is
glycine,
alanine, valine, leucine, and isoleucine; a group of amino acids having
aliphatic-
hydroxyl side chains is serine and threonine; a group of amino acids having
amide-
containing side chains is asparagine and glutamine; a group of amino acids
having
aromatic side chains is phenylalanine, tyrosine, and tryptophan; a group of
amino acids
61
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
having basic side chains is lysine, arginine, and histidine; and a group of
amino acids
having sulfur-containing side chains is cysteine and methionine. For example,
it is
reasonable to expect that replacement of a leucine with an isoleucine or
valine, an
aspartate with a glutamate, a threonine with a serine, or a similar
replacement of an
amino acid with a structurally related amino acid will not have a major effect
on the
properties of the resulting variant polypeptide. Whether an amino acid change
results in
a functional truncated and/or variant AARS polypeptide can readily be
determined by
assaying its non-canonical activity, as described herein. Conservative
substitutions are
shown in Table C under the heading of exemplary substitutions. Amino acid
substitutions falling within the scope of the invention, are, in general,
accomplished by
selecting substitutions that do not differ significantly in their effect on
maintaining (a)
the structure of the peptide backbone in the area of the substitution, (b) the
charge or
hydrophobicity of the molecule at the target site, (c) the bulk of the side
chain, or (d)
the biological function. After the substitutions are introduced, the variants
are screened
for biological activity.
Table C: Exemplary Amino Acid Substitutions
Original Residue Exemplary Substitutions Preferred Substitutions
Ala Val, Leu, Ile Val
Arg Lys, Gln, Asn Lys
Asn Gin, His, Lys, Arg Gin
Asp Glu Glu
Cys Ser Ser
Gin Asn, His, Lys, Asn
Glu Asp, Lys Asp
Gly Pro Pro
His Asn, Gln, Lys, Arg Arg
Ile Leu, Val, Met, Ala, Phe, Norleu Leu
Leu Norleu, Ile, Val, Met, Ala, Phe Ile
Lys Arg, Gln, Asn Arg
Met Leu, Ile, Phe Leu
Phe Leu, Val, Ile, Ala Leu
Pro Gly Gly
Ser Thr Thr
Thr Ser Ser
Trp Tyr Tyr
Tyr Trp, Phe, Thr, Ser Phe
62
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Original Residue Exemplary Substitutions Preferred Substitutions
Val Ile, Len, Met, Phe, Ala, Norleu Leu
[00153] Alternatively, similar amino acids for making conservative
substitutions can
be grouped into three categories based on the identity of the side chains. The
first
group includes glutamic acid, aspartic acid, arginine, lysine, histidine,
which all have
charged side chains: the second group includes glycine, serine, threonine,
cysteine,
tyrosine, glutamine, asparagine; and the third group includes leucine,
isoleucine, valine,
alanine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan, methionine, as described in
Zubay, G.,
Biochemistry, third edition, Wm.C. Brown Publishers (1993).
[00154] Thus, a predicted non-essential amino acid residue in a truncated
and/or
variant AARS polypeptide is typically replaced with another amino acid residue
from
the same side chain family. Alternatively, mutations can be introduced
randomly along
all or part of an AARS coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and
the
resultant mutants can be screened for an activity of the parent polypeptide to
identify
mutants which retain that activity. Following mutagenesis of the coding
sequences, the
encoded peptide can be expressed recombinantly and the activity of the peptide
can be
determined. A "non-essential" amino acid residue is a residue that can be
altered from
the reference sequence of an embodiment polypeptide without abolishing or
substantially altering one or more of its activities. Suitably, the alteration
does not
substantially abolish one of these activities, for example, the activity is at
least 20%,
40%, 60%, 70% or 80% 100%, 500%, 1000% or more of the reference AARS
sequence. An "essential" amino acid residue is a residue that, when altered
from the
reference sequence of an AARS polypeptide, results in abolition of an activity
of the
parent molecule such that less than 20% of the reference activity is present.
For
example, such essential amino acid residues include those that are conserved
in AARS
polypeptides across different species, including those sequences that are
conserved in
the active binding site(s) or motif(s) of AARS polypeptides from various
sources.
[00155] In general, polypeptides and fusion polypeptides (as well as their
encoding
polynucleotides) are isolated. An "isolated" polypeptide or polynucleotide is
one that is
removed from its original environment. For example, a naturally-occurring
protein is
isolated if it is separated from some or all of the coexisting materials in
the natural
system. Preferably, such polypeptides are at least about 90% pure, more
preferably at
least about 95% pure and most preferably at least about 99% pure. A
polynucleotide is
considered to be isolated if, for example, it is cloned into a vector that is
not a part of
the natural environment.
63
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00156] Certain embodiments also encompass dimers of AARS polypeptides.
Dimers may include, for example, homodimers between two identical AARS
polypeptides, heterodimers between two different AARS polypeptides (e.g., a
full-
length YRS polypeptide and a truncated YRS polypeptide; a truncated YRS
polypeptide
and a truncated WRS polypeptide), and/or heterodimers between an AARS
polypeptide
and a heterologous polypeptide. Certain heterodimers, such as those between an
AARS
polypeptide and a heterologous polypeptide, may be bi-functional, as described
herein.
[00157] Also included are monomers of AARS polypeptides, including isolated
AARS polypeptides monomers that do not substantially dimerize with a second
AARS
polypeptide, whether due to one or more substitutions, truncations, deletions,
additions,
chemical modifications, or a combination of these alterations. In certain
embodiments,
monomeric AARS polypeptides possess biological activities, including non-
canonical
activities, which are not possessed by dimeric or multimeric AARS polypeptide
complexes.
[00158] Certain embodiments of the present invention also contemplate the use
of
modified AARS polypeptides, including modifications that improved the desired
characteristics of an AARS polypeptide, as described herein. Modifications of
AARS
polypeptides of the invention include chemical and/or enzymatic
derivatizations at one
or more constituent amino acid, including side chain modifications, backbone
modifications, and N- and C-terminal modifications including acetylation,
hydroxylation, methylation, amidation, and the attachment of carbohydrate or
lipid
moieties, cofactors, and the like. Exemplary modifications also include
pegylation of
an AARS polypeptide (see, e.g., Veronese and Harris, Advanced Drug Delivery
Reviews 54. 453-456, 2002; and Pasut et at, Expert Opinion_ Ther Patents'
14(6) 859-
894 2004 ).
[00159] PEG is a well-known polymer having the properties of solubility in
water
and in many organic solvents, lack of toxicity, and lack of immunogenicity. It
is also
clear, colorless, odorless, and chemically stable. For these reasons and
others, PEG has
been selected as the preferred polymer for attachment, but it has been
employed solely
for purposes of illustration and not limitation. Similar products may be
obtained with
other water-soluble polymers, including without limitation; polyvinyl alcohol,
other
poly(alkylene oxides) such as poly(propylene glycol) and the like,
poly(oxyethylated
polyols) such as poly(oxyethylated glycerol) and the like,
carboxymethylcellulose,
dextran, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl purrolidone, poly-1,3- dioxolane, poly-
1,3,6-
trioxane, ethylene/maleic anhydride, and polyaminoacids. One skilled in the
art will be
able to select the desired polymer based on the desired dosage, circulation
time,
resistance to proteolysis, and other considerations.
64
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00160] In particular a wide variety of PEG derivatives are both available and
suitable for use in the preparation of PEG-conjugates. For example, NOF
Corp.'s PEG
reagents sold under the trademark SUNBRIGHTO Series provides numerous PEG
derivatives, including methoxypolyethylene glycols and activated PEG
derivatives such
as methoxy-PEG amines, maleimides, N-hydroxysuccinimide esters, and carboxylic
acids, for coupling by various methods to the N-terminal, C-terminal or any
internal
amino acid of the AARS polypeptide. Nektar Therapeutics' Advanced PEGylation
technology also offers diverse PEG-coupling technologies to potentially
improve the
safety and efficacy of an AARS polypeptide based therapeutic.
[00161] A search of patents, published patent applications, and related
publications
will also provide those skilled in the art reading this disclosure with
significant possible
PEG-coupling technologies and PEG-derivatives. For example, US Pat. Nos.
6,436,386;
5,932,462; 5,900,461; 5,824,784; and 4,904,584;
describe such technologies and derivatives, and methods
for their manufacture.
[00162] In certain aspects, chemoselective ligation technology may be utilized
to
modify AARS polypeptides of the invention, such as by attaching polymers in a
site-
specific and controlled manner. Such technology typically relies on the
incorporation
of chemoselective anchors into the protein backbone by either chemical or
recombinant
means, and subsequent modification with a polymer carrying a complementary
linker.
As a result, the assembly process and the covalent structure of the resulting
protein¨
polymer conjugate may be controlled, enabling the rational optimization of
drug
properties, such as efficacy and pharmacokinetic properties (see, e.g.,
Kochendoerfer,
Current Opinion in Chernical Biology 9-555-560, 2005)
[00163] In other embodiments, fusion proteins of AARS polypeptide to other
proteins are also included, and these fusion proteins may increase the AARS
polypeptide's biological activity, secretion, targeting, biological life, the
ability to
penetrate cellular membranes or the blood brain barrier, or pharmacokinetic
properties.
Examples of fusion proteins that improve pharmacokinetic properties ("PK
modifiers")
include without limitation, fusions to human albumin (Osborn et al.: Eur. J.
Pharnzacol.
456(1-3): 149-158, (2002)), antibody Fe domains, poly Glu or poly Asp
sequences, and
transferrin. Additionally, fusion with conformationally disordered polypeptide
sequences composed of the amino acids Pro, Ala, and Ser (PASylation) or
hydroxyethyl starch (sold under the trademark HESYLATIONO) provides a simple
way to increase the hydrodynamic volume of the AARS polypeptide. This
additional
extension adopts a bulky random structure, which significantly increases the
size of the
resulting fusion protein. By this means the typically rapid clearance of
smaller AARS
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
polypeptides via kidney filtration is retarded by several orders of magnitude.
Additionally use of Ig G fusion proteins has also been shown to enable some
fusion
protein proteins to penetrate the blood brain barrier (Fu et al., (2010) Brain
Res.
1352:208-13).
[00164] Examples of fusion proteins that improve penetration across cellular
membranes include fusions to membrane translocating sequences. In this
context, the
term "membrane translocating sequences" refers to naturally occurring and
synthetic
amino acid sequences that are capable of membrane translocation across a
cellular
membrane. Representative membrane translocating sequences include those based
on
the naturally occurring membrane translocating sequences derived from the Tat
protein,
and homeotic transcription protein Antennapedia, as well as synthetic membrane
translocating sequences based in whole or part on poly Arginine and Lysine
resides.
Representative membrane translocating sequences include for example those
disclosed
in the following patents, US5,652,122; US 5,670,617; US5,674,980; US5,747,641;
US5,804,604; US6,316,003; US7,585,834; US7,312,244; US7,279,502; US7,229,961;
US7,169,814; US7,453,011; US7,235,695; US6,982,351; US6,605,115; US7,306,784;
US7,306,783; US6,589,503; US6,348,185;
US6,881,825; US7,431,915;
W00074701A2; W02007111993A2; W02007106554A2; W002069930A1;
W003049772A2; W003106491A2; and W02008063113A1.
[00165] It will be appreciated that a flexible molecular linker (or spacer)
optionally
may be interposed between, and covalently join, the AARS polypeptide and any
of the
fusion proteins disclosed herein.
[00166] Additionally in some embodiments, the AARS polypeptide can include
synthetic, or naturally occurring secretion signal sequences, derived from
other well
characterized secreted proteins. In some embodiments such proteins, may be
processed
by proteolytic cleavage to form the AARS polypeptide in situ. Such fusions
proteins
include for example fusions of AARS polypeptide to ubiquitin to provide a new
N-
terminal amino acid, or the use of a secretion signal to mediate high level
secretion of
the AARS polypeptide into the extracellular medium, or N, or C-terminal
epitope tags
to improve purification or detection.
[00167] The AARS polypeptides described herein may be prepared by any suitable
procedure known to those of skill in the art, such as by recombinant
techniques. In
addition to recombinant production methods, polypeptides of the invention may
be
produced by direct peptide synthesis using solid-phase techniques (Merrifield,
J. Am.
Chem. Soc. 85:2149-2154 (1963)). Protein synthesis may be performed using
manual
techniques or by automation. Automated synthesis may be achieved, for example,
using
Applied Biosystems 431A Peptide Synthesizer (Perkin Elmer). Alternatively,
various
66
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
fragments may be chemically synthesized separately and combined using chemical
methods to produce the desired molecule.
IV. AARS POLYNUCLEOTIDES
[00168] Embodiments of the present invention include polynucleotides that
encode
one or more newly identified protein fragments of an aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase
(AARS), in addition to complements, variants, and fragments thereof. In
certain
embodiments, an AARS polynucleotide encodes all or a portion of the AARS
polypeptide reference sequence(s) as set forth in Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-
6, or
Table(s) 7-9, which represent splice variants, proteolytic fragments, or other
type of
fragments of Arginyl tRNA synthetase. Certain embodiments include
polynucleotides,
encoding polypeptides or proteins that comprise the sequence of one or more
splice
junctions of those splice variants, in addition to complements, variants, and
fragments
thereof. In certain embodiments, typically due to the singular nature of a
selected
AARS splice variant, which combines exons in a new or exceptional way, the
AARS
polynucleotide references sequences comprise a unique or exceptional splice
junction.
Certain embodiments exclude a corresponding full-length AARS polynucleotide.
[00169] Also included within the AARS polynucleotides of the present invention
are
primers, probes, antisense oligonucleotides, and RNA interference agents that
comprise
all or a portion of these reference polynucleotides, which are complementary
to all or a
portion of these reference polynucleotides, or which specifically hybridize to
these
reference polynucleotides, as described herein.
[00170] The term "polynucleotide" or "nucleic acid" as used herein designates
mRNA. RNA, cRNA, cDNA or DNA The term typically refers to polymeric form of
nucleotides of at least 10 bases in length, either ribonucleotides or
deoxynucleotides or
a modified form of either type of nucleotide. The term includes single and
double
stranded forms of DNA. The terms "DNA" and "polynucleotide" and "nucleic acid"
refer to a DNA molecule that has been isolated free of total genomic DNA of a
particular species. Therefore, an isolated DNA segment encoding a polypeptide
refers
to a DNA segment that contains one or more coding sequences yet is
substantially
isolated away from, or purified free from, total genomic DNA of the species
from
which the DNA segment is obtained. Also included are non-coding
polynucleotides
(e.g., primers, probes, oligonucleotides), which do not encode an AARS
polypeptide.
Included within the terms "DNA segment" and "polynucleotide" are DNA segments
and smaller fragments of such segments, and also recombinant vectors,
including, for
example, plasmids, cosmids, phagemids, phage, viruses, and the like.
67
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00171] Additional coding or non-coding sequences may, but need not, be
present
within a polynucleotide of the present invention, and a polynucleotide may,
but need
not, be linked to other molecules and/or support materials. Hence, the
polynucleotides
of the present invention, regardless of the length of the coding sequence
itself, may be
combined with other DNA sequences, such as promoters, polyadenylation signals,
additional restriction enzyme sites, multiple cloning sites, other coding
segments, and
the like, such that their overall length may vary considerably.
[00172] It is therefore contemplated that a polynucleotide fragment of almost
any
length may be employed; with the total length preferably being limited by the
ease of
preparation and use in the intended recombinant DNA protocol. Included are
polynucleotides of about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22,
23, 24, 25,
26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 41, 43, 44,
45, 46, 47, 48,
49, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200,
220, 240,
260, 270, 280, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850,
900, 950,
1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400, 1500, 1600, 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, 2200,
2300,
2400, 2500, 2600, 2700, 2800, 2900, 3000 or more (including all integers in
between)
bases in length, including any portion or fragment (e.g., greater than about
6, 7, 8, 9, or
nucleotides in length) of an AARS reference polynucleotide (e.g., base number
X-Y,
in which X is about 1-3000 or more and Y is about 10-3000 or more), or its
complement.
[00173] Embodiments of the present invention also include "variants" of the
AARS
reference polynucleotide sequences. Polynucleotide "variants" may contain one
or
more substitutions, additions, deletions and/or insertions in relation to a
reference
polynucleotide Generally, variants of an AARS reference polynucleotide
sequence
may have at least about 30%, 40% 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, generally at least
about
75%, 80%, 85%, desirably about 90% to 95% or more, and more suitably about 98%
or
more sequence identity to that particular nucleotide sequence as determined by
sequence alignment programs described elsewhere herein using default
parameters. In
certain embodiments, variants may differ from a reference sequence by about 1,
2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25,
26, 27, 28, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 41, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48,
49, 50, 60, 70,
80, 90, 100 (including all integers in between) or more bases. In certain
embodiments,
such as when the polynucleotide variant encodes an AARS polypeptide having a
non-
canonical activity, the desired activity of the encoded AARS polypeptide is
not
substantially diminished relative to the unmodified polypeptide. The effect on
the
activity of the encoded polypeptide may generally be assessed as described
herein.
68
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00174] Certain embodiments include polynucleotides that hybridize to a
reference
AARS polynucleotide sequence, or to their complements, under stringency
conditions
described below. As used herein, the term "hybridizes under low stringency,
medium
stringency, high stringency, or very high stringency conditions" describes
conditions for
hybridization and washing. Guidance for performing hybridization reactions can
be
found in Ausubel et al., (1998, supra), Sections 6.3.1-6.3.6. Aqueous and non-
aqueous
methods are described in that reference and either can be used.
[00175] Reference herein to low stringency conditions include and encompass
from
at least about 1% v/v to at least about 15% v/v formamide and from at least
about 1 M
to at least about 2 M salt for hybridization at 42 C, and at least about 1 M
to at least
about 2 M salt for washing at 42 C. Low stringency conditions also may
include 1%
Bovine Serum Albumin (BSA), 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 M NaHPO4 (pH 7.2), 7% SDS for
hybridization at 65 C, and (i) 2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS; or (ii) 0.5% BSA, 1 mM EDTA,
40 mM NaHPO4 (pH 7.2), 5% SDS for washing at room temperature. One embodiment
of low stringency conditions includes hybridization in 6 x sodium
chloride/sodium
citrate (SSC) at about 45 C, followed by two washes in 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS at
least at
50 C (the temperature of the washes can be increased to 55 C for low
stringency
conditions).
[00176] Medium stringency conditions include and encompass from at least about
16% v/v to at least about 30% v/v formamide and from at least about 0.5 M to
at least
about 0.9 M salt for hybridization at 42 C, and at least about 0.1 M to at
least about 0.2
M salt for washing at 55 C. Medium stringency conditions also may include 1%
Bovine Serum Albumin (BSA), 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 M NaHPO4 (pH 7.2), 7% SDS for
hybridization at 65 C, and (i) 2 x SSC, 0A% SDS; or (ii) 05% BSA, 1 mM EDTA,
40
mM NaHPO4 (pH 7.2), 5% SDS for washing at 60-65 C. One embodiment of medium
stringency conditions includes hybridizing in 6 x SSC at about 45 C, followed
by one
or more washes in 0.2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS at 60 C. High stringency conditions
include
and encompass from at least about 31% v/v to at least about 50% v/v formamide
and
from about 0.01 M to about 0.15 M salt for hybridization at 42 C, and about
0.01 M to
about 0.02 M salt for washing at 55 C.
[00177] High stringency conditions also may include 1% BSA, 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 M
NaHPO4 (pH 7.2), 7% SDS for hybridization at 65 C, and (i) 0.2 x SSC, 0.1%
SDS; or
(ii) 0.5% BSA, 1 mM EDTA, 40 mM NaHPO4 (pH 7.2), 1% SDS for washing at a
temperature in excess of 65 C. One embodiment of high stringency conditions
includes hybridizing in 6 x SSC at about 45 C, followed by one or more washes
in 0.2 x
SSC, 0.1% SDS at 65 C. One embodiment of very high stringency conditions
includes
69
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
hybridizing in 0.5 M sodium phosphate, 7% SDS at 65 C, followed by one or
more
washes in 0.2 x SSC, 1% SDS at 65 C.
[00178] Other stringency conditions are well known in the art and a skilled
artisan
will recognize that various factors can be manipulated to optimize the
specificity of the
hybridization. Optimization of the stringency of the final washes can serve to
ensure a
high degree of hybridization. For detailed examples, see Ausubel et al., supra
at pages
2.10.1 to 2.10.16 and Sambrook et al. (1989, supra) at sections 1.101 to
1.104.
[00179] While stringent washes are typically carried out at temperatures from
about
42 C to 68 C, one skilled in the art will appreciate that other temperatures
may be
suitable for stringent conditions. Maximum hybridization rate typically occurs
at about
20 C to 25 C below the T. for formation of a DNA-DNA hybrid. It is well
known in
the art that the T. is the melting temperature, or temperature at which two
complementary polynucleotide sequences dissociate. Methods for estimating T.
are
well known in the art (see Ausubel et al., supra at page 2.10.8).
[00180] In general, the T. of a perfectly matched duplex of DNA may be
predicted
as an approximation by the formula: T.= 81.5 + 16.6 (logio M) + 0.41 (%G+C) -
0.63
(% formamide) ¨ (600/length) wherein: M is the concentration of Nat,
preferably in the
range of 0.01 molar to 0.4 molar; %G+C is the sum of guanosine and cytosine
bases as
a percentage of the total number of bases, within the range between 30% and
75% G+C;
% formamide is the percent formamide concentration by volume; length is the
number
of base pairs in the DNA duplex. The T. of a duplex DNA decreases by
approximately
1 C with every increase of 1% in the number of randomly mismatched base
pairs.
Washing is generally carried out at T. ¨ 15 C for high stringency, or T. ¨ 30
C for
moderate stringency_
[00181] In one example of a hybridization procedure, a membrane (e.g., a
nitrocellulose membrane or a nylon membrane) containing immobilized DNA is
hybridized overnight at 42 C in a hybridization buffer (50% deionized
formamide, 5 x
TM
SSC, 5 x Denhardt's solution (0.1% ficoll, 0.1% polyvinylpyrollidone and 0.1%
bovine
serum albumin), 0.1% SDS and 200 mg/mL denatured salmon sperm DNA) containing
a labeled probe. The membrane is then subjected to two sequential medium
stringency
washes (i.e., 2 x SSC, 0.1% SDS for 15 min at 45 C, followed by 2 x SSC, 0.1%
SDS
for 15 min at 50 C), followed by two sequential higher stringency washes
(i.e., 0.2 x
SSC, 0.1% SDS for 12 min at 55 C followed by 0.2 x SSC and 0.1% SDS solution
for
12 min at 65-68 C.
[00182] As noted above, certain embodiments relate to AARS polynucleotides
that
encode an AARS potypeptide. Among other uses, these embodiments may be
utilized
to recombinantly produce a desired AARS polypeptide or variant thereof, or to
express
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
the AARS polypeptide in a selected cell or subject. It will be appreciated by
those of
ordinary skill in the art that, as a result of the degeneracy of the genetic
code, there are
many nucleotide sequences that encode a polypeptide as described herein. Some
of
these polynucleotides may bear minimal homology to the nucleotide sequence of
any
native gene. Nonetheless, polynucleotides that vary due to differences in
codon usage
are specifically contemplated by the present invention, for example
polynucleotides that
are optimized for human and/or primate codon selection.
[00183] Therefore, multiple polynucleotides can encode the AARS polypeptides
of
the invention. Moreover, the polynucleotide sequence can be manipulated for
various
reasons. Examples include but are not limited to the incorporation of
preferred codons
to enhance the expression of the polynucleotide in various organisms (see
generally
Nakamura et al., Nuc. Acid. Res. (2000) 28 (1): 292). In addition, silent
mutations can
be incorporated in order to introduce, or eliminate restriction sites,
decrease the density
of CpG dinucleotide motifs (see for example, Kameda et al., Biochem. Biophys.
Res.
Commun. (2006) 349(4): 1269-1277) or reduce the ability of single stranded
sequences
to form stem-loop structures: (see, e.g., Zuker M., Nucl. Acid Res. (2003);
31(13):
3406-3415). In addition, mammalian expression can be further optimized by
including
a Kozak consensus sequence [i.e., (a/g)cc(a/g)ccATGgl at the start codon.
Kozak
consensus sequences useful for this purpose are known in the art (Mantyh et
al. PNAS
92: 2662-2666 (1995); Mantyh et al. Prot. Exp. & Purif. 6,124 (1995)).
[00184] The polynucleotides of the present invention, regardless of the length
of the
coding sequence itself, may be combined with other DNA sequences, such as
promoters, polyadenylation signals, additional restriction enzyme sites,
multiple cloning
sites, other coding segments, and the like, such that their overall length may
vary
considerably. It is therefore contemplated that a polynucleotide fragment of
almost any
length may be employed; with the total length preferably being limited by the
ease of
preparation and use in the intended recombinant DNA protocol.
[00185] Polynucleotides and fusions thereof may be prepared, manipulated
and/or
expressed using any of a variety of well-established techniques known and
available in
the art. For example, polynucleotide sequences which encode polypeptides of
the
invention, or fusion proteins or functional equivalents thereof, may be used
in
recombinant DNA molecules to direct expression of an AARS polypeptide in
appropriate host cells. Due to the inherent degeneracy of the genetic code.
other DNA
sequences that encode substantially the same or a functionally equivalent
amino acid
sequence may be produced and these sequences may be used to clone and express
a
given polypeptide.
71
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00186] As will be understood by those of skill in the art, it may be
advantageous in
some instances to produce polypeptide-encoding nucleotide sequences possessing
non-
naturally occurring codons. For example, codons preferred by a particular
prokaryotic
or eukaryotic host can be selected to increase the rate of protein expression
or to
produce a recombinant RNA transcript having desirable properties, such as a
half-life
which is longer than that of a transcript generated from the naturally
occurring
sequence. Such polynucleotides are commonly referred to as "codon-optimized."
Any
of the polynucleotides described herein may be utilized in a codon-optimized
form. In
certain embodiments, a polynucleotide can be codon optimized for use in
specific
bacteria such as E. coli or yeast such as S. cerevisiae (see, e.g., Burgess-
Brown et al.,
Protein Expr Purif. 59:94-102, 2008; Ermolaeva MD (2001) Curr. Iss. Mol. Biol.
3 (4)
91-7; Welch et al., PLoS ONE 4(9): e7007 doi:10.1371/journal.pone.0007002).
[00187] Moreover, the polynucleotide sequences of the present invention can be
engineered using methods generally known in the art in order to alter
polypeptide
encoding sequences for a variety of reasons, including but not limited to,
alterations
which modify the cloning, processing, expression and/or activity of the gene
product.
[00188] According to another aspect of the invention, polynucleotides encoding
polypeptides of the invention may be delivered to a subject in vivo, e.g.,
using gene
therapy techniques. Gene therapy refers generally to the transfer of
heterologous
nucleic acids to the certain cells, target cells, of a mammal, particularly a
human, with a
disorder or conditions for which such therapy is sought. The nucleic acid is
introduced
into the selected target cells in a manner such that the heterologous DNA is
expressed
and a therapeutic product encoded thereby is produced.
[00189] Various viral vectors that can be utilized for gene therapy as taught
herein
include adenovirus, herpes virus, vaccinia, adeno-associated virus (AAV), or,
preferably, an RNA virus such as a retrovirus. Preferably, the retroviral
vector is a
derivative of a murine or avian retrovirus, or is a lentiviral vector. The
preferred
retroviral vector is a lentiviral vector. Examples of retroviral vectors in
which a single
foreign gene can be inserted include, but are not limited to: Moloney murine
leukemia
virus (MoMuLV), Harvey murinc sarcoma virus (HaMuSV), murine mammary tumor
virus (MuMTV), Sly, BIV, HIV and Rous Sarcoma Virus (RSV). A number of
additional retroviral vectors can incorporate multiple genes. All of these
vectors can
transfer or incorporate a gene for a selectable marker so that transduced
cells can be
identified and generated. By inserting a zinc finger derived-DNA binding
polypeptide
sequence of interest into the viral vector, along with another gene that
encodes the
ligand for a receptor on a specific target cell, for example, the vector may
be made
target specific. Retroviral vectors can be made target specific by inserting,
for example,
72
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
a polynucleotide encoding a protein (dimer). Illustrative targeting may be
accomplished
by using an antibody to target the retroviral vector. Those of skill in the
art will know
of, or can readily ascertain without undue experimentation, specific
polynucleotide
sequences which can be inserted into the retroviral genome to allow target
specific
delivery of the retroviral vector containing the zinc finger-nucleotide
binding protein
polynucleoti de.
[00190] Since recombinant retroviruses are defective, they require assistance
in order
to produce infectious vector particles. This assistance can be provided, for
example, by
using helper cell lines that contain plasmids encoding all of the structural
genes of the
retrovirus under the control of regulatory sequences within the LTR. These
plasmids are
missing a nucleotide sequence which enables the packaging mechanism to
recognize an
RNA transcript for encapsulation. Helper cell lines which have deletions of
the
packaging signal include but are not limited to PSI.2, PA317 and PA12, for
example.
These cell lines produce empty virions, since no genome is packaged. If a
retroviral
vector is introduced into such cells in which the packaging signal is intact,
but the
structural genes are replaced by other genes of interest, the vector can be
packaged and
vector virion produced. The vector virions produced by this method can then be
used to
infect a tissue cell line, such as NIH 3T3 cells, to produce large quantities
of chimeric
retroviral virions.
[00191] "Non-viral" delivery techniques for gene therapy can also be used
including,
for example, DNA-ligand complexes, adenovirus-ligand-DNA complexes, direct
injection of DNA, CaPO4 precipitation, gene gun techniques, electroporation,
liposomes, lipofection, and the like. Any of these methods are widely
available to one
skilled in the art and would be suitable for use in the present invention
Other suitable
methods are available to one skilled in the art, and it is to be understood
that the present
invention can be accomplished using any of the available methods of
transfection.
Lipofection can be accomplished by encapsulating an isolated DNA molecule
within a
liposomal particle and contacting the liposomal particle with the cell
membrane of the
target cell. Liposomes are self-assembling, colloidal particles in which a
lipid bilayer,
composed of amphiphilic molecules such as phosphatidyl serine or phosphatidyl
choline, encapsulates a portion of' the surrounding media such that the lipid
bilayer
surrounds a hydrophilic interior. Unilammellar or multilammellar liposomes can
be
constructed such that the interior contains a desired chemical, drug, or, as
in the instant
invention, an isolated DNA molecule.
[00192] In another aspect, polynucleotides encoding polypeptides of the
invention
may be used to express and delivery an AARS polypeptide via cell therapy.
Accordingly in another aspect, the current invention includes a cell therapy
for treating
73
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
a disease or disorder, comprising administering a host cell expressing, or
capable of
expressing, an AARS polypeptide.
[00193] Cell therapy involves the administration of cells which have been
selected,
multiplied and pharmacologically treated or altered (i.e. genetically
modified) outside
of the body (Bordignon, C. et at, Cell Therapy: Achievements and Perspectives
(1999),
Haematologica, 84, pp.1110-1149). Such host cells include for example, primary
cells,
including macrophages, and stem cells which have been genetically modified to
express
an AARS polypeptide. The aim of cell therapy is to replace, repair or enhance
the
biological function of damaged tissues or organs.
[00194] The use of transplanted cells has been investigated for the treatment
of
numerous endocrine disorders such as anemia and dwarfism, hematological
disorders,
kidney and liver failure, pituitary and CNS deficiencies and diabetes mellitus
(Uludag
et at., Technology of Mammalian Cell Encapsulation (2000), Advanced Drug
Delivery
Reviews, 42, pp. 29-64). Transplanted cells may function by releasing
bioactive
compounds such as an AARS polypeptide of the invention, to replace endogenous
AARS polypeptides which are absent or produced in insufficient quantities in
an
effected system.
[00195] Embodiments of the present invention also include oligonucleotides,
whether for detection, amplification, antisense therapies, or other purpose.
For these
and related purposes, the term "oligonucleotide" or "oligo" or "oligomer" is
intended to
encompass a singular "oligonucleotide" as well as plural "oligonucleotides,"
and refers
to any polymer of two or more of nucleotides, nucleosides, nucleobases or
related
compounds used as a reagent in the amplification methods of the present
invention, as
well as subsequent detection methods_ The oligonucleotide may be DNA and/or
RNA
and/or analogs thereof.
[00196] The term oligonucleotide does not necessarily denote any particular
function
to the reagent, rather, it is used generically to cover all such reagents
described herein.
An oligonucleotide may serve various different functions, e.g., it may
function as a
primer if it is capable of hybridizing to a complementary strand and can
further be
extended in the presence of a nucleic acid polymerasc, it may provide a
promoter if it
contains a sequence recognized by an RNA polymerase and allows for
transcription,
and it may function to prevent hybridization or impede primer extension if
appropriately situated and/or modified. An oligonucleotide may also function
as a
probe, or an antisense agent. An oligonucleotide can be virtually any length,
limited
only by its specific function, e.g., in an amplification reaction, in
detecting an
amplification product of the amplification reaction, or in an antisense or RNA
74
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
interference application. Any of the oligonucleotides described herein can be
used as a
primer, a probe, an antisense oligomer, or an RNA interference agent.
[00197] The term "primer" as used herein refers to a single-stranded
oligonucleotide
capable of acting as a point of initiation for template-directed DNA synthesis
under
suitable conditions defined, for example, by buffer and temperature, in the
presence of
four different nucleoside triphosphates and an agent for polymerization, such
as a DNA
or RNA polymerase or reverse transcriptase. The length of the primer, in any
given
case, depends on, for example, the intended use of the primer, and generally
ranges
from about 15 to 30 nucleotides, although shorter and longer primers may be
used.
Short primer molecules generally require cooler temperatures to form
sufficiently stable
hybrid complexes with the template. A primer need not reflect the exact
sequence of
the template but must be sufficiently complementary to hybridize with such
template.
The primer site is the area of the template to which a primer hybridizes. The
primer
pair is a set of primers including a 5' upstream primer that hybridizes with
the 5' end of
the sequence to be amplified and a 3' downstream primer that hybridizes with
the
complement of the 3' end of the sequence to be amplified.
[00198] The term "probe" as used herein includes a surface-immobilized or
soluble
but capable of being immobilized molecule that can be recognized by a
particular
target. See, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 6,582,908 for an example of arrays having
all
possible combinations of probes with 10, 12, and more bases. Probes and
primers as
used herein typically comprise at least 10-15 contiguous nucleotides of a
known
sequence. In order to enhance specificity, longer probes and primers may also
be
employed, such as probes and primers that comprise at least 20, 25, 30, 40,
50, 60, 70,
80, 90, 100, or at least 150 nucleotides of an AARS reference sequence or its
complement. Probes and primers may be considerably longer than these examples,
and
it is understood that any length supported by the knowledge in the art and the
specification, including the tables, figures, and Sequence Listing, may be
used.
[00199] Methods for preparing and using probes and primers are described in
the
references, for example Sambrook, J. et al. (1989) Molecular Cloning: A
Laboratory
Manual, 2nd ed., vol. 1-3, Cold Spring Harbor Press, Plainview N.Y.:
Ausubel, F.
M. etal. (1987) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Greene Publ. Assoc. &
Wiley-
Intersciences, New York N.Y.: Innis, M. et al. (1990) PCR Protocols. A Guide
to
Methods and Applications, Academic Press, San Diego Calif. PCR primer pairs
can be
derived from a known sequence, for example, by using computer programs
intended for
that purpose such as Primer (Version 0.5, 1991, Whitehead Institute for
Biomedical
Research, Cambridge Mass.).
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00200] Oligonucleotides for use as primers or probes may be selected using
software known in the art. For example, OLIGO 4.06 software is useful for the
selection of PCR primer pairs of up to 100 nucleotides each, and for the
analysis of
oligonucleotides and larger polynucleotides of up to 5,000 nucleotides from an
input
polynucleotide sequence of up to 32 kilobases. Similar primer selection
programs have
incorporated additional features for expanded capabilities. For example, the
PrimOU
primer selection program (available to the public from the Genome Center at
University
of Texas South West Medical Center, Dallas Tex.) is capable of choosing
specific
primers from megabase sequences and is thus useful for designing primers on a
genome-wide scope.
[00201] The Primer3 primer selection program (available to the public from the
Whitehead Institute/MIT Center for Genome Research, Cambridge Mass.) allows
the
user to input a "mispriming library," in which sequences to avoid as primer
binding
sites are user-specified. Primer3 is useful, in particular, for the selection
of
oligonucleotides for microarrays. (The source code for the latter two primer
selection
programs may also be obtained from their respective sources and modified to
meet the
user's specific needs.) The PrimeGen program (available to the public from the
UK
Human Genome Mapping Project Resource Centre, Cambridge UK) designs primers
based on multiple sequence alignments, thereby allowing selection of primers
that
hybridize to either the most conserved or least conserved regions of aligned
nucleic acid
sequences. Hence, this program is useful for identification of both unique and
conserved oligonucleotides and polynucleotide fragments. The oligonucleotides
and
polynucleotide fragments identified by any of the above selection methods are
useful in
hybridization technologies, for example, as PCR or sequencing primers,
microarray
elements, or specific probes to identify fully or partially complementary
polynucleotides in a sample of nucleic acids. Methods of oligonucleotide
selection are
not limited to those described herein.
[00202] In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides can be prepared by stepwise
solid-
phase synthesis, employing methods detailed in the references cited above, and
below
with respect to the synthesis of oligonucleotides having a mixture or
uncharged and
cationic backbone linkages. In some cases, it may be desirable to add
additional
chemical moieties to the oligonucleotide, e.g., to enhance pharmacokinetics or
to
facilitate capture or detection of the compound. Such a moiety may be
covalently
attached, typically to a terminus of the oligomer, according to standard
synthetic
methods. For example, addition of a polyethyleneglycol moiety or other
hydrophilic
polymer, e.g., one having 10-100 monomeric subunits, may be useful in
enhancing
76
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
solubility. One or more charged groups, e.g., anionic charged groups such as
an
organic acid, may enhance cell uptake.
[00203] A variety of detectable molecules may be used to render an
oligonucleotide,
or protein detectable, such as a radioisotopes, fluorochromes, dyes, enzymes,
nanoparticles, chemiluminescent markers, biotin, or other monomer known in the
art
that can be detected directly (e.g., by light emission) or indirectly (e.g.,
by binding of a
fluoreseently-labeled antibody).
[00204] Radioisotopes provide examples of detectable molecules that can be
utilized
in certain aspects of' the present invention. Several radioisotopes can be
used as
detectable molecules for labeling nucleotides or proteins, including, for
example, 32P,
3313, 35S, 3H, and 125I. These radioisotopes have different half-lives, types
of decay, and
levels of energy which can be tailored to match the needs of a particular
protocol. For
example, 3H is a low energy emitter which results in low background levels,
however
this low energy also results in long time periods for autoradiography.
Radioactively
labeled ribonucleotides, deoxyribonucleotides and amino acids are commercially
available. Nucleotides are available that are radioactively labeled at the
first, or a,
phosphate group, or the third, or y, phosphate group. For example, both [cc -
32P] dATP
and hf - 32P1 dATP are commercially available. In addition, different specific
activities
for radioactively labeled nucleotides are also available commercially and can
be
tailored for different protocols.
[00205] Other examples of detectable molecules that can be utilized to detect
an
oligonucleotide include fluorophores. Several fluorophores can be used for
labeling
nucleotides including, for example, fluorescein, tetramethylrhodamine, Texas
Red, and
a number of others (e.g., Haugland, Handbook of Fluorescent Probes - 9th Ed.,
2002,
Malec. Probes, Inc., Eugene OR; Haugland, The Handbook: A Guide to Fluorescent
Probes and Labeling Technologies-10th Ed., 2005, Invitrogen, Carlsbad, CA).
[00206] As one example, oligonucleotides may be fluorescently labeled during
chemical synthesis, since incorporation of amines or thiols during nucleotide
synthesis
permit addition of fluorophores. Fluorescently labeled nucleotides are
commercially
available. For example, uridine and deoxyuridine triphosphates are available
that are
conjugated to ten different fluorophores that cover the spectrum. Fluorescent
dyes that
can be bound directly to nucleotides can also be utilized as detectable
molecules. For
example, FAM, JOE, TAMRA, and ROX are amine reactive fluorescent dyes that
have
been attached to nucleotides and are used in automated DNA sequencing. These
fluoreseently labeled nucleotides, for example, ROX-ddATP, ROX-ddCTP, ROX-
ddGTP and ROX-ddUTP, are commercially available.
77
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00207] Non-radioactive and non-fluorescent detectable molecules are also
available.
As noted above, biotin can be attached directly to nucleotides and detected by
specific
and high affinity binding to avidin or streptavidin which has been chemically
coupled to
an enzyme catalyzing a colorimetric reaction (such as phosphatase, luciferase,
or
peroxidase). Digoxigenin labeled nucleotides can also similarly be used for
non-
isotopic detection of nucleic acids. Siotinylated and digoxigenin-labeled
nucleotides
are commercially available.
[00208] Very small particles, termed nanoparticles, also can be used to label
oligonucleotide probes. These particles range from 1-1000 nm in size and
include
diverse chemical structures such as gold and silver particles and quantum
dots. When
irradiated with angled incident white light, silver or gold nanoparticles
ranging from 40-
120 nm will scatter monochromatic light with high intensity. The wavelength of
the
scattered light is dependent on the size of the particle. Four to five
different particles in
close proximity will each scatter monochromatic light, which when superimposed
will
give a specific, unique color. The particles are being manufactured by
companies such
as Genicon Sciences (Carlsbad, CA). Derivatized silver or gold particles can
be
attached to a broad array of molecules including, proteins, antibodies, small
molecules,
receptor ligands, and nucleic acids. For example, the surface of the particle
can be
chemically derivatized to allow attachment to a nucleotide.
[00209] Other types of nanoparticles that can be used for detection of a
detectable
molecule include quantum dots. Quantum dots are fluorescing crystals 1-5 nm in
diameter that are excitable by light over a large range of wavelengths. Upon
excitation
by light having an appropriate wavelength, these crystals emit light, such as
monochromatic light, with a wavelength dependent on their chemical composition
and
size. Quantum dots such as CdSe, ZnSe, InP, or InAs possess unique optical
properties;
these and similar quantum dots are available from a number of commercial
sources
(e.g., NN-Labs, Fayetteville, AR; Ocean Nanotech, Fayetteville, AR; Nanoco
Technologies, Manchester, UK; Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, MO).
[00210] Many dozens of classes of particles can be created according to the
number
of size classes of the quantum dot crystals. The size classes of the crystals
are created
either 1) by tight control of crystal formation parameters to create each
desired size
class of particle, or 2) by creation of batches of crystals under loosely
controlled crystal
formation parameters, followed by sorting according to desired size and/or
emission
wavelengths. Two examples of references in which quantum dots are embedded
within
intrinsic silicon epitaxial layers of semiconductor light emitting/detecting
devices are
United States Patent Nos. 5,293,050 and 5,354,707 to Chapple Sokol, et al.
78
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00211] In certain embodiments, oligonucleotide primers or probes may be
labeled
with one or more light-emitting or otherwise detectable dyes. The light
emitted by the
dyes can be visible light or invisible light, such as ultraviolet or infrared
light. In
exemplary embodiments, the dye may be a fluorescence resonance energy transfer
(FRET) dye; a xanthene dye, such as fluorescein and rhodamine; a dye that has
an
amino group in the alpha or beta position (such as a naphthylamine dye, 1-
dimethylaminonaphthy1-5-sulfonate, 1-anilino-8-naphthalende sulfonate and 2-p-
touidiny1-6-naphthalene sulfonate); a dye that has 3-phenyl-7-
isocyanatocoumarin; an
acridine, such as 9-isothiocyanatoacridine and acridine orange; a pyrene, a
bensoxadiazole and a stilbene; a dye that has 3-(e-carboxypenty1)-3'-ethy1-
5,5'-
dimethyloxacarbocyanine (CYA); 6-carboxy fluorescein (FAM); 5&6-
carboxyrhodamine-110 (R110); 6-carboxyrhodamine-6G (R6G); N,N,IN',M-
tetramethy1-6-carboxyrhodamine (TAMRA); 6-carboxy-X-rhodamine (ROX); 6-
carboxy-4',5'-dichloro-2',7'-dimethoxyfluorescein (JOE); ALEXA FLUORTM; Cy2;
Texas Red and Rhodamine Red; 6-carboxy-2',4,7,7'-tetrachlorofluorescein (TET);
6-
carboxy-2',4,4',5',7,7'-hexachlorofluorescein (HEX); 5-carboxy-
2',4',5',7'-
tetrachlorofluorescein (ZOE); NAN; NED; Cy3; Cy3.5; Cy5; Cy5.5; Cy7; and
Cy7.5;
IR800CW, ICG, Alexa Fluor 350; Alexa Fluor 488; Alexa Fluor 532; Alexa Fluor
546;
Alexa Fluor 568; Alexa Fluor 594; Alexa Fluor 647; Alexa Fluor 680, or Alexa
Fluor
750.
[00212] The AARS polynucleotides and oligonucleotides of the present invention
can be used in any of the therapeutic, diagnostic, research, or drug discovery
compositions and methods described herein.
V. ANTIBODIES
[00213] According to another aspect, the present invention further provides
antibodies that exhibit binding specificity for an AARS polypeptide, or its
native
cellular binding partner (i.e. cellular receptor, lipid, carbohydrate,
protein, or nucleic
acid binding partner), or complex thereof, and methods of using the same. The
term
antibody includes the various variations of the same, such as FABs, human
antibodies,
modified human antibodies, single chains, nonhuman antibodies, and other
derivatives
of the immunoglobulin fold that underlie immune system ligands for antigens,
as
described herein and known in the art. Antibodies can be used in any of the
therapeutic,
diagnostic, drug discovery, or protein expression/purification methods and
compositions provided herein.
[00214] Certain antibodies of the present invention differ from certain
previously
made antibodies because they can distinguish between the AARS protein
fragments of
79
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table(s) 1-3, or Table(s) 4-6, or Table(s) 7-9 and their corresponding full-
length AARS,
typically by binding with greater affinity to the AARS protein fragments than
to the
corresponding full-length AARS. Generally, such antibodies may bind to unique
sequences or structures generated or revealed by splice variations,
proteolysis, or other
cellular processing that generates an AARS protein fragment of the invention
(e.g., post
translational processing, including but not limited to phosphorylation and
other
modifications that change protein structure). In some aspects the antibodies
may bind
to sequences around a unique splice junction (for example to one or more
regions of at
least 5 contiguous amino acids selected from the splice junction sequences
listed in
Tables 2B, 5B, or 8B, or alternatively to any amino acid sequence C-terminal
of this
splice site, for example as listed in Tables 2B, 5B, or 8B. For example, such
antibodies
may have binding specificity to one or more non-solvent exposed faces that are
exposed
in the AARS protein fragment but not in the full-length AARS, or sequences
that are
not found or are otherwise inaccessible in the full-length AARS. Antibodies
may also
bind to unique three-dimensional structures that result from differences in
folding
between the AARS protein fragment and the full-length AARS. Such differences
in
folding may be localized (e.g., to a specific domain or region) or globalized.
As one
example, folding of AARS protein fragments may generate unique continuous or
discontinuous epitopes that are not found in the corresponding or parent AARS.
Examples also include antibodies that specifically bind to N- or C- termini
generated by
splice variations, protcolysis, or other cellular processing; such termini may
be unique
compared to the full-length AARS or may not be exposed for antibody binding in
the
full-length versions due to their termini being completely or partially buried
in the
overall structure of the larger AARS parent molecule
[00215] In some embodiments, antibodies provided herein do not form
aggregates,
have a desired solubility, and/or have an immunogenicity profile that is
suitable for use
in humans, as described herein and known in the art. Also included are
antibodies that
are suitable for production work, such as to purify the AARS protein fragments
described herein. Preferably, active antibodies can be concentrated to at
least about
10mg/m1 and optional formulated for biotherapcutic uses.
[00216] In certain embodiments, antibodies are effective for modulating one or
more
of the non-canonical activities mediated by an AARS polypeptide of the
invention. In
certain embodiments, for example, the antibody is one that binds to an AARS
polypeptide and/or its binding partner, inhibits their ability to interact
with each other,
and/or antagonizes the non-canonical activity of the AARS polypeptide. In
certain
embodiments, for example, the antibody binds to the cellular binding partner
of an
AARS polypeptide, and mimics the AARS polypeptide activity, such as by
increasing
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
or agonizing the non-canonical activity mediated by the AARS polypeptide.
Accordingly, antibodies may be used to diagnose, treat, or prevent diseases,
disorders or
other conditions that are mediated by an AARS polypeptide of the invention,
such as by
antagonizing or agonizing its activity partially or fully.
[00217] An antibody, or antigen-binding fragment thereof, is said to
"specifically
bind," "immunologically bind," and/or is "immunologically reactive" to a
polypeptide
of the invention if it reacts at a detectable level (within, for example, an
ELISA assay)
with the polypeptide, and does not react detectably in a statistically
significant manner
with unrelated polypeptides under similar conditions. In certain instances, a
binding
agent does not significantly interact with a full-length version of the AARS
polypeptide.
[00218] Immunological binding, as used in this context, generally refers to
the non-
covalent interactions of the type which occur between an immunoglobulin
molecule and
an antigen for which the immunoglobulin is specific. The strength, or affinity
of
binding such as immunological binding interactions can be expressed in terms
of the
dissociation constant (Kd) of the interaction, wherein a smaller Kd represents
a greater
affinity. Immunological binding properties of selected polypeptides can be
quantified
using methods well known in the art. See, e.g., Davies et al. (1990) Annual
Rev.
Biochem. 59:439-473. In certain illustrative embodiments, an antibody has an
affinity
for an AARS protein fragment of at least about 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4,
0.5, 0.6,
0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1,2, 3,4, 5,6, 7, 8,9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,
20, 21, 22, 23,
24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 40, or 50 nM. In certain embodiments, the affinity
of the
antibody for an AARS protein fragment is stronger than its affinity for a
corresponding
full-length AARS polypeptide, typically by about 1 5x, 2x, 25x, 3x, 3_5x, 4x,
45x, 5x,
6x, 7x, 8x, 9x, 10x, 15x, 20x, 25x, 30x, 40x, 50x, 60x, 70x, 80x, 90x, 100x,
200x, 300x,
400x, 500x, 600x, 700x, 800x, 900x, 1000x or more (including all integers in
between).
In certain embodiments, an antibody as an affinity for a corresponding full-
length
AARS protein of at least about 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, 8, 9, 10, 11,
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 M. In certain embodiments, an antibody
binds
weakly or substantially undetectably to a full-length AARS protein.
[00219] An "antigen-binding site," or "binding portion" of an antibody, refers
to the
part of the immunoglobulin molecule that participates in antigen binding. The
antigen
binding site is formed by amino acid residues of the N-terminal variable ("V")
regions
of the heavy ("H") and light ("L") chains. Three highly divergent stretches
within the V
regions of the heavy and light chains are referred to as "hypervariable
regions" which
are interposed between more conserved flanking stretches known as "framework
regions," or "FRs". Thus the term "FR" refers to amino acid sequences which
are
81
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
naturally found between and adjacent to hypervariable regions in
immunoglobulins. In
an antibody molecule, the three hypervariable regions of a light chain and the
three
hypervariable regions of a heavy chain are disposed relative to each other in
three
dimensional space to form an antigen-binding surface. The antigen-binding
surface is
complementary to the three-dimensional surface of a bound antigen, and the
three
hypervariable regions of each of the heavy and light chains are referred to as
"complementarity-determining regions," or "CDRs."
[00220] Antibodies may be prepared by any of a variety of techniques known to
those of ordinary skill in the art. See, e.g., Harlow and Lane, Antibodies: A
Laboratory
Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, 1988. Monoclonal antibodies specific
for a
polypeptide of interest may be prepared, for example, using the technique of
Kohler and
Milstein, Eur. J. Immunol. 6:511-519, 1976, and improvements thereto. Also
included
are methods that utilize transgenic animals such as mice to express human
antibodies.
See, e.g., Neuberger et al., Nature Biotechnology 14:826, 1996; Lonberg et
al.,
Handbook of Experimental Pharmacology 113:49-101, 1994; and Lonberg et al.,
Internal Review of Immunology 13:65-93, 1995. Particular examples include the
VELOCIMMUNE platform by REGERNEREVR) (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No.
6,596,541). Antibodies can also be generated or identified by the use of phage
display
or yeast display libraries (see, e.g., U.S. Patent No. 7,244,592; Chao et al.,
Nature
Protocols. 1:755-768, 2006). Non-limiting examples of available libraries
include
cloned or synthetic libraries, such as the Human Combinatorial Antibody
Library
(HuCAL), in which the structural diversity of the human antibody repertoire is
represented by seven heavy chain and seven light chain variable region genes.
The
combination of these genes gives rise to 49 frameworks in the master library
By
superimposing highly variable genetic cassettes (CDRs = complementarity
determining
regions) on these frameworks, the vast human antibody repertoire can be
reproduced.
Also included are human libraries designed with human-donor-sourced fragments
encoding a light-chain variable region, a heavy-chain CDR-3. synthetic DNA
encoding
diversity in heavy-chain CDR-1, and synthetic DNA encoding diversity in heavy-
chain
CDR-2. Other libraries suitable for use will be apparent to persons skilled in
the art.
The polypeptides of this invention may be used in the purification process in,
for
example, an affinity chromatography step.
[00221] An "Fv" fragment can be produced by preferential proteolytic cleavage
of an
IgM, and on rare occasions IgG or IgA immunoglobulin molecule. Fv fragments
are,
however, more commonly derived using recombinant techniques known in the art.
The
Fv fragment includes a non-covalent VH::VL heterodimer including an antigen-
binding
site which retains much of the antigen recognition and binding capabilities of
the native
82
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
antibody molecule. See, e.g., Inbar et al. (1972) Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA
69:2659-
2662; Hochman etal. (1976) Biochem 15:2706-2710; and Ehrlich etal. (1980)
Bioehetn
19:4091-4096.
[00222] A single chain Fv ("sFv") polypeptide is a covalently linked VH::-V1,
heterodimer which is expressed from a gene fusion including VH- and VL-
encoding
genes linked by a peptide-encoding linker. Huston et al. (1988) PNAS USA.
85(16):5879-5883. A number of methods have been described to discern chemical
structures for converting the naturally aggregated¨but chemically
separated¨light and
heavy polypeptide chains from an antibody V region into an sFy molecule which
will
fold into a three dimensional structure substantially similar to the structure
of an
antigen-binding site. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,091,513 and 5,132,405, to
Huston etal.;
and U.S. Pat. No. 4,946,778, to Ladner etal.
[00223] Each of the above-described molecules includes a heavy chain and a
light
chain CDR set, respectively interposed between a heavy chain and a light chain
FR set
which provide support to the CDRS and define the spatial relationship of the
CDRs
relative to each other. As used herein, the term "CDR set" refers to the three
hypervariable regions of a heavy or light chain V region. Proceeding from the
N-
terminus of a heavy or light chain, these regions are denoted as "CDR1,"
"CDR2," and
"CDR3" respectively. An antigen-binding site, therefore, includes six CDRs,
comprising the CDR set from each of a heavy and a light chain V region. A
polypeptide
comprising a single CDR, (e.g., a CDR1, CDR2 or CDR3) is referred to herein as
a
"molecular recognition unit." Crystallographic analysis of a number of antigen-
antibody
complexes has demonstrated that the amino acid residues of CDRs form extensive
contact with bound antigen, wherein the most extensive antigen contact is with
the
heavy chain CDR3. Thus, the molecular recognition units are primarily
responsible for
the specificity of an antigen-binding site.
[00224] As used herein, the term "FR set" refers to the four flanking amino
acid
sequences which frame the CDRs of a CDR set of a heavy or light chain V
region.
Some FR residues may contact bound antigen; however, FRs are primarily
responsible
for folding the V region into the antigen-binding site, particularly the FR
residues
directly adjacent to the CDRS. Within FRs, certain amino residues and certain
structural
features are very highly conserved. In this regard, all V region sequences
contain an
internal disulfide loop of around 90 amino acid residues. When the V regions
fold into a
binding-site, the CDRs are displayed as projecting loop motifs which form an
antigen-
binding surface. It is generally recognized that there are conserved
structural regions of
FRs which influence the folded shape of the CDR loops into certain "canonical"
structures¨regardless of the precise CDR amino acid sequence. Further, certain
FR
83
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
residues are known to participate in non-covalent interdomain contacts which
stabilize
the interaction of the antibody heavy and light chains.
[00225] Certain embodiments include single domain antibody (sdAbs or
"nanobodies"), which refer to an antibody fragment consisting of a single
monomeric
variable antibody domain (see, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,840,526; 5,874,541;
6,005,079,
6,765,087, 5,800,988; 5,874,541; and 6,015,695). Such sdABs typically have a
molecular weight of about 12-15 kDa. In certain aspects, sdABs and other
antibody
molecules can be derived or isolated from the unique heavy-chain antibodies of
immunized camels and llamas, often referred to as camelids. See, e.g., Conrath
et al.,
JBC. 276:7346-7350, 2001.
[00226] A number of "humanized" antibody molecules comprising an antigen-
binding site derived from a non-human immunoglobulin have been described,
including
chimeric antibodies having rodent V regions and their associated CDRs fused to
human
constant domains (Winter et al. (1991) Nature 349:293-299; Lobuglio et al.
(1989)
Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 86:4220-4224; Shaw et aL (1987) J ittununol.
138:4534-
4538; and Brown et aL (1987) Cancer Res. 47:3577-3583), rodent CDRs grafted
into a
human supporting FR prior to fusion with an appropriate human antibody
constant
domain (Riechmann et al. (1988) Nature 332:323-327; Verhoeyen et al. (1988)
Science
239:1534-1536; and Jones et al. (1986) Nature 321:522-525), and rodent CDRs
supported by recombinantly veneered rodent FRs (European Patent Publication
No.
519,596, published Dec. 23, 1992). These "humanized" molecules arc designed to
minimize unwanted immunological response toward rodent antihuman antibody
molecules which limits the duration and effectiveness of therapeutic
applications of
those moieties in human recipients See, e.g., U.S Patent Nos 5,530,101;
5,585,089;
5,693,762; 6,180,370; and 7,022,500.
[00227] The antibodies of the present invention can be used in any of the
therapeutic,
diagnostic, drug discovery, protein purification, and analytical methods and
compositions described herein.
VI. ANTIBODY ALTERNATIVES AND OTHER BINDING AGENTS
[00228] According to another aspect, the present invention further provides
antibody
alternatives or other binding agents, such as soluble receptors, adnectins,
peptides,
peptide mimetics, small molecules, aptamers, etc., that exhibit binding
specificity for an
AARS polypeptide or its cellular binding partner as disclosed herein, or to a
portion,
variant or derivative thereof, and compositions and methods of using same.
Binding
agents can be used in any of the therapeutic, diagnostic, drug discovery, or
protein
expression/purification, and analytical methods and compositions described
herein.
84
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Biologic-based binding agents such as adnectins, soluble receptors, avimers,
and
trinectins are particularly useful.
[00229] In certain embodiments, such binding agents are effective for
modulating
one or more of the non-canonical activities mediated by an AARS polypeptide of
the
invention. In some embodiments, for example, the binding agent is one that
binds to an
AARS polypeptide and/or its binding partner, inhibits their ability to
interact with each
other, and/or antagonizes the non-canonical activity of the AARS polypeptide.
In
certain embodiments, for example, the binding agent binds to the cellular
binding
partner of an AARS polypeptide, and mimics the AARS polypeptide activity, such
as
by increasing or agonizing the non-canonical activity mediated by the AARS
polypeptide. Accordingly, such binding agents may be used to diagnose, treat,
or
prevent diseases, disorders or other conditions that are mediated by an AARS
polypeptide of the invention, such as by antagonizing or agonizing its
activity partially
or fully.
[00230] A binding agent is said to "specifically bind" to an AARS polypeptide
of the
invention, or its cellular binding partner, if it reacts at a detectable level
(within, for
example, an ELISA assay) with the polypeptide or its cellular binding partner,
and does
not react delectably in a statistically significant manner with unrelated
polypeptides
under similar conditions. In certain instances, a binding agent does not
significantly
interact with a full-length version of the AARS polypeptide. In certain
illustrative
embodiments, a binding agent has an affinity for an AARS protein fragment or
its
cellular binding partner of at least about 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4,
0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8,
0.9, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21,
22, 23, 24, 25,
26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 40, or 50 nM In certain embodiments, the affinity of the
binding
agent for an AARS protein fragment is stronger than its affinity for a
corresponding
full-length AARS polypeptide, typically by about 1.5x, 2x, 2.5x, 3x, 3.5x, 4x,
4.5x, 5x,
6x, 7x, 8x, 9x, 10x, 15x, 20x, 25x, 30x, 40x, 50x, 60x, 70x, 80x, 90x, 100x,
200x, 300x,
400x, 500x, 600x, 700x, 800x, 900x, 1000x or more (including all integers in
between).
In certain embodiments, a binding agent has an affinity for a corresponding
full-length
AARS protein of at least about 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,9, 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15, 16, 17,
18, 19, or 20 M.
[00231] As noted above, "peptides" are included as binding agents. The term
peptide typically refers to a polymer of amino acid residues and to variants
and
synthetic analogues of the same. In certain embodiments, the term "peptide"
refers to
relatively short polypeptides, including peptides that consist of about 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 amino
acids,
including all integers and ranges (e.g., 5-10, 8-12, 10-15) in between, and
interact with
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
an AARS polypeptide, its cellular binding partner, or both. Peptides can be
composed
of naturally-occurring amino acids and/or non-naturally occurring amino acids,
as
described herein.
[00232] In addition to peptides consisting only of naturally-occurring amino
acids,
peptidomimetics or peptide analogs are also provided. Peptide analogs are
commonly
used in the pharmaceutical industry as non-peptide drugs with properties
analogous to
those of the template peptide. These types of non-peptide compound are termed
"peptide mimetics" or "peptidomimetics" (Luthman, et al., A Textbook of Drug
Design
and Development, 14:386-406, 2nd Ed., Harwood Academic Publishers (1996);
Joachim Grante, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 33:1699-1720 (1994); Fauchere,
J., Adv.
Drug Res., 15:29 (1986); Veber and Freidinger TINS, p. 392 (1985); and Evans,
et al.,
J. Med. Chem. 30:229 (1987)). A peptidomimetic is a molecule that mimics the
biological activity of a peptide but is no longer peptidic in chemical nature.
Peptidomimetic compounds are known in the art and are described, for example,
in U.S.
Patent No. 6,245,886.
[00233] The present invention also includes peptoids. Peptoid derivatives of
peptides represent another form of modified peptides that retain the important
structural
determinants for biological activity, yet eliminate the peptide bonds, thereby
conferring
resistance to proteolysis (Simon, et al., PNAS USA. 89:9367-9371, 1992).
Peptoids are
oligomers of N-substituted glycines. A number of N-alkyl groups have been
described,
each corresponding to the side chain of a natural amino acid. The
peptidomimetics of
the present invention include compounds in which at least one amino acid, a
few amino
acids or all amino acid residues are replaced by the corresponding N-
substituted
glycines. Peptoid libraries are described, for example, in U S. Patent No_
5,811,387_
[00234] A binding agent may also include one or more small molecules. A "small
molecule" refers to an organic compound that is of synthetic or biological
origin
(biomolecule), but is typically not a polymer. Organic compounds refer to a
large class
of chemical compounds whose molecules contain carbon, typically excluding
those that
contain only carbonates, simple oxides of carbon, or cyanides. A "biomolecule"
refers
generally to an organic molecule that is produced by a living organism,
including large
polymeric molecules (biopolymers) such as peptides, polysaccharides, and
nucleic acids
as well, and small molecules such as primary secondary metabolites, lipids,
phospholipids, glycolipids, sterols, glycerolipids, vitamins, and hormones.
A
"polymer" refers generally to a large molecule or macromolecule composed of
repeating structural units, which are typically connected by covalent chemical
bond.
[00235] In certain embodiments, a small molecule has a molecular weight of
less
than 1000-2000 Daltons, typically between about 300 and 700 Daltons, and
including
86
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
about 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 500, 650, 600,
750, 700,
850, 800, 950, 1000 or 2000 Dalions. Small molecule libraries are described
elsewhere
herein.
[00236] Aptamers are also included as binding agents (see, e.g., Ellington et
al.,
Nature. 346, 818-22, 1990; and Tuerk et al., Science. 249, 505-10, 1990).
Examples of
aptamers included nucleic acid aptamers (e.g., DNA aptamers, RNA aptamers) and
peptide aptamers. Nucleic acid aptamers refer generally to nucleic acid
species that
have been engineered through repeated rounds of in vitro selection or
equivalent
method, such as SELEX (systematic evolution of ligands by exponential
enrichment),
to bind to various molecular targets such as small molecules, proteins,
nucleic acids,
and even cells, tissues and organisms. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 6,376,190;
and
6,387,620 Hence, included are nucleic acid aptamers that bind to the AARS
polypeptides described herein and/or their cellular binding partners.
[00237] Peptide aptamers typically include a variable peptide loop attached at
both
ends to a protein scaffold, a double structural constraint that typically
increases the
binding affinity of the peptide aptamer to levels comparable to that of an
antibody's
(e.g., in the nanomolar range). In certain embodiments, the variable loop
length may
be composed of about 10-20 amino acids (including all integers in between),
and the
scaffold may include any protein that has good solubility and compacity
properties.
Certain exemplary embodiments may utilize the bacterial protein Thioredoxin-A
as a
scaffold protein, the variable loop being inserted within the reducing active
site (-Cys-
Gly-Pro-Cys- loop in the wild protein), with the two cysteines lateral chains
being able
to form a disulfide bridge. Methods for identifying peptide aptamers are
described, for
example, in US Application No 2003/0108532_ Hence, included are peptide
aptamers
that bind to the AARS polypeptides described herein and/or their cellular
binding
partners. Peptide aptamer selection can be performed using different systems
known in
the art, including the yeast two-hybrid system.
[00238] Also included are ADNECTINSrm, AVIMERSrm, anaphones and anticalins
that specifically bind to an AARS protein fragment of the invention.
ADNECTINSTm
refer to a class of targeted biologics derived from human fibronectin, an
abundant
extracellular protein that naturally binds to other proteins. See, e.g., U.S.
Application
Nos. 2007/0082365; 2008/0139791; and 2008/0220049. ADNECTINSTm typically
consists of a natural fibronectin backbone, as well as the multiple targeting
domains of
a specific portion of human fibronectin. The targeting domains can be
engineered to
enable an ADNECTINTm to specifically recognize a therapeutic target of
interest, such
as an AARS protein fragment of the invention.
87
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00239] AVIMERSTm refer to multimeric binding proteins or peptides engineered
using in vitro exon shuffling and phage display. Multiple binding domains are
linked,
resulting in greater affinity and specificity compared to single epitope
immunoglobulin
domains. See, e.g., Silverman et at., Nature Biotechnology. 23:1556-1561,
2005; U.S.
Patent No. 7,166,697; and U.S. Application Nos. 2004/0175756, 2005/0048512,
2005/0053973, 2005/0089932 and 2005/0221384.
[00240] Also included are designed ankyrin repeat proteins (DARPins), which
include a class of non-immunoglobulin proteins that can offer advantages over
antibodies for target binding in drug discovery and drug development. Among
other
uses, DARPins are ideally suited for in vivo imaging or delivery of toxins or
other
therapeutic payloads because of their favorable molecular properties,
including small
size and high stability. The low-cost production in bacteria and the rapid
generation of
many target-specific DARPins make the DARPin approach useful for drug
discovery.
Additionally, DARPins can be easily generated in multispecific formats,
offering the
potential to target an effector DARPin to a specific organ or to target
multiple receptors
with one molecule composed of several DARPins. See, e.g., Stumpp et at., Curr
Opin
Drug DliSCOV Devel. 10:153-159, 2007; U.S. Application No. 2009/0082274; and
PCT/EP2001/10454.
[00241] Certain embodiments include "monobodies," which typically utilize the
10th
fibronectin type III domain of human fibronectin (FNfn10) as a scaffold to
display
multiple surface loops for target binding. FNfn10 is a small (94 residues)
protein with a
I3-sandwich structure similar to the immunoglobulin fold. It is highly stable
without
disulfide bonds or metal ions, and it can be expressed in the correctly folded
form at a
high level in bacteria The FNfn10 scaffold is compatible with virtually any
display
technologies. See, e.g., Baton et at., Protein Eng. 15:1015-20, 2002; and
Wojcik et at.,
Nat Stract Mol Biol., 2010; and U.S. Patent No. 6,673,901.
[00242] Anticalins refer to a class of antibody mimetics, which are typically
synthesized from human lipocalins, a family of binding proteins with a
hypervariable
loop region supported by a structurally rigid framework. See, e.g., U.S.
Application
No. 2006/0058510. Anticalins typically have a size of about 20 kDa. Anticalins
can be
characterized by a barrel structure formed by eight antiparallel 13-strands (a
stable 13-
barrel scaffold) that are pairwise connected by four peptide loops and an
attached a-
helix. In certain aspects, conformational deviations to achieve specific
binding are
made in the hypervariable loop region(s). See, e.g., Skerra, FEBS J. 275:2677-
83,
2008
88
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
VII. BIOASSAYS AND ANALYTICAL ASSAYS FOR DRUG RELEASE ASSAYS AND PRODUCT
SPECIFICATIONS, DIAGNOSTICS, AND REAGENTS
[00243] Also included are bioassays that relate to the AARS protein fragments
and
related agents as therapeutic and diagnostic reagents. Examples include
bioassays and
analytical assays that measure purity, biological activity, affinity,
solubility, pH,
endotoxin levels, among others, many of which are described herein. Also
included are
assays that establish dose response curves and/or provide one or more bases
for
comparison between different batches of agents. Batch comparisons can be based
on
any one or more of chemical characterization, biological characterization, and
clinical
characterization. For protein agents, also included are methods of evaluating
the
potency, stability, pharmacokinetics, and immunogenicity of a selected agent.
Among
other uses, these and other methods can be used for lot releasing testing of
biologic or
chemical agents, including the AARS protein fragments, antibodies, binding
agents,
polynucleotides such as antisense agents and vectors, and others described
herein.
[00244] Certain embodiments include the use of bioaffinity assays. Such assays
can
be used to assess the binding affinity, for example, between an AARS protein
fragment
and a cellular binding partner, or between an AARS protein fragment and an
antibody.
Binding affinity can also be measured between an AARS protein fragment and an
alternate binding agent such as a candidate or lead test compound (e.g., small
molecule
modulator of an AARS), or between an AARS cellular binding partner and a
candidate
or lead test compound. Certain exemplary binding affinity assays may utilize
ELISA
assays, as described herein and known in the art. Certain assays utilize high-
performance receptor binding chromatography (see, e.g., Roswall et al.,
Biologicals.
24-25-39, 1996) Other exemplary binding affinity assays may utilize surface
plasmon
resonance (SPR)-based technologies. Examples include BIACore technologies,
certain
of which integrate SPR technology with a microfluidics system to monitor
molecular
interactions in real time at concentrations ranging from pM to mM. Also
included are
KIN EXA rm assays, which provide accurate measurements of binding specificity,
binding affinity, and binding kinetics/rate constants.
[00245] Certain embodiments relate to immunoassays for evaluating or
optimizing
the immunogenicity of protein agents. Examples include ex vivo human cellular
assays
and in vitro immuno-enzymatic assays to provide useful information on the
immunogenic potential of a therapeutic protein. Ex vivo cell-response assays
can be
used, for example, to reproduce the cellular co-operation between antigen-
presenting
cells (APCs) and T-cells, and thereby measure T-cells activation after contact
with a
protein of interest. Certain in vitro enzymatic assays may utilize a
collection of
recombinant HLA-DR molecules that cover a significant portion of a relevant
human
89
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
population, and may include automated immuno-enzymatic assays for testing the
binding of peptides (stemming from the fragmentation of the therapeutic
protein) with
the HLA-DR molecules. Also included are methods of reducing the immunogenicity
of
a selected protein, such as by using these and related methods to identify and
then
remove or alter one or more T-cell epitopes from a protein agent.
[00246] Also included are biological release assays (e.g., cell-based assays)
for
measuring parameters such as specific biological activities, including non-
canonical
biological activities, and cytotoxicity. Certain specific biological assays
include, for
example, cell-based assays that utilize a cellular binding partner (e.g., cell-
surface
receptor) of a selected AARS protein fragment, which is functionally coupled
to a
readout, such as a fluorescent or luminescent indicator of a non-canonical
biological
activity, as described herein. For instance, specific embodiments include a
cell that
comprises a cell-surface receptor or an extracellular portion thereof that
binds to an
AARS protein fragment, wherein the cell comprises a detector or readout. Also
included are in vivo biological assays to characterize the pharmacokinetics of
an agent,
such as an AARS polypeptide or antibody, typically utilizing engineered mice
or other
mammal (see, e.g., Lee et al., The Journal of Pharmacology. 281:1431-1439,
1997).
Examples of cytotoxicity-based biological assays include release assays (e.g.,
chromium or europium release assays to measure apoptosis; see, e.g., von Zons
et al.,
Gun Diagn Lab Iminunol.4:202-207, 1997), among others, which can assess the
cytotoxicity of AARS protein fragments, whether for establishing dose response
curves,
batch testing, or other properties related to approval by various regulatory
agencies,
such as the Food and Drug Administration (FDA).
[00247] Such assays can be used, for example, to develop a dose response curve
for a
selected AARS protein fragment or other agent, and/or to compare the dose
response
curve of different batches of proteins or other agents. A dose-response curve
is an X-Y
graph that relates the magnitude of a stressor to the response of a receptor;
the response
may be a physiological or biochemical response, such as a non-canonical
biological
activity in a cell in vitro or in a cell or tissue in vivo, a therapeutically
effective amount
as measured in vivo (e.g., as measured by EC50), or death, whether measured in
vitro or
in vivo (e.g., cell death, organismal death). Death is usually indicated as an
LD50, a
statistically-derived dose that is lethal to 50% of a modeled population,
though it can be
indicated by LCoi (lethal dose for 1% of the animal test population), LC100
(lethal dose
for 100% of the animal test population), or LC1 0 (lowest dose causing
lethality).
Almost any desired effect or endpoint can be characterized in this manner.
[00248] The measured dose of a response curve is typically plotted on the X
axis and
the response is plotted on the Y axis. More typically, the logarithm of the
dose is
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
plotted on the X axis, most often generating a sigmoidal curve with the
steepest portion
in the middle. The No Observable Effect Level (NOEL) refers to the lowest
experimental dose for which no measurable effect is observed, and the
threshold dose
refers to the first point along the graph that indicates a response above
zero. As a
general rule, stronger drugs generate steeper dose response curves. For many
drugs, the
desired effects are found at doses slightly greater than the threshold dose,
often because
lower doses are relatively ineffective and higher doses lead to undesired side
effects.
For in vivo generated dose response curves, a curve can be characterized by
values such
as big/kg, mg/kg, or g/kg of body-weight, if desired.
[00249] For batch comparisons, it can be useful to calculate the coefficient
of
variation (CV) between different dose response curves of different batches
(e.g.,
between different batches of AARS protein fragments, antibodies, or other
agents), in
part because the CV allows comparison between data sets with different units
or
different means. For instance, in certain exemplary embodiments, two or three
or more
different batches of AARS protein fragments or other agents have a CV between
them
of less than about 15%, 14%, 13%, 12%, 11%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%,
2%, or 1% for a 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 point dose curve. In certain embodiments, the
dose
response curve is measured in a cell-based assay, and its readout relates to
an increase
or a decrease in a selected non-canonical activity of the AARS protein
fragment. In
certain embodiments, the dose response curve is measured in a cell release
assay or
animal model (e.g., mouse model), and its readout relates to cell death or
animal death.
Other variations will be apparent to persons skilled in the art.
17/H EXPRESSION ANTI) PURIFICATION SYSTEMS
[00250] Embodiments of the present invention include methods and related
compositions for expressing and purifying the AARS protein fragments or other
polypeptide-based agents of the invention. Such recombinant AARS polypeptides
can
be conveniently prepared using standard protocols as described for example in
Sambrook, et al., (1989, supra), in particular Sections 16 and 17; Ausubel et
al., (1994,
supra), in particular Chapters 10 and 16; and Coligan et al., Current
Protocols in
Protein Science (John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1995-1997), in particular Chapters 1,
5 and 6.
As one general example, AARS polypeptides may be prepared by a procedure
including
one or more of the steps of: (a) preparing a construct comprising a
polynucleotide
sequence that encodes a AARS polypeptide and that is operably linked to a
regulatory
element; (b) introducing the construct into a host cell; (c) culturing the
host cell to
express the AARS polypeptide; and (d) isolating the AARS polypeptide from the
host
cell.
91
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00251] AARS polynucleotides are described elsewhere herein. In order to
express a
desired polypeptide, a nucleotide sequence encoding the polypeptide, or a
functional
equivalent, may be inserted into appropriate expression vector, i.e., a vector
which
contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the
inserted
coding sequence. Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art may
be used
to construct expression vectors containing sequences encoding a polypeptide of
interest
and appropriate transcriptional and translational control elements. These
methods
include in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo
genetic
recombination. Such techniques are described in Sambrook et al., Molecular
Cloning, A
Laboratory Manual (1989), and Ausubel et al., Current Protocols in Molecular
Biology
(1989).
[00252] A variety of expression vector/host systems are known and may be
utilized
to contain and express polynucleotide sequences. These include, but are not
limited to,
microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage,
plasmid,
or cosmid DNA expression vectors; yeast transformed with yeast expression
vectors;
insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g.,
baculovirus); plant cell
systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic
virus,
CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or with bacterial expression vectors (e.g.,
Ti or
pBR322 plasmids); or animal cell systems, including mammalian cell and more
specifically human cell systems.
[00253] The "control elements" or "regulatory sequences" present in an
expression
vector are those non-translated regions of the vector--enhancers, promoters,
5' and 3'
untranslated regions--which interact with host cellular proteins to carry out
transcription
and translation Such elements may vary in their strength and specificity_
Depending on
the vector system and host utilized, any number of suitable transcription and
translation
elements, including constitutive and inducible promoters, may be used. For
example,
when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as the hybrid lacZ
promoter of the PBLUESCRIPT phagemid (Stratagene, La Jolla, Calif.) or PSPORT1
plasmid (Gibco BRL, Gaithersburg, Md.) and the like may be used. In mammalian
cell
systems, promoters from mammalian genes or from mammalian viruses are
generally
preferred. If it is necessary to generate a cell line that contains multiple
copies of the
sequence encoding a polypeptide, vectors based on SV40 or EBV may be
advantageously used with an appropriate selectable marker.
[00254] In bacterial systems, a number of expression vectors may be selected
depending upon the use intended for the expressed polypeptide. For example,
when
large quantities are needed, vectors which direct high level expression of
fusion
proteins that are readily purified may be used. Such vectors include, but are
not limited
92
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
to, the multifunctional E. coli cloning and expression vectors such as
BLUESCRIPT
(Stratagene), in which the sequence encoding the polypeptide of interest may
be ligated
into the vector in frame with sequences for the amino-terminal Met and the
subsequent
7 residues of 13-galactosidase so that a hybrid protein is produced; pIN
vectors (Van
Heeke & Schuster, J. Biol. Chem. 264:5503 5509 (1989)); and the like. pGEX
Vectors
(Promega, Madison, Wis.) may also be used to express foreign polypeptides as
fusion
proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST). In general, such fusion
proteins are
soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption to
glutathione-agarose
beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione. Proteins made
in such
systems may be designed to include heparin, thrombin, or factor XA protease
cleavage
sites so that the cloned polypeptide of interest can be released from the GST
moiety at
will.
[00255] Certain embodiments may employ E. co/i-based expression systems (see,
e.g., Structural Genomics Consortium et al., Nature Methods. 5:135-146, 2008).
These
and related embodiments may rely partially or totally on ligation-independent
cloning
(LIC) to produce a suitable expression vector. In specific embodiments,
protein
expression may be controlled by a T7 RNA polymerase (e.g., pET vector series).
These
and related embodiments may utilize the expression host strain BL21(DE3), a
XDE3
lysogen of BL21 that supports T7-mediated expression and is deficient in Ion
and ompT
proteases for improved target protein stability. Also included are expression
host
strains carrying plasmids encoding tRNAs rarely used in E. coli, such as
ROSETTATm
(DE3) and Rosetta 2 (DE3) strains. Cell lysis and sample handling may also be
improved using reagents sold under the trademarks BENZONASEO nuclease and
BUGBUSTERa-() Protein Extraction ReagenL For cell culture, auto-inducing media
can
improve the efficiency of many expression systems, including high-throughput
expression systems. Media of this type (e.g., OVERNIGHT EXPRESSTM
Autoinduction System) gradually elicit protein expression through metabolic
shift
without the addition of artificial inducing agents such as IPTG. Particular
embodiments
employ hexahistidine tags (such as those sold under the trademark HIS=TAGO
fusions),
followed by immobilized metal affinity chromatography (IMAC) purification, or
related
techniques. In certain aspects, however, clinical grade proteins can be
isolated from E.
coli inclusion bodies, without or without the use of affinity tags (see, e.g.,
Shimp et al.,
Protein Expr Purif 50:58-67, 2006). As a further example, certain embodiments
may
employ a cold-shock induced E. coli high-yield production system, because over-
expression of proteins in Escherichia coli at low temperature improves their
solubility
and stability (see, e.g., Qing et al., Nature Biotechnology. 22:877-882,
2004).
93
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00256] Also included are high-density bacterial fermentation systems. For
example,
high cell density cultivation of Ralstonia eutropha allows protein production
at cell
densities of over 150 g/L, and the expression of recombinant proteins at
titers exceeding
g/L.
[00257] In the yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae, a number of vectors containing
constitutive or inducible promoters such as alpha factor, alcohol oxidase, and
PGH may
be used. For reviews, see Ausubel et al. (supra) and Grant et al., Methods
Enzymol.
153:516-544 (1987). Also included are Pichia pandoris expression systems (see,
e.g.,
Li et al., Nature Biotechnology. 24, 210 ¨ 215, 2006; and Hamilton et al.,
Science,
301:1244, 2003). Certain embodiments include yeast systems that arc engineered
to
selectively glycosylate proteins, including yeast that have humanized N-
glycosylation
pathways, among others (see, e.g., Hamilton et al., Science. 313:1441-1443,
2006;
Wildt et al., Nature Reviews Microbial. 3:119-28, 2005; and Gemgross et al.,
Nature-
Biotechnology. 22:1409 -1414, 2004; U.S. Patent Nos. 7,629,163; 7,326,681; and
7,029,872). Merely by way of example, recombinant yeast cultures can be grown
in
Fembach Flasks or 15L, 50L, 100L, and 200L fermentors, among others.
[00258] In cases where plant expression vectors are used, the expression of
sequences encoding polypeptides may be driven by any of a number of promoters.
For
example, viral promoters such as the 35S and 19S promoters of CaMV may be used
alone or in combination with the omega leader sequence from TMV (Takamatsu,
EMBO J. 6:307-311(1987)). Alternatively, plant promoters such as the small
subunit
of RUBISCO or heat shock promoters may be used (Coruzzi et al., EMBO 1 3:1671-
1680 (1984); Broglie et al., Science 224:838-843 (1984); and Winter et al.,
Results
Prohl Cell Differ. 17-85-105 (1991)) These constructs can be introduced into
plant
cells by direct DNA transformation or pathogen-mediated transfection. Such
techniques
are described in a number of generally available reviews (see, e.g., Hobbs in
McGraw
Hill, Yearbook of Science and Technology, pp. 191-196 (1992)).
[00259] An insect system may also be used to express a polypeptide of
interest. For
example, in one such system, Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus
(AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes in Spodoptera frugiperda
cells or
in Trichoplusia ni cells. The sequences encoding the polypeptide may be cloned
into a
non-essential region of the virus, such as the polyhedrin gene, and placed
under control
of the polyhedrin promoter. Successful insertion of the polypeptide-encoding
sequence
will render the polyhedrin gene inactive and produce recombinant virus lacking
coat
protein. The recombinant viruses may then be used to infect, for example, S.
frugiperda
cells or Trichoplusia ni cells in which the polypeptide of interest may be
expressed
(Engelhard et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 9/:3224-3227 (1994)). Also
included
94
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
are baculovirus expression systems, including those that utilize SF9, SF21,
and T ni
cells (see, e.g., Murphy and Piwnica-Worms, Curr Protoc Protein Sci. Chapter
5:Unit5.4, 2001). Insect systems can provide post-translation modifications
that are
similar to mammalian systems.
[00260] In mammalian host cells, a number of viral-based expression systems
are
generally available. For example, in cases where an adenovirus is used as an
expression
vector, sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest may be ligated into an
adenovirus
transcription/translation complex consisting of the late promoter and
tripartite leader
sequence. Insertion in a non-essential El or E3 region of the viral genome may
be used
to obtain a viable virus which is capable of expressing the polypcptidc in
infected host
cells (Logan & Shenk, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 8/ :3655-3659 (1984)). In
addition,
transcription enhancers, such as the Rous sarcoma virus (RSV) enhancer, may be
used
to increase expression in mammalian host cells.
[00261] Examples of useful mammalian host cell lines include monkey kidney CV1
line transformed by SV40 (COS-7, ATCC CRL 1651); human embryonic kidney line
(293 or 293 cells sub-cloned for growth in suspension culture, Graham et al.,
J. Gen
Viral. 36:59 (1977)); baby hamster kidney cells (BHK, ATCC CCL 10); mouse
sertoli
cells (TM4, Mather, Biol. Reprod. 23:243-251 (1980)); monkey kidney cells (CV1
ATCC CCL 70); African green monkey kidney cells (VERO-76, ATCC CRL-1587);
human cervical carcinoma cells (HELA, ATCC CCL 2); canine kidney cells (MDCK,
ATCC CCL 34); buffalo rat liver cells (BRL 3A, ATCC CRL 1442); human lung
cells
(W138, ATCC CCL 75); human liver cells (Hep G2, HB 8065); mouse mammary
tumor (MMT 060562, ATCC CCL51); TR1 cells (Mather et al., Annals N.Y. Acad.
Sci. 383.44-68 (1982)); MRC 5 cells; FS4 cells; and a human hepatoma line (Hep
G2)
Other useful mammalian host cell lines include Chinese hamster ovary (CHO)
cells,
including DHFR-CHO cells (Urlaub etal., PNAS USA 77:4216 (1980)); and myeloma
cell lines such as NSO and Sp2/0. For a review of certain mammalian host cell
lines
suitable for antibody production, see, e.g., Yazaki and Wu, Methods in
Molecular
Biology, Vol. 248 (B. K.0 Lo, ed., Humana Press, Totowa, N.J., 2003), pp. 255-
268.
Certain preferred mammalian cell expression systems include CHO and 11EK293-
cell
based expression systems. Mammalian expression systems can utilize attached
cell
lines, for example, in T-flasks, roller bottles, or cell factories, or
suspension cultures,
for example, in 1L and 5L spinners, 5L, 14L, 40L, 100L and 200L stir tank
bioreactors,
or 20/50L and 100/200L WAVE bioreactors, among others known in the art.
[00262] Also included is cell-free expression of proteins. These and related
embodiments typically utilize purified RNA polymerase, ribosomes, tRNA and
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
ribonucleotides; these reagents may be produced by extraction from cells or
from a cell-
based expression system.
[00263] Specific initiation signals may also be used to achieve more efficient
translation of sequences encoding a polypeptide of interest. Such signals
include the
ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. In cases where sequences encoding
the
polypeptide, its initiation codon, and upstream sequences are inserted into
the
appropriate expression vector, no additional transcriptional or translational
control
signals may be needed. However, in cases where only coding sequence, or a
portion
thereof, is inserted, exogenous translational control signals including the
ATG initiation
codon should be provided. Furthermore, the initiation codon should be in the
correct
reading frame to ensure translation of the entire insert. Exogenous
translational
elements and initiation codons may be of various origins, both natural and
synthetic.
The efficiency of expression may be enhanced by the inclusion of enhancers
which are
appropriate for the particular cell system which is used, such as those
described in the
literature (Scharf. et al., Results Probl. Cell Differ. 20:125-162 (1994)).
[00264] In addition, a host cell strain may be chosen for its ability to
modulate the
expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed protein in
the desired
fashion. Such modifications of the polypeptide include, but are not limited
to, post-
translational modifications such as acetylation, carboxylation, glycosylation,
phosphorylation, lipidation, and acylation. Post-translational processing
which cleaves
a "prepro" form of the protein may also be used to facilitate correct
insertion, folding
and/or function. Different host cells such as yeast, CHO, HeLa, MDCK, HEK293,
and
W138, in addition to bacterial cells, which have or even lack specific
cellular
machinery and characteristic mechanisms for such post-translational
activities, may be
chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign
protein.
[00265] For long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins, stable
expression is generally preferred. For example, cell lines which stably
express a
polynucleotide of interest may be transformed using expression vectors which
may
contain viral origins of replication and/or endogenous expression elements and
a
selectable marker gene on the same or on a separate vector. Following the
introduction
of the vector, cells may be allowed to grow for about 1-2 days in an enriched
media
before they are switched to selective media. The purpose of the selectable
marker is to
confer resistance to selection, and its presence allows growth and recovery of
cells
which successfully express the introduced sequences. Resistant clones of
stably
transformed cells may be proliferated using tissue culture techniques
appropriate to the
cell type. Transient production, such as by transient transfection or
infection, can also
96
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
be employed. Exemplary mammalian expression systems that are suitable for
transient
production include HEK293 and CHO-based systems.
[00266] Any number of selection systems may be used to recover transformed or
transduced cell lines. These include, but are not limited to, the herpes
simplex virus
thymidine kinase (Wigler et al., Cell 11:223-232 (1977)) and adenine
phosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy et al., Cell 22:817-823 (1990)) genes which
can be
employed in tk- or aprt- cells, respectively. Also, antimetabolite, antibiotic
or herbicide
resistance can be used as the basis for selection; for example, dhfr which
confers
resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.
77:3567-70
(1980)); npt, which confers resistance to the aminoglycosides, neomycin and G-
418
(Colbere-Garapin et al., J. Mol. Biol. 150:1-14 (1981)); and als or pat, which
confer
resistance to chlorsulfuron and phosphinotricin acetyltransferase,
respectively (Murry,
supra). Additional selectable genes have been described, for example, trpB,
which
allows cells to utilize indole in place of tryptophan, or hisD, which allows
cells to
utilize histinol in place of histidine (Hartman & Mulligan, Proc. Natl. Acad.
Sci. U.S.A.
85:8047-51 (1988)). The use of visible markers has gained popularity with such
markers as green fluorescent protein (GFP) and other fluorescent proteins
(e.g., RFP,
YFP), anthocyanins, 13-glucuronidase and its substrate GUS, and luciferase and
its
substrate luciferin, being widely used not only to identify transformants, but
also to
quantify the amount of transient or stable protein expression attributable to
a specific
vector system (see, e.g., Rhodes et al., Methods Mol. Biol. 55:121-131
(1995)).
[00267] Embodiments of the present invention also include high-throughput
protein
production systems, or micro-production systems. Certain aspects may utilize,
for
example, hexa-histidine fusion tags for protein expression and purification on
metal
chelate-modified slide surfaces or MagneHis Ni-Particles (see, e.g., Kwon et
al., BMC
Biotechnol. 9:72, 2009; and Lin et al., Methods Mol Biol. 498:129-41, 2009)).
Also
included are high-throughput cell-free protein expression systems (see, e.g.,
Sitaraman
et al., Methods Mot. Biol. 498:229-44, 2009). These and related embodiments
can be
used, for example, to generate microarrays of AARS protein fragment(s), which
can
then be used for screening libraries to identify agents that interact with the
AARS
protein fragment(s).
[00268] A variety of protocols for detecting and measuring the expression of
polynucleotide-encoded products, using binding agents or antibodies such as
polyclonal
or monoclonal antibodies specific for the product, are known in the art.
Examples
include enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELI SA), western immunoblots,
radioimmunoassays (RIA), and fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS). These
and
97
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
other assays are described, among other places, in Hampton et al., Serological
Methods,
a Laboratory Manual (1990) and Maddox et al.,1 Exp. Med. 158:1211-1216 (1983).
[00269] A wide variety of labels and conjugation techniques are known by those
skilled in the art and may be used in various nucleic acid and amino acid
assays. Means
for producing labeled hybridization or PCR probes for detecting sequences
related to
polynucleoti des include oligolabeling, nick translation, end-labeling or PCR
amplification using a labeled nucleotide. Alternatively, the sequences, or any
portions
thereof may be cloned into a vector for the production of an mRNA probe. Such
vectors
are known in the art, are commercially available, and may be used to
synthesize RNA
probes in vitro by addition of an appropriate RNA polymerase such as T7, T3,
or SP6
and labeled nucleotides. These procedures may be conducted using a variety of
commercially available kits. Suitable reporter molecules or labels, which may
be used
include radionuclides, enzymes, fluorescent, chemiluminescent, or chromogenic
agents
as well as substrates, cofactors, inhibitors, magnetic particles, and the
like.
[00270] Host cells transformed with a polynucleotide sequence of interest may
be
cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the
protein from
cell culture. Certain specific embodiments utilize serum free cell expression
systems.
Examples include HEK293 cells and CHO cells that can be grown on serum free
medium (see, e.g., Rosser et al., Protein Expr. Purif. 40:237-43, 2005; and
U.S. Patent
number 6,210,922).
[00271] The protein produced by a recombinant cell may be secreted or
contained
intracellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used. As will be
understood
by those of skill in the art, expression vectors containing polynucleotides of
the
invention may be designed to contain signal sequences which direct secretion
of the
encoded polypeptide through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane. Other
recombinant constructions may be used to join sequences encoding a polypeptide
of
interest to nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide domain which will
facilitate
purification and / or detection of soluble proteins. Examples of such domains
include
cleavable and non-cleavable affinity purification and epitope tags such as
avidin, FLAG
tags, poly-histidine tags (e.g., 6xHis), cMyc tags, VS-tags, glutathione S-
transferase
(GST) tags, and others.
[00272] The protein produced by a recombinant cell can be purified and
characterized according to a variety of techniques known in the art. Exemplary
systems
for performing protein purification and analyzing protein purity include fast
protein
liquid chromatography (FPLC) (e.g., AKTA and Bio-Rad FPLC systems), high-
pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) (e.g., Beckman and Waters HPLC).
Exemplary chemistries for purification include ion exchange chromatography
(e.g., Q,
98
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
S), size exclusion chromatography, salt gradients, affinity purification
(e.g., Ni, Co,
FLAG, maltose, glutathione, protein A/G), gel filtration, reverse-phase,
ceramic
HYPERDO ion exchange chromatography, and hydrophobic interaction columns
(HIC), among others known in the art. Also included are analytical methods
such as
SDS-PAGE (e.g., coomassie, silver stain), immunoblot, Bradford, and ELISA,
which
may be utilized during any step of the production or purification process,
typically to
measure the purity of the protein composition.
[00273] Also included are methods of concentrating AARS protein fragments, and
composition comprising concentrated soluble proteins. In different aspects
such
concentrated solutions of AARS polypeptides may comprise proteins at a
concentration
of about 5 mg/mL; or about 8 mg1mL; or about 10 mg/mL; about 15 mg/mL; or
about
20 mg/mL.
[00274] In one aspect such compositions may be substantially monodisperse,
meaning that the AARS polypeptide compositions exist primarily (i.e. at least
about
90%, or greater) in one apparent molecular weight faun when assessed for
example, by
size exclusion chromatography, dynamic light scattering, or analytical
ultracentrifugation.
[00275] In another aspect, such compositions have a purity (on a protein
basis) of at
least about 90%, or in some aspects at least about 95% purity, or in some
embodiments,
at least 98% purity. Purity may be determined via any routine analytical
method as
known in the art.
[00276] In another aspect, such compositions have a high molecular weight
aggregate content of less than about 10%, compared to the total amount of
protein
present, or in some embodiments such compositions have a high molecular weight
aggregate content of less than about 5%, or in some aspects such compositions
have a
high molecular weight aggregate content of less than about 3%, or in some
embodiments a high molecular weight aggregate content of less than about 1%.
High
molecular weight aggregate content may be determined via a variety of
analytical
techniques including for example, by size exclusion chromatography, dynamic
light
scattering, or analytical ultracentrifugation.
[00277] In certain embodiments, as noted herein, the AARS polypeptide
compositions have an endotoxin content of less than about 10 EU / mg of AARS
polypeptide, or less than about 5 EU / mg of AARS polypeptide, less than about
3 EU /
mg of AARS polypeptide, or less than about 1 EU / mg of AARS polypeptide.
[00278] Examples of concentration approaches contemplated herein include
lyophilization, which is typically employed when the solution contains few
soluble
components other than the protein of interest. Lyophilization is often
performed after
99
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
HPLC run, and can remove most or all volatile components from the mixture.
Also
included are ultrafiltration techniques, which typically employ one or more
selective
permeable membranes to concentrate a protein solution. The membrane allows
water
and small molecules to pass through and retains the protein; the solution can
be forced
against the membrane by mechanical pump, gas pressure, or centrifugation,
among
other techniques.
[00279] In certain embodiments, the reagents, AARS protein fragments, or
related
agents (e.g., antibodies) have a purity of at least about 90%, as measured
according to
routine techniques in the art. In certain embodiments, such as diagnostic
compositions
or certain therapeutic compositions, the AARS compositions of the present
invention
have a purity of at least about 95%. In specific embodiments, such as
therapeutic or
pharmaceutical compositions, the AARS compositions of the present invention
have a
purity of at least about 97% or 98% or 99%. In other embodiments, such as when
being
used as reference or research reagents, AARS protein fragments can be of
lesser purity,
and may have a purity of at least about 50%, 60%, 70%, or 80%. Purity can be
measured overall or in relation to selected components, such as other
proteins, e.g.,
purity on a protein basis.
[00280] Purified AARS protein fragments can also be characterized according to
their biological characteristics. Examples include binding affinity or binding
kinetics to
a selected ligand (e.g., a cellular binding partner of the AARS protein
fragment such as
a cell-surface receptor or an extracellular domain thereof), and the presence
or levels of
one or more canonical or non-canonical biological activity, as described
herein.
Binding affinity and binding kinetics can be measured according to a variety
of
techniques known in the art, such as Biacore4-z) and related technologies that
utilize
surface plasmon resonance (SPR), an optical phenomenon that enables detection
of
unlabeled interactants in real time. SPR-based biosensors can be used in
determination
of active concentration, screening and characterization in terms of both
affinity and
kinetics. The presence or levels of one or more canonical or non-canonical
biological
activities can be measured according to cell-based assays, including those
that utilize a
cellular binding partner (e.g., cell-surface receptor) of a selected AARS
protein
fragment, which is functionally coupled to a readout or indicator, such as a
fluorescent
or luminescent indicator of a non-canonical biological activity, as described
herein.
[00281] In certain embodiments, as noted above, the AARS polypeptide
compositions are about substantially endotoxin free, including, for example,
about 95%
endotoxin free, preferably about 99% endotoxin free, and more preferably about
99.99% endotoxin free. The presence of endotoxins can be detected according to
routine techniques in the art, as described herein. In specific embodiments,
the AARS
100
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
compositions are made from a eukaryotic cell such as a mammalian or human cell
in
substantially serum free media.
[00282] In certain embodiments, the AARS polypeptide compositions comprise
less
than about 10% wt/wt high molecular weight aggregates, or less than about 5%
wt/wt
high molecular weight aggregates, or less than about 2% wt/wt high molecular
weight
aggregates, or less than about or less than about 1% wt,/wt high molecular
weight
aggregates.
[00283] Also included are protein-based analytical assays and methods, which
can be
used to assess, for example, protein purity, size, solubility, and degree of
aggregation,
among other characteristics. Protein purity can be assessed a number of ways.
For
instance, purity can be assessed based on primary structure, higher order
structure, size,
charge, hydrophobicity, and glycosylation. Examples of methods for assessing
primary
structure include N- and C-terminal sequencing and peptide-mapping (see, e.g.,
Allen et
at., Biologicals. 24:255-275, 1996)). Examples of methods for assessing higher
order
structure include circular dichroism (see, e.g., Kelly et at., Biochim Biophys
Acta.
1751:119-139, 2005), fluorescent spectroscopy (see, e.g., Meagher et at., J.
Biol. Chem.
273:23283-89, 1998), FT-IR, amide hydrogen-deuterium exchange kinetics,
differential
scanning calorimetry, NMR spectroscopy, immunoreactivity with conformationally
sensitive antibodies. Higher order structure can also be assessed as a
function of a
variety of parameters such as pH, temperature, or added salts. Examples of
methods for
assessing protein characteristics such as size include analytical
ultracentrifugation and
size exclusion HPLC (SEC-HPLC), and exemplary methods for measuring charge
include ion-exchange chromatography and isolectric focusing. Hydrophobicity
can be
assessed, for example, by reverse-phase HPLC and hydrophobic interaction
chromatography HPLC. Glycosylation can affect pharmacokinetics (e.g.,
clearance),
conformation or stability, receptor binding, and protein function, and can be
assessed,
for example, by mass spectrometry and nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR)
spectroscopy.
[00284] As noted above, certain embodiments include the use of SEC-HPLC to
assess protein characteristics such as purity, size (e.g., size homogeneity)
or degree of
aggregation, and/or to purify proteins, among other uses. SEC, also including
gel-
filtration chromatography (GFC) and gel-permeation chromatography (GPC),
refers to a
chromatographic method in which molecules in solution are separated in a
porous
material based on their size, or more specifically their hydrodynamic volume,
diffusion
coefficient, and/or surface properties. The process is generally used to
separate
biological molecules, and to determine molecular weights and molecular weight
distributions of polymers. Typically, a biological or protein sample (such as
a protein
101
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
extract produced according to the protein expression methods provided herein
and
known in the art) is loaded into a selected size-exclusion column with a
defined
stationary phase (the porous material), preferably a phase that does not
interact with the
proteins in the sample. In certain aspects, the stationary phase is composed
of inert
particles packed into a dense three-dimensional matrix within a glass or steel
column.
The mobile phase can be pure water, an aqueous buffer, an organic solvent, or
a mixture
thereof. The stationary-phase particles typically have small pores and/or
channels
which only allow molecules below a certain size to enter. Large particles are
therefore
excluded from these pores and channels, and their limited interaction with the
stationary
phase leads them to elute as a "totally-excluded" peak at the beginning of the
experiment. Smaller molecules, which can fit into the pores, are removed from
the
flowing mobile phase, and the time they spend immobilized in the stationary-
phase
pores depends, in part, on how far into the pores they penetrate. Their
removal from the
mobile phase flow causes them to take longer to elute from the column and
results in a
separation between the particles based on differences in their size. A given
size
exclusion column has a range of molecular weights that can be separated.
Overall,
molecules larger than the upper limit will not be trapped by the stationary
phase,
molecules smaller than the lower limit will completely enter the solid phase
and elute as
a single band, and molecules within the range will elute at different rates,
defined by
their properties such as hydrodynamic volume. For examples of these methods in
practice with pharmaceutical proteins, see Bruner et al., Journal of
Pharmaceutical and
Biomedical Analysis. 15: 1929-1935, 1997.
[00285] Protein purity for clinical applications is also discussed, for
example, by
Anicetti et al (Trendy in Biotechnology_ 7:342-349, 1989). More recent
techniques for
analyzing protein purity include, without limitation, the LabChip GXII, an
automated
platform for rapid analysis of proteins and nucleic acids, which provides high
throughput analysis of titer, sizing, and purity analysis of proteins. In
certain non-
limiting embodiments, clinical grade proteins such as protein fragments and
antibodies
can be obtained by utilizing a combination of chromatographic materials in at
least two
orthogonal steps, among other methods (see, e.g., Therapeutic Proteins:
Methods and
Protocols. Vol. 308, Eds., Smales and James, Humana Press Inc., 2005).
Typically,
protein agents (e.g., AARS protein fragments, antibodies, binding agents) and
other
agents (e.g., antisense, RNAi, small molecules) are substantially endotoxin-
free, as
measured according to techniques known in the art and described herein.
[00286] Protein solubility assays are also included. Such assays can be
utilized, for
example, to determine optimal growth and purification conditions for
recombinant
production, to optimize the choice of buffer(s), and to optimize the choice of
AARS
102
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
protein fragments or variants thereof. Solubility or aggregation can be
evaluated
according to a variety of parameters, including temperature, pH, salts, and
the presence
or absence of other additives. Examples of solubility screening assays
include, without
limitation, microplate-based methods of measuring protein solubility using
turbidity or
other measure as an end point, high-throughput assays for analysis of the
solubility of
purified recombinant proteins (see, e.g., Stenvall et al., Biochith Biophys
Acta. 1752:6-
10, 2005), assays that use structural complementation of a genetic marker
protein to
monitor and measure protein folding and solubility in vivo (see, e.g., 'Wigley
et at.,
Nature Biotechnology. 19:131-136, 2001), and electrochemical screening of
recombinant protein solubility in Escherichia coli using scanning
electrochemical
microscopy (SECM) (see, e.g., Nagamine et at., Biotechnology and
Bioengineering.
96:1008-1013, 2006), among others. AARS protein fragments with increased
solubility
(or reduced aggregation) can be identified or selected for according to
routine
techniques in the art, including simple in vivo assays for protein solubility
(see, e.g.,
Maxwell et al., Protein Sci. 8:1908-11, 1999).
[00287] Protein solubility and aggregation can also be measured by dynamic
light
scattering techniques. Aggregation is a general term that encompasses several
types of
interactions or characteristics, including soluble/insoluble,
covalent/noneovalent,
reversible/irreversible, and native/denatured interactions and
characteristics. For
protein therapeutics, the presence of aggregates is typically considered
undesirable
because of the concern that aggregates may cause an immunogenic reaction
(e.g., small
aggregates), or may cause adverse events on administration (e.g.,
particulates).
Dynamic light scattering refers to a technique that can be used to determine
the size
distribution profile of small particles in suspension or polymers such as
proteins in
solution. This technique, also referred to as photon correlation spectroscopy
(PCS) or
quasi-elastic light scattering (QELS), uses scattered light to measure the
rate of
diffusion of the protein particles. Fluctuations of the scattering intensity
can be
observed due to the Brownian motion of the molecules and particles in
solution. This
motion data can be conventionally processed to derive a size distribution for
the sample,
wherein the size is given by the Stokes radius or hydrodynamic radius of the
protein
particle. The hydrodynamic size depends on both mass and shape (conformation).
Dynamic scattering can detect the presence of very small amounts of aggregated
protein
(<0.01% by weight), even in samples that contain a large range of masses. It
can also
be used to compare the stability of different formulations, including, for
example,
applications that rely on real-time monitoring of changes at elevated
temperatures.
Accordingly, certain embodiments include the use of dynamic light scattering
to
103
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
analyze the solubility and/or presence of aggregates in a sample that contains
an AARS
protein fragment, antibody, or other agent of the invention.
IX DIAGNOSTIC METHODS AND COMPOSITIONS
[00288] AARS agents such as AARS protein fragments, AARS polynucleotides, and
antibodies and other binding agents described herein can be used in diagnostic
assays
and diagnostic compositions. Included are biochemical, histological, and cell-
based
methods and compositions, among others.
[00289] These and related embodiments include the detection of the AARS
polynucleotide sequence(s) or corresponding AARS polypeptide sequence(s) or
portions thereof of one or more newly identified AARS protein fragments, also
referred
to as AARS polypeptides. For instance, certain aspects include detection of
the AARS
polynucleotide sequence(s) or corresponding polypeptide sequence(s) or
portions
thereof of one or more newly identified AARS splice variants, and/or one or
more
splice junctions of those splice variants. In certain embodiments, the
polyrtucleotide or
corresponding polypeptide sequence(s) of at least one of the splice junctions
is unique
to that particular AARS splice variant.
[00290] Also included is the direct detection of AARS protein fragments,
including
splice variants, proteolytic fragments, and others. In certain embodiments,
the presence
or levels of one or more newly identified AARS protein fragments associate or
correlate
with one or more cellular types or cellular states. Hence, the presence or
levels of an
AARS polypeptide or polynucleotide can be used to distinguish between
different
cellular types or different cellular states. The presence or levels of AARS
protein
fragments or their related polynucleotides can be detected according to
polynucleotide
and/or polypeptide-based diagnostic techniques, as described herein and known
in the
art.
[00291] Certain aspects can employ the AARS protein fragments, antibody, or
AARS polynucleotides as part of a companion diagnostic method, typically to
assess
whether a subject or population subjects will respond favorably to a specific
medical
treatment. For instance, a given AARS therapeutic agent (e.g., protein
fragment,
antisense, RNAi, antibody, binding agent) could be identified as suitable for
a subject or
certain populations of subjects based on whether the subject(s) have one or
more
selected biomarkers for a given disease or condition. Examples of biomarkers
include
serum/tissue markers as well as markers that can be identified by medical
imaging
techniques. In certain embodiments, a naturally-occurring AARS protein
fragment (or
its corresponding polynucleotide) may itself provide a serum and/or tissue
biomarker
that can be utilized to measure drug outcome or assess the desirability of
drug use in a
104
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
specific subject or a specific population of subjects. In
certain aspects, the
identification of an AARS polypeptide or polynucleotide reference sequence may
include characterizing the differential expression of that sequence, whether
in a selected
subject, selected tissue, or otherwise, as described herein and known in the
art.
[00292] Certain of the methods provided herein rely on the differential
expression of
an AARS polypeptide or polynucleotide to characterize the condition or state
of a cell,
tissue, or subject, and to distinguish it from another cell, tissue, or
subject. Non-
limiting examples include methods of detecting the presence or levels of an
AARS
polypeptide or polynucleotide in a biological sample to distinguish between
cells or
tissues of different species, cells of different tissues or organs, cellular
developmental
states such as neonatal and adult, cellular differentiation states, conditions
such as
healthy, diseased and treated, intracellular and extracellular fractions, in
addition to
primary cell cultures and other cell cultures, such as immortalized cell
cultures.
[00293] Differential expression includes a statistically significant
difference in one
or more gene expression levels of an AARS polynucleotide or polypeptide
reference
sequence compared to the expression levels of the same sequence in an
appropriate
control. The statistically significant difference may relate to either an
increase or a
decrease in expression levels, as measured by RNA levels, protein levels,
protein
function, or any other relevant measure of gene expression such as those
described
herein. Also included is a comparison between an AARS polynucleotide or
polypeptide
of the invention and a full-length or wild-type cytosolic or mitochondrial
AARS
sequence, typically of the same or corresponding type. Differential expression
can be
detected by a variety of techniques in the art and described herein, including
polynucleotide and polypeptide based techniques, such as real-time PCR,
subtractive
hybridization, polynucleotide and polypeptide arrays, and others.
[00294] A result is typically referred to as statistically significant if it
is unlikely to
have occurred by chance. The significance level of a test or result relates
traditionally
to a frequentist statistical hypothesis testing concept. In simple cases,
statistical
significance may be defined as the probability of making a decision to reject
the null
hypothesis when the null hypothesis is actually true (a decision known as a
Type 1 error,
or "false positive determination"). This decision is often made using the p-
value: if the
p-value is less than the significance level, then the null hypothesis is
rejected. The
smaller the p-value, the more significant the result. Bayes factors may also
be utilized
to determine statistical significance (see, e.g., Goodman S., Ann Intern Med
130:1005-
13, 1999).
[00295] In more complicated, but practically important cases, the significance
level
of a test or result may reflect an analysis in which the probability of making
a decision
105
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
to reject the null hypothesis when the null hypothesis is actually true is no
more than the
stated probability. This type of analysis allows for those applications in
which the
probability of deciding to reject may be much smaller than the significance
level for
some sets of assumptions encompassed within the null hypothesis.
[00296] In certain exemplary embodiments, statistically significant
differential
expression may include situations wherein the expression level of a given AARS
sequence provides at least about a 1.2X, 1.3X, 1.4X, 1.5X, 1.6X, 1.7X, 1.8X,
1.9X,
2.0X, 2.2X, 2.4X, 2.6X, 2,8X, 3.0X, 4.0X, 5.0X, 6.0X, 7.0X, 8.0X, 9.0X, 10.0X,
15.0X, 20.0X, 50.0X, 100.0X, or greater difference in expression (i.e.,
differential
expression that may be higher or lower expression) in a suspected biological
sample as
compared to an appropriate control, including all integers and decimal points
in
between (e.g., 1.24X, 1.25X, 2.1X, 2.5X, 60.0X, 75.0X, etc.). In certain
embodiments,
statistically significant differential expression may include situations
wherein the
expression level of a given AARS sequence provides at least about 4, 5, 6, 7,
8, 9, 10,
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80,
90, 100, 200,
300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 percent (%) or greater difference in
expression
(i.e., differential expression that may be higher or lower) in a suspected
biological
sample as compared to an appropriate control, including all integers and
decimal points
in between.
[00297] As an additional example, differential expression may also be
determined by
performing Z-testing, i.e., calculating an absolute Z score, as described
herein and
known in the art (see Example 1). Z-testing is typically utilized to identify
significant
differences between a sample mean and a population mean. For example, as
compared
to a standard normal table (e_g , a control tissue), at a 95% confidence
interval (Le_ at
the 5% significance level), a Z-score with an absolute value greater than 1.96
indicates
non-randomness. For a 99% confidence interval, if the absolute Z is greater
than 2.58,
it means that p<.01, and the difference is even more significant-the null
hypothesis
can be rejected with greater confidence. In these and related embodiments, an
absolute
Z-score of 1.96, 2, 2.58, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17,
18, 19, 20 or
more, including all decimal points in between (e.g., 10.1, 10.6, 11.2, etc.),
may provide
a strong measure of statistical significance. In certain embodiments, an
absolute Z-
score of greater than 6 may provide exceptionally high statistical
significance.
[00298] Substantial similarly relates generally to the lack of a statistically
significant
difference in the expression levels between the biological sample and the
reference
control. Examples of substantially similar expression levels may include
situations
wherein the expression level of a given SSCIGS provides less than about a
.05X, 0.1X,
0.2X, 0.3X, 0.4X, 0.5X, 0.6X, 0.7X, 0.8X, 0.9X, 1.0X, 1.1X, 1.2X, 1.3X, or
1.4X
106
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
difference in expression (i.e., differential expression that may be higher or
lower
expression) in a suspected biological sample as compared to a reference
sample,
including all decimal points in between (e.g., .15X, 0.25X, 0.35X, etc.). In
certain
embodiments, differential expression may include situations wherein the
expression
level of a given AARS sequence provides less than about 0.25. 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 30, 40, 50 percent (%)
difference in
expression (i.e., differential expression that may be higher or lower) in a
suspected
biological sample as compared to a reference sample, including all decimal
points in
between.
[00299] In certain embodiments, such as when using an Affymetrix Microarray to
measure the expression levels of an AARS polynucleotide or polypeptide
reference
sequence, differential expression may also be determined by the mean
expression value
summarized by Affymetrix Microarray Suite 5 software (Affymetrix, Santa Clara,
CA),
or other similar software, typically with a scaled mean expression value of
1000.
[00300] Embodiments of the present invention include methods of detecting the
presence or levels of an AARS polynucleotide or polypeptide reference sequence
or a
portion thereof to distinguish between cells or tissues or other biological
sample of a
different organism or species, wherein the presence or levels of that sequence
associates
with a selected organism or species. General
examples include methods of
distinguishing between humans and any combination of bacteria, fungi, plants,
and
other non-human animals. Included within animals arc methods of distinguishing
between humans and any combination of vertebrates and invertebrates, including
vertebrates such as fish, amphibians, reptiles, birds, and non-human mammals,
and
invertebrates such as insects, mollusks, crustaceans, and corals Included
within non-
human mammals are methods of distinguishing between humans and any combination
of non-human mammals from the Order Afrosoricida, Macroscelidea,
Tubulidentata,
Hyracoidea, Proboscidea, Sirenia, Cingulata, Pilosa, Scandentia, Dermoptera,
Primates,
Rodentia, Lagomorpha, Erinaceomorpha, Soricomorpha, Chiroptera, Pholidota,
Cetacea, Camivora, Perissodactyla, or Artiodactyla. Included within the
Primate Order
are monkeys, apes, gorillas, and chimpanzees, among others known in the art.
Accordingly, the presence or levels of an AARS polynucleotide or polypeptide
reference sequence or variant, as described herein, may be used to identify
the source of
a given biological sample, such as a cell, tissue, or organ, by distinguishing
between
any combination of these organisms, or by distinguishing between humans and
any one
or more of these organisms, such as a panel of organisms. In certain
embodiments, the
source of a given biological sample may also be determined by comparing the
presence
or levels of an AARS sequence or a portion thereof to a pre-determined value.
107
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00301] Embodiments of the present invention include methods of detecting the
presence or levels of an AARS polynucleotide or polypeptide reference sequence
or a
portion thereof to distinguish between cells or other biological samples that
originate
from different tissues or organs. Non-limiting examples include methods of
distinguishing between a cell or other biological sample that originates from
any
combination of skin (e.g., dermis, epidermis, subcutaneous layer), hair
follicles,
nervous system (e.g., brain, spinal cord, peripheral nerves), auditory system
or balance
organs (e.g., inner ear, middle ear, outer ear), respiratory system (e.g.,
nose, trachea,
lungs), gastroesophogeal tissues, the gastrointestinal system (e.g., mouth,
esophagus,
stomach, small intestines, large intestines, rectum), vascular system (e.g.,
heart, blood
vessels and arteries), liver, gallbladder, lymphatic/immune system (e.g.,
lymph nodes,
lymphoid follicles, spleen, thymus, bone marrow), uro-genital system (e.g.,
kidneys,
ureter, bladder, urethra, cervix, Fallopian tubes, ovaries, uterus, vulva,
prostate,
bulbourethral glands, epididymis, prostate, seminal vesicles, testicles),
musculoskeletal
system (e.g., skeletal muscles, smooth muscles, bone, cartilage, tendons,
ligaments),
adipose tissue, mammary tissue, and the endocrine system (e.g., hypothalamus,
pituitary, thyroid, pancreas, adrenal glands). Hence, based on the association
of an
AARS polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence as described herein, these methods
may
be used to identify or characterize the tissue or organ from which a cell or
other
biological sample is derived.
[00302] Embodiments of the present invention include methods of detecting the
presence or levels of an AARS polynucleotide or polypeptide reference sequence
or a
portion thereof to distinguish between or characterize the developmental or
differentiation state of the cell Also included are methods of differentiating
between
germ cells, stem cells, and somatic cells. Examples of developmental states
include
neonatal and adult. Examples of cellular differentiation states include all of
the discreet
and identifiable stages between a totipotent cell, a pluripotent cell, a
multipotent
progenitor stem cell and a mature, fully differentiated cell.
[00303] A totipotent cell has total potential, typically arises during sexual
and
asexual reproduction, and includes and spores and zygotes, though in certain
instances
cells can dedifferentiate and regain totipotency. A pluripotent cell includes
a stem cell
that has the potential to differentiate into any of the three germ layers,
including the
endoderm (interior stomach lining, gastrointestinal tract, the lungs), the
mesoderm
(muscle, bone, blood, urogenital), and the ectoderm (epidermal tissues and
nervous
system). Multipotent progenitor cells are typically capable of differentiating
into a
limited number of tissue types. Examples of multipotent cells include, without
limitation, hematopoietic stem cells (adult stem cells) from the bone marrow
that give
108
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
rise to immune cells such as red blood cells, white blood cells, and
platelets,
mesenchymal stem cells (adult stem cells) from the bone marrow that give rise
to
stromal cells, fat cells, and various types of bone cells, epithelial stem
cells (progenitor
cells) that give rise to the various types of skin cells, and muscle satellite
cells
(progenitor cells) that contribute to differentiated muscle tissue.
Accordingly, the
presence or levels of particular AARS polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence
(e.g.,
splice junction of an AARS splice variant, AARS proteolytic fragment), can be
used to
distinguish between or characterize the above-noted cellular differentiation
states, as
compared to a control or a predetermined level.
[00304] Embodiments of the present invention include methods of detecting the
presence or levels of an AARS polynucleotide or polypeptide reference sequence
to
characterize or diagnose the condition or a cell, tissue, organ, or subject,
in which that
condition may be characterized as healthy, diseased, at risk for being
diseased, or
treated. For such diagnostic purposes, the term "diagnostic" or "diagnosed"
includes
identifying the presence or nature of a pathologic condition, characterizing
the risk of
developing such a condition, and/or measuring the change (or no change) of a
pathologic condition in response to therapy. Diagnostic methods may differ in
their
sensitivity and specificity. In certain embodiments, the "sensitivity" of a
diagnostic
assay refers to the percentage of diseased cells, tissues or subjects which
test positive
(percent of "true positives"). Diseased cells, tissues or subjects not
detected by the
assay are typically referred to as "false negatives." Cells, tissues or
subjects that are not
diseased and which test negative in the assay may be termed "true negatives."
In
certain embodiments, the "specificity" of a diagnostic assay may be defined as
one (1)
minus the false positive rate, where the "false positive" rate is defined as
the proportion
of those samples or subjects without the disease and which test positive.
While a
particular diagnostic method may not provide a definitive diagnosis of a
condition, it
suffices if the method provides a positive indication that aids in diagnosis.
[00305] In certain instances, the presence or risk of developing a pathologic
condition can be diagnosed by comparing the presence or levels of one or more
selected
AARS polynucleotide or polypeptide reference sequences or portions thereof
that
correlate with the condition, whether by increased or decreased levels, as
compared to a
suitable control. A "suitable control" or "appropriate control" includes a
value, level,
feature, characteristic, or property determined in a cell or other biological
sample of a
tissue or organism, e.g., a control or normal cell, tissue or organism,
exhibiting, for
example, normal traits, such as the absence of the condition. In certain
embodiments, a
"suitable control" or "appropriate control" is a predefined value, level,
feature,
109
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
characteristic, or property. Other suitable controls will be apparent to
persons skilled in
the art. Examples of diseases and conditions are described elsewhere herein.
[00306] Embodiments of the present invention include AARS polynucleotide or
nucleic acid-based detection techniques, which offer certain advantages due to
sensitivity of detection. Hence, certain embodiments relate to the use or
detection of
AARS polynucleotides as part of a diagnostic method or assay. The presence
and/or
levels of AARS polynucleotides may be measured by any method known in the art,
including hybridization assays such as Northern blot, quantitative or
qualitative
polymerase chain reaction (PCR), quantitative or qualitative reverse
transcriptase PCR
(RT-PCR), microarray, dot or slot blots, or in situ hybridization such as
fluorescent in
situ hybridization (FISH), among others. Certain of these methods are
described in
greater detail below.
[00307] AARS polynucleotides such as DNA and RNA can be collected and/or
generated from blood, biological fluids, tissues, organs, cell lines, or other
relevant
sample using techniques known in the art, such as those described in Kingston.
(2002
Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Greene Publ. Assoc. Inc. & John Wiley
&
Sons, Inc., NY, NY (see, e.g., as described by Nelson et al. Proc Arad Acad
Sci US A,
99: 11890-11895, 2002) and elsewhere. Further, a variety of commercially
available
kits for constructing RNA are useful for making the RNA to be used in the
present
invention. RNA may be constructed from organs/tissues/cells procured from
normal
healthy subjects; however, this invention also contemplates construction of
RNA from
diseased subjects. Certain embodiments contemplate using any type of organ
from any
type of subject or animal. For test samples RNA may be procured from an
individual
(e_g , any animal, including mammals) with or without visible disease and from
tissue
samples, biological fluids (e.g., whole blood) or the like.
[00308] In certain embodiments, amplification or construction of cDNA
sequences
may be helpful to increase detection capabilities. The instant disclosure, as
well as the
art, provides the requisite level of detail to perform such tasks. In one
exemplary
embodiment, whole blood is used as the source of RNA and accordingly, RNA
stabilizing reagents are optionally used, such as PAX tubes, as described, for
example,
in Thach et al., J. Itnmunol. Methods. Dec 283(1-2):269-279, 2003 and Chai et
al., J.
Clin. Lab Anal. 19(5):182-188, 2005
Complementary DNA (cDNA) libraries can be generated using techniques known in
the
art, such as those described in Ausubel et al. (2001 Current Protocols in
Molecular
Biology, Greene Publ. Assoc. Inc. & John Wiley & Sons, Inc., NY, NY); Sambrook
et
al. (1989 Molecular Cloning, Second Ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory,
Plainview,
NY); Maniatis et al. (1982 Molecular Cloning, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory,
110
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Plainview, NY) and elsewhere. Further, a variety of commercially available
kits for
constructing cDNA libraries are useful for making the cDNA libraries of the
present
invention. Libraries can be constructed from organs/tissues/cells procured
from normal,
healthy subjects.
[00309] Certain embodiments may employ hybridization methods for detecting
AARS polynucleotide sequences. Methods for conducting polynucleotide
hybridization
assays have been well developed in the art. Hybridization assay procedures and
conditions will vary depending on the application and are selected in
accordance with
the general binding methods known including those referred to in: Maniatis et
al.
Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (2nd Ed. Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.,
1989);
Berger and Kimmel Methods in Enzymology, Vol. 152, Guide to Molecular Cloning
Techniques (Academic Press, Inc., San Diego, Calif., 1987); Young and Davis,
PNAS.
80: 1194 (1983). Methods and apparatus for carrying out repeated and
controlled
hybridization reactions have been described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,871,928,
5,874,219,
6,045,996 and 6,386,749, 6,391,623.
[00310] Certain embodiments may employ nucleic acid amplification methods for
detecting AARS polynucleotide sequences. The term "amplification" or "nucleic
acid
amplification" refers to the production of multiple copies of a target nucleic
acid that
contains at least a portion of the intended specific target nucleic acid
sequence. The
multiple copies may be referred to as amplicons or amplification products. In
certain
embodiments, the amplified target contains less than the complete target gene
sequence
(introns and exons) or an expressed target gene sequence (spliced transcript
of exons
and flanking untranslated sequences). For example, specific amplicons may be
produced by amplifying a portion of the target polynucleotide by using
amplification
primers that hybridize to, and initiate polymerization from, internal
positions of the
target polynucleotide. Preferably, the amplified portion contains a detectable
target
sequence that may be detected using any of a variety of well-known methods.
[00311] -Selective amplification" or "specific amplification," as used herein,
refers
to the amplification of a target nucleic acid sequence according to the
present invention
wherein detectable amplification of the target sequence is substantially
limited to
amplification of target sequence contributed by a nucleic acid sample of
interest that is
being tested and is not contributed by target nucleic acid sequence
contributed by some
other sample source, e.g., contamination present in reagents used during
amplification
reactions or in the environment in which amplification reactions are
performed.
[00312] The term "amplification conditions" refers to conditions permitting
nucleic
acid amplification according to the present invention. Amplification
conditions may, in
some embodiments, be less stringent than "stringent hybridization conditions"
as
111
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
described herein. Oligonucleotides used in the amplification reactions of the
present
invention hybridize to their intended targets under amplification conditions,
but may or
may not hybridize under stringent hybridization conditions. On the other hand,
detection probes of the present invention typically hybridize under stringent
hybridization conditions. Acceptable conditions to carry out nucleic acid
amplifications
according to the present invention can be easily ascertained by someone having
ordinary skill in the art depending on the particular method of amplification
employed.
[00313] Many well-known methods of nucleic acid amplification require
thermocycling to alternately denature double-stranded nucleic acids and
hybridize
primers; however, other well-known methods of nucleic acid amplification are
isothermal. The polymerase chain reaction (U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195;
4,683,202;
4,800,159; 4,965,188), commonly referred to as PCR, uses multiple cycles of
denaturation, annealing of primer pairs to opposite strands, and primer
extension to
exponentially increase copy numbers of the target sequence. In a variation
called RT-
PCR, reverse transcriptase (RT) is used to make a complementary DNA (cDNA)
from
mRNA, and the cDNA is then amplified by PCR to produce multiple copies of DNA.
[00314] As noted above, the term "PCR" refers to multiple amplification cycles
that
selectively amplify a target nucleic acid species. Included are quantitative
PCR
(qPCR), real-time PCR), reverse transcription PCR (RT-PCR) and quantitative
reverse
transcription PCR (qRT-PCR) is well described in the art. The term "pPCR"
refers to
quantitative polymerase chain reaction, and the term "qRT-PCR" refers to
quantitative
reverse transcription polymerase chain reaction. qPCR and qRT-PCR may be used
to
amplify and simultaneously quantify a targeted cDNA molecule. It enables both
detection and quantification of a specific sequence in a cDNA pool, such as a
selected
AARS gene or transcript.
[00315] The term "real-time PCR" may use DNA-binding dye to bind to all double-
stranded (ds) DNA in PCR, causing fluorescence of the dye. An increase in DNA
product during PCR therefore leads to an increase in fluorescence intensity
and is
measured at each cycle, thus allowing DNA concentrations to be quantified.
However,
dsDNA dyes such as SYBR Green will bind to all dsDNA PCR products.
Fluorescence
is detected and measured in the real-time PCR thermocycler, and its geometric
increase
corresponding to exponential increase of the product is used to determine the
threshold
cycle ("Ct") in each reaction.
[00316] The term "Ct Score" refers to the threshold cycle number, which is the
cycle
at which PCR amplification has surpassed a threshold level. If there is a
higher quantity
of mRNA for a particular gene in a sample, it will cross the threshold earlier
than a
lowly expressed gene since there is more starting RNA to amplify. Therefore, a
low Ct
112
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
score indicates high gene expression in a sample and a high Ct score is
indicative of low
gene expression.
[00317] Certain embodiments may employ the ligase chain reaction (Weiss,
Science.
254: 1292, 1991), commonly referred to as LCR, which uses two sets of
complementary
DNA oligonucleotides that hybridize to adjacent regions of the target nucleic
acid. The
DNA oligonucleotides are covalently linked by a DNA ligase in repeated cycles
of
thermal denaturation. hybridization and ligation to produce a detectable
double-stranded
ligated oligonucleotide product.
[00318] Another method is strand displacement amplification (Walker, G. et
al.,
1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:392-396; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,270,184 and
5,455,166), commonly referred to as SDA, which uses cycles of annealing pairs
of
primer sequences to opposite strands of a target sequence, primer extension in
the
presence of a dNTPotS to produce a duplex hemiphosphorothioated primer
extension
product, endonuclease-mediated nicking of a hemimodified restriction
endonuclease
recognition site, and polymerase-mediated primer extension from the 3' end of
the nick
to displace an existing strand and produce a strand for the next round of
primer
annealing, nicking and strand displacement, resulting in geometric
amplification of
product. Thermophilic SDA (tSDA) uses thermophilic endonucleases and
polymerases
at higher temperatures in essentially the same method (European Pat. No. 0 684
315).
[00319] Other amplification methods include, for example: nucleic acid
sequence
based amplification (U.S. Pat. No. 5,130,238), commonly referred to as NASBA;
one
that uses an RNA replicase to amplify the probe molecule itself (Lizardi, P.
et al.,
1988, BioTechnol. 6: 1197-1202), commonly referred to as Q0 replicase; a
transcription based amplification method (Kwoh, fl et al , 1989, Proc Natl AL-
ad
Sci. USA 86:1173-1177); self-sustained sequence replication (Guatelli, J. et
al., 1990,
Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87: 1874-1878); and, transcription mediated
amplification
(U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,480,784 and 5,399,491), commonly referred to as TMA. For
further
discussion of known amplification methods see Persing, David H., 1993, "In
Vitro
Nucleic Acid Amplification Techniques" in Diagnostic Medical Microbiology:
Principles and Applications (Persing et al., Eds.), pp. 51-87 (American
Society for
Microbiology, Washington, DC).
[00320] Illustrative transcription-based amplification systems of the present
invention include TMA, which employs an RNA polymerase to produce multiple RNA
transcripts of a target region (U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,480,784 and 5,399,491). TMA
uses a
"promoter-primer" that hybridizes to a target nucleic acid in the presence of
a reverse
transcriptase and an RNA polymerase to form a double-stranded promoter from
which
the RNA polymerase produces RNA transcripts. These transcripts can become
113
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
templates for further rounds of TMA in the presence of a second primer capable
of
hybridizing to the RNA transcripts. Unlike PCR, LCR or other methods that
require
heat denaturation, TMA is an isothermal method that uses an RNase H activity
to digest
the RNA strand of an RNA:DNA hybrid, thereby making the DNA strand available
for
hybridization with a primer or promoter-primer. Generally, the RNase H
activity
associated with the reverse transcriptase provided for amplification is used.
[00321] In an illustrative TMA method, one amplification primer is an
oligonucleotide promoter-primer that comprises a promoter sequence which
becomes
functional when double-stranded, located 5' of a target-binding sequence,
which is
capable of hybridizing to a binding site of a target RNA at a location 3' to
the sequence
to be amplified. A promoter-primer may be referred to as a "T7-primer" when it
is
specific for T7 RNA polymerase recognition. Under certain circumstances, the
3' end
of a promoter-primer, or a subpopulation of such promoter-primers, may be
modified to
block or reduce primer extension. From an unmodified promoter-primer, reverse
transcriptase creates a cDNA copy of the target RNA, while RNase H activity
degrades
the target RNA. A second amplification primer then binds to the cDNA. This
primer
may be referred to as a "non-T7 primer" to distinguish it from a "T7-primer."
From
this second amplification primer, reverse transcriptase creates another DNA
strand,
resulting in a double-stranded DNA with a functional promoter at one end. When
double-stranded, the promoter sequence is capable of binding an RNA polymerase
to
begin transcription of the target sequence to which the promoter-primer is
hybridized.
An RNA polymerase uses this promoter sequence to produce multiple RNA
transcripts
(i.e., amplicons), generally about 100 to 1,000 copies. Each newly-synthesized
amplicon can anneal with the second amplification primer Reverse transcriptase
can
then create a DNA copy, while the RNase H activity degrades the RNA of this
RNA:DNA duplex. The promoter-primer can then bind to the newly synthesized
DNA,
allowing the reverse transcriptase to create a double-stranded DNA, from which
the
RNA polymerase produces multiple amplicons. Thus, a billion-fold isothermic
amplification can be achieved using two amplification primers.
[00322] In certain embodiments, other techniques may be used to evaluate RNA
transcripts of the transcripts from a particular cDNA library, including
microarray
analysis (Han, M., et al., Nat Biotechnol, 19: 631-635, 2001; Bao, P., et al.,
Anal
Chem, 74: 1792-1797, 2002; Schena et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93:10614-
19,
1996; and Heller et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94:2150-55, 1997) and SAGE
(serial analysis of gene expression). Like MPSS, SAGE is digital and can
generate a
large number of signature sequences. (see e.g., Velculescu, V. E., et al.,
Trends Genet,
16: 423-425., 2000; Tuteja R. and Tuteja N. Bioessays. 2004 Aug; 26(8):916-
22),
114
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
although orders of magnitude fewer than that are available from techniques
such as
MPSS.
[00323] In certain embodiments, the term "microarray" includes a "nucleic acid
microarray" having a substrate-bound plurality of nucleic acids, hybridization
to each of
the plurality of bound nucleic acids being separately detectable. The
substrate can be
solid or porous, planar or non-planar, unitary or distributed. Nucleic acid
microarrays
include all the devices so called in Schena (ed.), DNA Microarrays: A
Practical
Approach (Practical Approach Series), Oxford University Press (1999); Nature
Genet.
21(1) (suppl.): 1-60 (1999); Schena (ed.), Microarray Biochip: Tools and
Technology,
Eaton Publishing Company/BioTechniques Books Division (2000). Nucleic acid
microarrays may include a substrate-bound plurality of nucleic acids in which
the
plurality of nucleic acids are disposed on a plurality of beads, rather than
on a unitary
planar substrate, as described, for example, in Brenner et al., Proc. Natl.
Acad. Sci. USA
97(4): 1665-1670 (2000). Examples of nucleic acid microarrays may be found in
U.S.
Pat. Nos. 6,391,623, 6,383,754, 6,383,749, 6,380,377, 6,379,897, 6,376,191,
6,372,431,
6,351,712 6,344,316, 6,316,193, 6,312,906, 6,309,828, 6,309,824, 6,306,643,
6,300,063, 6,287,850, 6,284,497, 6,284,465, 6,280,954, 6,262,216, 6,251,601,
6,245,518, 6,263,287, 6,251,601, 6,238,866, 6,228,575, 6,214,587, 6,203,989,
6,171,797, 6,103,474, 6,083,726, 6,054,274, 6,040,138, 6,083,726, 6,004,755,
6,001,309, 5,958,342, 5,952,180, 5,936,731, 5,843,655, 5,814,454, 5,837,196,
5,436,327, 5,412,087, and 5,405,783
[00324] Additional examples include nucleic acid arrays that are commercially
available from Affymetrix (Santa Clara, Calif) under the brand name GENECHIPTm
Further exemplary methods of manufacturing and using arrays are provided in,
for
example, US. Pat. Nos. 7,028,629; 7,011,949; 7,011,945; 6,936,419; 6,927,032;
6,924,103; 6,921,642; and 6,818,394.
[00325] The present invention as related to arrays and microarrays also
contemplates
many uses for polymers attached to solid substrates. These uses include gene
expression monitoring, profiling, library screening, genotyping and
diagnostics. Gene
expression monitoring and profiling methods and methods useful for gene
expression
monitoring and profiling are shown in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,800,992, 6,013,449,
6,020,135, 6,033,860, 6,040,138, 6,177,248 and 6,309,822. Genotyping and uses
therefore are shown in U.S. Publication No. 2007-0065816 Al
and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,925,525, 6,268,141, 5,856,092, 6,267,152,
6,300,063, 6,525,185, 6,632,611, 5,858,659, 6,284,460, 6,361,947, 6,368,799,
6,673,579 and 6,333,179. Other methods of nucleic acid amplification, labeling
and
115
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
analysis that may be used in combination with the methods disclosed herein are
embodied in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,871,928, 5,902,723, 6,045,996, 5,541,061, and
6,197,506.
[00326] As will be apparent to persons skilled in the art, certain embodiments
may
employ oligonucleotides, such as primers or probes, for amplification or
detection, as
described herein. Oligonucleotides of a defined sequence and chemical
structure may
be produced by techniques known to those of ordinary skill in the art, such as
by
chemical or biochemical synthesis, and by in vitro or in vivo expression from
recombinant nucleic acid molecules, e.g., bacterial or viral vectors. In
certain
embodiments, an oligonucleotide does not consist solely of wild-type
chromosomal
DNA or the in vivo transcription products thereof.
[00327] Oligonucleotides or primers may be modified in any way, as long as a
given
modification is compatible with the desired function of a given
oligonucleotide. One of
ordinary skill in the art can easily determine whether a given modification is
suitable or
desired for any given oligonucleotide of the present invention. Relevant AARS
oligonucleotides are described in greater detail elsewhere herein.
[00328] While the design and sequence of oligonucleotides depends on their
function
as described herein, several variables are generally taken into account. Among
the most
relevant are: length, melting temperature (Tm), specificity, complementarity
with other
oligonucleotides in the system, GC content, polypyrimidine (T, C) or
polypurine (A,
G) stretches, and the 3'-end sequence. Controlling for these and other
variables is a
standard and well known aspect of oligonucleotide design, and various computer
programs are readily available to screen large numbers of potential
oligonucleotides for
optimal ones.
[00329] Certain embodiments therefore include methods for detecting a target
AARS
polynucleotide in a sample, the polynucleotide comprising the sequence of a
reference
AARS polynucleotide, as described herein, comprising a) hybridizing the sample
with a
probe comprising a sequence complementary to the target polynucleotide in the
sample,
and which probe specifically hybridizes to said target polynucleotide, under
conditions
whereby a hybridization complex is formed between said probe and said target
polynucleotide or fragments thereof, and b) detecting the presence or absence
of said
hybridization complex, and optionally, if present, the amount thereof. Also
included
are methods for detecting a target AARS polynucleotide in a sample, the
polynucleotide
comprising the sequence of a reference AARS polynucleotide, as described
herein,
comprising a) amplifying the target polynucleotide or fragment thereof, and b)
detecting
the presence or absence of said amplified target polynucleotide or fragment
thereof,
and, optionally, if present, the amount thereof. Specific embodiments relate
to the
116
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
detection of AARS splice variants, such as by detecting a unique splice
junction of the
splice variant, whether by hybridization, amplification, or other detection
method.
[00330] Embodiments of the present invention include a variety of AARS
polypeptide-based detection techniques, including antibody-based detection
techniques.
Included in these embodiments are the use of AARS polypeptides to generate
antibodies or other binders, which may then be used in diagnostic methods and
compositions to detect or quantitate selected AARS polypeptides in a cell or
other
biological sample, typically from a subject.
[00331] Certain embodiments may employ standard methodologies and detectors
such as western blotting and immunoprecipitation, enzyme-linked immunosorbent
assays (ELISA), flow cytometry, and immunofluorescence assays (IFA), which
utilize
an imaging device. These well-known methods typically utilize one or more
monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies as described herein that specifically bind
to a
selected AARS polypeptide of the invention, or a unique region of that AARS
polypeptide, and generally do not bind significantly to other AARS
polypeptides, such
as a full-length AARS polypeptide. In certain embodiments, the unique region
of the
AARS polypeptide may represent a unique three-dimensional structure that is
possessed
by a newly identified protein fragment of an AARS.
[00332] Certain embodiments may employ -arrays," such as -microarrays." In
certain embodiments, a "microarray" may also refer to a "peptide microarray"
or
"protein microarray" having a substrate-bound collection or plurality of
polypeptides,
the binding to each of the plurality of bound polypeptides being separately
detectable.
Alternatively, the peptide microarray may have a plurality of binders,
including but not
limited to monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, phage display
binders, yeast 2
hybrid binders, and aptamers, which can specifically detect the binding of the
AARS
polypeptides described herein. The array may be based on autoantibody
detection of
these AARS polypeptides, as described, for example, in Robinson et al., Nature
Medicine 8(3):295-301 (2002). Examples of peptide arrays may be found in WO
02/31463, WO 02/25288, WO 01/94946, WO 01/88162, WO 01/68671, WO 01/57259,
WO 00/61806, WO 00/54046, WO 00/47774, WO 99/40434, WO 99/39210, and WO
97/42507 and U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,268,210, 5,766,960, and 5,143,854
[00333] Certain embodiments may employ MS or other molecular weight-based
methods for diagnostically detecting AARS polypeptide sequences. Mass
spectrometry
(MS) refers generally to an analytical technique for determining the elemental
composition of a sample or molecule. MS may also be used for determining the
chemical structures of molecules, such as peptides and other chemical
compounds.
117
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00334] Generally, the MS principle consists of ionizing chemical compounds to
generate charged molecules or molecule fragments, and then measuring their
mass-to-
charge ratios. In an illustrative MS procedure: a sample is loaded onto the MS
instrument, and undergoes vaporization, the components of the sample are
ionized by
one of a variety of methods (e.g., by impacting them with an electron beam),
which
results in the formation of positively charged particles, the positive ions
are then
accelerated by a magnetic field, computations are performed on the mass-to-
charge
ratio (rn/z) of the particles based on the details of motion of the ions as
they transit
through electromagnetic fields, and, detection of the ions, which in step
prior were
sorted according to in/z.
[00335] An illustrative MS instruments has three modules: an ion source, which
converts gas phase sample molecules into ions (or, in the case of electrospray
ionization, move ions that exist in solution into the gas phase); a mass
analyzer, which
sorts the ions by their masses by applying electromagnetic fields; and a
detector, which
measures the value of an indicator quantity and thus provides data for
calculating the
abundances of each ion present.
[00336] The MS technique has both qualitative and quantitative uses, including
identifying unknown compounds, determining the isotopic composition of
elements in a
molecule, and determining the structure of a compound by observing its
fragmentation.
Other uses include quantifying the amount of a compot nd in a sample or
studying the
fundamentals of gas pin. se ion chemistry (the chemistry of ions and neutrals
in a
vacuum). Included are gas chromatography-mass spectrometry (GC/MS or GC-MS),
liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LC/MS or LC-MS), and ion mobility
spectrometry/mass spectrometry (IMS/MS or IMMS) Accordingly, MS techniques
may be used according to any of the methods provided herein to measure the
presence
or levels of an AARS polypeptide of the invention in a biological sample, and
to
compare those levels to a control sample or a pre-determined value.
[00337] Certain embodiments may employ cell-sorting or cell visualization or
imaging devices/techniques to detect or quantitate the presence or levels of
AARS
polynucleotides or polypeptides. Examples include flow cytometry or FACS,
immunofluorescence analysis (IFA), and in situ hybridization techniques, such
as
fluorescent in situ hybridization (FISH).
[00338] Certain embodiments may employ conventional biology methods, software
and systems for diagnostic purposes. Computer software products of the
invention
typically include computer readable medium having computer-executable
instructions
for performing the logic steps of the method of the invention. Suitable
computer
readable medium include floppy disk, CD-ROM/DVD/DVD-ROM, hard-disk drive,
118
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
flash memory, ROM/RAM, magnetic tapes and etc. The computer executable
instructions may be written in a suitable computer language or combination of
several
languages. Basic computational biology methods are described in, for example
Setubal
and Meidanis et at., Introduction to Computational Biology Methods (PWS
Publishing
Company, Boston, 1997); Salzberg, Searles, Kasif, (Ed.), Computational Methods
in
Molecular Biology, (Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1998); Rashidi and Buehler,
Bioinformatics
Basics: Application in Biological Science and Medicine (CRC Press, London,
2000)
and Ouelette and Bzevanis Bioinformatics: A Practical Guide for Analysis of
Gene and
Proteins (Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2nd ed., 2001). See U.S. Pat. No. 6,420,108.
[00339] Certain embodiments may employ various computer program products and
software for a variety of purposes, such as probe design, management of data,
analysis,
and instrument operation. See, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,593,839, 5,795,716, 5,733,729,
5,974,164, 6,066,454, 6,090,555, 6,185,561, 6,188,783, 6,223,127, 6,229,911
and
6,308,170.
[00340] The whole genome sampling assay (WGSA) is described, for example in
Kennedy et at., Nat. Biotech. 21, 1233-1237 (2003), Matsuzaki et at., Gen.
Res. 14:
414-425, (2004), and Matsuzaki, et at., Nature Methods 1:109-111 (2004).
Algorithms
for use with mapping assays are described, for example, in Liu et at.,
Bioinformatics.
19: 2397-2403 (2003) and Di et at. Bioinformatics. 21:1958 (2005). Additional
methods related to WGSA and arrays useful for WGSA and applications of WGSA
are
disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 7,459,273, U.S. Publication No.
2005-0130217 Al, U.S.
Publication No. 2007-0065816 Al, U.S. Publication No. 2004-0146883 Al, and
U.S. 2004-
0072217 Al. Genome wide association studies using mapping assays are described
in,
for example, Hu et al, Cancer Res.; 65(7)-2542-6 (2005), Mitra et al , Cancer
Res,
64(21):8116-25 (2004), Butcher et at., Hum Mot Genet., 14(10):1315-25 (2005),
and
Klein et al., Science. 308(5720):385-9 (2005).
[00341] Additionally, certain embodiments may include methods for providing
genetic information over networks such as the Internet as shown, for example,
in U.S.
Publication No. 2003-009722 Al, U.S. Publication No. 2002/0183936, U.S.
Publication No.
2003-0100995 Al, U.S. Publication No. 2003-0120432 Al, U.S. Publication No.
2004-0002818
Al, U.S Publication No. 2004-0126840 Al, and U.S. Publication No. 2004-0049354
Al.
ANTISENSE AND RNAI AGENTS
[00342] Embodiments of the present invention also include antisense
oligonucleotides and RNAi agents that target the AARS polynucleotide
sequences, and
methods of use thereof to reduce expression of a selected AARS transcript
and/or
protein fragment. Certain embodiments relate to targeting one or more splice
junctions
119
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
(often unique) that generate a splice variant, AARS protein fragment of
instant
invention. Also included are methods of antisense or RNAi inhibition that
target certain
splice forms, either to encourage or discourage splicing of a selected protein
fragment.
In certain preferred embodiments, the splice junctions that generate the AARS
protein
fragments are over-expressed with respect to particular tissues, and are
unique to that
splice variant. In these and related embodiments, such splice variants are not
the only
source of cytosolic AARS activity in the targeted cell type. For instance,
certain splice
variants to be targeted may represent about 10% to 50% of the total copy
number of the
AARS RNA splice variants in a given cell or tissue, and preferably about 1-10%
of the
total copy number of the AARS RNA splice variants in a given cell or tissue.
Splice
variants that are about <1% of the total copy number of the AARS RNA splice
variants
in a given cell or tissue may also be targeted.
[00343] In certain embodiments, the antisense or RNAi agent does not target
the full-
length protein, because such full-length proteins are responsible for a key
step in protein
synthesis, and thereby avoids lethality that often results from wild-type AARS
knockouts. Certain of the methods described herein can therefore by used to
avoid
undesired effects such as toxicities in both chronic and acute treatments, and
to
selectively modulate the non-canonical activities of the AARS protein
fragment.
However, certain embodiments may generically target AARS sequences, including
full-
length AARS sequences, such as to kill or substantially derange the cell
physiology of a
target cell or tissue.
[00344] In certain embodiments, the AARS splice variant to be targeted
possesses a
non-canonical biological activity. In some embodiments, the AARS splice
variant has
reduced or undetectable canonical AARS activity, and the antisense or RNAi-
related
method more specifically modulates its non-canonical activity. In certain
embodiments,
the antisense or RNAi-related agents can be combined with a targeted or local
delivery
approach to lessen systemic undesired effects to non-targeted cells or
tissues. Among
others described herein, exemplary cells or tissues that could be targeted
this way
include cancer cells, and cells to tissues that lend themselves to localized
targeting, such
as tumors or epithelia via topical application.
A. Antisense Agents
[00345] The terms "antisense oligomer" or "antisense compound" or "antisense
oligonucleotide" are used interchangeably and refer to a sequence of cyclic
subunits,
each bearing a base-pairing moiety, linked by intersubunit linkages that allow
the base-
pairing moieties to hybridize to a target sequence in a nucleic acid
(typically an RNA)
by Watson-Crick base pairing, to form a nucleic acid:oligomer heteroduplex
within the
120
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
target sequence, and typically thereby prevent translation of that RNA. Also
included
are methods of use thereof to modulate expression of a selected AARS
transcript, such
as a splice variant or proteolytic fragment, and/or its corresponding
polypeptide.
[00346] Antisense oligonucleotides may contain between about 8 and 40
subunits,
typically about 8-25 subunits, and preferably about 12 to 25 subunits. In
certain
embodiments, oligonucleotides may have exact sequence complementarity to the
target
sequence or near complementarity, as defined below. In certain embodiments,
the
degree of complementarity between the target and antisense targeting sequence
is
sufficient to form a stable duplex. The region of complementarity of the
antisense
oligomers with the target RNA sequence may be as short as 8-11 bases, but is
preferably 12-15 bases or more, e.g., 12-20 bases, or 12-25 bases, including
all integers
in between these ranges. An antisense oligomer of about 14-15 bases is
generally long
enough to have a unique complementary sequence in targeting the selected AARS
gene.
In certain embodiments, a minimum length of complementary bases may be
required to
achieve the requisite binding Tm, as discussed herein.
[00347] In certain embodiments, antisense oligomers as long as 40 bases may be
suitable, where at least a minimum number of bases, e.g., 10-12 bases, are
complementary to the target sequence. In general, however, facilitated or
active uptake
in cells is optimized at oligomer lengths less than about 30. For certain
oligomers,
described further below, an optimum balance of binding stability and uptake
generally
occurs at lengths of 18-25 bases. Included are antisense oligomers (e.g.,
PNAs, LNAs,
2'-0Me, MOE) that consist of about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20,
21, 22,
23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, or 40
bases, in which at
least about 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23,
24, 25, 26, 27,
28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, or 40 contiguous or non-
contiguous bases
are complementary to their AARS target sequence, or variants thereof.
[00348] In certain embodiments, antisense oligomers may be 100% complementary
to an AARS nucleic acid target sequence, or it may include mismatches, e.g.,
to
accommodate variants, as long as a heteroduplex formed between the oligomer
and
AARS nucleic acid target sequence is sufficiently stable to withstand the
action of
cellular nucleases and other modes of degradation which may occur in vivo. The
term
"target sequence" refers to a portion of the target RNA against which the
oligonucleotide is directed, that is, the sequence to which the
oligonucleotide will
hybridize by Watson-Crick base pairing of a complementary sequence. In certain
embodiments, the target sequence may be a contiguous region of an AARS mRNA
(e.g., a unique splice junction of an AARS mRNA), or may be composed of non-
contiguous regions of the mRNA.
121
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00349] Oligomer backbones which are less susceptible to cleavage by nucleases
are
discussed below. Mismatches, if present, are less destabilizing toward the end
regions
of the hybrid duplex than in the middle. The number of mismatches allowed will
depend on the length of the oligomer, the percentage of G:C base pairs in the
duplex,
and the position of the mismatch(es) in the duplex, according to well
understood
principles of duplex stability. Although such an antisense oligomer is not
necessarily
100% complementary to the AARS nucleic acid target sequence, it is effective
to stably
and specifically bind to the target sequence, such that a biological activity
of the nucleic
acid target, e.g., expression of AARS protein(s), is modulated.
[00350] The stability of the duplex formed between an oligomer and a target
sequence is a function of the binding Tm and the susceptibility of the duplex
to cellular
enzymatic cleavage. The Tm of an antisense oligonucleotide with respect to
complementary-sequence RNA may be measured by conventional methods, such as
those described by Hames et al., Nucleic Acid Hybridization, IRL Press, 1985,
pp.107-
108 or as described in Miyada C.G. and Wallace R.B., 1987, Oligonucleotide
hybridization techniques, Methods Enzymol. Vol. 154 pp. 94-107. In certain
embodiments, antisense oligomer may have a binding Tm, with respect to a
complementary-sequence RNA, of greater than body temperature and preferably
greater
than 50 C. Tm's in the range 60-80 C or greater are preferred. According to
well
known principles, the Tm of an oligomer compound, with respect to a
complementary-
based RNA hybrid, can be increased by increasing the ratio of C:G paired bases
in the
duplex, and/or by increasing the length (in base pairs) of the heteroduplex.
At the same
time, for purposes of optimizing cellular uptake, it may be advantageous to
limit the
size of the antisense oligomer_ For this reason, compounds that show high Tm
(50 C or
greater) at a length of 25 bases or less are generally preferred over those
requiring
greater than 25 bases for high Tm values.
[00351] Antisense oligomers can be designed to block or inhibit translation of
mRNA or to inhibit natural pre-mRNA splice processing, or induce degradation
of
targeted mRNAs, and may be said to be "directed to" or "targeted against" a
target
sequence with which it hybridizes. In certain embodiments, the target sequence
may
include any coding or non-coding sequence of an AARS mRNA transcript, and may
thus by within an exon or within an intron. In certain embodiments, the target
sequence
is relatively unique or exceptional among AARSs (e.g., a full-length AARS) and
is
selective for reducing expression of a selected AARS protein fragment, such as
a
proteolytic fragment or splice variant. In certain embodiments, the target
site includes a
3' or 5' splice site of a pre-processed mRNA, or a branch point. The target
sequence for
a splice site may include an mRNA sequence having its 5' end 1 to about 25 to
about 50
122
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
base pairs downstream of a splice acceptor junction or upstream of a splice
donor
junction in a preprocessed mRNA. In certain embodiments, a target sequence may
include a splice junction of an alternatively splice AARS mRNA, such as a
splice
junction that does not occur in the full-length AARS, or is unique or
exceptional to that
transcript, in that it either does not occur or only seldom occurs in other
AARS splice
variants. An oligomer is more generally said to be "targeted against" a
biologically
relevant target, such as reference AARS polynucleotide, when it is targeted
against the
nucleic acid of the target in the manner described herein.
[00352] An oligonucleotide is typically complementary to a target sequence,
such as
a target DNA or RNA. The terms "complementary" and "complementarity" refer to
polynucleotides (i.e., a sequence of nucleotides) related by the base-pairing
rules. For
example, the sequence "A-G-T," is complementary to the sequence "T-C-A."
Complementarity may be "partial," in which only some of the nucleic acids'
bases are
matched according to the base pairing rules. Or, there may be "complete" or
"total"
complementarity (100%) between the nucleic acids. The degree of
complementarity
between nucleic acid strands has significant effects on the efficiency and
strength of
hybridization between nucleic acid strands. While perfect complementarity is
often
desired, some embodiments can include one or more but preferably 20, 19, 18,
17, 16,
15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 mismatches with respect
to the target
sequence. Variations at any location within the oligomer are included. In
certain
embodiments, variations in sequence near the termini of an oligomer are
generally
preferable to variations in the interior, and if present are typically within
about 10, 9, 8,
7, 6, 5,4,3, 2, or 1 nucleotides of the 5' and/or 3' terminus.
[00353] The term "targeting sequence" or in certain embodiments "antisense
targeting sequence" refers to the sequence in an oligonucleotide that is
complementary
(meaning, in addition, substantially complementary) to the target sequence in
the DNA
or RNA target molecule. The entire sequence, or only a portion, of the
antisense
compound may be complementary to the target sequence. For example, in an
oligonucleotide having 20-30 bases, about 6, 7,8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
16, 17, 18,
19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, or 29 may be targeting sequences that
are
complementary to the target region. Typically, the targeting sequence is
formed of
contiguous bases, but may alternatively be formed of non-contiguous sequences
that
when placed together, e.g., from opposite ends of the oligonucleotide,
constitute
sequence that spans the target sequence.
[00354] Target and targeting sequences are described as "complementary" to one
another when hybridization occurs in an antiparallel configuration. A
targeting
sequence may have "near" or "substantial" complementarity to the target
sequence and
123
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
still function for the purpose of the present invention, that is, it may still
be functionally
"complementary." In certain embodiments, an oligonucleotide may have at most
one
mismatch with the target sequence out of 10 nucleotides, and preferably at
most one
mismatch out of 20. Alternatively, an oligonucleotide may have at least about
80%,
85%, 90% sequence homology, and preferably at least 95% sequence homology,
with
an AARS reference polynucleotide sequence described herein, or its complement.
[00355] An oligonucleotide "specifically hybridizes" to a target
polynucleotide if the
oligomer hybridizes to a target (e.g., an AARS reference polynucleotide or its
complement) under physiological conditions, with a Tm substantially greater
than 45 C,
preferably at least 50 C, and typically 60 C-80 C or higher. Such
hybridization
preferably corresponds to stringent hybridization conditions. At a given ionic
strength
and pH, the Tm is the temperature at which 50% of a target sequence hybridizes
to a
complementary polynucleotide. Again, such hybridization may occur with "near"
or
"substantial" complementarity of the antisense oligomer to the target
sequence, as well
as with exact complementarity.
[00356] The terms specifically binds or specifically hybridizes refer
generally to an
oligonucleotide probe or polynucleotide sequence that not only binds to its
intended
target gene sequence in a sample under selected hybridization conditions, but
does not
bind significantly to other target sequences in the sample, and thereby
discriminates
between its intended target and all other targets in the target pool. A probe
that
specifically hybridizes to its intended target sequence may also detect
concentration
differences under the selected hybridization conditions, as described herein.
[00357] A "nuclease-resistant" oligomeric molecule (oligomer) refers to one
whose
backbone is substantially resistant to nuclease cleavage, in non-hybridized or
hybridized form; by common extracellular and intracellular nucleases in the
body; that
is, the oligomer shows little or no nuclease cleavage under normal nuclease
conditions
in the body to which the oligomer is exposed.
[00358] A "heteroduplex" refers to a duplex between an oligonucleotide and the
complementary portion of a target polynucleotide, such as a target DNA or RNA.
A
"nuclease-resistant heteroduplex" refers to a heteroduplex formed by the
binding of an
oligomer to its complementary target, such that the heteroduplex is
substantially
resistant to in vivo degradation by intracellular and extracellular nucleases,
such as
RNaseH, which are capable of cutting double-stranded RNA/RNA or RNA/DNA
complexes.
[00359] A "subunit" of an oligonucleotide refers to one nucleotide (or
nucleotide
analog) unit. The term may refer to the nucleotide unit with or without the
attached
intersubunit linkage, although, when referring to a "charged subunit", the
charge
124
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
typically resides within the intersubunit linkage (e.g., a phosphate or
phosphorothioate
linkage or a cationic linkage).
[00360] The cyclic subunits of an oligonucleotide may be based on ribose or
another
pentose sugar or, in certain embodiments, alternate or modified groups.
Examples of
modified oligonucleotide backbones include, without limitation,
phosphorothioates,
chiral phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, ph
osphotri esters,
aminoalkylphosphothesters, methyl and other alkyl phosphonates including 3 '-
alkylene
phosphonates and chiral phosphonates, phosphinates, phosphoramidates including
3'-
amino phosphoramidate and aminoalkylphosphoramidates, thionophosphoramidates,
thionoalkylphosphonatcs, thionoalkylphosphotriesters, and boranophosphates
having
normal 3'-5' linkages, 2'-5' linked analogs of these, and those having
inverted polarity
wherein the adjacent pairs of nucleoside units are linked 3'-5' to 5'-3' or 2'-
5' to 5'-2'.
Also contemplated are peptide nucleic acids (PNAs), locked nucleic acids
(LNAs), 2'-
0-Methyl oligonucleotides (2'-0Me), 2'-methoxyethoxy oligonucleotides (MOE),
among other oligonucleotides known in the art.
[00361] The purine or pyrimidine base pairing moiety is typically adenine,
cytosine,
guanine, uracil, thymine or inosine. Also included are bases such as pyridin-4-
one,
pyridin-2-one, phenyl, pseudouracil, 2,4,6-trimell5thoxy benzene, 3-methyl
uracil,
dihydrouridine, naphthyl, aminophenyl, 5-alkylcytidines (e.g., 5-
methylcytidine), 5-
alkyluridines (e.g., ribothymidine), 5-halouridine (e.g., 5-bromouridine) or 6-
azapyrimidincs or 6-alkylpyrimidines (e.g. 6-methyluridine), propync,
quesosine, 2-
thiouridine, 4-thiouridine, wybutosine, wybutoxosine, 4-acetyltidine, 5-
(carboxyhydroxymethypuridine, 5 "-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouridine,
5-
carhoxymethylaminomethylu rid in e, p-D-galac to sylqu eo sine , 1-
methyladenosine, 1 -
methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanosine, 3-methylcytidine, 2-methyladenosine, 2-
methyl guanosine, N6-methyl adenosine, 7-methyl guanosine, 5-m eth oxyam
inomethyl -2-
thiouridine, 5-methylaminomethyluridine, 5-methylcarbonyhnethyluridine, 5-
methyloxyuridine, 5-methyl-2-thiouridine, 2-methylthio-N6-isopentenyl
adenosine, p-D-
mannosylqueosine, uridine-5-oxyacetic acid, 2-thiocytidine, threonine
derivatives and
others (Burgin et al., 1996, Biochemistry, 35, 14090; Uhlman & Pcyman, supra).
By
"modified bases" in this aspect is meant nucleotide bases other than adenine
(A),
guanine (G), cytosine (C), thymine (T), and uracil (U), as illustrated above;
such bases
can be used at any position in the antisense molecule. Persons skilled in the
art will
appreciate that depending on the uses of the oligomers, Ts and Us are
interchangeable.
For instance, with other antisense chemistries such as 2'-0-methyl antisense
oligonucleotides that are more RNA-like, the T bases may be shown as U.
125
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00362] As noted above, certain oligonucleotides provided herein include
peptide
nucleic acids (PNAs). Peptide nucleic acids (PNAs) are analogs of DNA in which
the
backbone is structurally homomorphous with a deoxyribose backbone, consisting
of N-
(2-aminoethyl) glycine units to which pyrimidine or purine bases are attached.
PNAs
containing natural pyrimidine and purine bases hybridize to complementary
oligonucleotides obeying Watson-Crick base-pairing rules, and mimic DNA in
terms of
base pair recognition (Egholm, Buchardt et al. 1993). The backbone of PNAs is
formed
by peptide bonds rather than phosphodiester bonds, making them well-suited for
antisense applications (see structure below). The backbone is uncharged,
resulting in
PNA/DNA or PNA/RNA duplexes that exhibit greater than normal thermal
stability.
PNAs are not recognized by nucleases or proteases.
[00363] PNAs may be produced synthetically using any technique known in the
art.
PNA is a DNA analog in which a polyamide backbone replaces the traditional
phosphate ribose ring of DNA. Despite a radical structural change to the
natural
structure, PNA is capable of sequence-specific binding in a helix form to DNA
or RNA.
Characteristics of PNA include a high binding affinity to complementary DNA or
RNA,
a destabilizing effect caused by single-base mismatch, resistance to nucleases
and
proteases, hybridization with DNA or RNA independent of salt concentration and
triplex formation with homopurine DNA. Panagenelm has developed its
proprietary Bts
PNA monomers (Bts; benzothiazole-2-sulfonyl group) and proprietary
oligomerisation
process. The PNA oligomerisation using Bts PNA monomers is composed of
repetitive
cycles of deprotection, coupling and capping. Panagene's patents to this
technology
include US 6969766, US 7211668, US 7022851, US 7125994, US 7145006 and US
7179896_ Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of
PNA
compounds include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,539,082;
5,714,331; and
5,719,262 .
Further teaching of PNA
compounds can be found in Nielsen et al., Science, 1991, 254, 1497.
[00364] Also included are -locked nucleic acid" subunits (LNAs). The
structures of
LNAs are known in the art: for example, Wengel, et al., Chemical
Communications
(1998) 455; Tetrahedron (1998) 54, 3607, and Accounts of Chem. Research (1999)
32,
301); Obika, et at., Tetrahedron Letters (1997) 38, 8735; (1998) 39. 5401, and
Bioorganic Medicinal Chemistry (2008)16, 9230.
[00365] Oligonucleotides may incorporate one or more LNAs; in some cases, the
compounds may be entirely composed of LNAs. Methods for the synthesis of
individual LNA nucleoside subunits and their incorporation into
oligonucleotides are
known in the art: U.S. Patents 7,572,582; 7,569,575; 7,084,125; 7,060,809;
7,053,207;
7,034,133; 6,794,499; and 6,670,461. Typical intersubunit linkers include
126
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
phosphodiester and phosphorothioate moieties; alternatively, non-phosphorous
containing linkers may be employed. A preferred embodiment is an LNA
containing
compound where each LNA subunit is separated by a DNA subunit (i.e., a
deoxyribose
nucleotide). Further preferred compounds are composed of alternating LNA and
DNA
subunits where the intersubunit linker is phosphorothioate.
[00366] Certain oligonucleotides may comprise morpholino-based subunits
bearing
base-pairing moieties, joined by uncharged or substantially uncharged
linkages. The
terms "morpholino oligomer" or "PM0" (phosphoramidate- or phosphorodiamidate
morpholino oligomer) refer to an oligonucleotide analog composed of morpholino
subunit structures, where (i) the structures are linked together by phosphorus-
containing
linkages, one to three atoms long, preferably two atoms long, and preferably
uncharged
or cationic, joining the morpholino nitrogen of one subunit to a 5' exocyclic
carbon of
an adjacent subunit, and (ii) each morpholino ring bears a purine or
pyrimidine or an
equivalent base-pairing moiety effective to bind, by base specific hydrogen
bonding, to
a base in a polynucleotide.
[00367] Variations can be made to this linkage as long as they do not
interfere with
binding or activity. For example, the oxygen attached to phosphorus may be
substituted
with sulfur (thiophosphorodiamidate). The 5' oxygen may be substituted with
amino or
lower alkyl substituted amino. The pendant nitrogen attached to phosphorus may
be
unsubstituted, monosubstituted, or disubstituted with (optionally substituted)
lower
alkyl. The purine or pyrimidine base pairing moiety is typically adenine,
cytosine,
guanine, uracil, thymine or inosine. The
synthesis, structures, and binding
characteristics of morpholino oligomers are detailed in U.S. Patent Nos.
5,698,685,
5,217,866, 5,142,047, 5,034,506, 5,166,315, 5,521,063, and 5,506,337, and PCT
Appn
Nos. PCT/US07/11435 (cationic linkages) and US08/012804 (improved synthesis)
[00368] The morpholino subunits may also be linked by non-phosphorus-based
intersubunit linkages, as described further below, where at least one linkage
is modified
with a pendant cationic group as described above. Other oligonucleotide analog
linkages which are uncharged in their unmodified state but which could also
bear a
pendant amine substituent could be used. For example, a 5'nitrogen atom on a
morpholino ring could be employed in a sulfamide linkage or a urea linkage
(where
phosphorus is replaced with carbon or sulfur, respectively) and modified in a
manner
analogous to the 5'-nitrogen atom in structure (b3) above
[00369] Certain embodiments include substantially uncharged morpholino
oligomers, such as a substantially uncharged phosphorodiamidate-linked
morpholino
oligomer. A
substantially uncharged, phosphorus containing backbone in an
127
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
oligonucleotide analog is one in which a majority of the subunit linkages,
e.g., between
50-100%, typically at least 60% to 100% or 75% or 80% of its linkages, are
uncharged
at physiological pH, and contain a single phosphorous atom. Examples of
morpholino
oligonucleotides having phosphorus-containing backbone linkages include
phosphoroamidate and phosphorodiamidate-linked morpholino oligonucleotides.
Certain embodiments may contain positively charged groups at preferably about
10%-
50% of their backbone linkages.
[00370] Properties of the morpholino-based subunits include, for example, the
ability
to be linked in a oligomeric form by stable, uncharged or positively charged
backbone
linkages, the ability to support a nucleotide base (e.g., adenine, cytosine,
guanine,
thymidine, uracil and hypoxanthine) such that the polymer formed can hybridize
with a
complementary-base target nucleic acid, including target RNA, Tm values above
about
45 C in relatively short oligonucleotides (e.g., 10-15 bases), the ability of
the
oligonucleotide to be actively or passively transported into mammalian cells,
and the
ability of the antisense oligonucleotide:RNA heteroduplex to resist RNase and
RNaseH
degradation, respectively.
[00371] In certain embodiments, a substantially uncharged oligonucleotide may
be
modified to include charged linkages, e.g., up to about 1 per every 2-5
uncharged
linkages, such as about 4-5 per every 10 uncharged linkages. In certain
embodiments,
optimal improvement in antisense activity may be seen when about 25% of the
backbone linkages are cationic. In certain embodiments, enhancement may be
seen
with a small number e.g., 10-20% cationic linkages, or where the number of
cationic
linkages are in the range 50-80%, such as about 60%. In certain embodiments
the
cationic backbone charges may be further enhanced by distributing the bulk of
the
charges close of the "center-region" backbone linkages of the antisense
oligonucleotide,
e.g., in a 20-mer oligonucleotide with 8 cationic backbone linkages, having at
least 70%
of these charged linkages localized in the 10 centermost linkages.
[00372] Oligonucleotides that target one or more portions of an AARS
polynucleotide reference sequence or its complement may be used in any of the
therapeutic, diagnostic, or drug screening methods described herein and
apparent to
persons skilled in the art.
B. RNA Interference Agents
[00373] Certain embodiments relate to RNA interference (RNAi) agents that
target
one or more mRNA transcripts of an aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase (AARS) reference
polynucleotide, including fragments and splice variants thereof. Also included
are
128
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
methods of use thereof to modulate the levels of a selected AARS transcript,
such as an
AARS splice variant or endogenous proteolytic fragment.
[00374] The term "double-stranded" means two separate nucleic acid strands
comprising a region in which at least a portion of the strands are
sufficiently
complementary to hydrogen bond and form a duplex structure. The term "duplex"
or
"duplex structure" refers to the region of a double stranded molecule wherein
the two
separate strands are substantially complementary, and thus hybridize to each
other.
"dsRNA" refers to a ribonucleic acid molecule having a duplex structure
comprising
two complementary and anti-parallel nucleic acid strands (i.e., the sense and
antisense
strands). Not all nucleotides of a dsRNA must exhibit Watson-Crick base pairs;
the two
RNA strands may be substantially complementary. The RNA strands may have the
same or a different number of nucleotides.
[00375] In certain embodiments, a dsRNA is or includes a region which is at
least
partially complementary to the target RNA. In certain embodiments, the dsRNA
is
fully complementary to the target RNA. It is not necessary that there be
perfect
complementarity between the dsRNA and the target, but the correspondence must
be
sufficient to enable the dsRNA, or a cleavage product thereof, to direct
sequence
specific silencing, such as by RNAi cleavage of the target RNA.
Complementarity, or
degree of homology with the target strand, is typically most critical in the
antisense
strand. While perfect complementarity, particularly in the antisense strand,
is often
desired some embodiments can include one or more but preferably 6, 5, 4, 3, 2,
or fewer
mismatches with respect to the target RNA. The mismatches are most tolerated
in the
terminal regions, and if present are preferably in a terminal region or
regions, e.g.,
within 6, 5, 4, or 3 nucleotides of the 5' and/or 3' terminus The sense strand
need only
be substantially complementary with the antisense strand to maintain the
overall
double-strand character of the molecule.
[00376] As used herein, "modified dsRNA" refers to a dsRNA molecule that
comprises at least one alteration that renders it more resistant to nucleases
(e.g., protein
kinase) than an identical dsRNA molecule that recognizes the same target RNA.
Modified dsRNAs may include a single-stranded nucleotide overhang and/or at
least
one substituted nucleotide.
[00377] As used herein, a "nucleotide overhang" refers to the unpaired
nucleotide or
nucleotides that protrude from the duplex structure when a 3'-end of one RNA
strand
extends beyond the 5'-end of the other complementary strand, or vice versa.
"Blunt" or
"blunt end" means that there are no unpaired nucleotides at that end of the
dsRNA, i.e.,
no nucleotide overhang. A "blunt ended" dsRNA is a dsRNA that is double
stranded
over its entire length, i.e., no nucleotide overhang at either end of the
molecule.
129
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00378] The term "terminal base pair," as used herein, refers to the last
nucleotide
base pair on one end of the duplex region of a double-stranded molecule. For
example,
if a dsRNA or other molecule is blunt ended (i.e., has no nucleotide
overhangs), the last
nucleotide base pairs at both ends of the molecule are terminal base pairs.
Where a
dsRNA or other molecule has a nucleotide overhang at one or both ends of the
duplex
structure, the last nucleotide base pair(s) immediately adjacent the
nucleotide
overhang(s) is the terminal base pair at that end(s) of the molecule.
[00379] In certain embodiments, the methods provided herein may utilize double-
stranded ribonucleic acid (dsRNA) molecules as modulating agents, for reducing
expression of an AARS transcript such as a selected fragment or splice
variant.
dsRNAs generally comprise two single strands. One strand of the dsRNA
comprises a
nucleotide sequence that is substantially identical to a portion of the target
gene or
target region (the "sense" strand), and the other strand (the "complementary"
or
"antisense" strand) comprises a sequence that is substantially complementary
to a
portion of the target region. The strands are sufficiently complementary to
hybridize to
form a duplex structure. In certain embodiments, the complementary RNA strand
may
be less than 30 nucleotides, less than 25 nucleotides in length, or even 19 to
24
nucleotides in length. In certain aspects, the complementary nucleotide
sequence may
be 20-23 nucleotides in length, or 22 nucleotides in length.
[00380] In certain embodiments, at least one of the RNA strands comprises a
nucleotide overhang of 1 to 4 nucleotides in length. In other embodiments, the
dsRNA
may further comprise at least one chemically modified nucleotide. In certain
aspects, a
dsRNA comprising a single-stranded overhang of 1 to 4 nucleotides may comprise
a
molecule wherein the unpaired nucleotide of the single-stranded overhang that
is
directly adjacent to the terminal nucleotide pair contains a purine base. In
other aspects,
the last complementary nucleotide pairs on both ends of a dsRNA are a G-C
pair, or, at
least two of the last four terminal nucleotide pairs are G-C pairs.
[00381] Certain embodiments of the present invention may comprise microRNAs.
Micro-RNAs represent a large group of small RNAs produced naturally in
organisms,
some of which regulate the expression of target genes. Micro-RNAs are formed
from
an approximately 70 nucleotide single-stranded hairpin precursor transcript by
Dicer.
(V. Ambros et al. Current Biology 13:807, 2003). Certain micro-RNAs may be
transcribed as hairpin RNA precursors, which are then processed to their
mature forms
by Dicer enzyme.
[00382] Certain embodiments may also employ short-interfering RNAs (siRNA). In
certain embodiments, the first strand of the double-stranded oligonucleotide
contains
two more nucleoside residues than the second strand. In other embodiments, the
first
130
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
strand and the second strand have the same number of nucleosides; however, the
first
and second strands may be offset such that the two terminal nucleosides on the
first and
second strands are not paired with a residue on the complimentary strand. In
certain
instances, the two nucleosides that are not paired are thymidine resides.
[00383] Also included are short hairpin RNAs (shRNAs) and micro RNAs
(miRNAs). A double-stranded structure of an shRNA is formed by a single self-
complementary RNA strand, and RNA duplex formation may be initiated either
inside
or outside the cell. MicroRNAs (miRNAs) are small non-coding RNAs of 20-22
nucleotides, typically excised from ¨70 nucleotide foldback RNA precursor
structures
known as pre-miRNAs.
[00384] In instances when the modulating agent comprises siRNA, the agent
should
include a region of sufficient homology to the target region, and be of
sufficient length
in terms of nucleotides, such that the siRNA agent, or a fragment thereof, can
mediate
down regulation of the target RNA. It will be understood that the term
"ribonucleotide"
or "nucleotide" can, in the case of a modified RNA or nucleotide surrogate,
also refer to
a modified nucleotide, or surrogate replacement moiety at one or more
positions. Thus,
an siRNA agent is or includes a region which is at least partially
complementary to the
target RNA, as described herein.
[00385] In addition, an siRNA modulating agent may be modified or include
nucleoside surrogates. Single stranded regions of an siRNA agent may be
modified or
include nucleoside surrogates, e.g., the unpaired region or regions of a
hairpin structure,
e.g., a region which links two complementary regions, can have modifications
or
nucleoside surrogates. Modification to stabilize one or more 3'- or 5'-
terminus of an
siRNA agent, e_g , against exonucleases, or to favor the antisense siRNA agent
to enter
into RISC are also useful. Modifications can include C3 (or C6, C7, C12) amino
linkers, thiol linkers, carboxyl linkers, non-nucleotidic spacers (C3, C6, C9,
C12,
abasic, triethylene glycol, hexaethylene glycol), special biotin or
fluorescein reagents
that come as phosphoramidites and that have another DMT-protected hydroxyl
group,
allowing multiple couplings during RNA synthesis.
[00386] siRNA agents may include, for example, molecules that are long enough
to
trigger the interferon response (which can be cleaved by Dicer (Bernstein et
al. 2001.
Nature, 409:363-366) and enter a RISC (RNAi-induced silencing complex)), in
addition
to molecules which are sufficiently short that they do not trigger the
interferon response
(which molecules can also be cleaved by Dicer and/or enter a RISC), e.g.,
molecules
which are of a size which allows entry into a RISC, e.g., molecules which
resemble
Dicer-cleavage products. An siRNA modulating agent, or a cleavage product
thereof,
131
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
can down regulate a target gene, e.g., by inducing RNAi with respect to a
target RNA,
preferably an AARS target such as a selected splice variant.
[00387] Each strand of an siRNA agent can be equal to or less than 35, 30, 25,
24,
23, 22, 21, 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, or 15 nucleotides in length. The strand is
preferably at
least 19 nucleotides in length. For example, each strand can be between 21 and
25
nucleotides in length. Preferred siRNA agents have a duplex region of 17, 18,
19, 29,
21, 22, 23, 24, or 25 nucleotide pairs, and one or more overhangs, preferably
one or two
3' overhangs, of 2-3 nucleotides.
[00388] In addition to homology to target RNA and the ability to down regulate
a
target gene, an siRNA agent may have one or more of the following properties:
it may,
despite modifications, even to a very large number, or all of the nucleosides,
have an
antisense strand that can present bases (or modified bases) in the proper
three
dimensional framework so as to be able to form correct base pairing and form a
duplex
structure with a homologous target RNA which is sufficient to allow down
regulation of
the target, e.g., by cleavage of the target RNA; it may, despite
modifications, even to a
very large number, or all of the nucleosides, still have "RNA-like"
properties, i.e., it
may possess the overall structural, chemical and physical properties of an RNA
molecule, even though not exclusively, or even partly, of ribonucleotide-based
content.
For example, an siRNA agent can contain, e.g., a sense and/or an antisense
strand in
which all of the nucleotide sugars contain e.g., 2' fluor in place of 2'
hydroxyl. This
deoxyribonucleotide-containing agent can still be expected to exhibit RNA-like
properties. While not wishing to be bound by theory, the electronegative
fluorine
prefers an axial orientation when attached to the C2' position of ribose. This
spatial
preference of fluorine can, in turn, force the sugars to adopt a C3'-endo
pucker_ This is
the same puckering mode as observed in RNA molecules and gives rise to the RNA-
characteristic A-family-type helix. Further, since fluorine is a good hydrogen
bond
acceptor, it can participate in the same hydrogen bonding interactions with
water
molecules that are known to stabilize RNA structures. Generally, it is
preferred that a
modified moiety at the 2' sugar position will be able to enter into H-bonding
which is
more characteristic of the OH moiety of a ribonucicotide than the H moiety of
a
deoxyribonucleotide.
[00389] A "single strand RNAi agent" as used herein, is an RNAi agent which is
made up of a single molecule. It may include a duplexed region, formed by
intra-strand
pairing, e.g., it may be, or include, a hairpin or pan-handle structure.
Single strand
RNAi modulating agents are preferably antisense with regard to the target
molecule. A
single strand RNAi agent should be sufficiently long that it can enter the
RISC and
participate in RISC mediated cleavage of a target mRNA. A single strand RNAi
agent
132
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
is at least 14, and more preferably at least 15, 20, 25, 29, 35, 40, or 50
nucleotides in
length. It is preferably less than 200, 100, or 60 nucleotides in length.
[00390] Hairpin RNAi modulating agents may have a duplex region equal to or at
least 17, 18, 19, 29, 21, 22, 23, 24, or 25 nucleotide pairs. The duplex
region may
preferably be equal to or less than 200, 100, or 50, in length. Certain ranges
for the
duplex region are 15-30, 17 to 23, 19 to 23, and 19 to 21 nucleotides pairs in
length.
The hairpin may have a single strand overhang or terminal unpaired region,
preferably
the 3', and preferably of the antisense side of the hairpin. In certain
embodiments,
overhangs are 2-3 nucleotides in length.
[00391] Certain modulating agents utilized according to the methods provided
herein
may comprise RNAi oligonucleotides such as chimeric oligonucleotides, or
"chimeras,"
which contain two or more chemically distinct regions, each made up of at
least one
monomer unit, i.e., a nucleotide in the case of an oligonucleotide compound.
These
oligonucleotides typically contain at least one region wherein the
oligonucleotide is
modified so as to confer upon the oligonucleotide increased resistance to
nuclease
degradation, increased cellular uptake, and/or increased binding affinity for
the target
nucleic acid. Consequently, comparable results can often be obtained with
shorter
oligonucleotides when chimeric oligonucleotides are used, compared to
phosphorothioate oligodeoxynucleotides. Chimeric oligonucleotides may be
formed as
composite structures of two or more oligonucleotides, modified
oligonucleotides,
oligonucleotides and/or oligonucleotide mimetics as described above. Such
oligonucleotides have also been referred to in the art as hybrids or gapmers.
Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of such hybrid
structures
include, but are not limited to, US Pat_ Nos 5,013,830; 5,149,797; 5,220,007;
5,256,775; 5,366,878; 5,403,711; 5,491,133; 5,565,350; 5,623,065; 5,652,355;
5,652,356; 5,700,922; and 5,955,589
In certain embodiments, the chimeric oligonucleotide is RNA-DNA, DNA-RNA, RNA-
DNA-RNA, DNA-RNA-DNA, or RNA-DNA-RNA-DNA, wherein the oligonucleotide
is between 5 and 60 nucleotides in length.
[00392] In one aspect of the invention RNAi agents relate to an
oligonucleotide
comprising at least one ligand tethered to an altered or non-natural
nucleobase. A large
number of compounds can function as the altered base. The structure of the
altered
base is important to the extent that the altered base should not substantially
prevent
binding of the oligonucleotide to its target, e.g., mRNA. In certain
embodiments, the
altered base is difluorotolyl, nitropyrrolyl, nitroimidazolyl, nitroindolyl,
napthalenyl,
anthrancenyl, pyridinyl, quinolinyl, pyrenyl, or the divalent radical of any
one of the
non-natural nucleobases described herein. In certain embodiments, the non-
natural
133
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
nucleobase is difluorotolyl, nitropyrrolyl, or nitroimidazolyl. In certain
embodiments,
the non-natural nucleobase is difluorotolyl. A wide variety of ligands are
known in the
art and are amenable to the present invention. For example, the ligand can be
a steroid,
bile acid, lipid, folic acid, pyridoxal, B12, riboflavin, biotin, aromatic
compound,
polycyclic compound, crown ether, intercalator, cleaver molecule, protein-
binding
agent, or carbohydrate. In certain embodiments, the ligand is a steroid or
aromatic
compound. In certain instances, the ligand is cholesteryl.
[00393] In other embodiments, the RNAi agent is an oligonucleotide tethered to
a
ligand for the purposes of improving cellular targeting and uptake. For
example, an
RNAi agent may be tethered to an antibody, or antigen binding fragment
thereof. As an
additional example, an RNAi agent may be tethered to a specific ligand binding
molecule, such as a polypeptide or polypeptide fragment that specifically
binds a
particular cell-surface receptor.
[00394] In other embodiments, the modulating agent comprises a non-natural
nucleobase, as described herein. In certain instances, the ribose sugar moiety
that
naturally occurs in nucleosides is replaced with a hexose sugar. In certain
aspects, the
hexose sugar is an allose, altrose, glucose, ITURTIOSe, gulose, idose,
galactose, talose, OT
a derivative thereof. In a preferred embodiment, the hexose is a D-hexose. In
certain
instances, the ribose sugar moiety that naturally occurs in nucleosides is
replaced with a
polycyclic heteroalkyl ring or cyclohexenyl group. In certain instances, the
polycyclic
heteroalkyl group is a bicyclic ring containing one oxygen atom in the ring.
In certain
instances, the polycyclic heteroalkyl group is a bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, a
bicyclo[3.2.1]octane, or a bicyclo[3.3.1]nonane. Examples of modified RNAi
agents
also include oligonucleotides containing modified backbones or non-natural
internucleoside linkages, as described herein.
[00395] The present invention further encompasses oligonucleotides employing
ribozymes. Synthetic RNA molecules and derivatives thereof that catalyze
highly
specific endoribonuclease activities are known as ribozymes. (see, e.g., U.S.
Pat. No.
5,543,508 to Haseloff et al., and U.S. Pat. No. 5,545,729 to Goodchild et al.)
The
cleavage reactions arc catalyzed by the RNA molecules themselves. In naturally
occurring RNA molecules, the sites of self-catalyzed cleavage are located
within highly
conserved regions of RNA secondary structure (Buzayan et al., Proc. Natl.
Acad. Sci.
U.S.A., 1986, 83, 8859; Forster et al., Cell, 1987, 50, 9). Naturally
occurring
autocatalytic RNA molecules have been modified to generate ribozymes which can
be
targeted to a particular cellular or pathogenic RNA molecule with a high
degree of
specificity. Thus, ribozymes serve the same general purpose as antisense
oligonucleotides (i.e., modulation of expression of a specific gene) and, like
134
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
oligonucleotides, are nucleic acids possessing significant portions of single-
strandedness.
[00396] In certain instances, the RNAi agents or antisense oligonucleotides
for use
with the methods provided herein may be modified by non-ligand group. A number
of
non-ligand molecules have been conjugated to oligonucleotides in order to
enhance the
activity, cellular distribution, cellular targeting, or cellular uptake of the
oligonucleotide, and procedures for performing such conjugations are available
in the
scientific literature. Such non-ligand moieties have included lipid moieties,
such as
cholesterol (Letsinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 1989, 86:6553),
arginine-rich
peptides, cholic acid (Manoharan et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 1994,
4:1053), a
thioether, e.g., hexy1-5-tritylthiol (Manoharan et al., Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci.,
1992,
660:306; Manoharan et al., Bioorg. Med. Chenz. Let., 1993, 3:2765), a
thiocholesterol
(Oberhauser et al.,Nucl. Acids Res., 1992, 20:533), an aliphatic chain, e.g.,
dodecandiol
or undecyl residues (Saison-Behmoaras et al., EMBO J., 1991, 10:111; Kabanov
et al.,
FEBS Lett., 1990, 259:327; Svinarchuk etal., Biochimie, 1993, 75:49), a
phospholipid,
e.g., di-hexadecyl-rac-glycerol or triethylammonium 1,2-di-O-hexadecyl-rac-
glycero-3-
H-phosphonate (Manoharan etal., Tetrahedron Lett., 1995, 36:3651; Shea etal.,
Nucl.
Acids Res., 1990, 18:3777), a polyamine or a polyethylene glycol chain
(Manoharan et
al., Nucleosides & Nucleotides, 1995, 14:969), or adamantane acetic acid
(Manoharan
et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 1995, 36:3651), a palmityl moiety (Mishra et at.,
Biochim.
Biophys. Acta, 1995, 1264:229), or an octadecylamine or hexylamino-carbonyl-
oxycholesterol moiety (Crooke et al., J. PharmacoL Exp. Ther., 1996, 277:923).
Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of such
oligonucleotide
conjugates have been listed above Typical conjugation protocols involve the
synthesis
of oligonucleotides bearing an aminolinker at one or more positions of the
sequence.
The amino group is then reacted with the molecule being conjugated using
appropriate
coupling or activating reagents. The conjugation reaction may be performed
either with
the oligonucleotide still bound to the solid support or following cleavage of
the
oligonucleotide in solution phase. Purification of the oligonucleotide
conjugate by
HPLC typically affords the pure conjugate.
[00397] Additional examples of RNAi agents may be found in U.S. Application
Publication Nos. 2007/0275465, 2007/0054279, 2006/0287260, 2006/0035254,
2006/0008822 . Also
included are vector delivery
systems that are capable of expressing the AARS-targeting sequences described
herein.
Included are vectors that express siRNA or other duplex-forming RNA
interference
molecules.
135
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00398] A vector or nucleic acid construct system can comprise a single vector
or
plasmid, two or more vectors or plasmids, which together contain the total DNA
to be
introduced into the genome of the host cell, or a transposon. The choice of
the vector
will typically depend on the compatibility of the vector with the host cell
into which the
vector is to be introduced. In the present case, the vector or nucleic acid
construct is
preferably one which is operably functional in a mammalian cell, such as a
muscle cell.
The vector can also include a selection marker such as an antibiotic or drug
resistance
gene, or a reporter gene (i.e., green fluorescent protein, luciferase), that
can be used for
selection or identification of suitable transformants or transfectants.
Exemplary
delivery systems may include viral vector systems (i.e., viral-mediated
transduction)
including, but not limited to, retroviral (e.g., lentiviral) vectors,
adenoviral vectors,
adeno-associated viral vectors, and herpes viral vectors, among others known
in the art.
XI. DRUG DISCOVERY
[00399] Certain embodiments relate to the use of AARS polypeptides,
antibodies, or
polynucleotides in drug discovery, typically to identify agents that modulate
one or
more of the non-canonical activities of the reference AARS polypeptide, e.g.,
the
AARS protein fragment. For example, certain embodiments include methods of
identifying one or more "cellular binding partners" of an AARS reference
polypeptide,
such as a cellular protein, lipid, nucleic acid or other host molecule that
directly or
physically interacts with the AARS polypeptide. Particular examples include
for
example cell-surface receptors, such as GPCRs, protein-protein interaction
domains,
and extracellular or intracellular domains thereof.
[00400] Also included are methods of identifying host molecules that
participate in
one or more non-canonical activities of the AARS polypeptide, including
molecules
that directly or indirectly interact with the cellular binding partner, and
either regulate
its role in a non-canonical activity, or are regulated by the binding partner.
Such host
molecules include both upstream and downstream components of the non-canonical
pathway, typically related by about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or more identifiable steps
in the
pathway, relative to the cellular binding partner/AARS protein interaction.
[00401] Certain aspects include methods of identifying a compound (e.g.,
polypeptide) or other agent that agonizes or antagonizes the non-canonical
activity of an
AARS reference polypeptide or active variant thereof, such as by interacting
with the
AARS polypeptide and/or one or more of its cellular binding partners. Also
included
are methods of identifying agents that modulate the expression (e.g.,
splicing) of AARS
splice variants, or modulate the activity of proteases that otherwise regulate
the
production of endogenous AARS protein fragments (resectins) at the protein
level.
136
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00402] Certain embodiments therefore include methods of identifying a binding
partner of an AARS reference polypeptide, comprising a) combining the AARS
polypeptide with a biological sample under suitable conditions, and b)
detecting
specific binding of the AARS polypeptide to a binding partner, thereby
identifying a
binding partner that specifically binds to the AARS reference polypeptide.
Also
included are methods of screening for a compound that specifically binds to an
AARS
reference polypeptide or a binding partner of the AARS polypeptide, comprising
a)
combining the polypeptide or the binding partner with at least one test
compound under
suitable conditions, and b) detecting binding of the polypeptide or the
binding partner to
the test compound, thereby identifying a compound that specifically binds to
the
polypeptide or its binding partner. In certain embodiments, the compound is a
polypeptide or peptide. In certain embodiments, the compound is a small
molecule or
other (e.g., non-biological) chemical compound. In
certain embodiments, the
compound is a peptide mimetic.
[00403] Any method suitable for detecting protein-protein interactions may be
employed for identifying cellular proteins that interact with an AARS
reference
polypeptide, interact with one or more of its cellular binding partners, or
both.
Examples of traditional methods that may be employed include co-
immunoprecipitation, cross-linking, and co-purification through gradients or
chromatographic columns of cell lysates or proteins obtained from cell
lysates, mainly
to identify proteins in the lysate that interact with the AARS polypeptide.
[00404] In these and related embodiments, at least a portion of the amino acid
sequence of a protein that interacts with an AARS polypeptide or its binding
partner can
be ascertained using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, such
as via the
Edman degradation technique. See, e.g., Creighton Proteins: Structures and
Molecular
Principles, W. H. Freeman & Co., N.Y., pp. 34 49, 1983. The amino acid
sequence
obtained may be used as a guide for the generation of oligonucleotide mixtures
that can
be used to screen for gene sequences encoding such proteins. Screening may be
accomplished, for example, by standard hybridization or PCR techniques, as
described
herein and known in the art. Techniques for the generation of oligonucleotide
mixtures
and the screening are well known. See, e.g., Ausubel et al. Current Protocols
in
Molecular Biology Green Publishing Associates and Wiley Interscience, N.Y.,
1989;
and Innis et al., eds. PCR Protocols: A Guide to Methods and Applications
Academic
Press, Inc., New York, 1990.
[00405] Additionally, methods may be employed in the simultaneous
identification
of genes that encode the binding partner or other polypeptide. These methods
include,
for example, probing expression libraries, in a manner similar to the well
known
137
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
technique of antibody probing of lambda-gtl 1 libraries, using labeled AARS
protein, or
another polypeptide, peptide or fusion protein, e.g., a variant AARS
polypeptide or
AARS domain fused to a marker (e.g., an enzyme, fluor, luminescent protein, or
dye),
or an Ig-Fc domain.
[00406] One method that detects protein interactions in vivo, the two-hybrid
system,
is described in detail for illustration only and not by way of limitation. One
example of
this system has been described (Chien et al., PNAS USA 88:9578 9582, 1991) and
is
commercially available from Clontech (Palo Alto, Calif.).
[00407] Briefly, utilizing such a system, plasmids may be constructed that
encode
two hybrid proteins: one plasmid consists of nucleotides encoding the DNA-
binding
domain of a transcription activator protein fused to an AARS reference
nucleotide
sequence (or, in certain embodiments, its binding partner), or a variant
thereof, and the
other plasmid consists of nucleotides encoding the transcription activator
protein's
activation domain fused to a cDNA (or collection of cDNAs) encoding an unknown
protein(s) that has been recombined into the plasmid as part of a cDNA
library. The
DNA-binding domain fusion plasmid and the activator cDNA library may be
transformed into a strain of the yeast Saccharoinyces cerevisiae that contains
a reporter
gene (e.g., HBS or lacZ) whose regulatory region contains the transcription
activator's
binding site. Either hybrid protein alone cannot activate transcription of the
reporter
gene: the DNA-binding domain hybrid cannot because it does not provide
activation
function and the activation domain hybrid cannot because it cannot localize to
the
activator's binding sites. Interaction of the two hybrid proteins
reconstitutes the
functional activator protein and results in expression of the reporter gene,
which is
detected by an assay for the reporter gene product
[00408] The two-hybrid system or other such methodology may be used to screen
activation domain libraries for proteins that interact with the "bait" gene
product. By
way of example, and not by way of limitation, an AARS reference polypeptide or
variant may be used as the bait gene product. An AA RS binding partner may
also be
used as a "bait" gene product. Total genomic or cDNA sequences are fused to
the DNA
encoding an activation domain. This library and a plasmid encoding a hybrid of
a bait
AARS gene product fused to the DNA-binding domain are co-transformed into a
yeast
reporter strain, and the resulting transformants are screened for those that
express the
reporter gene.
[00409] A cDNA library of the cell line from which proteins that interact with
bait
AARS gene products are to be detected can be made using methods routinely
practiced
in the art. For example, the cDNA fragments can be inserted into a vector such
that
they are translationally fused to the transcriptional activation domain of
GAL4. This
138
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
library can be co-transformed along with the bait gene-GAL4 fusion plasmid
into a
yeast strain, which contains a lacZ gene driven by a promoter that contains
GAL4
activation sequence. A cDNA encoded protein, fused to GAL4 transcriptional
activation
domain, that interacts with bait gene product will reconstitute an active GAL4
protein
and thereby drive expression of the HIS3 gene. Colonies, which express HIS3,
can be
detected by their growth on Petri dishes containing semi-solid agar based
media lacking
histidine. The cDNA can then be purified from these strains, and used to
produce and
isolate the bait AARS gene-interacting protein using techniques routinely
practiced in
the art.
[00410] Also included are three-hybrid systems, which allow the detection of
RNA-
protein interactions in yeast. See, e.g., Hook et al., RNA. 11:227-233, 2005.
Accordingly, these and related methods can be used to identify a cellular
binding
partner of an AARS polypeptide, and to identify other proteins or nucleic
acids that
interact with the AARS polypeptide, the cellular binding partner, or both.
[00411] Certain embodiments relate to the use of interactome screening
approaches.
Particular examples include protein domain-based screening (see, e.g., Boxem
et al.,
Cell. 134:534-545, 2008; and Yu et al., Science. 322:10-110, 2008).
[00412] As noted above, once isolated, binding partners can be identified and
can, in
turn, be used in conjunction with standard techniques to identify proteins or
other
compounds with which it interacts. Certain embodiments thus relate to methods
of
screening for a compound that specifically binds to the binding partner of an
AARS
reference polypeptide, comprising a) combining the binding partner with at
least one
test compound under suitable conditions, and b) detecting binding of the
binding
partner to the test compound, thereby identifying a compound that specifically
binds to
the binding partner. In certain embodiments, the test compound is a
polypeptide. In
certain embodiments, the test compound is a chemical compound, such as a small
molecule compound or peptide mimetic.
[00413] Certain embodiments include methods of screening for a compound that
modulates the activity of an AARS reference polypeptide, comprising a)
combining the
polypeptide with at least one test compound under conditions permissive for
the activity
of the polypeptide, b) assessing the activity of the polypeptide in the
presence of the test
compound, and c) comparing the activity of the polypeptide in the presence of
the test
compound with the activity of the polypeptide in the absence of the test
compound,
wherein a change in the activity of the polypeptide in the presence of the
test compound
is indicative of a compound that modulates the activity of the polypeptide.
Certain
embodiments include methods of screening for a compound that modulates the
activity
of a binding partner of an AARS reference polypeptide, comprising a) combining
the
139
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
polypeptide with at least one test compound under conditions permissive for
the activity
of the binding partner, b) assessing the activity of the binding partner in
the presence of
the test compound, and c) comparing the activity of the binding partner in the
presence
of the test compound with the activity of the binding partner in the absence
of the test
compound, wherein a change in the activity of the binding partner in the
presence of the
test compound is indicative of a compound that modulates the activity of the
binding
partner. Typically, these and related embodiments include assessing a selected
non-
canonical activity that is associated with the AARS polypeptide or its binding
partner.
Included are in vitro and in vivo conditions, such as cell culture conditions.
[00414] Certain embodiments include methods of screening a compound for
effectiveness as a full or partial agonist of an AARS reference polypeptide or
an active
fragment or variant thereof, comprising a) exposing a sample comprising the
polypeptide to a compound, and b) detecting agonist activity in the sample,
typically by
measuring an increase in the non-canonical activity of the AARS polypeptide.
Certain
methods include a) exposing a sample comprising a binding partner of the AARS
polypeptide to a compound, and b) detecting agonist activity in the sample,
typically by
measuring an increase in the selected non-canonical activity of the AARS
polypeptide.
Certain embodiments include compositions that comprise an agonist compound
identified by the method and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or
excipient.
[00415] Also included are methods of screening a compound for effectiveness as
a
full or partial antagonist of an AARS reference polypeptide, comprising a)
exposing a
sample comprising the polypeptide to a compound, and b) detecting antagonist
activity
in the sample, typically by measuring a decrease in the non-canonical activity
of the
AARS polypeptide_ Certain methods include a) exposing a sample comprising a
binding partner of the AARS polypeptide to a compound, and b) detecting
antagonist
activity in the sample, typically by measuring a decrease in the selected non-
canonical
activity of the AARS polypeptide. Certain embodiments include compositions
that
comprise an antagonist compound identified by the method and a
pharmaceutically
acceptable carrier or excipient.
[00416] In certain embodiments, in vitro systems may be designed to identify
compounds capable of interacting with or modulating an AARS reference sequence
or
its binding partner. Certain of the compounds identified by such systems may
be
useful, for example, in modulating the activity of the pathway, and in
elaborating
components of the pathway itself. They may also be used in screens for
identifying
compounds that disrupt interactions between components of the pathway; or may
disrupt such interactions directly. One exemplary approach involves preparing
a
reaction mixture of the AARS polypeptide and a test compound under conditions
and
140
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
for a time sufficient to allow the two to interact and bind, thus forming a
complex that
can be removed from and/or detected in the reaction mixture
[00417] In vitro screening assays can be conducted in a variety of ways. For
example, an AARS polypeptide, a cellular binding partner, or test compound(s)
can be
anchored onto a solid phase. In these and related embodiments, the resulting
complexes
may be captured and detected on the solid phase at the end of the reaction. In
one
example of such a method, the AARS polypeptide and/or its binding partner are
anchored onto a solid surface, and the test compound(s), which are not
anchored, may
be labeled, either directly or indirectly, so that their capture by the
component on the
solid surface can be detected. In other examples, the test compound(s) arc
anchored to
the solid surface, and the AARS polypeptide and/or its binding partner, which
are not
anchored, are labeled or in some way detectable. In certain embodiments,
microtiter
plates may conveniently be utilized as the solid phase. The anchored component
(or
test compound) may be immobilized by non-covalent or covalent attachments. Non-
covalent attachment may be accomplished by simply coating the solid surface
with a
solution of the protein and drying. Alternatively, an immobilized antibody,
preferably a
monoclonal antibody, specific for the protein to be immobilized may be used to
anchor
the protein to the solid surface. The surfaces may be prepared in advance and
stored.
[00418] To conduct an exemplary assay, the non-immobilized component is
typically
added to the coated surface containing the anchored component. After the
reaction is
complete, un-reacted components are removed (e.g., by washing) under
conditions such
that any specific complexes formed will remain immobilized on the solid
surface. The
detection of complexes anchored on the solid surface can be accomplished in a
number
of ways_ For instance, where the previously non-immobilized component is pre-
labeled, the detection of label immobilized on the surface indicates that
complexes were
formed. Where the previously non-immobilized component is not pre-labeled, an
indirect label can be used to detect complexes anchored on the surface; e.g.,
using a
labeled antibody specific for the previously non-immobilized component (the
antibody,
in turn, may be directly labeled or indirectly labeled with a labeled anti-Ig
antibody).
[00419] Alternatively, the presence or absence of binding of a test compound
can be
determined, for example, using surface plasmon resonance (SPR) and the change
in the
resonance angle as an index, wherein an AARS polypeptide or a cellular binding
partner is immobilized onto the surface of a commercially available sensorchip
(e.g.,
manufactured by BIACORETv 1) according to a conventional method, the test
compound
is contacted therewith, and the sensorchip is illuminated with a light of a
particular
wavelength from a particular angle. The binding of a test compound can also be
measured by detecting the appearance of a peak corresponding to the test
compound by
141
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
a method wherein an AARS polypeptide or a cellular binding partner is
immobilized
onto the surface of a protein chip adaptable to a mass spectrometer, a test
compound is
contacted therewith, and an ionization method such as MALDI-MS, ESI-MS, FAB-MS
and the like is combined with a mass spectrometer (e.g., double-focusing mass
spectrometer, quadrupole mass spectrometer, time-of-flight mass spectrometer,
Fourier
transformation mass spectrometer, ion cyclotron mass spectrometer and the
like).
[00420] In certain embodiments, cell-based assays, membrane vesicle-based
assays,
or membrane fraction-based assays can be used to identify compounds that
modulate
interactions in the non-canonical pathway of the selected AARS polypeptide. To
this
end, cell lines that express an AARS polypeptide and/or a binding partner, or
a fusion
protein containing a domain or fragment of such proteins (or a combination
thereof), or
cell lines (e.g., COS cells, CHO cells, HEK293 cells, Hela cells etc.) that
have been
genetically engineered to express such protein(s) or fusion protein(s) can be
used. Test
compound(s) that influence the non-canonical activity can be identified by
monitoring a
change (e.g., a statistically significant change) in that activity as compared
to a control
or a predetermined amount.
[00421] For embodiments that relate to antisense and RNAi agents, for example,
also
included are methods of screening a compound for effectiveness in altering
expression
of an AARS reference polynucleotide, comprising a) exposing a sample
comprising the
AARS reference polynucleotide to a compound such as a potential antisense
oligonucleotide, and b) detecting altered expression of the AARS
polynucleotide. In
certain non-limiting examples, these and related embodiments can be employed
in cell-
based assays or in cell-free translation assays, according to routine
techniques in the art.
Also included are the antisense and RNAi agents identified by such methods
[00422] Antibodies to AARS protein fragments can also be used in screening
assays,
such as to identify an agent that specifically binds to an AARS, confirm the
specificity
or affinity of an agent that binds to an AARS protein fragment, or identify
the site of
interaction between the agent and the AARS protein fragment. Included are
assays in
which the antibody is used as a competitive inhibitor of the agent. For
instance, an
antibody that specifically binds to an AARS protein fragment with a known
affinity can
act as a competitive inhibitor of a selected agent, and be used to calculate
the affinity of
the agent for the AARS protein fragment. Also, one or more antibodies that
specifically
bind to known epitopes or sites of an AARS protein fragment can be used as a
competitive inhibitor to confirm whether or not the agent binds at that same
site. Other
variations will be apparent to persons skilled in the art.
[00423] Also included are any of the above methods, or other screening methods
known in the art, which are adapted for high-throughput screening (HTS). HTS
142
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
typically uses automation to run a screen of an assay against a library of
candidate
compounds, for instance, an assay that measures an increase or a decrease in a
non-
canonical activity, as described herein.
[00424] Any of the screening methods provided herein may utilize small
molecule
libraries or libraries generated by combinatorial chemistry. Libraries of
chemical
and/or biological mixtures, such as fungal, bacterial, or algal extracts, are
known in the
art and can be screened with any of the assays of the invention. Examples of
methods
for the synthesis of molecular libraries can be found in: (Care11 et at.,
1994a; Care11 et
at., 1994b; Cho et at., 1993; DeWitt et at., 1993; Gallop et at., 1994;
Zuckermann et at.,
1994).
[00425] Libraries of compounds may be presented in solution (Houghten et at.,
1992) or on beads (Lam et at., 1991), on chips (Fodor et al., 1993), bacteria,
spores
(Ladner et at., U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,409, 1993), plasmids (Cull et at., 1992)
or on phage
(Cwirla et at., 1990; Devlin et at., 1990; Felici et at., 1991; Ladner et at.,
U.S. Pat. No.
5,223,409, 1993; Scott and Smith, 1990). Embodiments of the present invention
encompass the use of different libraries for the identification of small
molecule
modulators of one or more AARS protein fragments, their cellular binding
partners,
and/or their related non-canonical activities. Libraries useful for the
purposes of the
invention include, but are not limited to, (1) chemical libraries, (2) natural
product
libraries, and (3) combinatorial libraries comprised of random peptides,
oligonucleotides and/or organic molecules.
[00426] Chemical libraries consist of structural analogs of known compounds or
compounds that are identified as "hits" or "leads" via natural product
screening.
Natural product libraries are derived from collections of microorganisms,
animals,
plants, or marine organisms which are used to create mixtures for screening
by: (1)
fermentation and extraction of broths from soil, plant or marine
microorganisms or (2)
extraction of plants or marine organisms. Natural product libraries include
polyketides,
non-ribosomal peptides, and variants (non-naturally occurring) thereof. See,
e.g., Cane
et at., Science 282:63-68, 1998. Combinatorial libraries may be composed of
large
numbers of peptides, oligonucleotides or organic compounds as a mixture. They
are
relatively easy to prepare by traditional automated synthesis methods, PCR,
cloning or
proprietary synthetic methods.
[00427] More specifically, a combinatorial chemical library is a collection of
diverse
chemical compounds generated by either chemical synthesis or biological
synthesis, by
combining a number of chemical "building blocks" such as reagents. For
example, a
linear combinatorial chemical library such as a polypeptide library is formed
by
combining a set of chemical building blocks (amino acids) in every possible
way for a
143
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
given compound length (i.e., the number of amino acids in a polypeptide
compound).
Millions of chemical compounds can be synthesized through such combinatorial
mixing
of chemical building blocks.
[00428] For a review of combinatorial chemistry and libraries created
therefrom, see,
e.g., Huc, I. and Nguyen, R. (2001) Comb. Chem. High Throughput Screen 4:53-
74;
Lepre,C A. (2001) Drug Discov. Today 6:133-140; Peng, S. X. (2000) Biomed.
Chromatogr. 14:430-441; Bohm, H. J. and Stahl, M. (2000) Curr. Opin. Chem.
Biol.
4:283-286; Barnes,C and Balasubramanian, S. (2000) Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol.
4:346-
350; Lepre, Enjalbal, C, et al., (2000) Mass Septrom Rev. 19:139-161; Hall, D.
G.,
(2000) Nat. Biotechnol. 18:262-262; Lazo, J. S., and Wipf, P. (2000) J.
Pharmacol. Exp.
Ther. 293:705-709; Houghten, R. A., (2000) Ann. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol.
40:273-
282; Kobayashi, S. (2000) Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. (2000) 4:338-345; Kopylov,
A. M.
and Spiridonova, V. A. (2000) Mol. Biol. (Mosk) 34:1097-1113; Weber, L. (2000)
Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 4:295-302; Dolle, R. E. (2000) J. Comb. Chem. 2:383-
433;
Floyd, CD., et al., (1999) Prog. Med. Chem. 36:91-168; Kundu, B., et al.,
(1999) Prog.
Drug Res. 53:89-156; Cabilly, S. (1999) Mol. Biotechnol. 12:143-148; Lowe, G.
(1999)
Nat. Prod. Rep. 16:641-651; Dolle, R. E. and Nelson, K. H. (1999) J. Comb.
Chem.
1:235-282; Czarnick, A. W. and Keene, J. D. (1998) Curr. Biol. 8:R705-R707;
Dolle,
R. E. (1998) Mol. Divers. 4:233-256; Myers, P. L., (1997) Curr. Opin.
Biotechnol.
8:701-707; and Pluckthun, A. and Cortese, R. (1997) Biol. Chem. 378:443.
[00429] Devices for the preparation of combinatorial libraries arc
commercially
available (see, e.g., 357 MPS, 390 MPS, Advanced Chem Tech, Louisville Ky.,
Symphony, Rainin, Woburn, Mass., 433A Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.,
9050 Plus, Millipore, Bedford, Mass) In addition, numerous combinatorial
libraries
are themselves commercially available (see, e.g., ComGenex, Princeton, N.J.,
Asinex,
Moscow, Ru, Tripos, Inc., St. Louis, Mo., ChemStar, Ltd., Moscow, RU, 3D
Pharmaceuticals, Exton, Pa., Martek Biosciences, Columbia, Md., etc.).
XII. METHODS OF USE
[00430] Embodiments of the present invention include therapeutic methods of
treatment. Accordingly, the AARS agents described herein, including AARS
polypeptides, AARS polynucleotides, AARS polynucleotide-based vectors, AARS
expressing host cells, antisense oligonucleotides, RNAi agents, as well as
binding
agents such as peptides, antibodies and antigen-binding fragments, peptide
mimetics
and other small molecules, can be used to treat a variety of non-limiting
diseases or
conditions associated with the non-canonical activities of a reference AARS.
Examples
of such non-canonical activities include modulation of extracellular
signaling,
144
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
modulation of cell proliferation, modulation of cell migration, modulation of
cell
differentiation (e.g., hematopoiesis, neurogenesis, myogenesis, osteogenesis,
and
adipogenesis), modulation of apoptosis or other forms of cell death,
modulation of
angiogenesis, modulation of cell binding, modulation of cellular metabolism,
modulation of cytokine production or activity, modulation of cytokine receptor
activity,
modulation of cellular uptake, or secretion, immunomodulation, modulation of
inflammation, modulation of metabolic processes such as glucose control, and
the like.
[00431] Included are polynucleotide-based therapies, such as antisense
therapies and
RNAi interference therapies, which typically relate to reducing the expression
of a
target molecule, such as an endogenous fragment of an AARS, or a cellular
binding
partner of an AARS polypeptide, which otherwise contributes to its non-
canonical
activity. Antisense or RNAi therapies typically antagonize the non-canonical
activity,
such as by reducing expression of the AARS reference polypeptide. Also
included are
polypeptides or peptides, antibodies or antigen-binding fragment, peptide
mimetics, or
other small molecule-based therapies, which either agonize or antagonize the
non-
canonical activity of an AARS reference polypeptide, such as by interacting
directly
with the AARS polypeptide, its cellular binding partner(s), or both.
[00432] These and related embodiments include methods of using the AARS agents
or compositions of the present invention for treating a cell, tissue or
subject. The cells
or tissues that may be treated or modulated by the present invention are
preferably
mammalian cells or tissues, or more preferably human cells or tissues. Such
cells or
tissues can be of a healthy state or of a diseased state.
[00433] In certain embodiments, for example, methods are provided for
modulating
therapeutically relevant cellular activities including, but not limited to,
cellular
metabolism, cell differentiation, cell proliferation, cellular uptake, cell
secretion, cell
death, cell mobilization, cell migration, gene transcription, mRNA
translation, cell
impedance, immune responses, inflammatory responses, and the like, comprising
contacting a cell with an AARS agent or composition as described herein. In
certain
embodiments, the cell is in a subject. Accordingly, the AARS compositions may
be
employed in treating essentially any cell or tissue or subject that would
benefit from
modulation of one or more such activities.
[00434] The AARS agents and compositions may also be used in any of a number
of
therapeutic contexts including, for example, those relating to the treatment
or
prevention of neoplastic diseases, immune system diseases or conditions (e.g.,
autoimmune diseases and inflammation), infectious diseases, metabolic
diseases,
neuronal/neurological diseases, muscular/cardiovascular diseases, diseases
associated
with aberrant hematopoiesis, diseases associated with aberrant myogenesis,
diseases
145
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
associated with aberrant neurogenesis, diseases associated with aberrant
adipogenesis,
diseases associated with aberrant osteogenesis, diseases associated with
aberrant
angiogenesis, diseases associated with aberrant cell survival, diseases
associated with
aberrant lipid uptake, diseases associated with aging (e.g. hearing loss,
peripheral or
autonomic neuropathies, senile dementia, retinopathy) and others.
[00435] For example, in certain illustrative embodiments, the AARS
compositions of
the invention may be used to modulate angiogenesis, e.g., via modulation of
endothelial
cell proliferation and/or signaling. Endothelial cell proliferation and/or
signaling may
be monitored using an appropriate cell line (e.g., human microvascular
endothelial lung
cells (HMVEC-L) and human umbilical vein endothelial cells (HUVEC)), and using
an
appropriate assay (e.g., endothelial cell migration assays, endothelial cell
proliferation
assays, tube-forming assays, matrigel plug assays, etc.), many of which are
known and
available in the art.
[00436] Therefore, in related embodiments, the compositions of the invention
may
be employed in the treatment of essentially any cell or tissue or subject that
would
benefit from modulation of angiogenesis. For example, in some embodiments, a
cell or
tissue or subject experiencing or susceptible to angiogenesis (e.g., an
angiogenie
condition) may be contacted with a suitable composition of the invention to
inhibit an
angiogenic condition. In other embodiments, a cell or tissue experiencing or
susceptible to insufficient angiogenesis (e.g., an angiostatic condition) may
be
contacted with an appropriate composition of the invention in order to
interfere with
angiostatic activity and/or promote angiogenesis.
[00437] Also included are methods of modulating hematopoiesis and related
conditions_ Examples of hematopoietic processes that may be modulated by the
AARS
polypeptides of the invention include, without limitation, the formation of
myeloid cells
(e.g., erythroid cells, mast cells monocytes/macrophages, myeloid dendritic
cells,
granulocytes such as basophils, neutrophils, and eosinophils, megakaryocytes,
platelets)
and lymphoid cells (e.g., natural killer cells, lymphoid dendritic cells, B-
cells, and T-
cells). Certain specific hematopoietic processes include erythropoiesis,
granulopoiesis,
lymphopoicsis, mcgakaryopoiesis, thrombopoicsis, and others. Also included are
methods of modulating the trafficking or mobilization of hematopoietic cells,
including
hematopoietic stem cells, progenitor cells, erythrocytes, granulocytes,
lymphocytes,
megakaryocytes, and thrombocytes.
[00438] The methods of modulating hematopoiesis may be practiced in vivo, in
vitro,
ex vivo, or in any combination thereof. These methods can be practiced on any
biological sample, cell culture, or tissue that contains hematopoietic stem
cells,
hematopoietic progenitor cells, or other stem or progenitor cells that are
capable of
146
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
differentiating along the hematopoietic lineage (e.g., adipose tissue derived
stem cells).
For in vitro and ex vivo methods, stem cells and progenitor cells, whether of
hematopoietic origin or otherwise, can be isolated and/or identified according
to the
techniques and characteristics described herein and known in the art.
[00439] The compositions of the invention may also be useful as
immunomodulators
for treating anti- or pro-inflammatory indications by modulating the cells
that mediate,
either directly or indirectly, autoimmune and/or inflammatory diseases,
conditions and
disorders. The utility of the compositions of the invention as
immunomodulators or
modulators of inflammation can be monitored using any of a number of known and
available techniques in the art including, for example, migration assays
(e.g., using
leukocytes or lymphocytes) or cell viability assays (e.g., using B-cells, T-
cells,
monocytes or NK cells).
[00440] "Inflammation" refers generally to the biological response of tissues
to
harmful stimuli, such as pathogens, damaged cells (e.g., wounds), and
irritants. The
term "inflammatory response" refers to the specific mechanisms by which
inflammation
is achieved and regulated, including, merely by way of illustration, immune
cell
activation or migration, cytokine production, v asodilati on , including kinin
release,
fibrinolysis, and coagulation, among others described herein and known in the
art.
[00441] Clinical signs of chronic inflammation are dependent upon duration of
the
illness, inflammatory lesions, cause and anatomical area affected. (see, e.g.,
Kumar et
al., Robbins Basic Pathology-8th Ed., 2009 Elsevier, London; Miller, LM,
Pathology
Lecture Notes, Atlantic Veterinary College, Charlottetown, PEI, Canada).
Chronic
inflammation is associated with a variety of pathological conditions or
diseases,
including, for example, allergies, Alzheimer's disease, anemia, aortic valve
stenosis,
arthritis such as rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis, cancer, congestive
heart failure,
fibromyalgia, fibrosis, heart attack, kidney failure, lupus, pancreatitis,
stroke, surgical
complications, inflammatory lung disease, inflammatory bowel disease,
atherosclerosis,
neurological disorders, diabetes, metabolic disorders, obesity, and psoriasis,
among
others described herein and known in the art. Hence, AARS compositions may be
used
to treat or manage chronic inflammation, modulate any of one or more of the
individual
chronic inflammatory responses, or treat any one or more diseases or
conditions
associated with chronic inflammation.
[00442] Criteria for assessing the signs and symptoms of inflammatory and
other
conditions, including for purposes of making differential diagnosis and also
for
monitoring treatments such as determining whether a therapeutically effective
dose has
been administered in the course of treatment, e.g., by determining improvement
according to accepted clinical criteria, will be apparent to those skilled in
the art and are
147
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
exemplified by the teachings of e.g., Berkow et al., eds., The Merck Manual,
16th
edition, Merck and Co., Rahway, N.J., 1992; Goodman et al., eds., Goodman and
Gilman's The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 10th edition, Pergamon
Press,
Inc., Elmsford, N.Y., (2001); Avery's Drug Treatment: Principles and Practice
of
Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics, 3rd edition, ADIS Press, Ltd.,
Williams and
Wilkins, Baltimore, MD. (1987); Ebadi, Pharmacology, Little, Brown and Co.,
Boston,
(1985); 0 solci al., eds., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th edition,
Mack
Publishing Co., Easton, PA (1990); Katzung, Basic and Clinical Pharmacology,
Appleton and Lange, Norwalk, CT (1992).
[00443] In other embodiments, the AARS compositions of the invention may be
used
to modulate cellular proliferation and/or survival and, accordingly, for
treating or
preventing diseases, disorders or conditions characterized by abnormalities in
cellular
proliferation and/or survival. For example, in certain embodiments, the AARS
compositions may be used to modulate apoptosis and/or to treat diseases or
conditions
associated with abnormal apoptosis. Apoptosis can be monitored by any of a
number of
available techniques known and available in the art including, for example,
assays that
measure fragmentation of DNA, alterations in membrane asymmetry, activation of
apoptotic caspases and/or release of cytochrome C and AIF.
[00444] The progress of these and other therapies (e.g., ex vivo therapies)
can be
readily monitored by conventional methods and assays and based on criteria
known to
the physician or other persons of skill in the art.
XII/. PHARMACEUTICAL FORMULATIONS, ADMINISTRATION AND KITS
[00445] Embodiments of the present invention include AARS polynucleotides,
AARS polypeptides, host cells expressing AARS polypeptides, binding agents,
modulatory agents, or other compounds described herein, formulated in
pharmaceutically-acceptable or physiologically-acceptable solutions for
administration
to a cell or an animal, either alone, or in combination with one or more other
modalities
of therapy. It will also be understood that, if desired, the compositions of
the invention
may be administered in combination with other agents as well, such as, e.g.,
other
proteins or polypeptides or various pharmaceutically-active agents. There is
virtually
no limit to other components that may also be included in the compositions,
provided
that the additional agents do not adversely affect the modulatory or other
effects desired
to be achieved.
[00446] In the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention, formulation of
pharmaceutically-acceptable excipients and carrier solutions is well-known to
those of
skill in the art, as is the development of suitable dosing and treatment
regimens for
148
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
using the particular compositions described herein in a variety of treatment
regimens,
including e.g., oral, parenteral, intravenous, intranasal, subcutaneous, and
intramuscular
administration and formulation.
[00447] In certain applications, the pharmaceutical or therapeutic
compositions of
the invention do not stimulate an immune reaction. In other embodiments, the
pharmaceutical or therapeutic compositions of the invention, typically
comprising one
or more AARS polypeptides or polynucleotides, stimulate an immune reaction,
such as
by serving as an adjuvant in a vaccine or related composition, or being
present in a
composition together with a separate adjuvant or agent stimulates an immune
response.
[00448] In certain embodiments, the AARS agents such as AARS polypeptides,
AARS polynucleotides, and antibodies have a solubility that is desirable for
the
particular mode of administration, such intravenous administration. Examples
of
desirable solubilities include at least about 1 mg/ml, at least about 10
mg/ml, at least
about 25 mg/ml, and at least about 50 mg/ml.
[00449] In certain applications, the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed
herein
may be delivered via oral administration to a subject. As such, these
compositions may
be formulated with an inert diluent or with an assimilable edible carrier, or
they may be
enclosed in hard- or soft-shell gelatin capsule, or they may be compressed
into tablets,
or they may be incorporated directly with the food of the diet.
[00450] In certain circumstances it will be desirable to deliver the
pharmaceutical
compositions disclosed herein parenterally, subcutaneously, intravenously,
intramuscularly, intra-arterially, intrathecally, intraparenchymally,
intraventricularly,
intraurethrally, intrasternally, intracranially, intrasynovially, or even
intraperitoneally as
described, for example, in US_ Pat No 5,543,158; US PaL No 5,641,515 and U S
Pat. No. 5,399,363
Suitable devices for parenteral administration include needle (including
microneedle)
injectors, needle-free injectors, and infusion techniques.
[00451] Solutions of the active compounds as free base or pharmacologically
acceptable salts may be prepared in water suitably mixed with a surfactant,
such as
hydroxypropylcellulose. Dispersions may also be prepared in glycerol,
liquid
polyethylene glycols, and mixtures thereof and in oils. Under ordinary
conditions of
storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the
growth of
microorganisms.
[00452] The pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile
aqueous
solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous
preparation of
sterile injectable solutions or dispersions (U.S. Pat. No. 5,466,468
). In all cases the form should be sterile
149
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It should be
stable under
the conditions of manufacture and storage and should be preserved against the
contaminating action of microorganisms, such as bacteria and fungi. The
carrier can be
a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol
(e.g.,
glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like),
suitable
mixtures thereof, and/or vegetable oils. Proper fluidity may be maintained,
for
example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the
required
particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. The
prevention of
the action of microorganisms can be facilitated by various antibacterial and
antifungal
agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, thimerosal,
and the
like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for
example, sugars
or sodium chloride. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be
brought about by the use in the compositions of agents delaying absorption,
for
example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
[00453] For parenteral administration in an aqueous solution, for example, the
solution should be suitably buffered if necessary and the liquid diluent first
rendered
isotonic with sufficient saline or glucose. These particular aqueous solutions
are
especially suitable for intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous and
intraperitoneal
administration. In this connection, a sterile aqueous medium that can be
employed will
be known to those of skill in the art in light of the present disclosure. For
example, one
dosage may be dissolved in 1 ml of isotonic NaCl solution and either added to
1000 ml
of hypodermoclysis fluid or injected at the proposed site of infusion (see,
e.g.,
Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 15th Edition, pp. 1035-1038 and 1570-
1580).
Some variation in dosage will necessarily occur depending on the condition of
the
subject being treated. The person responsible for administration will, in any
event,
determine the appropriate dose for the individual subject. Moreover, for human
administration, preparations should meet sterility, pyrogenicity, and the
general safety
and purity standards as required by FDA Office of Biologics standards.
[00454] Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the
active
compounds in the required amount in the appropriate solvent with the various
other
ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization.
Generally,
dispersions are prepared by incorporating the various sterilized active
ingredients into a
sterile vehicle which contains the basic dispersion medium and the required
other
ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for
the
preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of
preparation are
vacuum-drying and freeze-drying techniques which yield a powder of the active
150
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-
filtered
solution thereof.
[00455] The compositions disclosed herein may be formulated in a neutral or
salt
form. Pharmaceutically-acceptable salts, include the acid addition salts
(formed with
the free amino groups of the protein) and which are formed with inorganic
acids such
as, for example, hydrochloric or phosphoric acids, or such organic acids as
acetic,
oxalic, tartaric, mandelic, and the like. Salts formed with the free carboxyl
groups can
also be derived from inorganic bases such as, for example, sodium, potassium,
ammonium, calcium, or ferric hydroxides, and such organic bases as
isopropylamine,
trimethylaminc, histidinc, procaine and the like. Upon formulation, solutions
will be
administered in a manner compatible with the dosage formulation and in such
amount
as is therapeutically effective. The formulations are easily administered in a
variety of
dosage forms such as injectable solutions, drug-release capsules, and the
like.
[00456] As used herein, "carrier" includes any and all solvents, dispersion
media,
vehicles, coatings, diluents, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic
and absorption
delaying agents, buffers, carrier solutions, suspensions, colloids, and the
like. The use
of such media and agents for pharmaceutical active substances is well known in
the art.
Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the
active
ingredient, its use in the therapeutic compositions is contemplated.
Supplementary
active ingredients can also be incorporated into the compositions.
[00457] The phrase "pharmaceutically-acceptable" refers to molecular entities
and
compositions that do not produce an allergic or similar untoward reaction when
administered to a human. The preparation of an aqueous composition that
contains a
protein as an active ingredient is well understood in the art
Typically, such
compositions are prepared as injectables, either as liquid solutions or
suspensions; solid
forms suitable for solution in, or suspension in, liquid prior to injection
can also be
prepared. The preparation can also be emulsified.
[00458] In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions may be
delivered
by intranasal sprays, inhalation, and/or other aerosol delivery vehicles.
Methods for
delivering genes, polynucleotides, and peptide compositions directly to the
lungs via
nasal aerosol sprays have been described e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 5,756,353 and
U.S. Pat.
No. 5,804,212
Likewise, the delivery of drugs using intranasal microparticle resins
(Takenaga et al.,
1998) and lysophosphatidyl-glycerol compounds (U.S. Pat. No. 5,725,871
) are also well-known in the
pharmaceutical arts. Likewise, transmucosal drug delivery in the form of a
151
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
polytetrafluoroetheylene support matrix is described in U.S. Pat. No.
5,780,045
[00459] The pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated to be immediate and
/
or sustained release. Sustained release compositions include delayed,
modified, pulsed,
controlled, targeted and programmed release. Thus the compositions may be
formulated
as a suspension or as a solid, semi-solid, or thixotropic liquid for
administration as an
implanted depot providing sustained release of the AARS polynucleotides, AARS
polypeptides, binding agents, modulatory agents and other active agents.
Examples of
such formulations include without limitation, drug-coated stents and semi-
solids and
suspensions comprising drug-loaded poly(DL-lactic-co-glycolic)acid (PGLA),
poly(DL-lactide-co-glycolide) (PLG) or poly(lactide) (PLA) lamellar vesicles
or
microparticles, hydrogels (Hoffman AS: Ann. NY. Acad. Sci. 944: 62-73 (2001)),
poly-
amino acid nanoparticles systems, sold under the trademark MEDUSA developed
by
Flamel Technologies Inc., non aqueous gel systems sold under the trademark
ATRIGEL developed by Atrix, Inc., and Sucrose Acetate Isobutyrate Extended
Release formulations sold under the trademark SABER developed by Durect
Corporation, and lipid-based systems developed by SkyePharma and sold under
the
trademark DEPOFOAMO.
[00460] Sustained release devices capable of delivering desired doses of the
pharmaceutical compositions over extended periods of time are known in the
art. For
example, US Pat. Nos. 5,034,229; 5,557,318; 5,110,596; 5,728,396; 5,985,305;
6,113,938; 6,156,331; 6,375,978; and 6,395,292; teach osmotically-driven
devices
capable of delivering an active agent formulation, such as a solution or a
suspension, at
a desired rate over an extended period of time (i.e, a period ranging from
more than
one week up to one year or more). Other exemplary sustained release devices
include
regulator-type pumps that provide constant flow, adjustable flow, or
programmable
flow of beneficial agent formulations, which are available from Medtronic
including the
Intrathecal pumps sold under the trademark SYNCHROMED INFUSION SYSTEM ,
the Johnson and Johnson systems sold under the trademark CODMAN division
pumps, and INSET technologies pumps. Further examples of devices are
described in
US Pat. Nos. 6,283,949; 5,976,109; 5,836,935; and 5,511,355.
[00461] In certain embodiments, the delivery may occur by use of liposomes,
nanocapsules, microparticles, microspheres, lipid particles, vesicles, and the
like, for the
introduction of the compositions of the present invention into suitable host
cells. In
particular, the compositions of the present invention may be formulated for
delivery
either encapsulated in a lipid particle, a liposome, a vesicle, a nanosphere,
a
152
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
nanoparticle or the like. The formulation and use of such delivery vehicles
can be
carried out using known and conventional techniques.
[00462] In certain embodiments, the agents provided herein may be attached to
a
pharmaceutically acceptable solid substrate, including biocompatible and
biodegradable
substrates such as polymers and matrices. Examples of such solid substrates
include,
without limitation, polyesters, hydrogels (for example, poly(2-hydroxyethyl-
methacrylate), or poly(vinylalcohol)), polylactides (U.S. Pat. No. 3,773,919),
copolymers of L-glutamic acid and y-ethyl-L-glutamate, non-degradable ethylene-
vinyl
acetate, degradable lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymers such as poly(lactic-
co-glycolic
acid) (PLGA) and the LUPRON DEPOTTm (injectable microspheres composed of
lactic
acid-glycolic acid copolymer and leuprolide acetate), poly-D-(-)-3-
hydroxybutyric acid,
collagen, metal, hydroxyapatite, bioglass, aluminate, bioceramic materials,
and purified
proteins.
[00463] In one particular embodiment, the solid substrate comprises
biodegradable
polymers sold under the trademark ATRIGELTm (QLT, Inc., Vancouver, B.C.). The
ATRIGEL drug delivery system consists of biodegradable polymers dissolved in
biocompatible carriers. Pharmaceuticals may be blended into this liquid
delivery
system at the time of manufacturing or, depending upon the product, may be
added later
by the physician at the time of use. When the liquid product is injected into
the
subcutaneous space through a small gauge needle or placed into accessible
tissue sites
through a cannula, water in the tissue fluids causes the polymer to
precipitate and trap
the drug in a solid implant. The drug encapsulated within the implant is then
released
in a controlled manner as the polymer matrix biodegrades with time.
[00464] Pharmaceutical compositions for use in the present invention may also
be
administered topically, (intra)dermally, or transdermally to the skin or
mucosa. Typical
formulations for this purpose include gels, hydrogels, lotions, solutions,
creams,
ointments, dusting powders, dressings, foams, films, skin patches, wafers,
implants,
sponges, fibers, bandages, and microemulsions. Liposomes may also be used.
Typical
carriers include alcohol, water, mineral oil, liquid petrolatum, white
petrolatum,
glycerin, polyethylene glycol, and propylene glycol. Penetration enhancers may
be
incorporated¨see, e.g., Finnin and Morgan: I Pharm. Sci. 88(10): 955-958,
(1999).
Other means of topical administration include delivery by electroporation,
iontophoresis, phonophoresis, sonophoresis, and microneedle or needle-free
injection
for example using the systems sold under the trademarks POWDERJECTTm, and
BIOJECTTm.
[00465] Methods of formulation are well known in the art and are disclosed,
for
example, in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Mack Publishing
153
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Company, Easton, Pa., 20th edition, ISBN: 0683306472 (2000). The compositions
and
agents provided herein may be administered according to the methods of the
present
invention in any therapeutically effective dosing regimen. The dosage amount
and
frequency are selected to create an effective level of the agent without
harmful effects.
The effective amount of a compound of the present invention will depend on the
route
of administration, the type of warm-blooded animal being treated, and the
physical
characteristics of the specific warm-blooded animal under consideration. These
factors
and their relationship to determining this amount are well known to skilled
practitioners
in the medical arts. This amount and the method of administration can be
tailored to
achieve optimal efficacy but will depend on such factors as weight, diet,
concurrent
medication and other factors which those skilled in the medical arts will
recognize.
[00466] In particular embodiments, the amount of a composition or agent
administered will generally range from a dosage of from about 0.1 to about 100
mg/kg/day, and typically from about 0.1 to 10 mg/kg where administered orally
or
intravenously. In particular embodiments, a dosage is 5 mg/kg or 7.5 mg,/kg.
In
various embodiments, the dosage is about 50-2500 mg per day, 100-2500 mg/day,
300-
1800 mg/day, or 500-1800 mg/day. In one embodiment, the dosage is between
about
100 to 600 mg/day. In another embodiment, the dosage is between about 300 and
1200
mg/day. In particular embodiments, the composition or agent is administered at
a
dosage of 100 mg/day, 240 mg/day 300 mg/day, 600 mg/day, 1000 mg/day, 1200
mg/day, or 1800 mg/day, in one or more doses per day (i.e., where the combined
doses
achieve the desired daily dosage). In related embodiments, a dosage is 100 mg
bid, 150
mg bid, 240 mg bid, 300 mg bid, 500 mg bid, or 600 mg bid. In various
embodiments,
the composition or agent is administered in single or repeat dosing The
initial dosage
and subsequent dosages may be the same or different.
[00467] In certain embodiments, a composition or agent is administered in a
single
dosage of 0.1 to 10 mg,/kg or 0.5 to 5 mg/kg. In other embodiments, a
composition or
agent is administered in a dosage of 0.1 to 50 mg/kg/day, 0.5 to 20 mg/kg/day,
or 5 to
20 mg/kg/day.
[00468] In certain embodiments, a composition or agent is administered orally
or
intravenously, e.g., by infusion over a period of time of about, e.g., 10
minutes to 90
minutes. In other related embodiments, a composition or agent is administered
by
continuous infusion, e.g., at a dosage of between about 0.1 to about 10
mg/kg/hr over a
time period. While the time period can vary, in certain embodiments the time
period
may be between about 10 minutes to about 24 hours or between about 10 minutes
to
about three days.
154
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00469] In particular embodiments, an effective amount or therapeutically
effective
amount is an amount sufficient to achieve a total concentration of the
composition or
agent in the blood plasma of a subject with a C. of between about 0.1 [tg/m1
and
about 20 tg/m1 or between about 0.3 pg/ml and about 20 mind. In certain
embodiments, an oral dosage is an amount sufficient to achieve a blood plasma
concentration (C.) of between about 0.1 pg/m1 to about 5 g/m1 or between about
0.3
[tg/m1 to about 3 1.1g/ml. In certain embodiments, an intravenous dosage is an
amount
sufficient to achieve a blood plasma concentration (C.) of between about 1
[tg/m1 to
about 10 [tg/m1 or between about 2 1.1g/m1 and about 6 ..tg/ml. In a related
embodiment,
the total concentration of an agent in the blood plasma of the subject has a
mean trough
concentration of less than about 20 tg/m1 and/or a steady state concentration
of less
than about 20 p,g/ml. In a further embodiment, the total concentration of an
agent in the
blood plasma of the subject has a mean trough concentration of less than about
10
[tg/m1 and/or a steady state concentration of less than about 10 [tg/ml.
[00470] In yet another embodiment, the total concentration of an agent in the
blood
plasma of the subject has a mean trough concentration of between about 1 ng/ml
and
about 10 tg/m1 and/or a steady state concentration of between about 1 ng/ml
and about
[tg/ml. In one embodiment, the total concentration of an agent in the blood
plasma
of the subject has a mean trough concentration of between about 0.3 [tg/m1 and
about 3
1.1g/m1 and/or a steady state concentration of between about 0.3 pg/m1 and
about 3
[tg/ml.
[00471] In particular embodiments, a composition or agent is administered in
an
amount sufficient to achieve in the mammal a blood plasma concentration having
a
mean trough concentration of between about 1 ng/ml and about 10 tg/m1 and/or a
steady state concentration of between about 1 ng/ml and about 10 [tg/ml. In
related
embodiments, the total concentration of the agent in the blood plasma of the
mammal
has a mean trough concentration of between about 0.31.1g/m1 and about 3
1.1g/m1 and/or a
steady state concentration of between about 0.3 jig/m1 and about 3 tg/ml.
[00472] In particular embodiments of the present invention, the effective
amount of a
composition or agent, or the blood plasma concentration of composition or
agent is
achieved or maintained, e.g., for at least 15 minutes, at least 30 minutes, at
least 45
minutes, at least 60 minutes, at least 90 minutes, at least 2 hours, at least
3 hours, at
least 4 hours, at least 8 hours, at least 12 hours, at least 24 hours, at
least 48 hours, at
least 3 days, at least 4 days, at least 5 days, at least 6 days, at least one
week, at least 2
weeks, at least one month, at least 2 months, at least 4 months, at least 6
months, at
least one year, at least 2 years, or greater than 2 years.
155
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00473] In certain polypeptide-based embodiments, the amount of polypeptide
administered will typically be in the range of about 0.1 gg/kg to about 0.1
mg/kg to
about 50 mg/kg of patient body weight. Depending on the type and severity of
the
disease, about 0.1 1.tg/kg to about 0.1 mg/kg to about 50 mg/kg body weight
(e.g., about
0.1-15 mg/kg/dose) of polypeptide can be an initial candidate dosage for
administration
to the patient, whether, for example, by one or more separate administrations,
or by
continuous infusion. For example, a dosing regimen may comprise administering
an
initial loading dose of about 4 mg/kg, followed by a weekly maintenance dose
of about
2 mg/kg of the polypeptide, or about half of the loading dose. However, other
dosage
regimens may be useful. A typical daily dosage might range from about 0.1
gg/kg to
about 1 ittg/kg to 100 mg/kg or more, depending on the factors mentioned
above. For
repeated administrations over several days or longer, depending on the
condition, the
treatment is sustained until a desired suppression of disease symptoms occurs.
[00474] In particular embodiments, the effective dosage achieves the blood
plasma
levels or mean trough concentration of a composition or agent described
herein. These
may be readily determined using routine procedures.
[00475] Embodiments of the present invention, in other aspects, provide kits
comprising one or more containers filled with one or more of the polypeptides,
polynucleotides, antibodies, multiunit complexes, compositions thereof, etc.,
of the
invention, as described herein. The kits can include written instructions on
how to use
such compositions (e.g., to modulate cellular signaling, angiogenesis, cancer,
inflammatory conditions, diagnosis etc.).
[00476] The kits herein may also include a one or more additional therapeutic
agents
or other components suitable or desired for the indication being treated, or
for the
desired diagnostic application. An additional therapeutic agent may be
contained in a
second container, if desired. Examples of additional therapeutic agents
include, but are
not limited to anti-neoplastic agents, anti-inflammatory agents, antibacterial
agents,
antiviral agents, angiogenic agents, etc.
[00477] The kits herein can also include one or more syringes or other
components
necessary or desired to facilitate an intended mode of delivery (e.g., stents,
implantable
depots, etc.).
[00478]
[00479] Although the foregoing invention has been described in some detail by
way
of illustration and example for purposes of clarity of understanding, it will
be readily
156
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art in light of the teachings of this
invention that
certain changes and modifications may be made thereto without departing from
the
spirit or scope of the appended claims. The following examples are provided by
way of
illustration only and not by way of limitation. Those of skill in the art will
readily
recognize a variety of noncritical parameters that could be changed or
modified to yield
essentially similar results.
X/V. EXAMPLES
[00480] GENERAL METHODS Unless indicated otherwise in the examples below, the
following general methods for gene optimization, small and large scale protein
expression, protein purification, transcriptional profiling and screening were
used to
make and characterize the AARS polypeptides described in the Examples below.
GENE SYNTHESIS AND CLONING INTO EXPRESSION VECTORS
[00481] Polynucleotide sequences encoding epitope tagged versions of the AARS
polypeptides were codon optimized and cloned into bacterial expression vectors
using
the methods listed below.
[00482] In method (1), E. colt codon-optimized DNA (Welch et al., PLoS ONE
4(9):
e7007 doi:10.1371/journal.pone.0007002) encoding each AARS polypeptide is
synthesized by DNA 2.0 (Menlo Park, CA), and two versions of each AARS
polypeptide are synthesized, containing either an N-terminal, or C-terminal
combined
epitope tag comprising both a six histidine tag and V5 epitope tag.
[00483] DNA encoding the N-terminally tagged AARS polypeptides is synthesized
with a 5' extension encoding in 5' to 3' orientation, a ribosome binding site
(rbs
(underlined below)), NdeI restriction site, six histidine tag, and a V5
epitope tag,
(AGGAGGTAAAACATATGCATCATCATCATCATCACGGTAAGCCTATCCCTA
ACCCTTTGCTCGGTCTCGATTCTACG) (SEQ. ID. No. 1), which is fused in frame
to the predicted AARS polypeptide open reading frame. In cases where the AARS
polypeptide comprises a predicted native initiation methionine (ATG) residue,
or the
first amino acid residue of the predicted AARS polypeptide is Met, this was
deleted. At
the end of the predicted AARS polypeptide open reading frame, two stop codons
and a
XhoI site (TAATGACTCGAG) (SEQ. ID. No. 2) are added.
[00484] DNA encoding the C-terminally tagged AARS polypeptides is synthesized
with a 5' extension encoding a rbs (underlined below) and NdeI restriction
site that
either recapitulates the predicted native start codon for the AARS
polypeptide, or
inserts an ATG in frame with the predicted AARS polypeptide open reading
frame,
(AGGAGATAAAACATATG) (SEQ. ID. No. 3). In different embodiments, the
157
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
ribosome binding site can comprise the sequences "AGGAGGTAAAACAT" (SEQ.
ID. No. 4), "AGGAGATAAAACAT" (SEQ. ID. No. 5), or GAAGGAGATATACAT
(SEQ. ID. No. 6). At the 3' end of the predicted AARS polypeptide open reading
frame,
a 3' extension is synthesized which encodes in 5' to 3' order, a V5 epitope
tag, six
histidine tag, two stop codons and a XhoI site,
(GGTAAGCCTATCCCTAACCCTCTCCTCGGTCTCGATTCTACGCACCACCATC
ATCACCATTAATGACTCGAG) (SEQ. ID. No. 7), which is fused in frame to the
predicted AARS polypeptide open reading frame. If the AARS polypeptide
included a
predicted native stop codon, this was deleted.
[00485] Synthesized DNA sequences encoding the AARS polypeptides are
subcloned into pJExpress411 vector (DNA 2.0). After sequencing to confirm
synthesis
of the correct product, expression vectors are transformed into bacteria for
protein
expression as described more fully below.
[00486] In method (2), E. coli codon-optimized DNA (Ermolaeva MD (2001) Curr.
Iss. Mol. Biol. 3 (4) 91-7) encoding each AARS polypeptide is synthesized by
GENEWIZ (South Plainfield, NJ). Each polynucleotide sequence encoding the AARS
polypeptide was synthesized with short 5' and 3' extensions comprising unique
restriction sites for subsequent cloning.
[00487] Specifically a BamH1 restriction site was inserted at the 5' end of
the
predicted open reading frame. In cases where the AARS polypeptide comprises a
predicted native initiation methionine residue (ATG), or the first amino acid
residue of
the predicted AARS polypeptide is Met, this was deleted. Additionally a XhoI
restriction site was inserted at the 3' end of the predicted open reading
frame. In cases
where the AARS polypeptide comprises a predicted native stop codon, this was
deleted
[00488] After restriction digestion, the resulting DNA sequences are subcloned
into
modified pET-24b vectors (EMD, Gibbstown, NJ) containing either an N-
terminal(pET24b_N-6XHisN5), or C-terminal (pET24b_C-V5/6XHis) combined
epitope tag comprising both a six histidine and VS epitope tag (vector
modification by
GENEWIZ, (South Plainfield, NJ).
[00489] After restriction digestion, and cloning, the DNA encoding the N-
tagged
AARS polypeptide is cloned into the N-tagged vector (pET24b_N-6XHisN5), which
comprises a 5' DNA sequence encoding six histidines and a V5 epitope tag,
(CATATGCATCATCATCATCATCACGGTAAGCCTATCCCTAACCCTCTCCTCGGTCTCGATTC
TACGGGATCC) (SEQ. ID. No. 8), in frame with an initiation codon (ATG) embedded
within the NdeI restriction site. This 5' extension is fused to the predicted
AARS
polypeptide open reading frame through a short 2 amino acid linker (GS).
158
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00490] At the 3' end of the predicted open reading frame, the DNA encoding
the N-
tagged AARS polypeptide comprises a DNA sequence encoding a 2 amino acid
extension (LE) followed by two termination codons (CTCGAGTAATGA) (SEQ. ID.
No. 9).
[00491] After restriction digestion, and cloning, the DNA encoding the C-
tagged
AARS polypeptide cloned into the C-tagged vector (pET24b_C-V5/6XHis),
comprises
a 5' sequence encoding an initiation codon (ATG) embedded within the NdeI
restriction
site which is fused to the predicted AARS polypeptide open reading frame
through a
short 2 amino acid linker (GS), (CATATGGGATCC) (SEQ. ID. No. 10).
[00492] At the 3' end of the predicted open reading frame, the DNA encoding
the C-
tagged AARS polypeptide comprises a 3' DNA sequence encoding a short linker 2
amino acid linker (LE) followed by a V5 epitope tag followed by six
histidines, and two
stop codons,
CTCGAGGGTAAGCCTATCCCTAACCCTCTCCTCGGTCTCGATTCTACGCACC
AC CAC CAC CAC CACTAATGA (SEQ. ID. No. 11).
AARS POLYPEPTIDE EXPRESSION, PURIFICATION AND BIOPHYSICAL
CHARACTERIZATION
[00493] 6xHis-tagged AARS polypeptides are expressed in bacteria in a medium-
throughput format and/or in larger scale flask cultures depending upon the
amount of
protein required. AARS polypeptides are purified using affinity and ion
exchange
chromatography as described below, and as specified for specific experiments.
[00494] Bacterial cultures: 100 ng of expression vector comprising codon
optimized DNA encoding each AARS polypeptide (as described above) is
transformed
into BL21(DE3) (EMD chemicals, cat. no. 69450) competent E. coil bacteria at
42 C for
30 seconds in PCR plates. C41(DE3) (Lucigen, cat. no. 60442), HMS174(DE3) (EMD
chemicals, cat. no. 69453) and 0rigami2(DE3) (EMD chemicals, cat. no. 71345)
strains
are also evaluated. The plates are placed on ice for 2 minutes and 100 uL of
SOC
medium is added, followed by a 1-hour incubation at 37 C. 5 mL of auto-
induction
medium (EMD chemicals, cat. no. 71491) supplemented with kanamycin (100 ug/mL)
is added into each well of a 24-well block (Qiagen, cat. no. 19583). The
transformation
reactions are added to the individual wells, the block is sealed with adhesive
film
(VWR, cat. no 60941-078) and incubated overnight at 250 rpm in a 37 C shaker.
When
low temperature (25 C) conditions are used, incubation is carried out for 48
hours
instead.
[00495] For larger scale expression, 200 mL of auto-induction medium
supplemented with kanamycin (100 jig/mL) is added into 500-mL Erlenmeyer
flasks
159
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
with vent caps (Corning, cat. no. 431401). The transformation reactions are
added to
the individual flasks and incubated for 30 hours at 250 rpm in a 37 C shaker.
[00496] Protein Isolation: After the culture reached stationary phase (typical
0D600
of 3-6), the blocks are centrifuged at 3600 x g for 10 minutes. The medium is
carefully
aspirated and the blocks are frozen at -80 C or -20 C for 10 minutes. The
blocks are
then allowed to thaw at room temperature and 1 mL lysis buffer (100 mL
Bugbuster
supplemented with 200 j.tL lysonase (EMD chemicals, cat. no 71370) and
protease
inhibitors "complete mini EDTA-free" (Roche, cat. no. 11 836 170 001)) is
added into
each well. The pellets are resuspended by repeat pipetting until no clump is
visible and
transferred to eppendorf tubes, followed by a 10-20 minute incubation on a
shaker at
room temperature. After centrifugation at 16,000 g for 10 minutes at 4 C, the
lysates
are loaded onto a TurboFilter 96 Plate included in the Ni-NTA Superflow 96
BioRobot
Kit (Qiagen, cat. no. 969261) and centrifuged at 500 g for 5-10 minutes.
[00497] For larger scale expression, the stationary phase culture is
transferred into
500-mL bottles and centrifuged at 6,000 g for 10 minutes. The medium is
decanted and
the pellet is stored at -80 C or -20 C before further processing. The pellet
is then
allowed to thaw at room temperature and 20 mL lysis buffer is added into each
bottle.
The pellets are resuspended by repeat pipetting until no clump is visible,
followed by 20
minute incubation on a shaker at room temperature. After centrifugation at
10,000 g for
30 minutes at 4 C, the lysates are transferred to clean tubes or bottles. If
trace amounts
of debris are carried over during the transfer, the sample is centrifuged
again or passed
through a 0.45 l_tm cellulose acetate membrane (Corning, cat. no. 430314) for
further
clarification.
[00498] Affinity Purification: A QIAFilter 96 Plate is loaded with 200 tiL Ni-
NTA
Superflow slurry included in the Ni-NTA Superflow 96 BioRobot Kit and the
resin is
equilibrated by adding 600 1iL binding buffer (20 mM sodium phosphate, 500 mM
sodium chloride and 10 mM imidazole, pH 7.5). A vacuum of -15 in. Hg is
applied
until all the buffer has passed through the resin. The clarified cell lysates
from the
previous step are then loaded onto the QIAFilter0 96 Plate and allowed to bind
for 5
minutes. A vacuum of -3 in. Hg is applied for approximately 5 minutes until
all the
samples have passed through the resin. The resin is then washed with 1 mL
binding
buffer, followed by two washes with 1 mL binding buffer containing 0.1% Triton
X-
TM
100. The resin is then washed 10 times with 1 nit binding buffer without
Triton X-100.
The bound 6xHis-tagged AARS polypeptides are eluted with 450 1.tL elution
buffer (20
mM sodium phosphate, 500 mM sodium chloride and 500 mM imidazole, pH 7.5) and
stored at 4 C.
160
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00499] For larger scale expression, an empty disposable column "Poly-Prep"
(Bio-
Rad, cat. no. 731-1550) is loaded with 1 mL Ni-NTA Superflow slurry (Qiagen,
cat. no.
30450) and the 0.5 mL resin is equilibrated by adding 5 mL binding buffer. The
clarified cell lysate from the previous step is then loaded onto the column
and allowed
to pass through by gravity. The resin is first washed with 50 mL binding
buffer plus
0.1% Triton X-100, then washed with 50 mL binding buffer without Triton X-100.
The
bound 6xHis-tagged AARS polypeptides are eluted with 2 mL elution buffer and
stored
at 4 C.
[00500] Desalting and Polishing Steps: For AARS polypeptides with a molecular
mass of >10 kDa, the Omega 10K membrane of an AcroPrep 96 filter plate (Pall,
cat.
no. 5034) is rinsed with 20 uL 1X PBS and the plate is placed onto a vacuum
manifold
(>10 in Hg) until all the liquid passes through. The eluates from the previous
step (Ni-
NTA) are dispensed into each well and the vacuum applied until all the liquid
passes
through. These steps are repeated until the total eluate volume (450 gL) has
been
processed. AARS polypeptides are recovered by adding 180 uL of 1X PBS pH 7.4
to
each well, pipetting up and down 10 times carefully and then transferred to a
clean
block. This step is repeated to yield a total volume of 360 AL per well and
the block is
stored at 4 C. For AARS polypeptides with a molecular mass of <10 kDa, the
eluates
TM
from Ni-NTA are loaded onto an Amicon Ultra-15 Centrifugal Filter Unit with
TM
Ultrace1-3 membrane (Millipore, cat. no. UFC900308), followed by the addition
of 10
mL IX PBS and a centrifugation at 3,600 g for 10-30 minutes until the volume
is less
than 3601uL. The samples are recovered and 1X PBS is added to a final volume
of 360
AL.
[00501] In order to remove endotoxins, an AcroPrep Advance filter plate with
Mustang Q membrane (Pall, cat. no. 8171) is rinsed with 300 1.tL of 1X PBS and
centrifuged at 1,000 g for 5 minutes to remove the buffer. The desalted AARS
polypeptides (360 L/well) are added to the filter plate and incubated on a
shaker for 5-
minutes. The plate is then centrifuged at 1,000 g for 5-10 minutes and the
flow
through fractions containing the AARS polypeptides are collected and stored at
4"C.
[00502] For larger scale expression, the eluates from Ni-NTA are loaded onto
an
Amicon Ultra-15 Centrifugal Filter Unit with Ultrace1-3 or Ultracel-10
membrane
(Millipore, cat. no. UFC900308 or UFC901008) depending on the molecular weight
of
the AARS polypeptide and then centrifuged at 3,600 g for 10-30 minutes until
the
volume is reduced to 250 pL. The samples are mixed in 10 mL IX PBS, pH7.4 and
centrifuged again at 3,600 g for 10-30 minutes until the volume is about 250
L. This
step is repeated one more time, the supernatants are recovered and 1X PBS is
added to a
final volume of 1.5 mL.
161
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00503] In order to remove endotoxins, a Sartobind Q 5 strong anion exchanger
membrane (Sartorius, cat. no. Q5F) is flushed with 1 mL 1X PBS and the AARS
polypeptides are slowly passed through the membrane using a plastic syringe.
The flow
through fraction containing the AARS polypeptides is collected in a 96-deep
well block
that is sealed and stored at 4 C.
[00504] 6xHis-tagged AARS polypeptides expressed in bacteria and found in
inclusion bodies are purified using affinity chromatography and a series of
refolding
steps, as described below.
[00505] Bacterial cultures: 100 ng of plasmid encoding each AARS polypeptide
is
transformed into BL21(DE3) (EMD chemicals, cat. no. 69450) or C41(DE3)
(Lucigen,
cat. no. 60442) competent E. coli bacteria at 42 C for 30 seconds in PCR
plates. The
plates are placed on ice for 2 minutes and 100 uL of SOC medium is added,
followed
by a 1-hour incubation at 37 C. 5 mL of auto-induction medium (EMD chemicals,
cat.
no. 71491) supplemented with kanamycin (100 ug/mL) is added into each well of
a 24-
well block (Qiagen, cat. no. 19583). The transformation reactions are added to
the
individual wells, the block is sealed with adhesive film (VWR, cat. no 60941-
078) and
incubated overnight at 250 rpm in a 37 C shaker.
[00506] For larger scale expression, 200 mL of auto-induction medium
supplemented with kanamycin (100 p.g/mL) is added into 500-mL Erlenmeyer
flasks
with vent caps (Corning, cat. no. 431401). The transformation reactions are
added to
the individual flasks and incubated for 30 hours at 250 rpm in a 37 C shaker.
[00507] Isolation: After the cultures reach stationary phase (typical 0D600 of
3-6),
the blocks are centrifuged at 3,600 x g for 10 minutes. The medium is
carefully
aspirated and the blocks are frozen at -80 C or -20 C for 10 minutes The
blocks are
then allowed to thaw at room temperature and 1 ml, lysis buffer (100 mL
Bugbuster
supplemented with 200 !al lysonase (EMD chemicals, cat. no 71370) and protease
inhibitor "complete mini EDTA-free" (Roche, cat. no. 11 836 170 001)) is added
into
each well. The pellets are resuspended by repeat pipetting until no clump is
visible and
transferred to eppendorf tubes, followed by a 10-20 minute incubation on a
shaker at
room temperature. After centrifugation at 16,000 x g for 10 minutes at 4 C,
the soluble
lysates are discarded and the inclusion bodies are thoroughly resuspended in
denaturing
binding buffer (20 mM sodium phosphate, 500 mM sodium chloride, 6 M guanidine
hydrochloride, 10 mM imidazole, pH 7.5). The samples are centrifuged at 16,000
g for
minutes and the supernatants loaded onto a TurboFilter 96 Plate included in
the Ni-
NTA Superflow 96 BioRobot Kit (Qiagen, cat. no. 969261) followed by
centrifugation
at 500 g for 5-10 minutes. The filtrates are collected in a clean 96-well
block (Greiner,
cat. no. 780286).
162
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00508] For larger scale expression, the stationary phase culture is
transferred into
500-mL bottles and centrifuged at 6,000 g for 10 minutes. The medium is
decanted and
the pellet is stored at -80 C or -20 C before further processing. The pellet
is then
allowed to thaw at room temperature and 20 mL lysis buffer is added into each
bottle.
The pellets are resuspended by repeat pipetting until no clump is visible,
followed by 20
minute incubation on a shaker at room temperature. After centrifugation at
10,000 g for
30 minutes at 4 C, the soluble lysates are discarded and the insoluble
inclusion bodies
thoroughly resuspended in denaturing binding buffer.
[00509] Affinity Purification: A QIAFilter 96 Plate is loaded with 200 j..iL
Ni-NTA
Superflow slurry included in the Ni-NTA Superflow 96 BioRobot Kit and the
resin is
equilibrated by adding 600 IAL denaturing binding buffer (see above). A vacuum
of -15
in. Hg is applied until all of the buffer passes through the resin. The
clarified denatured
samples from the previous step are then loaded onto the QIAFilter0 96 Plate
and
allowed to bind for 5 minutes. A vacuum of approximately 3 inches of mercury
is
applied for approximately 5 minutes until all the samples pass through the
resin. The
resin is then washed with 1 mL denaturing binding buffer, followed by five
washes with
1 mL denaturing binding buffer containing 0.1% Triton X-100. The resin is then
washed 15 times with 1 mL denaturing binding buffer without Triton X-100. The
bound 6xHis-tagged AARS polypeptides are then eluted with 45011L denaturing
elution
buffer (20 mM sodium phosphate, 500 mM sodium chloride, 6 M guanidine
hydrochloride and 500 mM imidazole, pH 7.5) and stored at 4 C.
[00510] For larger scale expression, an empty disposable column "Poly-Prep"
(Bio-
Rad, cat. no. 731-1550) is loaded with 1 mL Ni-NTA Superflow slurry (Qiagen,
cat. no.
30450) and the 05 mL resin is equilibrated by adding 5 mL denaturing binding
buffer
(see above). The denatured inclusion bodies from the previous step are then
loaded
onto the column and allowed to pass through by gravity. The resin is first
washed with
50 mL denaturing binding buffer plus 0.1% Triton X-100, then washed with 50 mL
denaturing binding buffer without Triton X-100. The bound 6x Hi s-tagged AARS
polypeptides are eluted with 2 mL denaturing elution buffer and stored at 4 C.
[00511] Refolding: For AARS polypeptides >10 kDa, the Omega 10K membrane of
an AcroPrep 96 filter plate (Pall, cat. no. 5034) is rinsed with 20 tL 1X PBS
and the
plate is placed onto a vacuum manifold (>10 in. Hg) until all the liquid
passes through.
The eluates from the previous step (Ni-NTA) are dispensed into each well and
the
vacuum applied until all the liquid passes through. These steps are repeated
until the
total eluate volume (450 4) has been processed. AARS polypeptides are
recovered by
adding 200 !IL of refolding buffer containing 50 mM Tris, 250 mM sodium
chloride, 10
mM potassium chloride, 2 mM magnesium chloride, 2 mM calcium chloride, 400 mM
163
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
sucrose, 500 mM arginine, 1 mM DTT and 0.01% polysorbate 80, pH 7.4) to each
well,
pipetting up and down 10 times carefully, and then transferred to a clean
block. This
step is repeated to yield a total volume of 400 1.t1_, per well and the block
is placed on the
shaker overnight at 4 C. For AARS polypeptides <10 kDa, the eluates from Ni-
NTA
are loaded onto an Amicon Ultra-15 Centrifugal Filter Unit with Ultrace1-3
membrane
(Millipore, cat. no. UFC900308), followed by the addition of 10mL refolding
buffer
and a centrifugation at 3,600 g for 10-30 minutes until the volume is less
than 400 L.
The samples are recovered and extra refolding buffer is added to a final
volume of 400
L. The samples are transferred to a 96-well block, sealed with film and placed
on a
shaker overnight at 4t.
[00512] For larger scale cultures, the eluates from Ni-NTA are loaded onto an
Amicon Ultra-15 centrifugal filter unit with Ultrace1-3 or Ultracel-10
membrane
(Millipore, cat. no. UFC900308 or UFC901008 depending on the molecular weight
of
the AARS polypeptide) and then centrifuged at 3,600 g for 10-30 minutes until
the
volume is reduced to about 500 pL. For AARS polypeptides with p1> 7, the
samples
are diluted 20-fold in the following buffer: 50 mM sodium acetate, 10 mM
sodium
chloride, 0.4 mM potassium chloride, 1 mM EDTA, 400 mM sucrose, 500 mM
arginine, 1 mM DTT and 0.01% polysorbate 80, pH 6Ø For AARS polypeptides
with
pl <7, the samples are diluted 20-fold in the following buffer: 50 mM Tris,
250 rriM
sodium chloride, 10 rnM potassium chloride, 2 mM magnesium chloride, 2 mM
calcium chloride, 400 mM sucrose, 500 mM arginine, 1mM DTT and 0.01%
polysorbate 80, pH 8Ø The samples are incubated on a shaker at 4 C
overnight.
[00513] Desalting and Polishing Steps: After overnight incubation, the 96-well
block is centrifuged at 3,600 g to remove any potential aggregates The
supernatants are
then subjected to buffer exchange with 1X PBS (Invitrogen, cat. no. 10010).
For AARS
polypeptides > 10 kDa, the Omega 10K membrane of an AcroPrep 96 filter plate
is
rinsed with 20 L 1X PBS and the plate is placed onto a vacuum manifold (>10
in. Hg)
until all the liquid passes through. The samples in the refolding buffer are
dispensed
into each well and the vacuum applied until all the liquid passes through.
These steps
are repeated until the total sample volume (400 L) has been processed. AARS
polypeptides are recovered by adding 180 I, of 1X PBS pH 7.4 to each well,
pipetting
up and down 10 times carefully, and then transferred to a clean block. This
step is
repeated to yield a total volume of 360 L per well and the block is stored at
4 C. For
AARS polypeptides < 10 kDa, the refolded samples are loaded onto an Amicon
Ultra-
15 Centrifugal Filter Unit with Ultrace1-3 membrane (Millipore, cat. no.
UFC900308)
followed by the addition of 10 mL 1X PBS and centrifugation at 3,600 g for 10-
30
164
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
minutes until the volume is less than 360 L. The samples are recovered and IX
PBS
is added to a final volume of 360 L.
[00514] In order to remove endotoxins, an AcroPrep Advance filter plate with
Mustang Q membrane (Pall, cat. no. 8171) is rinsed with 300 1tL of 1X PBS and
centrifuged at 1,000 g for 5 minutes to remove the buffer. The AARS
polypeptides
(360 L/well) are added to the filter plate and incubated on a shaker for 5-10
minutes.
The plate is then centrifuged at 1,000 g for 5-10 minutes and the flow through
fractions
containing the AARS polypeptides are collected and stored at 4 C.
[00515] For larger scale cultures, after overnight incubation, the refolded
samples are
centrifuged at 10,000 g for 10 minutes to remove any insoluble aggregates. The
supernatant is loaded onto an Amicon Ultra-15 Centrifugal Filter Unit and
centrifuged
at 3,600 g until the volume is reduced to 250 L. The samples are mixed in 10
mL IX
PBS and centrifuged again at 3,600 g for 10-30 minutes until the volume is
about 250
L. Note that the pH of 1X PBS is adjusted to match the pH of the refolding
buffer,
either pH 6.0 or pH 8Ø This step is repeated one more time, the supernatants
are
recovered and 1X PBS is added to a final volume of 1.5 mL.
[00516] In order to remove endotoxins, a Sartobind Q 5 strong anion exchanger
membrane (Sartorius, cat. no. Q5F) is flushed with 1 mL IX PBS and the AARS
polypeptides are slowly passed through the membrane using a plastic syringe.
The flow
through fraction containing the AARS polypeptides is collected in a 96-deep
well block
that is sealed and stored at 4 C.
[00517] BIOPHYSICAL CHARACTERIZATION: All purified AARS polypeptides are
analyzed by SDS-PAGE, their concentration determined based on A280 and
calculated
extinction coefficient (ProtParam on ExPASy server) Endotoxin levels are
measured
by the QCL-1000 Endpoint Chromogenic LAL assay (Lonza, cat. no. 50-648U)
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
[00518] Dynamic Light Scattering: A Wyatt Technology DynaPro 99 instrument
and the temperature controller (20 C) are warmed up for 15 minutes before the
experiment followed by connection of the Dynamics software to the instrument.
The
acquisition time is set to 10 seconds for multiple acquisitions and the laser
power is set
to 100%. The quartz cuvette is washed thoroughly with deionized water and
methanol
before the addition of the protein sample (154 at a concentration of
approximately 1
mg/mL in PBS). Air bubbles are removed by tapping the cuvette before it is
inserted
into the holder with the frosted side to the left. If the intensity is too
high (warning
message shown on the screen), the sample is further diluted with PBS until the
intensity
is decreased to a normal range. The data collected include hydrodynamic
radius,
165
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
polydispersity, predicted average molecular weight, percentage of intensity
and
percentage of mass.
[00519] Size Exclusion Chromatography: The protein sample is diluted to a
concentration of about 5-10 mg/rriL in PBS before being loaded into a 100 ut
sample
loop on the General Electric AKTA FPLC. The SuperdexTm200 10/300 GL size
exclusion column (General Electric, cat. no. 17-5175-01) is used for
separation. The
column is first equilibrated with 1.5 column volume (CV) of 1X PBS buffer,
followed
by sample injection. The column is run in 1 CV of lx PBS buffer (isocratic
flow) with
absorbance at 280nm monitoring. The peak area is integrated and the percentage
calculated with the Unicorn software. The elution volume is used to estimate
the
molecular weight based on comparison with gel filtration calibration kits
(General
Electric, cat. no. 28-4038-41 and 28-4038-42).
[00520] Protein Recovery upon Storage at High Concentration: 10 !AL of the
AARS polyp eptides concentrated to > 10mg/mL using an Amicon Ultra-15 filter
unit
(Millipore, cat. no. UFC901024 or UFC900324 depending on molecular weight) are
transferred to a clean microcentrifuge tube. The sample is stored at room
temperature
for one week followed by centrifugation at 16,000 g for 10 minutes to pellet
any
precipitates. The concentration of the supernatant is determined by a Bradford
protein
assay and compared to the concentration measured prior to the week-long
exposure to
room temperature. The recovery is expressed as percentage of the starting
concentration.
[00521] Characterization of AARS polyp eptides by LC-MS: Purified AARS
polypeptides (1 mg/mL) are diluted 1:10 into 0.1% formic acid and 0.6 ug
protein is
loaded with a Dionex autosampler onto a C4 capillary column The capillary
column is
prepared by cutting 150 mm of fused silica tubing (0.36 mm OD by 0.1 mm ID,
Polymicro Technologies, cat. no. 2000023). The capillary is pulled at one end
with a
Suter Instrument Laser Fiber Puller and cut with a fused silica cutter to
generate a 5 um
tip. The capillary is packed to the length of 75 mm with C4 resin (51am, 300A,
Michrom, cat. no. PM5/64300/00) using pressure bomb. The LC-MS analysis is
performed on an ThermoFisher LTQ ion trap mass spectrometer coupled to a
Dionex
Ultimate3000 HPLC system. The analyte is eluted from the column using a 35-
minute
gradient of 5-70% acetonitrile in 0.1% formic acid at a flow rate of 0.9
[iL/min. The
LTQ is operated on a full MS scan mode (300-2,000 m/z) with a spray voltage of
2.5
kV.
[00522] Data collection and analysis: raw mass spectrometry data are stored in
RAW files generated by XCalibur running on the LTQ XL mass spectrometer. The
MS
spectra of the major peaks on the chromatograph are further analyzed with
166
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
ThermoFisher deconvoluting algorithm ProMass to obtain the AARS polypeptide
molecular weights.
FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS OF AARS POLYPEPTIDES
TRANSCRIPTIONAL PROFILING
[00523] Background and therapeutic relevance: In addition to traditional
target
identification techniques, genomic tools have recently emerged as important
approaches
to aid in elucidating the mechanism of action of AARS polypeptides and can
provide
direct insight into therapeutic relevance early in the drug discovery process.
To
facilitate an understanding of potential therapeutic utility, primary human
cell types are
cultured with AARS polypeptides and transcriptional profiling is assessed at
two
separate time points following incubation with AARS polypeptides.
[00524] The cell types chosen for transcriptional profiling are based on the
pluripotent capabilities of the cells in question and potential to identify
AARS
polypeptides of direct therapeutic value. For example, Mesenchymal stem cells
(MSCs) can differentiate into osteogenic, adipogenic, chondrogenic,
myocardial, or
neural lineages when exposed to specific stimuli, making them attractive for
understanding the potential relevance of the AARS polypeptides to a broad
range of cell
types, and diseases.
[00525] In addition to supporting hematopoietic cells, marrow stromal cells
can also
be induced to differentiate into cells of different connective tissue lineage,
such as bone,
cartilage, and fat. The potential of Human Mesenchymal stem cells (hMSCs) to
maintain multipotency and proliferate extensively in vitro provides new
avenues for
cell-based therapy in the restoration of damaged or diseased tissue. Recent
reports also
indicate that HMSCs are capable of cell fate crossing germ layer boundaries.
In addition
to differentiating into multi-lineages of the mesoderm, these cells can also
differentiate
into neurons of ectodermal origin and hepatocyte-like cells of endodermal
origin.
During the process of differentiation, these cells may modify expression
patterns of
certain lineage specific transcripts.
[00526] Accordingly the ability of specific AARS polypeptides to modulate
specific
patterns of genes in HMSCs in a time dependent manner demonstrates that these
proteins play potentially significant roles in a broad array of
differentiation pathways,
as well as diseases and disorders resulting from the dysfunction, or
deterioration of
these processes, or the corresponding cell types. Moreover AARS polypeptides
with the
ability to modulate gene transcription in MSCs have significant therapeutic
utility to
enable the in vitro or in vivo modulation of hematopoiesis, neurogenesis,
myogenesis,
167
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
osteogenesis, and adipogenesis, as well as in a broad range of disorders and
diseases,
including for example inflammatory responses, autoimmunity, cancer, neuronal
degeneration, muscular dystrophy, osteoporosis, and lipodystrophy.
[00527] Human Skeletal Muscle Cells (HSkMC) can undergo differentiation to
exhibit actin and myosin myofilaments, and have been used in the study of
genetic
muscular diseases such as Malignant Hyperthermial. HSkMC also have the
potential
to act as a cardiac graft, mending damage to the heart. Recently, cultured
Human
Skeletal Muscle cells have been used in micro gravity experiments to study the
effects
of low gravity environments on Human Skeletal Muscle.
[00528] Accordingly the ability of specific AARS polypeptides to modulate
specific
patterns of genes in HSkMC in a time dependent manner demonstrates that these
proteins play potentially significant roles in the processes of myogenesis, as
well as
diseases and disorders resulting from the dysfunction, or deterioration of
these
processes as well as muscle cell development or metabolism. Accordingly AARS
polypeptides with the ability to modulate gene transcription in muscle cells
have
therapeutic utility in a broad range of diseases including for example, the
treatment of
metabolic disease, cachexia, various muscle wasting conditions, as well as
musculoskeletal diseases.
[00529] Methods: The ability of AARS polypeptides to modulate gene expression
is
assessed using a high-throughput microfluidic real-time quantitative PCR (RT-
qPCR)
approach (Fluidigm Corporation).(See Petriv- et al., (2010) PNAS
(doi/10.1073/pnas.1009320107) in Human Marrow Stromal Cells (HMSC) and Human
Skeletal Muscle Cells (HSkMC). In the experiments reported here, Human HSkMC
(Cat # 150-050 and HMSC (Cat # 492-050 were purchased from Cell Applications
HMSC cells are cryopreserved at second passage and can be cultured and
propagated to
population doublings. Here HMSC in the 6th Passage are used. Human Skeletal
Muscle Cells (HSkMC) are cryopreserved at second passage and can be cultured
and
propagated for at least 15 population doublings. In the experiments reported
here
HSkMC at passage 6 post harvest from normal human donor are used.
[00530] In both cases, cells arc plated at 50000 cells/ mL in 1001IL volume of
growth
media and exposed to AARS polypeptides at a concentration of 250nM, or as
otherwise
indicated below, for 24 hours and 72 hours. Controls include Differentiation
media
with a standard cocktail to promote (1) Adipogenesis, (2) Osteogenesis, (3)
Chondrogenesis and (4) Skeletal muscle myotube formation. Additional controls
include untreated wells containing only growth media. Two wells were nm for
each
Differentiation control. Controls: all media was made utilizing DMEM as the
basal
media. Standard literature was followed and Differentiation media was
purchased from
168
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Cell Applications. Per the vendor, differentiation media contained the
following
additives: Skeletal muscle differentiation cocktail: FBS, insulin, glutamine,
FGF, EGF;
Adipogenesis cocktail: insulin, dexamethasone and IBMX; Osteogenesis cocktail:
FBS,
dexamethasone, ascorbate 2 phosphate, beta-glycerophosphate; Chondrogenesis
cocktail: insulin, ascorbate-2-phosphate, and TGF-131.
[00531] Standard protocols for using an A131 (Applied Biosystems, Item #
AM1728)
TAQMANO Gene Expression Cells-to-CTTm Kit are utilized to lyse cells and
harvest
genomic material. An ABI Pre-Amp Mix (Applied Biosystems, Item# 4391128) is
used
to initiate pre-amplification. Gene specific primers are created using a
Primer 3
program and purchased from IDT technologies. Fluidigm profiling arrays (Item #
BMK-M-96.96) were used for actual quantitative PCR with standard Fluidigm
loading
reagents and pipetting devices. Table El below lists the genes profiled.
Table El
List of genes assessed in transcriptional profiling
Compiled
Unique refseq_nt Full name Synonyms
List
ABCA1 NM 005502 ATP-binding ABC-EABCECERPIFLJ149581
cassette, sub-family HDLDT1
A (ABC1), member IMGC1648641MGC16501ETGD
1
ACTB NM 001101 actin, beta PS1TP5BP1
ACTG1 NM 001614 actin, gamma 1 ACTIACTGIDFNA201DFNA26
ACVR2B NM 001106 activin A receptor, ACTRIIB ActR-IIBIMGC116908
type JIB
AP0A1 NM 000039 apolipoprotein A-I MGC117399
ARNT NM 178427 aryl hydrocarbon HIF-
receptor nuclear lbetalH1F1BlEllF1BETAITANG
translocator 0
IbHLHe2
BAD NM 032989 BCL2-associated BBC2IBCL2L8
agonist of cell death
BCL2 NM 000657 B-cell Bc1-2
CLUlymphoma 2
BMP2 NM 001200 bone morphogenetic BMP2A
protein 2
BMP4 NM_130851 bone morphogenetic BMP2BIBMP2B11MCOPS610FC
protein 4 111
ZYME
C3AR1 NM 004054 complement AZ3B1C3ARIHNFAG09
component 3a
receptor 1
CASP3 NM 032991 caspasc 3, CPP32ICPP32B SCA-1
apoptosis-related
169
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table El
List of genes assessed in transcriptional profiling
Compiled
Unique refseq_nt Full name Synonyms
List
cysteine peptidase _
CAV1 NM 001753 caveolin 1, caveolac BSCL3 CGL3 MSTP0851VIP21
protein, 22kDa
CDH5 NM 001795 cadhcrin 5, type 2 7B41CD1441F1117376
(vascular
endothelium)
CFLAR NM_003879 CASP8 and FADD- CASH CASP8AP1ICLARPICasp
like apoptosis er1
regulator FLAMEIFLAME-
11FLAME1IFLIPI
1-FLICE
IMRIT1 c-FLIPIc-FLIPLIc-FLIPRI
c-FLIPS
COMP NM 000095 cartilage oligomeric EDM11EPD1 IMEDIMGC131819I
matrix protein MGC149768I
PSACH1THBS5
C SF' NM_172212 colony stimulating MCSF MGC31930
factor 1
(macrophage)
CTGF NM 001901 connective tissue CCN21HCS24 IGFBP81MGC102
growth factor 8391NOV2
CTNNB1 NM 001904 catcnin (cadherin- CTNNBIDKFZp686D022531FLJ
associated protein), 256061
beta 1, 88kDa FLJ37923
DAAM1 NMO14992 dishevelled F11416571KIAA0666
associated activator
of morphogenesis 1
ELN NM 001081755 elastin FLJ386711F11435231SVASIWBS
IWS
EN01 NM 001428 enolase 1, (alpha) ENO1L1 MPB11NNEIPPH
FABP3 NM 004102 fatty acid binding FABP111H-FABP1MDGI10-
protein 3, muscle FABP
and heart
(mammary-derived
growth inhibitor)
FAK NM 001199649 focal adhesion fakl
kinase
FGF4 NM 002007 fibroblast growth HBGF-41HSTIHST-11HSTF11K-
factor 4 FGF1KFGF
FIGF NM 004469 c-fos induced VEGF-D VEGFD
growth factor
(vascular
endothelial growth
170
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table El
List of genes assessed in transcriptional profiling
Compiled
Unique refseq_nt Full name Synonyms
List
factor D)
FLT1 NM 002019 fins-related tyrosine FLTIVEGFR1
kinase 1 (vascular
endothelial growth
factor/vascular
permeability factor
receptor)
FOXA1 NM 004496 forkhead box Al HNF3AIMGC331051TCF3A
GAPDH NM 002046 glyceraldehyde-3- G3PDIGAPD1MGC88685
phosphate
dehydrogenase
GFAP NM 002055 glial fibrillary F1145472
acidic protein
SLC2A4 NM 001042 solute carrier family GLUT4
2 (facilitated
glucose
transporter),
member 4
HAND1 NM 004821 heart and neural Hxt1Thing1IbHLHa27 eHand
crest derivatives
expressed 1
H1F1A NM 181054 hypoxia inducible H1F-1alphalflIF11HIF1-
factor 1, alpha ALPHA MOP 11PASD8 bHLHe7
subunit (basic helix- 8
loop-helix
transcription factor)
HK2 NM 000189 hexokinase 2 DKFZp686M16691HKII HXK2
HMGB1 NM 002128 high-mobility group DKFZp686A0423611-1MG1 HMG
box 1 31SBP-1
HNF4A NM 178850 hepatocyte nuclear FLJ396541HNF4 HNF4a71HNF4a
factor 4, alpha 81HNF4a91
HNF4a1pha MODYIMODY11NR
2A1
1NR2A21
1TCFITCF14
HPRT1 NM 000194 hypoxanthine HGPRT1HPRT
phosphoribosyltrans
ferase 1
HSPB1 NM 001540 heat shock 27kDa CMT2FIDKFZp586P132211-1MN2
protein 1 B1HS.760671
HSP27IHSP28IHsp25ISRP27
ICAM1 NM 000201 intercellular BB2CD541P3.58
adhesion molecule
171
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table El
List of genes assessed in transcriptional profiling
Compiled
Unique refseq_nt Full name Synonyms
List
1
1FNG NM 000619 interferon, gamma 1FG IF1
IGF1 NM 001111285 insulin-like growth IGF-I IGF1A1IGFI
factor 1
(somatomedin C)
IGF2 NM 001127598 insulin-like growth Cllorf431FLJ22066 FLJ447341IN
factor 2 SIGF
(somatomedirl A) pp9974
IGFBP3 NM 001013398 insulin-like growth BP-531IBP3
factor binding
protein 3
IGFBP5 NM_000599 insulin-like growth IBP5
factor binding
protein 5
IKBKB NM 001556 inhibitor of kappa FLJ337711FLJ362181F1138368 F
light polypeptide LJ405091
gene enhancer in B- IKK-
cells, kinase beta betalIKK21IKKB1MGC1318011
NFKBIKB
IL10 NM 000572 interleukin 10 CSIF1IL-
1011L10A1MGC1264501MGC126
4511
_TGIF
IL I B NM 000576 interleukin 1, beta IL-11ILl-BETAIIL1F2
IL3 NM 000588 interleukin 3 IL-
(colony-stimulating 31MCGF1MGC793981MGC79399
factor, multiple) 1
MULTI-CSF
IL4 NM 172348 interleukin 4 BCGF-11BCGF1 BSF11IL-
41MGC79402
IL5 NM 000879 interleukin 5 EDFI1L-51TRF
(colony-stimulating
factor, eosinophil)
IL6R NM 181359 interleukin 6 CD1261IL-6R-11IL-6R-
receptor alphal1L6RA1
MGC104991
IL8 NM 000584 interleukin 8 CXCL81GCP-
11GCP11LECTILUCT LYNAP1
MDNCF
IMONAPINAFINAP-11NAP1
ITGA5 NM 002205 integrin, alpha 5 CD49e1FNRA VLA5A
(fibronectin
receptor, alpha
172
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table El
List of genes assessed in transcriptional profiling
Compiled
Unique refseq_nt Full name Synonyms
List
polypeptide)
KDR NM 002253 kinase insert CD3091FLK11VEGFR1VEGFR2
domain receptor (a
type III receptor
tyrosine kinase)
LEP NM 000230 leptin FLJ9411410B1OBS
LPL NM_000237 lipoprotein lipase HDLCQ111LIPD
MAPK11 NM 002751 mitogen-activated P38B1P38BETA2 PRKM111SAP
protein kinase 11 K21
SAPK2B1p38-21p38Beta
MMP1 NM 002421 matrix CLG1CLGN
metallopcptidase 1
(interstitial
collagenase)
MMP3 NM 002422 matrix CHDS61MGC126102 MGC12610
metallopeptidase 3 31
(stromelysin 1, MGC 1261041
progelatinase) MMP-31SL-
11STMY1STMY11STR1
MYH1 NM 005963 myosin, heavy MGC1333841MYHSA11MYHa
chain 1, skeletal MyHC-2X1D1
muscle, adult MyHC-2x
MYH11 NM 022844 myosin, heavy AAT41DKFZp686D101261
chain 11, smooth DKFZp686D192371
muscle FAA41FLJ35232 MGC126726
1MGC329631
SMHC1SMMHC
MYH7 NM 000257 myosin, heavy CMD1S CMH11DKFZp451F0471
chain 7, cardiac MGC1383761
muscle, beta MGC1383781MPD11MYHCB1SP
MD
SPMM
MYOD1 NM 002478 myogcnic MYF3 MYOD1PUM1bHLHc1
differentiation 1
NFATC1 NM 172390 nuclear factor of MGC1384481NF-
activated T-cells, ATC1NFAT21NFATc
cytoplasmic,
cal cineurin-
dependent 1
NFATC2 NM 173091 nuclear factor of NFAT11NFATP
activated T-cells,
cytoplasmic,
calcineurin-
173
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table El
List of genes assessed in transcriptional profiling
Compiled
Unique refseq_nt Full name Synonyms
List
dependent 2
NFKB1 NM 003998 nuclear factor of DKFZp686C01211 EBP-11KBF11
kappa light MGC541511
polypeptide gene NF-kappa-B NF-kappaB1NFKB-
enhancer in B-cells p105
1 INFKB-p50 p1051p50
NOS2 NM 000625 nitric oxide HEP-NOSIINOS NOSINOS2A
synthase 2,
inducible
NOTCH1 NM 017617 notch 1 TAN1111N1
NR3C1 NM 001024094 nuclear receptor GCCRIGCRIGRIGRL
subfamily 3, group
C, member 1
(glucocorticoid
receptor)
NRP2 NM 201279 neuropilin 2 MGC1265741NP21NPN21PRO271
41
VEGF165R2
PAX7 NM 013945 paired box 7 F11374601HUP1 PAX7B1RMS2
PDGFB NM_033016 platelet-derived FLJ128581PDGF2ISISISSVIc-sis
growth factor beta
polypeptide (simian
sarcoma viral (v-
sis) oncogene
homolog)
PDK4 NM 002612 pyruvate F1140832
dehydrogenase
kinase, isozyme 4
PLA2G 1B NM 000928 phospholipase A2, MGC1198341MGC1198351PLA21
group TB (pancreas) PLA2A1
PPLA2
PLIN1 NM 002666 lipid droplet perilipin
associated protein
PPARG NM_138712 peroxisome CIMT1 GLM11NR1C31PPARG11
proliferator- PPARG21
activated receptor PPARgamma
gamma
QARS NM_005051 glutaminyl-tRNA GLNRSIPRO2195
synthetase
RHOA NM 001664 ras homolog gene ARH12IARHAIRH0121RHOH12
family, member A
RUNX1 NM 001754 runt-related AML11AML1-EVI-
transcription factor 11AMLCR11CBFA21
174
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table El
List of genes assessed in transcriptional profiling
Compiled
Unique refseq_nt Full name Synonyms
List
1 _EVI-1IPEBP2aB
RXRA NM 002957 retinoid X receptor, FLJ00280IFLJ00318IFLJ16020 F
alpha LJ16733
IMGC102720INR2B1
SERPINE1 NM 001165413 serpin peptidase PAT PAHIPAIlIPLANH1
inhibitor, clade E
(nexin, plasminogen
activator inhibitor
type 1), member 1
SMAD2 NM 005901 SMAD family JV181J-V18-1IMADH2IMADR21
member 2 MGC22139I
MGC344401hMAD-2 hSMAD2
SMAD4 NM 005359 SMAD family DPC4IJIPIMADH4
member 4
TERT NM 198255 te1omerase reverse EST2 TCS1ITP2ITRT hEST2
transcriptase
TGFB1 NM 000660 transforming CED1DPD1 LAPITGFB1TGFbeta
growth factor, beta
TGFB3 NM 003239 transforming ARVDIFLJ16571 TGF-beta3
growth factor, beta
3
THBS4 NM 003248 thrombospondin 4 TSP4
TNF NM 000594 tumor necrosis DIF TNF-alphaITNFAITNFSF2
factor
TUBB NM 178014 tubulin, beta M40IMGC117247IMGC16435I0
K/SW-c1.56ITUBB1
TUBBS
TUBB1 NM 030773 tubulin, beta 1 tubulin isoform beta (1)
TUBG I NM 001070 tubulin, gamma 1 GCP-1ITUBG TUBGCP1
VCAM1 NM 080682 vascular cell CD106IDKFZp779G2333IINCA
adhesion molecule M-100IMGC99561
VEGFA NM 003376 vascular endothelial MGC70609IMVCD I IVEGFIVPF
growth factor A
VIM NM 003380 vimentin F1136605
WISP1 NM 080838 WNT1 inducible CCN4IWISP 1 c WISP 1 i WISP' tc
signaling pathway
Protein 1
WNT1 NM 005430 wingless-type INT1
MMTV integration
site family, member
175
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00532] Bioinformatics Analysis: Data retrieved in .csv format from the
Biomark
machine by Fluidigm is converted to a tabular format including sample, mRNA,
and
replicate information along with the raw fluorescence value. PCR reactions
that failed
are marked as missing. Multiple experiments were combined after normalizing to
total
expression of mRNA species. All measured mRNA expression is filtered based on
the
requirement of detection in at least 2 of all of the biological replicates
tested. We
assessed technical, biological and set deviation mean in entire dataset.
[00533] For data analysis Ct values for all genes of interest are first
normalized to the
averaged Ct values for housekeeping genes from the corresponding sample to
obtain
ACt values (ACt = Ct gene ¨ Ct average housekeeping genes). Genes from each
sample
are then normalized to the same gene in untreated control to obtain AACt
values (AACt
=ACt control sample - ACt treated sample).
[00534] To obtain fold change values up-regulated genes (i.e. AACts greater
than 0)
are subject to the following calculation: Fold Change = 2^AACt. For down-
regulated
genes (i.e. AACts less than 0): Fold Change = -(2^1AACt ).
CELLULAR PROLIFERATION ASSAYS ( ASSAYS Al-All IN THE DATA TABLES BELOW)
[00535] Background and therapeutic relevance: The ability to modulate the rate
of
cellular proliferation and apoptosis of different cell types represents a
fundamental
property of many therapeutic compounds, and is of direct relevance to the
treatment and
prevention of a broad range of diseases and disorders.
[00536] Accordingly AARS polypeptides with the ability to modulate the rate of
cellular proliferation and or apoptosis have significant therapeutic utility
in a broad
range of diseases including, as growth factors, and differentiation factors
for stem cells,
and in treatment regimens to enhance or suppress the proliferation of specific
cell types
of interest in vivo or in vitro, including for example, haemopoietic cells,
immunomodulatory cells, cancer, and for the treatment and prevention of
diseases
associated with aging, including for example neurodegeneration, peripheral
neuropathy,
and loss of muscular and soft tissue tone.
[00537] Methods: Effects of the AARS polypeptides on cellular proliferation is
assessed using one or more of the methods listed below, and as more
specifically
elaborated in the methods below.
[00538] Hoechst 33432. Standard cell counts to assess proliferation are
performed
using Hoechst 33432, which is a cell-permeant nuclear counterstain that emits
blue
fluorescence when bound to dsDNA. It is available as a solution (Invitrogen
Cat # H-
3570) that is used at a final concentration of ug/mL in either media or PBS.
Cells are
176
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
grown in 96 well plates in the presence of AARS polypeptides for a standard
growth
time of 48 hours, or longer depending on cell type and as described in the
examples
below.
[00539] ATP-lite. Cellular ATP levels correlate with cellular health and can
be
readily determined using a variety of commercially available kits. ATP-lite
(Perkin-
Elmer, Cat #6016947 Boston, MA 02481) which is a homogenous mixture of lysis
solution and ATP-detection reagent. is pre-mixed before use and is used 1:1
v:v ratio
with cultured cells. Plates are incubated for 5 minutes to promote lysis and
plates are
measured using a luminescent plate reader. Cells are grown in 96 well plates
in the
presence of AARS polypeptides for a standard growth time of 48 hours, or
longer
depending on cell type and as described in the examples below.
[00540] ALAMARBLUEO (Resazurin) is a cell viability indicator which is based
on
the redox state of the cells. Resazurin, the active ingredient, is a nontoxic,
cell
permeable compound that is blue in color and virtually nonfluorescent when
present in
its oxidized form. However upon entering normal viable cells, resazurin is
rapidly
reduced to resorufin, which produces a red fluorescence signal. Viable cells
continuously convert resazurin to resorufin, thereby generating a quantitative
measure
of viability¨and cytotoxicity. The lack of toxicity allows long-term exposure
of cells
to resazurin without negative impact; cells grown in the presence of resazurin
were
found to produce similar numbers of viable cells as control cells, as
determined by flow
cytometric analysis.
[00541] Measurements are made by adding a solution of Resazurin /
ALAMARBLUEO to cells, incubating them for 1-4 hours, and reading the
fluorescence
or absorbance The amount of fluorescence or absorbance is proportional to the
number
of living cells and corresponds to the cells metabolic activity. Damaged and
nonviable
cells have lower innate metabolic activity and thus generate a proportionally
lower
signal than healthy cells. After incubation with ALAMARBLUEO, samples can
readily
be measured on fluorescence and absorbance instrumentation. For fluorescence
readings: 530 nm excitation and 590 nm emission filter settings are used.
[00542] Cells are grown in 96 well plates in the presence of AARS polypeptides
for
a standard growth time of 48 hours, or longer depending on cell type and as
described
in the examples below.
ACETYLATED LDL UPTAKE IN HEPG2C3A HUMAN HEPATOCYTE CELLS. (ASSAY B1
IN THE DATA TABLES BELOW)
[00543] Background and therapeutic relevance: LDL is the major carrier of
cholesterol in the blood, accounting for more than 60% of the cholesterol in
plasma. In
177
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
humans, the hepatic LDL receptor is responsible for clearing around 70 % of
plasma
LDL from circulation. Internalized LDL is degraded to free cholesterol and
amino acids
in the lysosome. The liver is the most important organ for LDL catabolism and
LDL
receptor activity in humans. LDL that is not internalized and remains in
circulation can
be transported by endothelial cells into the vessel wall, resulting in the
formation of
atherosclerotic plaques. Circulating LDL can also be taken up by macrophages
and this
can also contribute to the formation of plaques. Increasing LDL uptake into
hepatic
tissue is thought to be beneficial to human health and finding safe and
efficacious
therapeutics that may the positively regulate this process may provide new
therapies for
cardiovascular and metabolic diseases. To investigate whether the unique
properties of
AARS polypeptides can regulate uptake of acetylated LDL, a standard assay for
measuring acetylated LDL uptake is employed in HepG2C3a cells.
[00544] Accordingly AARS polypeptides with the ability to modulate LDL uptake
have significant therapeutic utility in a broad range of diseases including
for example,
the treatment of hypercholesteremia, hyperlipidemia, type 1 and 2 diabetes,
metabolic
syndrome, and vascular diseases including atherosclerosis
[00545] Methods: HEPG2C3a cells (ATCC4 CRL-10741) are maintained in Eagles
Minimal Essential (EMEM) medium supplemented with 10% FBS (HyClone
Cat#SH30910.03), 50u/mL penicillin/50pg/mL streptomycin, (Invitrogen) in 15 mL
medium in 75 mL flasks. Cells are grown at 37 C, 5% CO2, in a humidified
environment and utilized in BSL2 certified tissue culture hoods using sterile
technique
and appropriate personal protective equipment including goggles, gloves and
lab coats.
HEPG2C3a express the LDL-receptor and are competent for acetylated LDL uptake
when grown on clear bottom collagen coated plates_ A 100 tiL volume of cells
is plated
on collagen coated plates (Invitrogen Cat#A11428) overnight in complete medium
(above) at a cell density of 50,000 cells/mL. Cells are washed once with PBS
(Invitrogen Cat# 10010) and 80 pt of serum free EMEM is added to each well.
AARS
polypeptides at a final concentration of 250nM per well are added in a
consistent
volume in sterile PBS to each well. A unique AARS polypeptide is placed in
each well.
Cells are serum starved and exposed to the AARS polypeptides for 16 hours.
Following the 16 hour incubation, the, supernatant is collected and soluble
ICAM is
measured using a standard ELISA kit from RND Systems (Cat # DY643), and serum
free media supplemented with 5 g/mL ac-LDL (Alexa Fluor 488 labeled Cat #
L23380,
Invitrogen) is added to each well. Following a 2 hour incubation at 37 C 5%
CO2, cells
are washed twice with sterile PBS before 100 p1_, PBS is added to each well
for
quantification. Plates were analyzed for total fluorescent intensity using a
bottom read
on a Victor XS fluorescent plate reader (Perkin Elmer) at an excitation
wavelength
178
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
centered around 485 nm, and an emission wavelength centered around 535 nm.
Cells
are stained with Hoechst dye and fluorescent intensity 405nm Excitation /
450nM
Emission is read to confirm total cell number is consistent across the plate.
REGULATION OF HUMAN NEUTROPHIL OXIDATIVE BURST AND ELASTASE
PRODUCTION (ASSAYS CI-C3 IN THE DATA TABLES BELOW)
NEUTROPHIL OXIDATIVE BURST
[00546] Background and therapeutic relevance:
Phagocytosis by
polymorphonuclear neutrophils and monocytes constitutes an essential arm of
host
defense against infections by microorganisms including bacteria and fungi. The
phagocytic process can be separated into several major stages: chemotaxis
(migration of
phagocytes to inflammatory sites), attachment of particles to the cell surface
of
phagocytes, ingestion (phagocytosis) and intracellular killing by oxygen-
dependent
(oxidative burst) and oxygen-independent mechanisms. Reduced or missing burst
activity is observed in inborne defects like the chronic granulomatous disease
(CGD).
CGD is a heterogeneous group of inherited disorders that usually manifests
itself during
the first two years of life. The disease is characterized by repeated and life-
threatening
infections caused by bacterial and fungal organisms. These infections
typically consist
of pneumonia, lymphadenitis, or abscesses that involve lymph nodes, lungs, and
liver.
The NADPH oxidasc is the enzyme system responsible for producing superoxide
anion,
which is quickly converted to hydrogen peroxide and hydroxyl radicals.
Abnormalities
in the constituent peptides of the NADPH oxidase enzyme system lead to the
dysfunctions characteristic of CGD Neutrophils from CGD patients fail to
produce a
significant oxidative burst following stimulation. Different forms of CGD are
described
(classical X-linked CGD and autosomal recessive patterns). The oxidative burst
of
granulocytes is impaired in transplantation, later stages of HIV infection,
and in the
elderly, making these populations more susceptible to secondary infection and
exacerbations of inflammatory disease. Various immunomodulators (e.g.,
cytokines
(GM-CSF, G-CSF, TNF) or drugs) also seem to have effects on the oxidative
burst.
There is the potential for proteins with the ability to up-regulate or down-
regulate
oxidative burst in a therapeutic fashion to be useful for a variety of
different disease
states.
[00547] Methods: The protein kinase C ligand phorbol 12-myristate 13-acetate
(PMA) can be utilized in this assay as an agonist of the oxidative burst
process.
Heparinized whole blood is mixed with sterile dextran (0.6% final
concentration) for 1
hour and allowed to separate into layers. The lower layer contains neutrophil,
179
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
monocytes and red blood cells. An ammonium chloride lysis step is utilized to
remove
all RBCs and a 97% pure population of neutrophils with approximately 3%
monocyte
contamination remains following lysis step. Upon stimulation, granulocytes and
monocytes produce reactive oxygen metabolites (superoxide anion, hydrogen
peroxide,
hypochlorous acid) which destroy bacteria inside the phagosome. Formation of
the
reactive oxidants during the oxidative burst can be monitored by the addition
and
oxidation of Amplex Red. The percentage of cells having produced reactive
oxygen
radicals are then analyzed as well as their mean fluorescence intensity using
a
fluorescent plate reader. The typical time course for this reaction is 10
minutes, with
obvious burst being seen by 2 minutes and a drop off of signal being seen by
20
minutes. This assay can be run in agonist mode in the absence of PMA or in
antagonist
mode, with concomitant administration of AARS polypeptides and PMA at a
concentration that is below the EC50 for this compound.
REGULATION OF HUMAN NEUTROPHIL ELASTASE PRODUCTION
[00548] Background and therapeutic relevance: Neutrophil elastase is a serine
protease that has been implicated as having a specific role in the development
of a wide
range of human diseases, including inflammatory disorders of the lung and
cardiovascular system. Although its key physiologic role is in innate host
defense, it
can also participate in tissue remodeling and possesses secretagogue actions
that are
now recognized as important to local inflammatory signals. Neutrophil clastasc
activity
has been implicated in the development of emphysema for several decades,
however
only relatively recently has a pathogenetic function been ascribed to this
serine
proteinase in situations where excessive extracellular matrix deposition
occurs The use
of genetically manipulated animal models is starting to uncover the potential
ways in
which its actions might influence fibrotic lung repair. Emerging evidence
suggests that
the engagement of cellular pathways with more direct effects on fibrogenic
mediator
generation and collagen synthesis appears to underpin the actions of
neutrophil elastase
in promoting lung matrix accumulation. Human neutrophil elastase is also
present
within atherosclerotic plaques where it contributes to matrix degradation and
weakening
of the vessel wall associated with the complications of aneurysm formation and
plaque
rupture. It is joined by other extracellular proteases in these actions but
the broad range
of substrates and potency of this enzyme coupled with activity associated with
neutrophil degranulation single this disruptive protease out as therapeutic
target in
atherosclerotic disease.
[00549] Methods: This assay uses the ENZCHEKO Elastase Assay Kit (Invitrogen
Catalog # E-12056). Neutrophils are prepared from fresh human blood using a 6%
180
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
dextran solution and red blood cells are lysed before plating cells in RPMI
media
(media should be un-supplemented with no serum, no antibiotics). A 1.0 mg/mL
stock
solution of the DQ elastin substrate is prepared by adding 1.0 mL of deionized
water
(dH20) directly to one of the three vials containing the lyophilized substrate
and
mixing to dissolve. 1X Reaction Buffer is prepared by diluting 6 mL of the 10X
Reaction Buffer in 54 mL dH20. A 100 lug/mL working solution of the DQ elastin
substrate is prepared by diluting the DQ elastin stock solution tenfold in 1X
Reaction
Buffer. Porcine pancreatic elastase stock solution is prepared by making a 100
U/mL
stock solution in dH20. To assay for elastase activity, 50 [iL of 1X Reaction
Buffer is
pipette into each assay well containing 500,000 neutrophils/ mL in a 30 4
volume.
84 of each AARS polypeptide is added per well, and the sample incubated for 20
minutes at 37 C. 50 4 of 100 pg/mL DQ elastin working solution is added to
each
well and mixed. Samples are incubated at room temperature, protected from
light, for
30 minutes. Fluorescence intensity in a fluorescence microplate reader
equipped with
standard fluorescein filters (ex 485/ Em 535) fluorescence may be measured
over
multiple time points.
BINDING TO TOLL-LIKE RECEPTORS AND ACTIVATION OF NFKB (ASSAYS D1-D4
THE DATA TABLES BELOW)
[00550] Background and therapeutic relevance: Macrophages are major players in
the innate immune system and express a large repertoire of different classes
of pattern
recognition receptors (PRRs), including the family of Toll-like receptors
(TLRs) which
are powerful regulators and controllers of the immune response.
[00551] Stimulation of TLRs by microbial pathogens and endogenous ligands
initiates signaling cascades that induce the secretion of pro-inflammatory
cytokines and
effector cytokines that direct downstream adaptive immune responses.
Endogenous
ligands, as well as microbial components, are recognized by and can activate
TLRs,
raising the possibility that these receptors may be critical targets for the
development of
new therapies for multiple diseases.
[00552] Accordingly AARS polypeptides that modulate TLR receptor activity,
have
therapeutic utility in a broad range of diseases and disorders including for
example,
inflammatory diseases and disorders, autoimmune diseases, tissue
transplantation /
organ rejection, cancer prevention or treatment, the modulation of
haematopoiesis and
infection.
181
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Measurement of TLR activation in RAW-BLUE cells
[00553] Mouse macrophages sold under the trademark RAWBLUETM cells
(Invivogen, Catalog code: raw-sp) express all TLRs except TLR5 and include a
secreted embryonic alkaline phosphatase (SEAP) gene which is inducible by NF-
kB
and AP-1 transcription factors. Upon TLR stimulation, RAWBLUETM cells activate
NF-kB and/or AP-1 leading to the secretion of SEAP which is measurable when
using
SEAP detection medium.
[00554] Methods: RAW-BLUE'm cells are washed twice with PBS, trypsinized and
resuspended in fresh Growth Medium (Growth Medium: DMEM, 4.5 g/1 glucose, 10%
heat-inactivated fetal bovine scrum (30 minutes at 56 C), 100 mg/mL ZEOCINTM,
2
mM L-glutamine). Cells are plated at a concentration of 50,000 cells/well in a
96 well
plate in a total volume of 100 pi, and AARS polypeptides, controls, or AARS
polypeptides (+LPS) are added to each well at the concentrations shown in the
experiments outlined below. Cells are incubated at 37 C in a 5% CO2 incubator
for 18
hours. On experimental day 2, SEAP detection medium (QUANTI-BLUETm)
(Invivogen Catalog code: rep-qbl) is prepared following the instructions and
120 1.tL is
added per well to a clear flat-bottom 96-well plate, and cell supernatant is
added (20
4). Samples are incubated at 37 C for about 30 minutes to up to 2 hours. SEAP
levels are determined using a spectrophotometer and reading absorbance at 650
nM.
[00555] To detect AARS polypeptides that specifically block TLR activation
this
assay can be modified to identify potential TLR antagonists. In this case AARS
polypeptides are added to the cells at a final concentration of about 250nM
per well, (or
as otherwise specified in the Examples below) 1 hour prior to adding 50 ng/mL
LPS.
Cells are incubated and SEAP detected as described above_ PBS control wells
with no
LPS or AARS polypeptide alone added are used to find the basal level of TLR
stimulation at the time of the measurement. Control wells are pretreated with
PBS and
known TLR agonists and antagonists. The ratio of the background subtracted
[PBS plus
LPS signal] to [AARS polypeptide plus LPS signal] is used to determine percent
antagonism.
Human TLR screening in Hek293 cells
[00556] Human HEK293 cells are genetically modified and sold under the
trademark
HEKBlueTM TLR cells (Invivogen). The TLR2 and TLR4 versions of this cell type
selectively express all TLR2 or TLR4 and include a secreted embryonic alkaline
phosphatase (SEAP)reporter gene under the control of an IFN-beta minimal
promoter
which is fused to five NF-kB and AP-1 transcription factors binding sites.
With the use
of specific TLR 2 or 4 agonists (respectively), HEKBLUETM TLR2 and HEKBLUETM
182
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
TLR4 cells activate NF-kB and/or AP-1 leading to the secretion of SEAP which
is
measurable when using SEAP detection reagent. The HEKBLUETM TLR2 cells are
co-transfected with the LPS co-receptor protein CD14 to enhance TLR2
responsiveness
and improve signal quality. The parent cell expresses endogenous levels of
TLR1, 3, 5,
6 and also NOD1.
[00557] Methods: HEKBLUETM -TLR2 or HEKBLUETM -TLR4 cells are washed
twice with PBS, trypsinized and resuspended in fresh Growth Medium (Growth
Medium: DMEM, 4.5 g/L glucose, 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum (30
minutes at 56 C), 100 mg/mL ZEOC1INTM, 2 mM L-glutamine). Cells are plated at
a
concentration of 50,000 cells/well in a 96 well plate in a total volume of 100
!IL, and
AARS polypeptides, controls, or AARS polypeptides (+LPS) are added to each
well at
the concentrations shown in the experiments outlined below. Cells are
incubated at
37 C in a 5% CO2 incubator for 18 hours. On experimental day 2, SEAP detection
medium (QUANTI-BLUETm) (Invivogen Catalog code: rep-qbl) is prepared following
the instructions and 120 III_ is added per well to a clear flat-bottom 96-well
plate, and
cell supernatant is added (20 pL). Samples are incubated at 37 C for about 30
minutes
to up to 2 hours. SEAP levels are determined using a spectrophotometer and
reading
absorbance at 650 nM. Control wells are pretreated with PBS and known TLR
agonists
such as UltraPure LPS (TLR-4) or PAM3CSK4 (TLR-2). The ratio of the background
subtracted [PBS plus LPS signal] to [AARS polypeptide plus LPS signal] is used
to
determine percent agonism.
CYTOKINE RELEASE (ASSAYS E1-E16 IN THE DATA TABLES BELOW)
[00558] Background and therapeutic relevance: Cytokines are a diverse set of
small
cell signaling protein molecules that are used extensively for intercellular
communication, and play significant roles in normal body homeostasis,
including
immunomodulation and regulation. Accordingly AARS polypeptides that modulate
the
release, or biological activities of cytokines, have therapeutic utility in a
broad range of
diseases and disorders including for example, inflammatory diseases and
disorders,
autoimmunc diseases, tissue transplantation / organ rejection, cancer
prevention or
treatment, the modulation of haematopoiesis and infection.
Cytokine release from cells in culture
[00559] Methods: Test cells are seeded into a 24-well plate at density of
about 1
million cells/well in 1 mL of growth media. Cells are treated with either AARS
polypeptide (at the concentrations shown in the examples below) or an equal
volume of
PBS and incubated overnight at 37 with 5% CO2. Following cell treatment,
samples are
183
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
centrifuged at 4 C in a swinging bucket centrifuge at 2,000 x g for 5
minutes. Media is
carefully removed so as to not disturb the cell pellet and transferred to a
new tube.
Samples are assayed immediately or snap frozen in liquid nitrogen for
subsequent
analysis. Cytokine release (including the cytokines MIF, IL-8, IL-10, Serpin
El, GM-
CSF, GRO, IL-1 alpha, IL- lbeta, IL-lra, IL-6, MCP-1, MIP-1, RANTES and TNF-
alpha) is determined using commercially available kits (R&D Systems, Inc, MN,
USA)
or via a contract research organization (MD Biosciences (St. Paul, MN).
Cytokine Release from Human Whole Blood
[00560] Methods: Human whole blood is obtained from normal human donors and
collected with heparin in standard collection tubes. Blood is used on the same
day as it
is collected to ensure adequate cell health. Blood is mixed gently and plated
in an 100
!IL volume into 96 well polycarbonate V bottom plates. AARS polypeptides are
added
and slowly mixed into blood 2X using a multichannel pipet set on 50 gL. Filter
tips are
used for all experimentation and full PPE is worn. All experimentation occurs
in a
dedicated biosafety hood that is suitable for experimentation with human
blood. Blood
is incubated overnight at 37 C with 5% CO2. Following cell treatment, samples
are
centrifuged in a swinging bucket centrifuge at 2,000 x g for 5 minutes.
Supernatant is
collected for cytokine ELISAs EL1SA are performed as described previously.
Cytokine Release from PBMCs
[00561] Methods: To isolate peripheral blood mononuclear cells freshly
isolated
human whole blood is gently layered over Sigma HISTOPAQUEO-1077 at a ratio of
1.1 in 50 mL conical tubes at room temperature Layered samples are centrifuged
at 400
x g in a swinging bucket clinical centrifuge for 30 minutes at room
temperature with no
brake. The white cellular layer at the interface between the plasma and
density gradient
is then removed by pipet. These peripheral blood mononuclear cells are washed
twice
with RPMI-1640 (Invitrogen #22400-105) by dilution and centrifugation for 10
minutes
at 250 x g. The washed PBMC were resuspended in RPMI-1640 + 10% FBS and plated
at 1x106 cells/mt.
Cytokine release from Human Synoviocytes
[00562] Background and therapeutic relevance: A large number of studies have
demonstrated that IL-6 and IL-8 are overproduced in several diseases, and thus
may
play a fundamental role in the pathogenesis of inflammatory disease. IL-6
activates
endothelial cell production, leading to the release of IL-8 and monocyte
chemoattractant
protein, expression of adhesion molecules, and recruitment of leukocytes to
184
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
inflammatory sites. These cytokines are expressed in cell types associated
with
inflammatory disease, including cells involved in the pathogenesis of systemic
juvenile
arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Crohn's disease, and rheumatoid
arthritis. One
of the most important systemic actions of cytokine production is the induction
of the
acute phase response. Acute phase proteins are produced primarily by the liver
and
include proteins that promote the immune response through activation of
complement,
induction of proinflammatory cytokines, and stimulation of neutrophil
chemotaxis.
Alternatively, the acute phase response can be helpful, and acute-phase
proteins, such
as proteinase antagonists, opsonins, and procoagulants, help limit tissue
destruction by
resolving inflammation. In particular, IL-6 can stimulate synoviocyte
proliferation and
osteoclast activation, leading to synovial pannus formation and repair. IL-6
acts with
IL-1 to increase production of matrix metalloproteinases, which may contribute
to joint
and cartilage destruction. However, IL-6 may also have protective effects in
the joint,
as suggested by the finding that this cytokine induces the expression of the
tissue
inhibitor of metalloproteinase and stimulates proteoglycan synthesis when
injected into
the joints of mice with antigen-induced arthritis. Human Fibroblast-Like
Synoviocytes-
Rheumatoid Arthritis (HFLS-RA) are isolated from synovlal tissues obtained
from
patients with Rheumatoid Arthritis (RA). They are cryopreserved at second
passage and
can be cultured and propagated at least 5 population doublings. HFLS are long
known
for their role in joint destruction by producing cytokines and
metalloproteinases that
contribute to cartilage degradation.
[00563] Accordingly AARS polypeptides with the ability to modulate the growth,
differentiation, or cytokine release profile of fibroblast-like synoviocytes-
rheumatoid
arthritis (HFLS-RA) have therapeutic utility in a broad range of diseases
including for
example, the treatment of inflammatory diseases and disorders including
systemic
juvenile arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Crohn's disease, and
rheumatoid
arthritis.
[00564] Methods: HFLS-RA, adult cells (Cell Applications Cat # 408RA-05a) are
maintained in Synoviocyte Growth Medium (Cell Applications Cat #415-50) in 15
mL
medium in 125 mL flasks for 1 passage before use. Cells arc maintained at 37
C, 5%
CO2, in a humidified environment and utilized in BSL2 certified tissue culture
hoods
using sterile technique and appropriate personal protective equipment
including
goggles, gloves and lab coats. An 80 jiL volume of cells is plated overnight
in growth
medium at a cell density of about 50,000 cells/mL. AARS polypeptides at a
final
concentration of 250 nM per well (or as otherwise indicated in the examples
below) are
added in sterile PBS to each well following overnight adherence. Control wells
contain
untreated cells and are incubated with an equivalent volume of PBS. Cells are
exposed
185
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
to proteins or PBS in basal media (Cell Applications Cat #310-470) for 24
hours.
Supernatant is removed and IL-8, IL-6 and TNFa ELISA assays are run according
to
manufacturer's instructions (RIND Systems, Cat # DY206 and DY-208, DY-210 Duo-
set kits). Proliferation is assessed with Resazurin as described previously by
adding
fresh media containing Resazurin to plates following supernatant removal and
incubating for three hours at 37 C. Plates are read on a fluorescent plate
reader and
viability / proliferation is expressed as a function of resorufin associated
fluorescence of
AARS polypeptide treated wells divided by resorufin associated fluorescence of
PBS
only treated wells.
Human Astrocyte Proliferation and inflammatory cytokine production
[00565] Background and therapeutic relevance: Human astrocytes (HA) are
derived from human cerebral cortex. They are cryopreserved at second passage
and can
be cultured and propagated 10 population doublings. HA are the most abundant
cells in
the central nervous system and they perform many functions such as provision
of
mechanical support and nutrients to neurons, and removal of wastes from
neurons. In
addition to playing a critical support role for optimal neuronal functioning,
they also
provide biochemical support of endothelial cells which form the blood-brain
barrier.
Recent studies have shown that astrocytes are capable of regulating
neurogenesis by
instructing the stem cells to adopt a neuronal fate and controlling the
function of single
synapses, participate actively in the transfer and storage of information in
the brain.
Recognition of the importance of astrocytes in nervous system functioning is
increasing, HA can serve as useful in vitro model for exploring the diversity
of
astrocytes functions Astrocytes have been shown to proliferate in response to
IL6 and
TNFalpha. In addition, these cells are capable of making their own IL6 and
TNFalpha.
Thus AARS polypeptides which modulate the proliferation and cytokine
production in
HA have therapeutic utility in a variety of neurological diseases including
neuro-
in fl ammati on , n euro degen erati on , tumori gen esi s of the brain, and
brain is ch emi a and
repair.
[00566] Methods: Human Astrocytes (HA) from Cell Applications (Cat # 882K-05f)
are maintained in Cell Applications HA Cell Growth Medium (Cat # 821-500)
according to manufacturer's instructions. Cells are maintained at 37 C, 5%
CO2, in a
humidified environment and utilized in BSL2 certified tissue culture hoods
using sterile
technique and appropriate personal protective equipment including goggles,
gloves and
lab coats. An 80 1..tt volume of cells is plated on collagen coated plates
overnight in
complete medium (above) at a cell density of 50,000 cells/mL. Cells are washed
once
with PBS and 80 1iL of serum free growth media is added to each well. AARS
186
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
polypeptides at a final concentration of 250 nM per well (or as otherwise
described in
the examples below) are added in a consistent volume in sterile PBS to each
well. Cells
are exposed to AARS polypeptides for 48 hours and spent media is removed for
cytokine assessment (as described previously). Cells are exposed to proteins
or PBS in
basal media (Cell Applications Cat #310-470) for 48 hours. Supernatant is
removed
and 1L-8 and 1L-6 ELISA assays are run according to manufacturer's
instructions (RND
Systems, Cat # DY206 and DY-208, DY-210 Duo-set kits). Proliferation is
assessed
with Resazurin as described previously by adding fresh media containing
Resazurin to
plates following supernatant removal and incubating for three hours at 37 C.
Plates are
read on a fluorescent plate reader and viability / proliferation is expressed
as a function
of resorufin associated fluorescence of AARS polypeptide treated wells divided
by
resorufin associated fluorescence of PBS only treated wells.
Human lung microvascular endothelial cell (HLMVEC) proliferation and
inflammatory cytokine production
[00567] Background and therapeutic relevance: The pulmonary vasculature is of
great physiological/pathological significance. It is now recognized to be a
tissue
composed of metabolically active, functionally responsive cells, that interact
with
circulating substrates and formed elements in ways that regulate the
composition of
systemic arterial blood, affect target organ functions, and contribute to
thrombosis,
hemostasis and immune reactions, as well as tumor metastasis. Human lung
microvascular endothelial cells (HLMVEC) exhibit elevated expression of
chemoattractant cytokines and cell adhesion molecules that provide critical
cues for
directed migration of leucocytes into the lung during acute lung injury This
primary
cell type can be useful tool for studying various aspects of pathology and
biology of the
pulmonary microvasculature in vitro. Alteration in the structure and function
of the
microvasculature in response to inflammatory stimuli is believed to be a key
factor in
organ damage and under appropriate conditions, may provide a stimulus for
repair. A
significant cause of these vascular alterations is the induction of an
inflammatory
reaction involving leukocyte infiltration. A variety of studies focused on
granulocyte
adhesion to the endothelium have revealed that leukocyte recruitment and
emigration
involves a well- orchestrated adhesion cascade. The adhesion cascade begins
when the
granulocyte attaches to the endothelium and begins to roll in the direction of
fluid flow
at a low velocity. As the granulocyte rolls, it becomes activated,
subsequently firmly
adheres to the endothelium, and migrates across the endothelium into the
extravascular
space. These adhesion events are mediated, in part, by molecular interactions
that occur
between CAMs on the surface of the granulocytes and cognate glycoproteins
present on
187
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
the endothelium. A variety of studies have revealed that the endothelial cell
adhesion
molecule E-selectin can interact with SLex-type glycan presenting granulocyte
ligands
to mediate the attachment and rolling steps of the adhesion cascade . The
downstream
steps of the cascade involve the interaction of endothelial-expressed
intercellular
adhesion molecule with granulocyte- expressed CD18 integrins.
[00568] Thus AARS polypeptides which modulate proliferation and / or cytokine
production of human lung microvascular endothelial cells have therapeutic
utility in a
variety of vascular and pulmonary diseases including inflammatory and
obstructive
lung diseases including for example, pulmonary hypertension, chronic
obstructive
pulmonary disease, idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, and asthma.
[00569] Methods: HLMVEC (Cell Applications, Catalog # 540-05) are maintained
in Cell Applications Microvascular Endothelial Cell Growth Medium (Cat # 111-
500),
For appropriate growth, an Attachment Factor Solution containing collagen
(Cell
Applications, Catalog # 123-100), is used to coat plates and flasks before
plating cells.
Cells are maintained at 37 C, 5% CO2, in a humidified environment and utilized
in
BSL2 certified tissue culture hoods using sterile technique and appropriate
personal
protective equipment including goggles, gloves and lab coats. A 801ut volume
of cells
is plated on collagen coated plates overnight in complete medium (above) at a
cell
density of 50,000 cells/mL. Cells are washed once with PBS and 80 [IL of serum
free
growth media is added to each well. AARS polypeptides at a final concentration
of 250
nM per well (or as otherwise described in the examples below) are added in a
consistent
volume in sterile PBS to each well. Cells are exposed to AARS polypeptides for
48
hours and spent media is removed for ELISA for cell adhesion molecules and
cytokine
assessment (as described previously) Cell
adhesion molecules including soluble
VCAM and/or ICAM are measured using a standard ELISA kit from RND Systems
(Cat # DY643 and DY720 respectively). Proliferation is assessed with Resazurin
as
described previously by adding fresh media containing Resazurin to plates
following
supernatant removal and incubating for three hours at 37 'C. Plates are read
on a
fluorescent plate reader and viability / proliferation is expressed as a
function of
resorufin associated fluorescence of AARS polypeptide treated wells divided by
resorufin associated fluorescence of PBS only treated wells.
CELL ADHESION ((ASSAYS F1-F7 IN THE DATA TABLES BELOW)
[00570] Background and therapeutic relevance: Cell Adhesion Molecules (CAMs)
are proteins located on the cell surface which are involved with the binding
with other
cells or with the extracellular matrix (ECM) in the process called cell
adhesion. These
proteins are typically transmembrane receptors and are composed of three
domains: an
188
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
intracellular domain that interacts with the cytoskeleton, a transmembrane
domain, and
an extracellular domain that interacts either with other CAMs of the same kind
(homophilic binding) or with other CAMs or the extracellular matrix
(heterophilic
binding). Most of the CAMs belong to four protein families: Ig
(immunoglobulin)
superfamily (IgSF CAMs), the integrins, the cadherins, and the selectins. The
immunoglobulin superfamily (IgSF) cell adhesion molecules are calcium-
independent
transmembrane glycoproteins, including: neural cell adhesion molecules
(NCAMs),
intercellular cell adhesion molecules (ICAMs), vascular cell adhesion molecule
(VCAM), platelet-endothelial cell adhesion molecule (PECAM-1), endothelial
cell-
selective adhesion molecule (ESAM), junctional adhesion molecule (JAMs),
nectins,
and other cell adhesion molecules.
[00571] Cell adhesion molecules are cell surface glycoproteins that are
critical for
leukocyte adhesion to the sinusoidal endothelium and transmigration and
cytotoxicity in
a variety of inflammatory liver diseases. ICAM-1 plays an important role in
inflammation, and the increased expression of ICAM-1 on endothelial cells is
reflected
in the activation of endothelial cells. ICAM-1 is of particular importance
since it
mediates firm endothelial adhesion and facilitates leukocyte transmigration.
Studies
have shown that there is an upregulation of ICAM-1 on both sinusoidal cells
and
hepatocytes in inflammatory liver conditions such as hepatitis B viral
infection,
autoimmune liver disorders, alcoholic hepatitis, and liver allograft
rejection.
[00572] Thus AARS polypeptides which modulate cell adhesion molecule
production and cell adhesion to endothelial cells have therapeutic utility in
a variety of
inflammatory diseases including for example, cardiovascular diseases,
atherosclerosis,
autoimmunity and pulmonary hypertension
[00573] Methods: Human umbilical vein cells (ATCC, Cat # CRL-2873 ) (HUVEC)
are seeded at a concentration of about 1.2 x 105 cells / well in 12 well
plates coated with
human fibronectin attachment solution in the suggested ATCC media and
supplements
and grown according to manufacturer's instructions. Cells are stimulated with
AARS
polypeptides at the indicated concentrations, or PBS alone, and incubated
overnight in
growth media. Human acute monocytic leukemia (THP-1 (TM-202)), cells are
resuspended into 0.1% BSA/ RPMI serum free medium with calcein AM (6 [tL/mL;
Invitrogen Cat # C1430) and incubated for 30 minutes. Labeled cells are
collected and
resuspended in RPM1 medium containing 10 % FBS, and the density adjusted to 2
x 106
cells/mt.
[00574] 100i.iL (2 x 105) labeled THP-1 cells are placed into each well of the
HUVEC monolayer in 1 mL of growth media and incubated for 15 minutes. The
wells
are washed twice with PBS to remove unbound cells, and then the cells are read
by
189
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
fluorescent plate reader with an Excitation wavelength of 488 nm and an
Emission
wavelength of 530 rim.
CELLULAR DIFFERENTIATION (ASSAYS G1-G4 IN THE DATA TABLES BELOW)
Adipoeyte differentiation and proliferation in primary human pre-adipocyte
cells.
[00575] Background and therapeutic relevance: Both obesity and lipodystrophy
are commonly associated with pathologies including diabetes and cardiovascular
diseases. It is now recognized that adipose tissue is an endocrine organ that
secretes a
wide variety of factors, and dysregulated secretion affects adipogenesis as
well as
whole-body glucose/insulin homeostasis. Excess adipose tissue leading to
obesity has
become a severe public health threat. Adipose tissue development can be
affected by
genetic background, hormonal balance, diet, and physical activity. Adipose
tissue mass
can increase when fat cells are increased in size due to higher
triacylglycerol
accumulation. In addition, an increase in fat cell number, arising from
differentiation of
precursor cells into adipocytes, can also occur even in adults as observed in
severe
human obesity and in rodents fed a high-carbohydrate or high-fat diet.
Adipocytes
specifically are thought to arise from mesenchymal cells that undergo the
commitment
and differentiation process, adipogenesis. Pre-adipocyte cell lines can
undergo
adipocyte differentiation upon treatment with adipogcnic agents comprised of
synthetic
glucocorticoid, dexamethasone (DEX), isobutylmethylxanthine (IBMX), and
insulin,
have been valuable in these studies. Peroxisome proliferator-activated
receptor y
(PPARy) and CCAAT enhancer-binding protein (C/EBP) family of transcription
factors
have been firmly established to play critical roles in adipocyte
differentiation. Early
during adipocyte differentiation, C/EBPf3 and C/EBP6 are induced by DEX and
IBMX,
respectively, which together then induce PPARy and C/EBPa, to activate various
adipocyte markers that are required for adipocyte function. Other
transcription factors
have also been reported to either positive or negatively regulate adipogenesis
and
various growth factors and hormones can affect adipocyte differentiation by
regulating
expression of adipogenic transcription factors. In fact, in addition to being
the main site
for energy storage in mammals by storing triacyglycerol and releasing fatty
acids in
times of need, adipose tissue secretes a wide array of molecules that are
involved in
diverse physiological processes including immune response, vascular function,
and
energy homeostasis. Cytokines such as TNF-a and IL-6 are secreted from
adipocytes.
Some of these factors may also affect growth and development of adipose tissue
by
autocrine/paracrine action.
190
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00576] Thus AARS polypeptides which have the ability to modulate the
differentiation and / or proliferation of normal human pre-adipocytes have
therapeutic
utility in a broad range of diseases including for example, the treatment and
prevention
of metabolic disease, cardiovascular diseases, obesity and lipodystrophies, as
well as
the long term complications of diabetes.
[00577] Methods: HPAd (human pre-adipocytes) (Cell Application Cat # 803sD)
are
maintained according to vendor instructions. For culturing, cells are thawed
quickly,
and transferred immediately into 15mL of Adipocyte Growth Medium (Cell
Application Cat # 811M-250) and plated into a standard sterile tissue culture
treated
flask. Media is replaced with fresh Adipocyte Growth Medium every other day
until
cell is >60% confluent. Cells are grown at 37 C, 5% CO2, in a humidified
environment
and utilized in BSL2 certified tissue culture hoods using sterile technique
and
appropriate personal protective equipment including goggles, gloves and lab
coats.
Cells are plated in clear bottom black walled 96 well tissue culture treated
assay plates
for differentiation at a concentration of about 50,000 cells/mL. AARS
polypeptides at a
final concentration of 250nM per well (or as otherwise indicated in the
Examples
below) are added to each assay well. All cells are maintained in growth media
for 2
days with the exception of the positive controls which are stimulated with
adipogenic
differentiation media (Cell Applications Cat #811D-250). Cells are exposed to
AARS
polypeptides for 48 hours. Cell adhesion molecules including soluble VCAM
and/or
ICAM are measured using a standard ELISA kit from RND Systems (Cat # DY643 and
DY720 respectively). Proliferation is assessed with Resazurin as described
previously
by adding fresh media containing Resazurin to plates following supernatant
removal
and incubating for three hours at 37 'V Plates are read on a fluorescent plate
reader
and viability / proliferation is expressed as a function of resorufm
associated
fluorescence of AARS polypeptide treated wells divided by resorufin associated
fluorescence of PBS only treated wells. Fresh media is added and
differentiation is
maintained for 16 days post initial media exchange, with fresh media exchanged
every
other day to maintain cell health. On day 15, cells are placed in serum free
media. On
day 16, differentiation to mature adipocytes is assessed with Nile Red
(1nvitrogen,
concentration of 3 uM final) staining and quantified with a fluorescent plate
reader with
the appropriate wavelengths. To perform this assay cells are fixed with 10%
paraformaldehyde, washed in PBS and permeabilized in PBS containing 0.5% BSA
and
0.1% Triton X-100. Cell proliferation is assessed with an intensity
measurement on a
fluorescent reader with Hoechst dye 33432 at a concentration of lug/mL final,
as
described previously. Adipogenesis is expressed as intensity of Nile Red
signal.
Hoechst dye signal is used to assess cellular number.
191
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Human skeletal muscle cell differentiation and proliferation.
[00578] Background and therapeutic relevance: The development of skeletal
muscle is a multistep process that involves the determination of
pluripotential
mesodermal cells to give rise to myoblasts, withdrawal of the myoblasts from
the cell
cycle and differentiation into muscle cells, and finally growth and maturation
of skeletal
muscle fibers. Skeletal muscle differentiation involves myoblast alignment,
elongation,
and fusion into multinucleate myotubes, together with the induction of
regulatory and
structural muscle-specific genes. At the molecular level, myogenic commitment
and
muscle-specific gene expression involve the skeletal muscle-specific helix-
loop-helix
(bHLH) MyoD family of proteins, which includes MyoD, myogenin, myf-5, and
MRF4, and the myocyte enhancer-binding factor 2 (MEF2). The DNA binding
activity
of MyoD family proteins is attenuated by Id, which forms complexes with E2a
gene
products in proliferating cells and is down-regulated when they are induced to
differentiate. The decision to differentiate into myotubes is influenced
negatively by
several factors. Treatment of myoblasts with fetal bovine serum, basic
fibroblast growth
factor 2, or transforming growth factor in is known to inhibit differentiation
of
myoblasts. Myogenesis is also regulated negatively by oncogenes such as c-mye,
c-jun,
c-fos, H-ras, and El a. There is very little information regarding the
signaling that is
triggered in the myoblast upon serum withdrawal which leads to the induction
of the
MyoD family gene expression and to muscle differentiation. Myogenic
differentiation
appears to depend on the activation of integrins present on the plasma
membrane of
myoblasts suggesting the operation of an "outside-in" biochemical pathway in
which
integrin is the upstream molecular species. Interactions of insulin-like
growth factor
(IGF)-I and -II with their receptors are also positive regulators of skeletal
muscle
differentiation.
[00579] Accordingly AARS polypeptides with the ability to modulate muscle
development have therapeutic utility in a broad range of diseases including
for example,
the treatment of metabolic disease, cachexi a, various muscle wasting
conditions, as well
as musculoskeletal disease where muscle atrophy plays a key role in the
pathogenesis
and symptomology. Human Skeletal Muscle Cells (HSkMC) can undergo
differentiation to exhibit actin and myosin myofilaments. HSkMC have been used
in the
study of genetic muscular diseases such as Malignant Hyperthermia. HSkMC also
have
the potential to act as a cardiac graft, mending damage to the heart, and thus
AARS
polypeptides with the ability to modulate muscle development also have utility
as in
vitro and in vivo regulators of myogenesis.
[00580] Methods: To assess the potential role of AARS polypeptides in this
process,
a standard assay of skeletal muscle cell differentiation was employed. For
this assay,
192
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Human Adult Skeletal Muscle Cells (HSkMC, Cell Application Cat # 150-050 are
isolated from healthy human donors from limbal skeletal muscle. Cells are
maintained
in HSkMC Growth Medium (Cell Applications, Cat # 151-500). These cells can be
cultured and propagated for at least 15 population doublings. For
differentiation, cells
are maintained in growth media for one passage and then plated at 50,000 cells
per mL
media in to 96 well clear bottom black walled TC treated plates treated with
collagen at
100 I, per well. Cells are allowed to adhere overnight. AARS polypeptides in
PBS, or
PBS alone, is added to each well at a final concentration of 250nM protein (or
as
otherwise indicated in the examples below). Control wells received the same
volume of
Differentiation Media (Cell Applications Cat # 151D-250) at this time. Cells
are
incubated with protein or differentiation media for 48 hours. At 48 hours,
cell culture
supernatant is collected from all wells and differentiation media is added at
a volume of
150 pi to the entire plate with the exception of control wells which are
maintained in
growth media only. Supernatant is utilized to assess cytokine production
including IL6
and IL8 as described previously. Proliferation is assessed with Resazurin as
described
previously by adding fresh media containing Resazurin to plates following
supernatant
removal and incubating for three hours at 37 C. Cells are monitored under the
microscope and media is exchanged for fresh Differentiation media every 2
days. On
Day 10, media is removed and cells are fixed with 10% paraformaldehyde for 30
minutes. Cells are permeabilized with 0.1% Triton X-100 in PBS for 15 minutes
and
cells are stained with TR-Labeled phalloidin and Hoechst 33432 (as described
previously) to define actin and nuclei respectively. Nuclear intensity is used
to
determine cell proliferation in each well and phalloidin intensity is used to
determine
total actin content_ Cells are also stained with alpha actin skeletal muscle
antibody
(GenTex Cat # GTX101362). Digital photos using a fluorescent microscope as
well as
visual inspections and scoring are made of all wells.
Human hone marrow mesenehymal stem differentiation and proliferation.
[00581] Background and therapeutic relevance: Mesenchymal stem cells (MSCs)
are multipotent stem cells that can differentiate into a variety of cell
types, including
osteoblasts, chondrocytes, myocytes, adipocytes, beta-pancreatic islets cells,
and
potentially, neuronal cells. Many different events contribute to the
commitment of the
MSC to other lineages including the coordination of a complex network of
transcription
factors, cofactors and signaling intermediates from numerous pathways. MSCs
are of
intense therapeutic interest because they represent a population of cells with
the
potential treat a wide range of acute and degenerative diseases.
193
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00582] Moreover AARS polypeptides with the ability to modulate the
differentiation of MSCs into different developmental pathways have significant
therapeutic utility to enable the in vitro or in vivo modulation of
hematopoiesis,
neurogenesis, myogenesis, osteogenesis, and adipogenesis, as well as in a
broad range
of disorders and diseases, including for example inflammatory responses,
autoimmunity, cancer, neuronal degeneration, muscular dystrophy, osteoporosis,
and
lipodystrophy. Human MSCs are immuno-privileged, and represent an advantageous
cell type for allogenic transplantation, reducing the risks of rejection and
complications
of transplantation. Recently, there have also been significant advances in the
use of
autologous mesenchymal stem cells to regenerate human tissues, including
cartilage
and meniscus, tendons, and bone fractures. Many studies have also investigated
the use
of MSCs for gene therapy, including transplantation of MSCs transfected with
vascular
endothelial growth factor for the improvement of heart function after MI in
rats, MSCs
as vehicles for interferon-0 delivery into tumors in mice and gene therapy
with MSCs
expressing BMPs to promote bone formation. Accordingly due to the intense
interest as
MSCs as direct and modified therapeutics, as well as the potential of AARS
polypeptides to act as therapeutic agents to regulate the differentiation of
MSCs in vivo,
AARS polypeptides were tested as potential inducers of MSC proliferation and
differentiation.
[00583] Methods: hMSC (human marrow stromal cells) (Cell Application Cat # 492-
050 are maintained according to vendor instructions. For culturing, cells are
thawed
quickly, and transferred immediately into 15mL of Marrow Stromal cell Growth
Medium (Cell Application Cat # 419-500) and plated into a standard sterile
tissue
culture treated flask Media is replaced with fresh Marrow Stromal cell Growth
Medium every other day until cells are >60% confluent. Cells are grown at 37
C, 5%
CO2, in a humidified environment and utilized in BSL2 certified tissue culture
hoods
using sterile technique and appropriate personal protective equipment
including
goggles, gloves and lab coats. Cells are plated in clear bottom black walled
96 well
tissue culture treated assay plates for differentiation at a concentration of
50,000
cells/mt. tRNA synthetase derived proteins at a final concentration of 250 nM
per well
(or as otherwise specified in the Examples below) are added to each assay
well. All
cells are maintained in growth media for 2 days with the exception of the
positive
controls, which was stimulated with osteogenic or chonodrogenic
differentiation media
(StemPro, Invitrogen, Cat # A10072-01 and A10071-01 respectively). Cells are
exposed to AARS polypeptides for 48 hours. Soluble VCAM is measured using a
standard ELISA kit from RND Systems (Cat # DY643). Proliferation is assessed
with
Resazurin as described previously by adding fresh media containing Resazurin
to plates
194
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
following supernatant removal and incubating for three hours at 37 C. Plates
are read
on a fluorescent plate reader and viability / proliferation is expressed as a
function of
resorufin associated fluorescence of AARS polypeptide treated wells divided by
resorufin associated fluorescence of PBS only treated wells. Following an
assessment of
cell viability, resazurin is removed with two media exchanges and 0.5X
differentiation
media is added to all wells. Differentiation is monitored by visual
inspections of all
wells for 10 days post media exchange, with fresh media exchanged every other
day to
maintain cell health. Differentiation was assessed with alkaline phosphatase
staining
using ELF-97 stain (Invitrogen Cat# E6601) at day 10 post first
differentiation
exchange. (Yang et al, Nature Protocols (6) 187-213 (2011)
doi:10.1038/nprot.2010.189).
Human pulmonary artery smooth muscle cell (hPASIVIC) proliferation and
differentiation.
[00584] Background and therapeutic relevance: Pulmonary artery smooth muscle
cells (PASMCs) in normal human adult lung blood vessels are mostly quiescent,
non-
migratory and are largely committed to executing their contractile function in
the lung.
However, PASMCs are not terminally differentiated and possess the ability to
modulate
their phenotype and exit their quiescent state in response to changing local
environmental cues. This differentiation state may occur in development,
tissue injury,
and vessel remodeling in response to changes in tissue demand. Pulmonary
hypertension (PH) is associated with a variety of underlying conditions
including an
increase in peripheral pulmonary vascular resistance as a result of increased
vascular
tone and PASMC contractility and vascular remodeling Vascular remodeling
involves
PASMC growth, synthesis of matrix material, and alterations in cell-cell and
cell-matrix
interactions in the walls of small pulmonary arteries (PAs), which lead to
increased
thickness of the smooth muscle component of the vessel wall and abnormal
muscularization of the normally nonmuscularized, distal PAs. This process
contributes
to reduced lumen diameter and increased peripheral resistance. Although the
precise
role of the PASMCs in the initial cause of the disease is controversial, the
changes that
occur play a key role in the clinical consequences of the disease. A crucial
step in
studying cellular differentiation is identifying a set of cell-specific or
cell-selective
genes that contribute to the differentiated function(s) of the cell. A variety
of smooth
muscle cell (SMC) genes have been identified that serve as useful markers of
the
relative state of differentiation or maturation of the vascular SMCs, such as
SM alpha-
actin, SM MHC, hl-calponin, SM22-alpha, desmin, metavinculin, smoothelin and
others. The most widely used marker is SM alpha-actin, partially because of
the
195
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
commercial availability of a number of very high-affinity and highly selective
antibodies for this protein. Whether changes in PASMCs result from their
inherent
characteristics or from dysregulation of molecular events that govern PASMC
growth
remains an open question. However determining the regulatory cues and managing
potential dis-regulation provides significant therapeutic insight to managing
a variety of
vascular and pulmonary diseases including pulmonary hypertension, vascular
diseases.
[00585] Thus AARS polypeptides which have the ability to modulate the
differentiation and / or proliferation of normal human PASMCs derived from
adult
humans have therapeutic utility in a variety of vascular and pulmonary
diseases
including inflammatory and obstructive lung diseases including for example,
pulmonary
hypertension, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, idiopathic pulmonary
fibrosis,
and asthma.
[00586] Methods: HPASMC (Cell Applications Cat # 352-05a) are maintained in
HPASMC growth media (Cell Applications Cat # 352-05a) in 15 mL medium in 125
mL flasks for 1 passage before use. Cells are maintained at 37 C, 5% CO2. in a
humidified environment and utilized in BSL2 certified tissue culture hoods
using sterile
technique and appropriate personal protective equipment including goggles,
gloves and
lab coats. An 801aL volume of cells is plated on collagen coated overnight in
growth
medium at a cell density of 50,000 cells/mL. AARS polypeptides were added in
sterile
PBS to each well at a final concentration of 250 nM (or as otherwise specified
in the
Examples below). Control wells held only an equivalent volume of PBS. Positive
control samples were incubated with vendor supplied HPASMC differentiation
media
(Cell Applications Cat # 311D-250). Cells are exposed to AARS polypeptides or
PBS
in basal media (Cell Applications Cat # 310-470) for 48 hours followed by a
media
exchange to differentiation media for the entire plate. Supernatant is
collected and
utilized to assess cytokine production including IL6 and IL8 as described
previously.
Proliferation is assessed with Resazurin as described previously by adding
fresh media
containing Resazurin to plates following supernatant removal and incubating
for three
hours at 37 C. Cells are monitored for 10 days with a media exchange every
other day.
Differentiation is assessed after fixation as described above, and
permeabilzation with
0.1% Triton X-100, by quantifying staining to smooth muscle actin-alpha
staining
using an anti-SMA-alpha antibody (GeneTex Cat #GTX101362) and an Alexa 405
conjugated secondary antibody. Proliferation is assessed with Hoechst staining
after cell
fixation in 10% formaldehyde for 30 minutes. Hoechst dye is read using a
bottom
reading fluorescent plate reader with an excitation wavelength (Ex) of 405
nna, and an
emission wavelength (Em) of 450 nm. Total actin staining is assessed via the
use of an
Alexa-488 labeled phalloidin stain (Invitrogen Cat# A12379).
196
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
ANALYSIS or THE BINDING or AARS POLYPEPTIDES TO CELLS (ASSAYS Hl-H10 IN
THE DATA TABLES BELOW)
[00587] Background and therapeutic relevance: The binding of AARS polypeptides
to specific cell types demonstrates that the cell type in question expresses
specific
receptors for the AARS polypeptide in question. Depending upon the cell type
in
question, cell binding implies a potential role for the AARS polypeptide in
regulating
the activity or behavior of the cell, or similar types of cell, in vivo.
Specific examples
of such regulatory roles include for example, the binding and modulation of B-
cells and
T-cells (immunomodulation / chemotaxis / autoimmunity / inflammation); HepG2
cells
(control of metabolism, cholesterol uptake or metabolism); THP-1, Jurkat, Raji
cells
(immunomodulation / chemotaxis / autoimmunity / inflammation), platelets
(thrombopoiesis), 3T3L1 adipocytes (lipogenesis / metabolism), and C2C12 mouse
myoblasts (rnyogenesis, osteogenesis).
Binding to blood cells
[00588] Methods: Blood is collected in EDTA tubes from healthy donors. 2mL
whole blood is placed into 5mL Falcon FACS tube. 2mL of staining buffer (PBS +
2%
FBS) is added, vortexed 3-5 seconds, centrifuged for 5 minutes at 300 x g. The
supernatant aspirated, the wash repeated, and the pellet resuspended in 2 mL
of staining
buffer.
[00589] 100111 of washed blood is transferred to clean 5mL FACS sample tubes.
His6- or V5-His6-tagged AARS polypeptides are added to tubes at the
concentrations
indicated in the specific experiments outlined below and incubated on ice for
45
minutes_ After incubation, antibodies for the different cell type surface
markers (BD
Pharmigen Cat Nos. 560910, 555398, 555415, 340953, 560361), and FITC labeled
anti-
V5 tag antibody (V5-FITC, Invitrogen Cat # R96325) or FITC labeled anti-His6
antibody (AbCam Cat #ab1206) are added to tubes, incubated in the dark on ice
30
minutes. After incubation 2mL of BD FACS Lysing Solution (cat #349202) was
added
to tubes. Samples are vortexed, and placed on ice for 15 minutes. Samples are
washed
with 1 x 2mL PBS and resuspended in 2mL of 2% formaldehyde in PBS prior to
FACS
analysis. AARS polypeptides that bind greater than 25% of a cellular
population, where
antibody alone has no significant signal, is deemed a hit.
[00590] Platelet binding assays: 501IL of washed blood is transferred to clean
5mL
FACS sample tubes, His6- or V5-His6-tagged AARS polypeptides are added to
tubes at
the concentrations indicated in the specific experiments outlined below and
tubes are
placed on ice for 45 minutes. 20 uL CD61 pan platelet antibody (BD Pharmigen,
Cat #
555754) and 0.5 [IL anti- V5-FITC labeled antibody (Invitrogen, R96325) or
FITC
197
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
labeled anti-His6 antibody (AbCam Cat #ab1206) are added to each tube. Tubes
are
placed on ice and protected from light for 30 minutes. Samples are brought up
to a total
volume in 2mL of 1% formaldehyde in PBS and analyzed by flow cytometry within
24
hours. AARS polypeptides that bind greater than 25% of a cellular population,
where
antibody alone has no significant signal, is deemed a hit.
[00591] Binding to cells in culture: Approximately 1 x 106 cells in 100 jiL
complete
RPMI medium are placed into 5mL FACS tubes. His6- or V5-His6-tagged AARS
polypeptides are added to tubes at the concentrations indicated in the
specific
experiments outlined below and tubes are placed on ice for 45 minutes. Cell
samples
are washed twice with ImL staining buffer (PBS + 2% FBS), and then 0.51.IL of
anti-
V5-FITC antibody (Invitrogen R96325) or FITC labeled anti-His6 antibody (AbCam
Cat #ab1206) in staining buffer with 200gg/mL human IgG, is added and the
samples
incubated on ice, protected from light, for 30 minutes. Samples are washed
twice with
lmL staining buffer, and then brought up to a total volume in 2mL of 1%
formaldehyde
in PBS and analyzed by flow cytometry within 24 hours. AARS polypeptides that
bind
greater than 25% of a cellular population, where antibody alone has no
significant
signal, is deemed a hit.
ANIMAL STUDIES: MODULATION OF HAEMATOPOIESIS AND CIRCULATING CYTOKINES
[00592] Background and therapeutic relevance: Hematopoiesis (alternatively
haemopoiesis or hemopoiesis) is the formation of blood cellular components.
All
cellular blood components are derived from haematopoietic stem cells (HSCs)
which
reside in the medulla of the bone (bone marrow) and have the unique ability to
give rise
to all of the different mature blood cell types HSCs are self-renewing. when
they
proliferate, at least some of their daughter cells remain as HSCs, so the pool
of stem
cells does not become depleted. The other daughters of HSCs (myeloid and
lymphoid
progenitor cells), however can each commit to any of the alternative
differentiation
pathways that lead to the production of one or more specific types of blood
cells, but
cannot themselves self-renew. A change in the blood components in response to
exposure to an AARS polypeptide therefore suggests that the AARS polypeptide
is
capable of modulating hematopoiesis, and regulating the development of
haematopoietic stem cells.
[00593] All blood cells can be divided into three lineages; Erythroid cells,
lymphocytes and myelocytes.
[00594] Erythroid cells are the oxygen carrying red blood cells. Both
reticulocytes
and erythrocytes are functional and are released into the blood. Accordingly a
198
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
reticulocyte count estimates the rate of erythropoiesis, and a change in red
blood cell
count suggests that an AARS polypeptide modulates erythropoiesis.
[00595] Lymphocytes are the cornerstone of the adaptive immune system. They
are
derived from common lymphoid progenitors. The lymphoid lineage is primarily
composed of T-cells and B-cells (types of white blood cells). Accordingly a
change in
white blood cell count or composition in response to exposure to an AARS
polypeptide
suggests that that the AARS polypeptide modulates lymphopoiesis.
[00596] Myelocytes, which include granulocytes, megakaryocytes and
macrophages,
and are derived from common myeloid progenitors, are involved in a variety of
roles,
including innate immunity, adaptive immunity, and blood clotting. Accordingly
a
change in myeloid cell count or composition in response to exposure to an AARS
polypeptide suggests that that the AARS polypeptide modulates myelopoiesis.
The
same rationale can be used to establish whether the AARS polypeptides modulate
granulopoiesis, by measuring changes in granulocyte number in response to
exposure to
the AARS polypeptides. A role for the AARS polypeptide in modulating
megakaryocytopoiesis may be inferred by a change in megakaryocyte or platelet
composition or number in the blood.
[00597] Cytokine release in either wild type mice, or in various animal model
systems of inflammation, provides an initial assessment of the potential
ability of the
AARS polypeptides to modulate inflammatory responses. The role of AARS
polypeptides in modulating acute chronic inflammatory processes for example,
can be
readily assessed using a mouse model of diet induced obesity (DIO). The DIO
model
centers upon placing rodents on a high fat diet for several months leading to
increased
obesity, insulin resistance and immune system dysfunction_ A particular
consequence of
this immune system dysregulation results in increased production of
proinflammatory
cytokines in DIO animals leading to a condition of chronic systemic
inflammation.
There is a growing body of evidence suggesting that low grade inflammation
contributes to the development and maintenance of obesity and a diabetic
phenotype
that is similarly observed in the human condition termed metabolic syndrome.
As such,
the ability of AARS polypeptides to modulate the immune system and restore
homeostatic balance towards a resolution of this chronic inflammatory state
would be
particularly beneficial in numerous diseases and disorders including but not
limited to
the treatment and prevention of the symptoms and side effects of metabolic
disease,
diabetes, cardiovascular diseases, atherosclerosis, obesity, as well as
various
autoimmune diseases and disorders, including for example, multiple sclerosis,
vascular
and allergic disorders.
199
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00598] Methods: Male wild type control (C57BL/6) or diet induced obesity mice
(C57BL/6NHsd) are purchased from Harlan (Indianapolis, IN) and housed
individually.
DIO mice are fed a high fat diet (Cat. #TD.06414-60% kcal from fat) and
control mice
are fed a normal diet (Cat. #2018S-18% kcal from fat). DIO mice are placed on
the high
fat diet starting at 6 weeks of age for a total of 10 weeks. Both DIO and
control mice
are allowed to feed and drink ad libitum. At 16 weeks of age, mice are sorted
and
randomized into groups of 5 animals based on weight. On day 2, mice are
weighed and
tail vein bled (1004) for pre-treatment complete blood count (CBC) analysis.
On day
1, mice are weighed and intravenously injected via the tail vein with vehicle
(PBS) or
individual AARS polypeptides at 10mg/kg. Four hours post-injection, mice are
facial
vein bled (150-2004) for subsequent cytokine analysis. On days 2, 3, & 4, mice
are
intravenously dosed as on day 1. On day 5, mice are weighed, terminated and
blood are
collected by heart puncture for Complete Blood Count (CBC analysis) (plasma-
EDTA)
and cytokine examination (serum).
[00599] CBC and cytokine analysis: Complete blood counts are analyzed from
blood draws preceding injections (day -2) and 24 hours after the final
injection (day 5).
CBC values are assessed for total white blood cell counts and overall red
blood cell
morphology. White blood cells are further characterized by total and
fractional
percentage of neutrophils, lymphocytes, monocytes, eosinophils, & basophils.
Red
blood cell breakdown included measurements of hemoglobin (dL), hematocrit (%),
mean corpuscular volume (fL), mean corpuscular hemoglobin, mean corpuscular
hemoglobin concentration (%), and total platelet count (103/4). CBC analysis
is
performed by Antech Diagnostics (Fishers, IN).
[00600] Circulating cytokine levels are examined at 4 hours post-injection
(day 1)
and 24 hours after the final injection (day 5). Serum is isolated, snap frozen
and sent to
Rules Based Medicine (Austin, TX) for multi-analyte profiling. Serum samples
are
analyzed using the RodentMap panel encompassing 59 unique biomarkers including
Apo A-1, CD40, CD4O-L, CRP, ET-1, eotaxin, EGF, Factor VII, fibrinogen, FGF-9,
FGF-basic, GST-a, GCP-2, GM-CSF, KC/GROoc, haptoglobin, IgA, IFNy, IP-10, IL-
la, IL-113, IL-10, 1L-11, 1L-12p70, 11-17A, IL-18, IL-2, 1L-3, 1L-4, 1L-5, 1L-
6, 1L-7,
LIF, lymphotactin, M-CSF-1, MIP-la, MIP-13, MIP-ly, MIP-2, MIP-313, MDC, MMP-
9, MCP-1, MCP-3, MCP-5, MPO, myoglobin, SAP, SGOT, SCF, RANTES, TPO,
tissue factor, TIMP-1, TNF-a, VCAM-1, VEGF-A, and vWF. A change in cytokine
levels was counted as a hit if the cytokine increased by at least 2-fold or
decreased by at
least 50% compared to vehicle controls.
200
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
EXAMPLE 1
IDENTIFICATION OF PROTEOLYTIC FRAGMENTS AND PRODUCTS OF ALTERNATIVE
SPLICING FROM AARSs USING PROTEIN TOPOGRAPHY AND MIGRATION ANALYSIS
PLATFORM
[00601] To identify AARS fragments from cell lines, conditioned media and
tissues,
samples are prepared in the following ways:
[00602] Mouse nzacrophage (RAW 264.7), cytosol and conditioned media: Cells
are
treated with serum free DMEM media at a density of 15 x 106 cells / flasks.
After 48
hours conditioned media and cell pellets arc collected and processed. 200 jig
of protein
from secreted and cytosolic proteomic fractions are separated by SDS-PAGE and
gel
slices are prepared for analysis by mass spectrometry.
[00603] Mouse pancreas tissue: The pancreas from three mice are chopped,
dounce
homogenized, and sonicated in PBS with protease inhibitors. Cytosolic proteome
is
isolated by centrifugation and 200 fig of protein is separated by SDS-PAGE and
gel
slices are prepared for analysis by mass spectrometry.
[00604] Mouse liver tissue: Three mouse livers are chopped, dounced
homogenized,
and sonicated in PBS with protease inhibitors. Cytosolic proteome is isolated
by
centrifugation and 200 fig of protein is separated by SDS-PAGE and gel slices
are
prepared for analysis by mass spectrometry.
[00605] In-gel digests arc analyzed by LTQ XL ion trap mass spectrometer
(ThermoFisher) equipped with ultimate 3000 LC system (Dionex). The samples
are
first loaded on PepTrap (michrom) for 10 min with 5% Acetonitrile in 0.1%
formic acid
using Dionex autosampler. Then the samples are analyzed with a 100 m (inner
diameter) fused silica capillary column containing 10 cm of C18 resin
(michrom).
Peptides are eluted from the column into mass spectrometer with a flow rate of
0.45 1/min using a linear gradient of 5-33.5% acetonitrile in 0.1% formic acid
within
110 min.
[00606] LTQ is operated in data-dependent scanning mode such that one full MS
scan is followed by seven MS/MS scans of the seven most abundant ions. Dynamic
exclusion is enabled with repeat count equals to 1, repeat duration equals to
20 seconds,
exclusion list size is 300 and exclusion duration is 60 seconds.
[00607] After LC-MS/MS analysis, the raw data is searched with
BioWorks3.3.1(SEQUEST) using a concatenated target/decoy variant of the mouse
IPI
database. The SEQUEST data are filtered and sorted with DTASelect. Tables 1, 4
and
7 show sequences identified in this way.
201
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
EXAMPLE 2
IDENTIFICATION OF SPLICE VARIANTS USING DEEP SEQUENCING
[00608] Splice variants of the aminoacyl tRNA synthetase are identified using
high
throughput sequencing of cDNA libraries enriched for aminoacyl tRNA synthetase
transcripts. The cDNA templates are prepared from total RNA extracts of
tissues such
as human adult and fetal brains and enriched for aminoacyl tRNA synthetase
transcripts
by using primer sequences specific for all annotated exons of all annotated
human
aminoacyl tRNA synthetases and their associated proteins.
[00609] Human Total RNAs arc obtained from Clontech. For cell line and mouse
tissue samples, total RNAs are extracted using RNA Extract II Kit (MN).
Genomic
DNA is digested in the total RNA samples by DNAase I. To obtain mature
messenger
RNAs (mRNAs), the RNA samples are enriched twice by binding polyA+ RNA and
digestion of RNA without 5'-cap by 5'-phosphate dependent exonuelease.
Complementary DNA (cDNA) is synthesized from mature RNAs using primers that
anneal to exon sequences of aminoacyl tRNA synthetase genes. A transcriptome
enriched for aminoacyl tRNA synthetase genes is amplified by multiplex PCR
using the
aminoacyl tRNA synthetase-exon specific cDNA and different combinations of
aminoacyl tRNA synthetase-exon primers. The double-stranded aminoacyl tRNA
synthetase¨enriched transcriptome PCR products are enzymatically repaired at
both
ends before adding A-overhangs to the 3' ends of the repaired fragments.
Sequencing
adaptors and index sequences are then added to the aminoacyl tRNA synthetase-
enriched transcriptome PCRs products to generate cDNA libraries for deep
sequencing
with Illumina's Multiplex Sequencing Kit. In brief, the aminoacyl tRNA
synthetase-
enriched transcriptome PCR products with 3'-A overhangs are ligated to the
InPE
adaptor oligonucleotides provided in the kits. Index sequences are added to
the PCR
products with InPE adaptors. To obtain enough DNA fragments for deep
sequencing,
the PCR products with index sequences are further amplified by PCR. Aminoacyl
tRNA synthetase-enriched cDNA libraries with different indexes are pooled and
sequenced using an Illumina DNA sequencing machine to get 50 base pair end
reads.
Sequencing reads are mapped to human or mouse genome for identification of
alternative splicing events. "Splicemap" software
is used to identify splice junctions.
[00610] Deep sequencing of these cDNAs are performed to generate about 1
million
sequencing reads of about 50 nucleotides in length. The sequences specific for
exons of
the aminoacyl tRNA synthetases are queried against annotated exon junctions
and new
exon junctions are identified as alternative splicing events.
202
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
[00611] The columns in Tables 2, 5, and 8 labeled "5' exon" and "3'exon"
indicate,
when present, which exons are fused together in the cDNA sequence. Tables 2,
5, and
8 show sequences that were identified for alternative splice events,
transcripts
containing such splice events, and the polypeptides expressed by those
transcripts.
Alternative splice variants identified by deep sequencing are identified in
Tables 2, 5,
and 8 as those ones in which there are numbers greater than zero in the
columns
labeled as "Sequencing reads" in the human adult or fetal brain.
EXAMPLE 3
IDENTIFICATION OF AARS POLYPEPTIDES USING BIOINFORMATICS
[00612] AARS protein fragments (resectin or appendacrine peptides) are
identified
using bioinformatics. Amino acid sequences of the full length human aminoacyl
tRNA
synthetase are aligned with the full length amino acid sequence of its
ortholog from the
bacterium Escherichia coli using a program such as FASTA (available at the
website
http://fasta.bioch.virginia.edu/fasta_www2/fasta_www.cgi) or the BLASTP
program
from the NCBI (available at the website
http ://www.ncbi .nlm.nih. gov/b last/B last. c gi?PRO GRAM=b lastp&BLAS T
PROGRAM
S=blastp&PAGE TYPE=BlastSearch&SHOW DEFAULTS=on&LINK LOC=blastho
m). Resectin sequences from the human proteins are identified as sequences
covering
regions where there are gaps in the bacterial sequence in the alignment, or
regions with
low homology between the two species. The peptide, and corresponding DNA
sequences in Tables 3, 6, and 9 include examples identified in this way.
EXAMPLE 4
DIFFERENTIAL EXPRESSION OF AARS POLYPEPTIDES IDENTIFIED BY MASS
SPECTROMETRY
[00613] The PROTOMAP technique is used as described in Example 1 to compare
the differential expression of Arginyl tRNA synthetases in different
tissues/cell types
(refer to Tables 1, 4, and 7 for sequences and comparisons): Aminoacyl-tRNA
synthetase resectin expression is compared between mouse liver tissue and
mouse
pancreas tissue. Aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase resectin expression is compared
between
cytosol of RAW264.7 and conditioned media from RAW264.7 cells harvested after
48
hours of serum starvation.
203
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
EXAMPLE 5
DIFFERENTIAL EXPRESSION OF AARS POLYPEPTIDES IDENTIFIED BY DEEP
SEQUENCING
[00614] To test for differential expression of spice events, the deep
sequencing is
done for cDNAs prepared from different tissues.
[00615] Expression of specific alternative splice events for aminoacyl tRNA
synthetases is unexpected and indicates biological importance. The variation
in relative
number of reads seen in the deep sequencing of different transcriptome samples
indicates that alternative splice events of aminoacyl tRNA synthetases are
differentially
regulated and not just artifacts due to sample handling.
EXAMPLE 6
ANTIBODY SCREENING
[00616] To facilitate the discovery of antibodies displaying preferential
binding to
specific aminoacyl tRNA synthetase fragments (e.g., >10-fold higher affinity
when
compared to the parental full length enzyme), a human antibody phage display
library is
screened by AbD Serotec (a division of MORPHOSYSTm, Martinsried/Planegg,
Germany) using affinity enrichment techniques (panning). Antibodies enriched
after
multiple rounds of screening with the aminoacyl tRNA synthetase fragments are
subsequently characterized by ELISA for reactivity to the fragments, and to
the
parental, full length enzyme. Clones demonstrating preferential binding (e.g.,
>10-fold
higher affinity) to the aminoacyl tRNA synthetase fragments are further
characterized.
[00617] If the necessary specificity is not achieved at the end of this
process,
subtraction strategies, such as pre-adsorption steps with the full length
enzyme and/or
counter-screening, are used to eliminate cross reacting antibodies and drive
the
selection process towards the unique epitope(s) on the aminoacyl tRNA
synthetase
fragments.
EXAMPLE 7
IDENTIFICATION OF SPLICE VARIANTS USING SYSTEMATIC PCR
[00618] cDNA templates for PCR reactions are reverse transcribed from total
RNA
extracts of tissues or cells (e.g., human brain, IMR-32 and HEK293T). PCR
reactions
are performed using aminoacyl tRNA synthetase specific primers, pairing a
forward
primer (FP 1) designed to anneal to the 5' untranslated region or exons in the
5' half of
the gene with a reverse primer (RP1) designed to anneal to exons in the 3'
half of the
gene or the 3'UTR. Amplified DNA products are analyzed by agarose gel
204
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
electrophoresis to identify PCR products that are a different size then the
fragment
amplified form the canonical transcripts. These different PCR products are
excised and
purified from the gel and ligated into a standard cloning vector for DNA
sequence
analysis. Alternative splicing variants are identified as different sequences
from the
canonical transcripts. Splice variants identified by this systematic PCR
approach are
shown in Tables 2, 5 and 8.
EXAMPLE 8
CODON OPTIMIZATION OF SELECTED AARS POLYNUCLEOTIDES
[00619] Representative AARS polypeptides (summarized in Table E2) are selected
for further biochemical, biophysical and functional characterization based on
one or
more of the following criteria, i) the identification of AARS polypeptide
proteolytic
fragments, ii) the identification of AARS polypeptide splice variants, iii)
the
identification of AARS polypeptides by bioinformatic analysis, iv) evidence of
differential expression of specific AARS polypeptides, v) the domain structure
of the
AARS protein, vi) the size of the AARS polypeptide, and vii) the minimization
of
similar duplicative sequences.
Table E2
Summary of AARS Polypeptides Selected for Codon Optimization and Bacterial
Expression
AARS SEQ. ID Nos. for SEQ. ID. Nos. for Residues of Location of
Cloning /
Polypeptide Epitope Tagged AARS AARS epitope tag synthesis
Name AARS Polynucleotides protein method
polypeptides used
ArgRSN1 SEQ.ID. NO. 31 SEQ.ID. NO. 39 1-398 N-terminal 1
ArgRSN1 SEQ.ID. NO.32 SEQ.ID. NO. 39 1-398 C-terminal 1
ArgRSN2 SEQ.ID. NO. 33 SEQ.ID. NO. 40 1-71 N-terminal 1
ArgRSN2 SEQ.ID. NO. 34 SEQ.ID. NO. 40 1-71 C-terminal 1
ArgRSN3 SEQ.ID. NO. 35 SEQ.ID. NO. 41 1-353 + 20 N-terminal 1
aa
ArgRSN3 SEQ.ID. NO. 36 SEQ.ID. NO. 41 1-353 + 20 C-terminal 1
aa
ArgRSN4 SEQ.ID. NO. 37 SEQ.ID. NO. 42 1-160 N-terminal 1
ArgRS" SEQ.ID. NO. 38 SEQ.ID. NO. 42 1-160 C-terminal 1
ArgRS" SEQ.ID. NO. 139 SEQ.ID. NO. 147 73-660 N-terminal 1
ArgRSci SEQ.ID. NO. 140 SEQ.ID. NO. 147 73-660 C-terminal 1
ArgRSc2 SEQ.ID. NO. 141 SEQ.ID. NO. 148 551-660 N-terminal
ArgRSc2 SEQ.ID. NO. 142 SEQ.ID. NO. 148 551-660 C-terminal 1
ArgRS" SEQ.M. NO. 143 SEQ.ID. NO. 149 463-660 N-terminal 1
ArgRSc3 SEQ.ID. NO. 144 SEQ.ID. NO. 149 463-660 C-terminal 1
205
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table E2
Summary of AARS Polypeptides Selected for Codon Optimization and Bacterial
Expression
AARS SEQ. ID Nos. for SEQ. ID. Nos. for Residues of Location of
Cloning /
Polypeptide Epitope Tagged AARS AARS epitope tag synthesis
Name AARS Polynucleotides protein method
polypeptides used
ArgRS" SEQ.ID. NO. 145 SEQ.ID. NO. 150 247-660 N-terminal
ArgRS" SEQ.ID. NO. 146 SEQ.ID. NO. 150 247-660 C-terminal 1
ArgRSIl SEQ.ID. NO. 157 SEQ.ID. NO. 159 168-530 N-terminal 1
ArgRSI1 SEQ.ID. NO. 158 SEQ.ID. NO. 159 168-530 C-terminal 1
[00620] Polynucleotides encoding the selected AARS polypeptides listed in
Table
E2, along with the appropriate N or C-terminal epitope tag, are synthesized
and cloned
as described in the General Materials and Methods section using the gene
synthesis
methodology listed in Table E2.
EXAMPLE 9
SMALL SCALE BACTERIAL EXPRESSION AND PURIFICATION
[00621] The AARS polypeptides listed in Table E2 are expressed in E. co/i. as
described in the General Materials and Methods section. The relative
expression of
soluble and inclusion body localized AARS polypeptides is summarized in Table
E3
below.
Table E3
Summary of AARS Polypeptide Bacterial Expression Characteristics
Amount of
Amount of
Protein
AARS Location of Protein
Recovered from
Polypeptide Epitope Tag Soluble Recovered from
Inclusion Bodies
Fraction
ArgRSN1 N-terminal ND
ArgRSN1 C-terminal ND
ArgRSN2 N-terminal +++++ ND
ArgRSN2 C-terminal +++++ ND
ArgRSN3 N-terminal ND
ArgRSN3 C-terminal ND
ArgRSN4 N-terminal ND
ArgRSN4 C-terminal
ArgRSci N-terminal ND
ArgRScl C-terminal ND
ArgRS( 2 N-terminal ++
206
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table E3
Summary of AARS Polypeptide Bacterial Expression Characteristics
Amount of
Amount of
Protein
AARS Location of Protein
Recovered from
Polypeptide Epitope Tag Soluble Recovered from
Inclusion Bodies
Fraction
ArgRS C-terminal ++
ArgRS" N-terminal ND
ArgRS " C-terminal ND
ArgRS C4 N-terminal ND
ArgRS" C-terminal ND
ArgRS11 N-terminal +++
ArgRSI1 C-terminal +4-
" 11 represents 0-1 mg/L AARS polypeptide expression
"++" represents 1-5 mg/L AARS polypeptide expression;
"+++" represents 5-10 mg/L AARS polypeptide expression;
"++++" represents 10-15 mg/L AARS polypeptide expression;
"+++++" represents >15 mg/L AARS polypeptide expression;
ND: not determined
[00622] Surprisingly, the protein expression data demonstrates the existence
of at
least one protein domain that exhibits high level expression of soluble
protein when
expressed in E. co/i. Specifically the data demonstrates that the AARS
polypeptide
ArgRS1N2, (amino acids 1-71), defines the boundary of a novel protein domain
that is
highly expressed in E. coll.
EXAMPLE 10
LARGE SCALE PRODUCTION OF AARS POLYPEPTIDES
[00623] Representative AARS polypeptides are prepared in larger amounts to
enable
further functional and biophysical characterization. The AARS polypeptides
listed in
Table E4 are expressed in E. co/i. in large scale culture as described in the
General
Materials and Methods section. The yields, and specified biophysical
characteristics, for
each expressed soluble protein are summarized below in Table E4.
Table E4
Summary of representative AARS Polypeptide yield and biophysical
characterization
AARS Location Yield Purity Endotoxin Molecular Working Stability
Aggregation
Polypeptide of [mg/L] [%] [EU/mg] Weight stock [percent [DLS]
Epitope (I) cone recovery]
Tag [mg/mi] (2)
ArgRSN) C-
4.5 95 0.8 ND 4.24 ND ND
terminal
207
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
ArgRSil C-
0.7 99 <0.1 ND 0.16 ND ND
terminal
ArgRSc2 C-
. 1.1 99 <0.1 ND 8.4 ND ND
terminal
Notes
(1): Yield determined by measuring protein recovery after last purification
step o
(2): Determined as percent recovery of non aggregated material after 1 week at
25 C
Key: ND: Not Determined
[00624] The results from these studies establish that representative AARS
proteins
from the ArgRS1 N2, ArgRS1I1 and ArgRS1c2 families of AARS proteins can be
successfully expressed in E. coli, and purified to high purity, with low
endotoxin
contamination levels.
EXAMPLE 11
TRANSCRIPTIONAL PROFILING OF REPRESENTATIVE AARS POLYPEPTIDES
[00625] To test for the ability of the AARS polypeptides to modulate gene
expression, selected AARS polypeptides were incubated with mesenchymal stem
cells
or human skeletal muscle cells for the times and at the concentrations shown
in Table
E5.
Table E5
Transcriptional profiling of representative AARS Polypeptides in Mesenchymal
Stem Cells (MSC) or Human Skeletal Muscle Cells (HSkMC)
Test Sample Description Cell type and Exposure Time
Location
of MSC MSC HSkMC
AARS Epitope Concentration 24 72 HSkMC 72
Polypeptides Tag nM hours hours 24 hours hours
N- 250
ArgRSN2
terminal 4 3 3 2
C- 250
ArgRSN2
terminal 1 1 5 7
N- 250
ArgRS C2
terminal 2 5 5 10
C- 250
ArgRS C2
terminal 0 4 7 3
N- 250
ArgRS
ii
terminal 2 5 7 3
C- 250
ArgRS
ii
terminal 5 3 10 5
Controls
Average across all AARS polypeptides
screened 3 5 6 7
208
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table ES
Transcriptional profiling of representative AARS Polypeptides in Mesenchymal
Stem Cells (MSC) or Human Skeletal Muscle Cells (HSkMC)
Osteogenesis cocktail 17 20 11 16
Chondrogenesis cocktail 17 19 14 19
Adipogenesis cocktail 19 15 16 18
SKMC Pos Ctrl 11 8 5 4
Untreated 0 0 1 1
[00626] In Table ES, the numbers in each column represent the number of genes
which were modulated, either positively or negatively by at least 4 fold
compared to the
control genes, as described in the general methods section. The data shows
that specific
forms of the AARS polypeptides tested have the surprising ability to regulate
the
transcription, and hence potentially modulate the developmental fate or
differentiation
status when added to either Mesenchymal Stem Cells (MSC) and / or Human
Skeletal
Muscle Cells (HSkMC). Shaded cells with bolded numbers in the table represent
examples where the AARS polypeptide exhibits a significant impact on the
regulation
of gene transcription in the cell lines and times indicated in the table.
[00627] It is concluded that ArgRS1N2, ArgRS I", and ArgRS1I1 appear to be
major
regulators of Mesenchymal Stem Cell and / or human skeletal muscle cell gene
expression.
EXAMPLE 12
FUNCTIONAL PROFILING OF AARS POLYPEPTIDES
[00628] To test for the ability of the AARS polypeptides to modulate a range
of
phenotypic processes, selected AARS polypeptides were incubated with the cell
types,
and the conditions provided in the general methods section, and Tables ES and
E6.
Table E6
Key to Assays and criteria for indicating a hit
Proliferation assays
Source and cell type Assay
Number
Human megakaryocytic leukemia cells / Mo7e Al
Human acute promyelocytic leukemia cells / HL60 A2
Human lymphoblast (cancer cell line) / RPMI8226 A3
Human mesenchymal stem cells / hMSC A4
Human astrocytes AS
Human bone marrow aspirate cells / Bone Marrow Cells A6
Human bone marrow aspirate cells/ Bone Marrow Cells (Long Term Culture) A7
Human Synoviocyte / HFLS-SynRA A8
Human pre-adipocyte cells /hPAD A9
209
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table E6
Key to Assays and criteria for indicating a hit
Human pulmonary artery smooth muscle cell /hPASMC A 10
Human skeletal muscle cell /hSKMC Al 1
Data analysis for proliferation assays was performed by dividing the numerical
value in
the assay well by the average PBS value for the assay plate. AARS polypeptides
were
considered to be proliferative if greater than 3 SD away from the PBS value in
the
positive direction. A tRNA synthetase derived AARS polypeptide was considered
to
be cytotoxic if greater than 3 SD away from the PBS value in the negative
direction. A
cytotoxic compound was utilized as a negative control and the average value
for this
was always greater than 3 SD away from PBS average value.
Cellular differentiation and phenotype assays
Assay
Assay Description
Number
Human hepatocyte (HepG2C3a cells) acetylated LDL uptake B1
Data analysis for ac-LDL uptake assay was performed by dividing the numerical
value
in the assay well by the average PBS value for the assay plate. AARS
polypeptides
were considered to be a modulator of ac-LDL uptake if greater than 2 SD away
from
the PBS value in the positive or negative direction. A visual check to confirm
plate
reader results was made using a fluorescent microscope.
Human Neutrophil assays
Assay Description Assay
Number
Neutrophil Elastase Cl
Neutrophil oxidative burst (agonist) C2
Neutrophil oxidative burst (antagonist) C3
Data analysis for neutrophil assays was performed by dividing the numerical
value in
the assay well by the average PBS value for the assay plate. AARS polypeptides
were
considered to be a modulator of neutrophil elastase production or oxidative
burst
biology if greater than 2 SD away from the PBS value in the positive or
negative
direction.
Modulation of Toll-like receptors (TLR)
Assay Description Assay
Number
TLR activation in RAW BLUE cells D1
TLR antagonism in RAW BLUE cells D2
Activation of hTLR2 D3
Activation of hTLR4 D4
Data analysis for TLR modulation assays was performed by dividing the
numerical
value in the assay well by the average PBS value for the assay plate. AARS
polypeptides were considered to be a modulator of TLR specific biology if
greater than
3 SD away from the PBS value in the positive or negative direction. Positive
controls,
including LPS and detection reagent were always significantly distinct and > 3
SD
from PBS average value.
Cytokine Release
Assay Description Assay
Number
Human Synoviocyte cytokine production (IL6 release) El
210
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table E6
Key to Assays and criteria for indicating a hit
Human pulmonary artery smooth muscle cell (hPASMC) cytokine production E2
(IL6 release)
Human skeletal muscle cell (hSKMC) cytokine production (IL6 release) E3
Human Astrocyte cytokine production (IL6 release) E4
Whole blood IL6 release E5
Human pulmonary artery smooth muscle cell (hPASMC) cytokine production E6
(IL8release) 72 h Incubation
IL8 production
Assay Description Assay
Number
Human Synoviocyte cytokine production (IL8 release) E7
Human pulmonary artery smooth muscle cell (hPASMC) cytokine production E8
(IL8release)
Human skeletal muscle cell (hSKMC) cytokine production (1L8 release) E9
Human Astrocyte cytokine production (IL8 release) E10
Human hepatocyte (HepG2C3a cells) IL8 release Eli
Human acute promyelocytic leukemia cells / HL60 (IL8 release) E12
Human lymphoblast (cancer cell line) / RPM18226 (IL8 Release) E13
TNF alpha production
Human Synoviocyte cytokine production (TNF alpha release) El 4
Whole blood TNF alpha release El 5
ILIO Release
Human acute promyelocytic leukemia cells / HL60 IL10 release E16
Human Primary Blood Mononuclear cells (IL 10 Release) E 1 7
Data analysis for cytokine release assays was performed by dividing the
numerical
value in the assay well by the average PBS value for the assay plate. AARS
polypeptides were considered to be a modulator of cytokine production or
cytokine
related biology if the measured value was greater than 2 SD away from the PBS
value
in the positive or negative direction. A protein standard (specific to each
assay kit) was
run on every plate to insure good assay quality. Only assays with protein
standard
curves that had an R2 value of > than 0.9 were chosen for data analysis.
Cell Adhesion and Chemotaxis
Assay Description Assay
Number
Monocyte THP 1/ Human umbilical vein endothelial cell (HUVEC) cell Fl
adhesion
Human hcpatocyte (HepG2C3a cells) (ICAM release) F2
Human lung microvascular endothelial cell (HLMVEC) cell adhesion F3
regulation (ICAM release)
Human umbilical vein endothelial cell (HUVEC) cell adhesion regulation F4
(VCAM release)
Human mesenchymal stem cell (hMSC) cell adhesion regulation (VCAM F5
release)
Human skeletal muscle cell (hSKMC) cell adhesion regulation (VCAM F6
release)
Human pulmonary artery smooth muscle cell (hPASMC) cell adhesion F7
211
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986
PCT/US2011/034838
Table E6
Key to Assays and criteria for indicating a hit
regulation (VCAM release)
Data analysis for cell adhesion regulation assays was performed by dividing
the
numerical value in the assay well by the average PBS value for the assay
plate. AARS
polypeptides were considered to be a modulator of cell adhesion or a regulator
of
biology related to cell adhesion if the measured value was greater than 2 SD
away from
the PBS value in the positive or negative direction. In the case of the ELISA
assays, a
protein standard (specific to each assay kit) was run on every plate to insure
good assay
quality. Only assays with protein standard curves that had an R2 value of >
than 0.9
were chosen for data analysis.
Cellular Differentiation
Assay Description Assay
Number
Human pre-adipocyte (hPAD) cell differentiation G1
Human skeletal muscle (hSKMC) cell differentiation G2
Human mesenchymal stem (hMSC) cell differentiation G3
Human pulmonary artery smooth muscle cell (hPASMC) differentiation G4
Data analysis for cellular differentiation assays was performed by dividing
the
numerical value in the assay well by the average PBS value for the assay
plate.
Differentiation assays were scored based upon fluorescent intensity of
particular
antibodies as described in the methods section. AARS polypeptides were
considered to
be a modulator of cellular differentiation if an intensity value for a
specific marker of
differentiation was greater than 2 SD away from the PBS value in the positive
or
negative direction in a given treated well. For the hSKMC analysis, digital
photos were
taken of all wells and photos were scored in a blinded fashion by three people
using a 4
point scoring system where a score of "4" indicated intense skeletal muscle
actin
staining and obvious myotube formation and a score of "1" indicated a lack of
any
differentiation or a suppression of differentiation. The average value from
visual
scoring was used and only wells with an average value of > 3 were considered
hits.
Differentiation control treated wells in this assay typically scored > 2,
while PBS
treated wells scored <2.
Cell Binding
Assay Description Assay
Number
PBMC HI
Primary T cell H2
Primary B cell H3
Primary Monocyte H4
HepG2 H5
3T3L1 H6
C2C12 H7
THP1 H8
Jurkat H9
Raji H10
AARS polypeptides were considered to be binding to a particular cell type if
the mean
cell bound fluorescence intensity was greater than 2 SD away from the reagent
control
values for that cell type.
212
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
CA 02797277 2012-10-23
WO 2011/139986 PCT/US2011/034838
Table E7
Results of Functional Profiling studies of AARS Polypeptides
AARS Location Concentration Assay Hits
Polypeptides of Epitope [nM]
Tag
ArgRSN2 N-terminal 250 A5 (Proliferation)
ArgRSN2 C -terminal 250
A6 (Proliferation)
D2 (Modulation of Toll-like
receptors)
ArgRSH N-termi nal 250
E4 (Cytokine Release)
F5 (Cell Adhesion and
Chemotaxis)
E4 (Cytokine Release)
ArgRSI1 C -terminal 250 F5 (Cell Adhesion and
Chemotaxis)
ArgRSc2 N-terminal 250 A6 (Proliferation)
ArgRSc2 C -terminal 250
[00629] It is concluded that ArgRS1N2, ArgRS1I1, and ArgRS1 t2 appear to be
major
regulators of cytokine release, proliferation, and cell adhesion and
chemotaxis. Of note
is that in many cases there is a significant difference in the relative
activity of the N-
terminally tagged and C-terminally tagged versions of the AARS polypeptides
both in
the transcriptional profiling experiments, as well as in the phenotypic
screening
experiments. This data is consistent with the hypothesis that with these AARS
polypeptides, the novel biological activity is suppressed when the AARS
polypeptide is
part of the intact tRNA synthetase, or translationally fused to another
protein, but that
this biological activity is revealed when the AARS polypeptides have a free
amino or
free carboxy terminus.
[00630] When viewed in the context of the transcriptional profiling studies,
the
phenotypic screening data demonstrates that the AARS polypeptides ArgRS1N2
(amino
acids 1-71), ArgRS111 (amino acids 168-530) and ArgRS1 C2 (amino acids 551-
660)
define the boundaries of a three novel protein domains that are highly active
in a broad
array of phenotypic screening assays.
[00631] Accordingly it is concluded that AARS polypeptides comprising amino
acids 1-71, or 168-530, or 551-660 of Arginyl tRNA synthetase define the
approximate
boundaries (i.e. within about +/- 5 amino acids) of a three distinct novel,
highly active
AARS polypeptide domains, that arc i) highly functionally active, ii) can be
readily
made and produced in E. coli, and iii) exhibit favorable protein stability and
aggregation characteristics.
213
Date Recue/Date Received 2020-06-02
